CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS/GAS/NBFF/CCC AFB Express/Robin… · construct new express / gas / nbff /...

PROJECT MANUAL

Volume 2 of 4 (Division 13 – Division 33) For Solicitation

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS/GAS/NBFF/CCC

ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA

AAFES PROJECT NUMBER 0753-15-000001

21 June 2018

PWBA ARCHITECTS, INC. 529 South Perry Street, Suite 15, Montgomery, AL 36104

PWBA 150406

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC PROJECT DIRECTORY ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 00 01 02 – 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 00 01 02

PROJECT DIRECTORY

Owner: ARMY AND AIR FORCE EXCHANGE SERVICE (AAFES) AAFES – HQ, Dallas, TX Real Estate (RE-C) – Major Construction (214) 312-4680 Mr. Curtis Kitchens RE-PM Sr. Project Manager [email protected] Architect: PWBA ARCHITECTS, INC. 529 South Perry Street, Suite 15 Montgomery, AL 36104-4636 (334) 244-4990 Mr. Edward M. Brummal, Jr., AIA, CCS, CSI [email protected] Civil GONZALEZ-STRENGTH & ASSOCIATES, INC. Engineer: 2176 Parkway Lake Drive

Hoover, AL 35244-1083 (205) 942-2486

Mr. Jon Rasmussen, P.E., LEED AP [email protected] Structural BLACKBURN DANIELS O’BARR, INC. Engineer: 8805 County Road 40E Lowndesboro, AL 36752 (334) 265-0206 Jack Daniels, P.E. [email protected] Mechanical BBG&S ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS INC.

Engineer: 200 River Hills Business Park, Suite 235 Birmingham, AL 35242 (205) 995-4979

Mr. Jack Bowness, P.E. [email protected] Electrical RAY ENGINEERING GROUP, LLC

Engineer: No. 3 Riverchase Ridge Birmingham, AL 35244 (205) 987-0047

Mr. David Hoppe, P.E. [email protected] Fuel Systems JOHNSON SPELLMAN & ASSOCIATES, INC. Engineer: 350 Research Court, Suite 130 Peachtree Corners, GA 30092 (678) 336-5413 Mr. Greg Luther, P.E. [email protected]

END OF SECTION

mailto:[email protected]

mailto:[email protected]

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC TABLE OF CONTENTS ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 00 01 10 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 00 01 10

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Volume 1 of 4 (Division 00 – Division 12)

DIVISION 00 – INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 00 01 01 .............PROJECT TITLE PAGE ............................................................................................................. 1 00 01 02 .............PROJECT DIRECTORY ............................................................................................................. 1 00 01 10 .............TABLE OF CONTENTS ............................................................................................................. 6 00 01 15 .............LIST OF DRAWINGS ................................................................................................................ 4 00 04 04 .............SUBSTITUTIONS ...................................................................................................................... 1 00 31 00 ............AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION ............................................................. See Volume 3 DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 .............SUMMARY... ............................................................................................................................ 6 01 10 17 .............EXCHANGE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED EQUIPMENT (EF/EI) ...................................... 2 01 10 18 .............EXCHANGE FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT (EF/CI) ..................... 2 01 10 60 .............SAFETY POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ................................................................................ 3 01 10 60.1 ................ SAMPLE SAFETY PLAN ................................................................................................... 3 01 10 60.2 ................ SAMPLE CONSTRUCTION HAZARD PLAN ................................................................... 1 01 13 00 .............SAFETY REGULATIONS AND CODES .................................................................................... 7 01 13 00.1 ................ WASTE DISPOSAL ........................................................................................................... 1 01 14 20 .............CONSTRUCTION PHASING ..................................................................................................... 2 01 14 50 .............CUTTING AND PATCHING ...................................................................................................... 2 01 22 00 .............UNIT PRICES ............................................................................................................................ 1 01 31 00 .............PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION ................................................................. 3 01 32 00 .............CONTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION ................................................................... 3 01 33 00 .............SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES .................................................................................................... 3 01 33 10 ............WEATHER TABLE .................................................................................................................... 1 01 35 43 .............ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION ........................................................................................... 6 01 40 00 .............QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................... 3 01 43 23 .............FIXTURE INSTALLERS (FIRESTONE CCC) ............................................................................ 2 01 50 00 .............TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS .......................................................................... 9 01 57 13 .............TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL ........................................................... 4 01 58 00 .............CONSTRUCTION SITE SIGN.................................................................................................... 2 01 58 00.1 ................ PREFERRED CONSTRUCTION SIGN DETAIL ................................................................ 1 01 58 00.2 ................ ALTERNATE CONSTRUCTION SIGN DETAIL ................................................................. 1 01 59 00 .............FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS .................................................................................................. 2 01 60 00 .............PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................... 4 01 64 00 .............OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS (FIRESTONE CCC).......................................................... 3 01 65 00 .............STARTING OF SYSTEMS ......................................................................................................... 2 01 71 00 .............CLEANING .. ............................................................................................................................ 2 01 74 19 .............CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL ................................................. 3 01 77 00 .............PROJECT CLOSEOUT .............................................................................................................. 4 01 77 00.1 ................ DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE INSTRUCTION ................................................................. 9 01 77 00.4 ................ DD FORM 1354 EXAMPLE ............................................................................................. 2 01 78 39 .............PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS .......................................................................................... 3 01 91 13 ............GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS .................................................................... 1 DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 01 00 .............MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS ................................................................ 1 02 41 00 .............DEMOLITION ............................................................................................................................ 3 DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE 03 30 00 .............CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ................................................................................................. 13 03 35 36 .............POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH – NEW CONSTRUCTION ....................................... 7 03 45 00 .............ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE – PLANT CAST .................................................... 6

TABLE OF CONTENTS CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC 00 01 10 - 2 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY 04 20 00 .............UNIT MASONRY ..................................................................................................................... 10 DIVISION 05 – METALS 05 12 00 .............STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING ............................................................................................. 5 05 21 00 .............STEEL JOIST FRAMING ........................................................................................................... 3 05 31 00 .............STEEL DECKING ...................................................................................................................... 4 05 40 00 .............COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING ........................................................................................ 6 05 50 00 .............METAL FABRICATIONS........................................................................................................... 4 DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 .............ROUGH CARPENTRY .............................................................................................................. 5 06 40 23 .............INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK .......................................................................... 5 DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 19 00 .............WATER REPELLENTS ............................................................................................................. 4 07 21 00 .............THERMAL INSULATION .......................................................................................................... 3 07 24 00 .............EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM .................................................................... 5 07 25 00 .............WEATHER BARRIERS ............................................................................................................. 5 07 41 13 .............METAL ROOF AND SOFFIT PANELS ................................................................................... 10 07 54 00 .............PVC MEMBRANE ROOFING ................................................................................................. 11 07 62 00 .............SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM ................................................................................... 2 07 71 00 .............ROOF SPECIALTIES ................................................................................................................ 2 07 71 23 .............MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS ............................................................... 3 07 72 00 .............ROOF ACCESSORIES .............................................................................................................. 3 07 84 00 ............FIRESTOPPING ........................................................................................................................ 3 07 92 00 .............JOINT SEALANTS ..................................................................................................................... 5 DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS 08 11 13 .............HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES .............................................................................. 5 08 14 16 .............FLUSH WOOD DOORS ............................................................................................................ 3 08 31 00 .............ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES ............................................................................................. 3 08 33 26 .............OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES .............................................................................................. 3 08 36 13 .............SECTIONAL DOORS ................................................................................................................ 3 08 38 15 .............DOUBLE-ACTING TRAFFIC DOORS ....................................................................................... 3 08 39 53 .............BLAST RESISTANT STEEL DOOR AND FRAME ASSEMBLIES ........................................... 4 08 41 13.53 .......ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS (BLAST RESISTANT) ............................................................... 7 08 42 29.53 .......SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES (BLAST RESISTANT) ................................................... 9 08 71 00 .............DOOR HARDWARE ................................................................................................................. 4 08 71 00.01 ............. HARDWARE SCHEDULE ................................................................................................. 8 08 80 00 .............GLAZING...... ............................................................................................................................ 7 08 83 00 .............MIRRORS .... ............................................................................................................................ 2 08 91 00 .............LOUVERS ..... ............................................................................................................................ 3 DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 09 21 16 .............GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES............................................................................................. 6 09 30 00 ............TILING .......... ............................................................................................................................ 6 09 51 00 .............ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS .......................................................................................................... 4 09 54 23 .............LINEAR METAL CEILINGS ...................................................................................................... 3 09 65 00 ............RESILIENT FLOORING ............................................................................................................ 4 09 68 13 .............TILE CARPETING ..................................................................................................................... 3 09 72 00 ............WALL COVERINGS .................................................................................................................. 2 09 77 33 .............GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS ................................................................... 2 09 90 00 .............PAINTING .... ............................................................................................................................ 7 DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10 14 00 .............SIGNAGE ..... ............................................................................................................................ 3 10 14 53 .............TRAFFIC SIGNAGE .................................................................................................................. 1


10 21 13 .............TOILET COMPARTMENTS....................................................................................................... 3 10 22 15 .............CHAIN LINK MESH PARTITIONS ........................................................................................... 4 10 26 00 .............WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION SYSTEMS ......................................................................... 3 10 28 00 .............TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES ........................................................................................ 4 10 44 13 .............FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES .......................................................................................... 3 10 51 00 .............LOCKERS..... ............................................................................................................................ 2 10 71 13.43 .......FIXED SUN SCREENS ............................................................................................................. 3 10 73 16 .............ALUMINUM CANOPIES ........................................................................................................... 4 DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 .............FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT (EF/CI) .................................................................................... 4 11 40 00.1 ................ SNACK AVENUE CUT SHEETS .................................................................. See Volume 4 11 40 00.2 ................ HUNT BROTHERS PIZZA CUT SHEETS .................................................... See Volume 4 11 40 00.3 ................ J WALKEN CHICKEN CUT SHEETS ........................................................... See Volume 4 11 40 00.4 ................ ARBY’S CUT SHEETS ................................................................................. See Volume 4 DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 12 69 00 .............ENTRY FLOOR MATS .............................................................................................................. 2

Volume 2 of 4 (Division 13 – Division 33) DIVISION 00 – INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 00 01 01 .............PROJECT TITLE PAGE ............................................................................................................. 1 00 01 02 .............PROJECT DIRECTORY (duplicated from Volume 1) ......................................................... 1 00 01 10 .............TABLE OF CONTENTS (duplicated from Volume 1) .......................................................... 6 00 01 15 .............LIST OF DRAWINGS (duplicated from Volume 1) ............................................................ 4 DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13 03 50 .............AIR/WATER UNIT .................................................................................................................... 2 13 04 80 .............FUEL SALES CANOPY ............................................................................................................. 3 13 05 00 .............GASOLINE DISPENSING AND UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK SYSTEMS ................. 22 13 05 00.1 ................ UNATTENDED FUELING CHECKLIST ............................................................................. 5 DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 13 00 .............FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS ....................................................................................... 5 DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 05 00 .............COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING ...................................................................... 4 22 05 23 .............GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING.............................................................. 3 22 05 29 .............HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPE AND EQUIPMENT ............................. 5 22 05 53 .............IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ............................................ 2 22 07 00 .............PLUMBING INSULATION ........................................................................................................ 6 22 11 16 .............DOMESTIC WATER PIPING .................................................................................................... 6 22 11 19 .............DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES ............................................................................ 2 22 13 16 .............SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING .................................................................................. 4 22 13 19 .............SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES ............................................................................. 3 22 30 00 .............PLUMBING EQUIPMENT ......................................................................................................... 3 22 40 00 .............PLUMBING FIXTURES ............................................................................................................. 8 DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 05 10 .............BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................... 10 23 05 13 .............COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT ........................................... 6 23 05 53 .............IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT...................................................... 3 23 05 93 .............TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC ......................................................... 3 23 07 13 ............DUCT INSULATION .................................................................................................................. 5 23 07 19 .............HVAC PIPING INSULATION .................................................................................................... 4 23 09 13 .............INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC ................................................. 5


23 09 23 .............DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC ............................................................... 11 23 23 00 .............REFRIGERANT PIPING ........................................................................................................... 6 23 31 13 .............METAL DUCTS ....................................................................................................................... 17 23 33 00 .............AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES ....................................................................................................... 5 23 34 16 .............CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS .................................................................................................... 4 23 34 23 .............HVAC POWER VENTILATORS ................................................................................................ 4 23 34 33 .............AIR CURTAINS ......................................................................................................................... 2 23 37 00 .............AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS ..................................................................................................... 3 23 37 13.13 .......AIR DIFFUSERS ....................................................................................................................... 2 23 37 13.23 .......AIR REGISTERS AND GRILLES.............................................................................................. 2 23 38 13 .............COMMERCIAL KITCHEN HOODS ......................................................................................... 10 23 55 23.16 .......HIGH-INTENSITY, GAS-FIRED, RADIANT HEATERS ............................................................ 4 23 55 33.16 .......GAS-FIRED UNIT HEATERS .................................................................................................... 3 23 74 13 .............PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS .............................................................................. 14 23 81 27 .............SMALL SPLIT-SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING ................................................................ 4 DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 01 01 .............ELECTRICAL – GENERAL PROVISIONS ................................................................................ 5 26 01 02 .............ELECTRICAL – SCOPE OF WORK .......................................................................................... 6 26 05 13.16 .......CONDUCTORS – MEDIUM VOLTAGE .................................................................................... 2 26 05 19 .............CONDUCTORS ......................................................................................................................... 3 26 05 19.2 .........METALLIC SHEATHED CABLE ............................................................................................... 3 26 05 26 .............GROUNDING ............................................................................................................................ 2 26 05 33.1 .........RACEWAYS – METAL ............................................................................................................. 3 26 05 33.3 .........OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES ............................................................................................ 2 26 10 01 .............PRIMARY DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ....................................................................................... 2 26 12 13 .............TRANSFORMERS – PAD MOUNTED, OIL FILLED ............................................................... 3 26 24 13.1 .........FRONT ACCESSIBLE SWITCHBOARD................................................................................... 4 26 24 16.1 .........PANELBOARDS – LIGHTING/RECEPTACLE ........................................................................ 4 26 27 26 .............BASIC DEVICES ....................................................................................................................... 3 26 28 13 .............FUSES .......... ............................................................................................................................ 1 26 28 16.1 .........SAFETY SWITCHES ................................................................................................................. 2 26 50 00 .............LIGHTING MATERIALS AND METHODS ............................................................................... 4 DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 31 00 .............FIRE ALARM SYSTEM / LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM ................................................................. 17 28 31 00.1 .........FIRE ALARM SYSTEM & EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM .............................. 8 28 39 00 .............COMBINATION MASS NOTIFICATION / LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM ....................................... 18 DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 31 00 00 .............EARTHWORK ........................................................................................................................ 12 31 10 00 .............SITE CLEARING ....................................................................................................................... 2 31 23 00 .............EXCAVATION AND FILL .......................................................................................................... 4 31 31 16 .............TERMITE CONTROL ................................................................................................................. 2 DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 10 00 .............BASES, BALLASTS, AND PAVING ......................................................................................... 5 32 13 00 ............RIGID PAVING ......................................................................................................................... 4 32 16 13.13 .......CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE CURBS AND GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS ......................... 11 32 17 23 ............PAVEMENT MARKINGS .......................................................................................................... 2 32 31 13 .............CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES ......................................................................................... 5 32 92 19 .............SEEDING ..... ............................................................................................................................ 3 32 92 23 .............SODDING..... ............................................................................................................................ 3 DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES 33 00 00 ............UTILITIES ..... ............................................................................................................................ 8 33 51 00 ............NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION .............................................................................................. 6


Volume 3 of 4 (Specific to Robins AFB) DIVISION 00 – INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 00 01 01 .............PROJECT TITLE PAGE ............................................................................................................. 1 00 01 02 .............PROJECT DIRECTORY (duplicated from Volume 1) ......................................................... 1 00 01 10 .............TABLE OF CONTENTS (duplicated from Volume 1) .......................................................... 6 00 01 15 .............LIST OF DRAWINGS (duplicated from Volume 1) ............................................................ 4 00 31 00 ............AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION ................................................................................... 2 00 31 00.1 ................ GEOTECHNICAL EXPLORATION REPORT ................................................................... 61 00 31 00.2 ................ STORMWATER MANAGEMENT REPORT ................................................................. 202 00 31 00.3 ................ HYDRANT FLOW TESTING AND FIRE FLOW CALCULATIONS ................................. 11 00 31 00.4 ................ ROBINS AFB BUILDING 978 HAZMAT SURVEY REPORT ........................................ 32 00 31 00.5 ................ ROBINS AFB BUILDING 990 HAZMAT SURVEY REPORT ........................................ 32 00 31 00.6 ................ ROBINS AFB BUILDING 991 HAZMAT SURVEY REPORT ........................................ 37 00 31 00.7 ................ ROBINS AFB BUILDING 992 HAZMAT SURVEY REPORT ........................................ 34 00 31 00.8 ................ ROBINS AFB BUILDING 995 HAZMAT SURVEY REPORT ........................................ 32 00 31 00.9 ................ ROBINS AFB BUILDING 996 HAZMAT SURVEY REPORT ..................................... 140 ROBINS AFB REQUIREMENTS 01040 .................SITE REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................................... 10 01300 .................SUBMITTALS AND CONTRACTOR-FURNISHED ITEMS ....................................................... 9 01501 .................TEMPORARY SERVICES – CONTRACTOR ............................................................................ 5 01540 .................GREEN PROCUREMENT ....................................................................................................... 12 01560 .................ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ROBINS AIR FORCE BASE ............................. 35 01568 .................ASBESTOS ABATEMENT ...................................................................................................... 43 01572 .................CONSTRUCTION & DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT ................................................. 6 01580 .................SAFETY REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................................... 7 01700 .................EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................ 6 01730 .................OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA ............................................................................ 6 02065 .................LEAD-BASED PAINT IN-PLACE MANAGEMENT AND ABATEMENT FOR RAFB ............. 18 16011 .................GENERAL ELECTRICAL ........................................................................................................... 6 16190 .................DEMOLITION OF EXISTING FACILITIES ................................................................................ 2 CONTRACTOR GUIDELINES CONTRACTOR GUIDELINES LETTER – JULY 7, 2017 ...................................................................................... 2

• ATTACHMENT 1 – OSHA SUBSTANCE SPECIFIC DUST PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ......... 2 • ATTACHMENT 2 - NON-AIR FORCE USE OF RADIATION SOURCES APPLICATION

REQUIREMENTS ........ ............................................................................................................................ 4


Volume 4 of 4 (Food Service Cut Sheets) DIVISION 00 – INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 00 01 01 .............PROJECT TITLE PAGE ............................................................................................................. 1 00 01 02 .............PROJECT DIRECTORY (duplicated from Volume 1) ......................................................... 1 00 01 10 .............TABLE OF CONTENTS (duplicated from Volume 1) .......................................................... 6 00 01 15 .............LIST OF DRAWINGS (duplicated from Volume 1) ............................................................ 4 Refer to Section 11 40 00 – FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT (EF/CI) in Volume 1 11 40 00.1 ................ FOOD SERVICE CUT SHEETS - SNACK AVENUE .......................................................... 1

*SNACK AVENUE CUT SHEETS ........................................................................ 63 11 40 00.2 ................ FOOD SERVICE CUT SHEETS - HUNT BROTHERS PIZZA ............................................ 1

*HUNT BROTHERS PIZZA CUT SHEETS .......................................................... 10 11 40 00.3 ................ FOOD SERVICE CUT SHEETS - J WALKEN CHICKEN ................................................... 1

*J WALKEN CHICKEN CUT SHEETS ................................................................... 5 11 40 00.4 ................ FOOD SERVICE CUT SHEETS - ARBY’S ......................................................................... 1

*ARBY’S CUT SHEETS .................................................................................... 236

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC LIST OF DRAWINGS ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 00 01 15 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 00 01 15

LIST OF DRAWINGS

SHEET NO. SHEET TITLE

GENERAL T001 TITLE SHEET, INDEX, VICINITY AND LOCATION MAPS

EXPRESS

LIFE SAFETY

LS101 EXPRESS LIFE SAFETY PLAN

GENERAL PHASING PH-1 PHASING PLAN

OVERALL

LANDSCAPE

L100 SITE PLAN / LANDSCAPE PLAN

OVERALL CIVIL

C100 SITE & DEMOLITION PHASING PLAN C101 PHASE 1 DEMOLITION PLAN C102 PHASE 2 SITE LAYOUT PLAN C103 PHASE 3 DEMOLITION PLAN C104 PHASE 4 SITE LAYOUT PLAN C201 SITE GRADING & STORM DRAINAGE PLAN C202 SPOT ELEVATION PLAN C203 STORM DRAINAGE PROFILES C301 SITE UTILITY PLAN C401 ES&PCP COVER SHEET C402 ES&PCP NOTES C403 ES&PCP NOTES C404 ES&PCP NOTES C405 ES&PC INITIAL PLAN C406 ES&PC INTERMEDIATE PLAN C407 ES&PC FINAL PLAN C501 ES&PC DETAILS C502 ES&PC DETAILS C503 ES&PC DETAILS C504 ES&PC DETAILS C601 SECTIONS & DETAILS C602 SECTIONS & DETAILS C603 SECTIONS & DETAILS C604 SECTIONS & DETAILS C605 SECTIONS & DETAILS

EXPRESS

STRUCTURAL

S001 GENERAL NOTES, SCHEDULES, TYPICAL DETAILS S101 FOUNDATION PLAN S102 ROOF FRAMING PLAN S201 SECTIONS AND DETAILS S202 SECTIONS AND DETAILS S203 SECTIONS AND DETAILS

LIST OF DRAWINGS CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS/ NBFF / CCC 00 01 15 - 2 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406


EXPRESS ARCHITECTURAL

A101 EXPRESS FLOOR PLAN A102 DETAILS A103 EXPRESS & ARBY’S REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A104 EXPRESS ROOF PLAN AND DETAILS A201 EXPRESS EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A300 EXPRESS BUILDING SECTION AND DETAILS A301 EXPRESS WALL SECTIONS A302 EXPRESS WALL SECTIONS A303 EXPRESS WALL SECTIONS A304 EXPRESS WALL SECTIONS A305 EXPRESS WALL SECTION

A401a EXPRESS SNACK AVENUE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE

A401b EXPRESS HUNT BROTHERS AND J-WALKEN CHICKEN EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES AND LARGE SCALE SNACK AVENUE FLOOR PLAN

A402 EXPRESS INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A403 EXPRESS LARGE SCALE TOILET PLANS, ELEVATIONS, & SCHEDULE A404 EXPRESS INTERIOR ELEVATIONS, CABINET AND COFFEE PORTAL SECTIONS

A405a ARBY’S LARGE SCALE EQUIPMENT PLAN AND SCHEDULE A405b ARBY’S LARGE SCALE FLOOR PLAN AND SCHEDULE A406 ARBY’S INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A407 ARBY’S DÉCOR PACKAGE (SHEETS 1 – 3) A408 ARBY’S DÉCOR PACKAGE (SHEETS 4 – 7) A409 ARBY’S DÉCOR PACKAGE (SHEETS 9 – 12) A410 ARBY’S DÉCOR PACKAGE (SHEETS 13 – 14) A500 EXPRESS ARCHITECTURAL PRE-CAST CONCRETE DETAILS A501 EXPRESS DUMPSTER PLAN, SECTION, AND DETAILS A601 EXPRESS FINISH & DOOR SCHEDULES, DOOR TYPES, FRAME TYPES & LOUVER TYPES A602 EXPRESS DOOR DETAILS A603 EXPRESS DOOR AND WINDOW DETAILS A604 EXPRESS WINDOW DETAILS

EQ101 EXPRESS FURNITURE & EQUIPMENT PLAN

EXPRESS PLUMBING

P0.1 EXPRESS PLUMBING LEGENDS, SCHEDULES, NOTES AND DETAILS P0.2 EXPRESS RISER DIAGRAM

P1.01 EXPRESS PIPING NON PRESSURE FLOOR PLAN P1.02 EXPRESS PIPING PRESSURE PLAN P1.03 PIPING PRESSURE SITE PLAN

EXPRESS

MECHANICAL

M0.1 EXPRESS ABBREVIATIONS, LEGENDS AND GENERAL NOTES M0.2 EXPRESS HVAC EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES SHEET 1 OF 2 M0.3 EXPRESS HVAC EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES SHEET 2 OF 2

M1.01 EXPRESS HVAC FLOOR PLAN M1.02 EXPRESS HVAC ROOF PLAN M5.01 EXPRESS HVAC DETAILS SHEET 1 OF 2 M5.02 EXPRESS HVAC DETAILS SHEET 2 OF 2 M5.03 EXPRESS HVAC CONTROLS

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC LIST OF DRAWINGS ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 00 01 15 - 3 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406


EXPRESS ELECTRICAL

E001 EXPRESS ELECTRICAL LEGEND, SCHEDULE & NOTES E002 EXPRESS PANELBOARD SCHEDULES & SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM E003 EXPRESS ELECTRICAL DETAILS E004 15KV SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM PHASE 1 & 2 E005 15KV SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM PHASE 3 & 4 E006 15KV SITE PLAN PHASE 1 & 2 E007 15KV SITE PLAN PHASE 3 & 4 E100 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN E101 EXPRESS FUEL CANOPY FLOOR PLAN – ELECTRICAL E110 EXPRESS FLOOR PLAN LIGHTING E111 EXPRESS FLOOR PLAN POWER & AUXILIARY E112 EXPRESS FLOOR PLAN FIRE ALARM / MASS NOTIFICATION E113 EXPRESS ROOF PLAN - ELECTRICAL E120 EXPRESS LARGE SCALE PLAN – SNACK AVENUE – EQUIPMENT E121 EXPRESS LARGE SCALE PLAN – ARBY’S EQUIPMENT PLAN AND SCHEDULE

FIRESTONE

LIFE SAFETY

FLS101 FIRESTONE LIFE SAFETY PLAN

FIRESTONE STRUCTURAL

FS001 FIRESTONE GENERAL NOTES, SCHEDULES, TYPICAL DETAILS FS101 FIRESTONE FRAMING PLANS – CAR CARE CENTER FS201 FIRESTONE SECTIONS AND DETAILS FS202 FIRESTONE SECTIONS AND DETAILS

FIRESTONE

ARCHITECTURAL

FA101 FIRESTONE FLOOR PLAN AND LARGE SCALE SHOWROOM PLAN FA102 FIRESTONE REFLECTED CEILING PLAN AND FLOOR FINISH PLAN FA103 FIRESTONE ROOF PLAN AND DETAILS FA201 FIRESTONE EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS FA301 FIRESTONE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS, SECTIONS, AND DETAILS FA302 FIRESTONE WALL SECTIONS AND DETAILS FA303 FIRESTONE WALL SECTIONS AND DETAILS FA304 FIRESTONE WALL SECTIONS AND DETAILS FA401 FIRESTONE FIXTURE PLAN AND NOTES FA402 FIRESTONE SHOWROOM FIXTURE PLAN AND ELEVATIONS FA403 FIRESTONE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS, SECTIONS AND DETAILS FA500 FIRESTONE ARCHITECTURAL PRE-CAST CONCRETE DETAILS

FA601 FIRESTONE FINISH AND DOOR SCHEDULES, DOOR TYPES, FRAME TYPES AND LOUVER TYPES

FA602 FIRESTONE DOOR DETAILS FA603 FIRESTONE DETAILS FA604 FIRESTONE GENERAL INFORMATION

FIRESTONE PLUMBING

FP0.1 FIRESTONE OVERALL PLUMBING PLAN, LEGENDS, SCHEDULES, NOTES, AND DETAILS FP0.2 FIRESTONE PLUMBING DETAILS, RISER, AND SCHEDULES

FP1.01 FIRESTONE PIPING NON-PRESSURE & PRESSURE FLOOR PLANS

LIST OF DRAWINGS CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS/ NBFF / CCC 00 01 15 - 4 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406


FIRESTONE MECHANICAL

FM0.1 FIRESTONE HVAC EQUIPMENT, SCHEDULES, LEGENDS & NOTES SHEET 1 OF 2 FM0.2 FIRESTONE HVAC EQUIPMENT, SCHEDULES, LEGENDS & NOTES SHEET 2 OF 2

FM1.01 FIRESTONE HVAC PLAN FM5.01 FIRESTONE HVAC DETAILS SHEET 1 OF 2 FM5.02 FIRESTONE HVAC DETAILS SHEET 2 OF 2

FIRESTONE ELECTRICAL

FE200 FIRESTONE ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS, LEGENDS, NOTES AND SCHEDULES FE201 FIRESTONE RISER DIAGRAM, PANEL SCHEDULES AND NOTES FE202 FIRESTONE ELECTRICAL DETAILS FE203 FIRESTONE LIGHTING PLAN FE204 FIRESTONE POWER PLAN FD205 FIRESTONE FIRE ALARM PLAN FE206 FIRESTONE BURGLAR ALARM RISER DIAGRAM, NOTES, SCHEDULES

FUEL SYSTEM

GM1.0 FUEL / DISPENSER SYSTEM – PARTIAL SITE PLAN GM2.0 FUEL STORAGE TANK INSTALLATION DETAILS GM2.1 FUEL STORAGE TANK INSTALLATION DETAILS GM2.2 FUEL STORAGE TANK INSTALLATION DETAILS GM3.0 FUEL / DISPENSER SYSTEM MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS GM3.1 FUEL / DISPENSER SYSTEM MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS GM4.0 FUEL SYSTEM / DISPENSER LAYOUT – ISOMETRIC GM5.0 VEEDER-ROOT TLS-450 PLUS AUTOMATIC TANK GAUGE SCHEMATIC AND NOTES GM5.1 PETROLEUM / ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS GM6.0 BILL OF MATERIALS GM7.0 CANOPY PLAN AND ELEVATIONS

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC AIR/WATER UNITROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 13 03 50 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 13 03 50AIR/WATER UNIT

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. All labor, equipment and material and incidentals to furnish and install an air/water unit and arealighting unit to include concrete pad where shown on the drawings and described herein:

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.B. Division 26 - Electrical.C. Division 33 - Utilities.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Units shall be the product of a manufacturer with a minimum of 20 years documented

experience in the design and fabrication of air/water units.B. Electrical devices factory installed within the unit shall be UL listed. Factory installed wiring

system shall bear UL label certifying compliance with the National Electric Code.C. Verify all dimensions shown on the drawings.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.B. Furnish complete manufacture’s literature to the Contracting Officer for approval prior to

installation.1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver items in manufacturer's original protective packaging.B. Handle so as to prevent damage to finished surface.C. Maintain protective covers on all items until installation is complete.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 AIR/WATER AND AREA LIGHTING UNIT

A. Duro Manufacturing, Inc shall manufacture Air/Water unit. The unit shall include an area lightby the same manufacture. Model No. 80-T-SB & SA-86.

B. Unit features shall include:1. Cabinet. Top and base cast aluminum. Surround stainless steel. Split front cover with

lock. Aluminum hose guides with nylon rollers. Side panel door removable by lock and keyfor servicing of compressor.

2. Compressor. Compressor no oil with permanently lubricated bearings at connecting rods,continues duty, thermally protected UL listed motor.

3. Operational Features. A pressure control switch controls compressor. Turns on at 70 psiand off at 100 psi. Unloading valve is operated by the pressure switch to assure free start.Include with the pressure-switch, is a dial face gauge, safety valve and shut off valve.

4. Area Light. 400 watt halide fixture. 12’ mounting height. Heavy tandem tabular design.Solid cross members at top and bottom. Finished enamel black. Hold down bolts with basecovers.

2.02 CONCRETE PADA. Pad shall be a minimum size of 10” greater than the manufacturer's recommended layout of the

air/water and area lighting units. Pad shall have a minimum thickness of 1’- 6” withreinforcement.

B. Concrete shall conform to ACI 301.C. Reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A185.

AIR/WATER UNIT CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC13 03 50 - 2 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA

AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Footings shall be placed in conformance with CRSI 63 and 67. Anchor bolts and templates shallbe galvanized steel in accordance with manufacture’s recommendations.

B. Install air/water and area lighting units in accordance with manufacture’s recommendations.3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. After installation, make final adjustments to ensure unit is in properly operating.B. After final adjustment, all metal surfaces shall be cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations.C. Leave work area clean and free of debris.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC FUEL SALES CANOPYROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 13 04 80 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 13 04 80FUEL SALES CANOPY


A. All labor, equipment and material and incidentals to design, furnish and install aprefabricated/Pre-engineered metal canopy to include footings and lighting where shown on thedrawings and described herein:

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.B. Division 26 - Electrical

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Structures shall be the product of a manufacturer with a minimum of 20 years documented

experience in the design and fabrication of steel canopies.B. Electrical devices factory installed within the prefabricated canopy shall be UL listed. Factory

installed wiring system shall bear UL Classification label certifying compliance with the NationalElectric Code.

C. A professional engineer licensed in the State the project is occurring in shall accomplishstructural design. Design shall be accomplished in accordance with State and local buildingcodes.

D. Verify all dimensions shown on drawings by taking field measurements to insure proper fit andattachment of all component parts.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.B. Furnish complete literature and installation and assembly drawings to the Contracting Officer for

approval prior to fabrication and installation to include:1. Manufacturer's data.2. Shop drawings shall indicate materials, finish size and methods of fabrication, assembly,

and installation.3. Canopy and footing design shall comply with IBC and ASCE 7 requirements.4. A professional engineer registered in the State the project is occurring in shall seal design

calculations and shop drawings for entire canopy structure and footings. Calculations fordesign of the canopy structure and footings shall be submitted for approval prior tofabrication. A subsurface investigation, if available, will be presented in Section 00 31 00. If a subsurface investigation is not presented, all investigations required for the design ofthe canopy and footings shall be acquired by and at the expense of the Contractor.

5. Certification: Provide letter of compliance certifying that the proposed canopy design andlayout meets or exceeds all applicable loadings (e.g. wind load, rain live load, dead load,snow load, etc.) for the job location (city and state) in accordance with IBC and ASCE 7. Letter shall bear design engineer's professional seal.

C. Submit color charts illustrating all finish colors and patterns.1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver items in manufacturer's original protective packaging.B. Handle so as to prevent damage to finished surface.C. Maintain protective covers on all items until installation is complete.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

A. Columns shall be fabricated from hollow structural sections conforming to ASTM A500 Grade B,with minimum yield strength of 46 ksi. ASTM A36 structural steel plate with minimum yield

FUEL SALES CANOPY CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC13 04 80 - 2 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA


strength of 36 ksi with pre-punched or pre-drilled boltholes shall be used for column top andbase plates. Columns shall be provided with electrical access openings, cover plates, conduitsand drains per owner requirements.

B. Wide flange beams conforming to ASTM A36 with minimum yield strength of 50 ksi shall beused as the primary roof-framing members. Other roof-framing members (channel, angle, ortees), if used, shall conform to ASTM A36 with minimum yield strength of 36 ksi. Bracing shallbe designed as required by design.

C. Structural steel plate shall conform to ASTM A36 with minimum yield strength of 36 ksi.D. Structural bolts shall conform to ASTM A325 Specification for High Strength Bolts for Structural

Steel Joints. All structural steel framing members shall be shop fabricated for field boltedassembly, unless otherwise specified on drawing.

E. Anchor bolts shall conform to ASTM A36 with minimum yield strength of 36 ksi. Double nuts andwashers shall be provided with each anchor bolt, with one set to be used for leveling column.

F. All structural steel framing members shall be cleaned to remove loose mill scale and otherforeign matter.

G. After cleaning, all members shall be given one shop coat of rust-inhibitive primer. The primercoat thickness shall be a minimum of 1 mil.

2.02 DECK PANELA. Roof deck panels shall conform to ASTM A653 Grade 40 steel with minimum yield strength of

40 ksi, with a G60 galvanized surface per ASTM A924.B. Panel profile shall have a minimum thickness of 24 gauge.C. Panels shall have a finish side coated with a full coat of white polyester paint baked on over an

epoxy primer. A white wash coat baked on over an epoxy primer shall protect the interior side ofthe panel.

D. Panels shall be fastened to the bottom flange of the wide flange purlin beams with a system,which requires no "through the panel" fasteners.

E. Deck panels shall not be spliced.2.03 FASCIA SYSTEM

A. Kynar Aluminum Composite Material Panels shall be provided with a 4 mm thick pre-finishedaluminum composite material substrate. Finish color shall be factory applied. Color perEXCHANGE requirements.

B. Fascia outriggers shall be cold formed 2” x 2” x 20 gauge steel angles conforming to ASTMA653 Grade CS with a minimum yield strength of 25 ksi, with a G90 galvanized surface perASTM A924. 2” x 2” x 18 gauge or 2” x 2” x 1/8 inch structural angle shall be used as requiredby design. Outrigger spacing per design requirements.

C. There shall be no exposed fasteners on exterior or bottom face of fascia panels.D. Vertical seams shall be sealed from backside.E. 24 gauge flashing shall be used as required by design.

2.04 GUTTERA. Gutter shall conform to ASTM A653 Grade 40 steel with minimum yield strength of 40 ksi, with a

G60 galvanized surface per ASTM A924.B. Profile shall be at a minimum be 12-inch wide x 4-inch deep, 24 gauge thick.C. Gutters shall have a finish side coated with a full coat of polyester paint baked on over an epoxy

primer. A white wash coat baked on over an epoxy primer shall protect the interior side of thegutter.

D. Gutter leaders to column drain shall be one of the following options: 3 inch diameter PVC pipewith a 24 gauge leader cover (dry leader) or an 8 inch wide tapered (4 inch to 6 inch deep) 24

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC FUEL SALES CANOPYROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 13 04 80 - 3AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

gauge steel leader (wet leader). Larger gutters shall be used where required for properdrainage.

2.05 DOWNSPOUTSA. External downspouts shall be 3” x 4” roll formed aluminum with watertight locked seams.

Exterior side coated with a full coat of polyester paint baked on over an epoxy primer color perEXCHANGE requirements. Eternal downspouts shall be mounted to the face of the column andbe of one continuous length. Larger drains shall be used where required for proper drainage.

B. Internal downspouts shall be 3 inch diameter PVC with couplings provided at gutter leaderattachment location and at base of column where attachment to site drainage system isrequired. Larger drains shall be used where required for proper drainage.

2.06 LIGHTSA. Lighting layout and fixtures shall be per requirements shown in the plans.

2.07 SIGNSA. Signs and logos shown in the drawings will be furnished and installed by EXCHANGE. Signs

and logos are shown in drawings for information only.2.08 FOOTINGS

A. Footings shall be designed and installed by the fabricator. Designs shall conform to State andlocal building codes. A professional engineer in the State the project is occurring in shall sealdesign calculations. Calculations shall be submitted for approval prior to placing the footings. Footings shall be reinforced concrete. Subsurface investigations shall be the responsibility ofthe fabricator.

B. Concrete shall conform to ACI 301.C. Reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A615.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Footings shall be placed in conformance with CRSI 63 and 67. Anchor bolts and templates shallbe shipped to owner prior to pouring canopy footings.

B. Structural steel shall be set plumb, square and level in accordance with Erection drawingsprovided by the fabricator. Erection of structural steel shall be in accordance with the latestAISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice. All structural bolts shall be tightened by theturn-of-the-nut method as specified in the latest RCSC Specification for Structural Joints UsingASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.

C. Deck, fascia, and gutter systems, as well as other accessories shall be assembled inaccordance with by the fabricator.

3.02 ADJUST AND CLEANA. After installation, make final adjustments to ensure all members fit and are aligned properly.B. After final adjustment, all metal surfaces shall be cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations.C. Leave work area clean and free of debris.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC GASOLINE DISPENSING AND STORAGE ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 13 05 00 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 13 05 00

GASOLINE DISPENSING AND UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A . Provide a complete gasoline fueling system, including but not limited to underground storage tanks, submersible turbine pumps, electrical wiring, electronic control/monitoring/leak detection system, Stage I vapor recovery systems, vent lines, fill risers, product piping, fittings, valves, caps, unions and necessary appurtenances, as specified, shown on the drawings, and as required for a complete and operating system. The complete fueling system shall include EXCHANGE-furnished, Contractor-installed gasoline dispensers and electrical controls for the Point Of Sale system as shown on drawings.

B . The complete operational gasoline dispensing system must be successfully tested, certified, and registered, and shall have all necessary permits to conduct sales of gasoline. Contractor shall obtain and pay for all required testing, permits, certifications and registrations.

C . Provide complete double-walled product piping system, including secondary containment and accessories as specified, shown on the drawings, and as required to prevent the possibility of contamination of air, soil, water, or groundwater.

D . Install EXCHANGE-furnished electronic gasoline dispensing items including dispensers, control consoles, interconnecting devices and accessories furnished by EXCHANGE and as required for a complete and operating system.

E . Provide submersible turbine fuel pumps including pump riser pipes as specified, shown on the drawings, and required for a complete and operating installation. Provide check valves, ball valves, metal flex connectors and shut-off (isolation) valves as required.

F . Provide fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP) double-walled underground fuel storage tanks with a wet interstitial space including “dead man” anchoring system designed and furnished by the tank manufacturer, and sealed, water-tight type turbine pump enclosures as specified, shown on the drawings, and required for a complete and operating system.

G . Provide tank monitoring/inventory control/release detection system including console with alarm capability, automatic tank gauging equipment, electronic line leak detectors for primary piping of double-walled product piping, sensors for all secondary containment (including tanks, piping and dispenser sumps), an overfill alarm with acknowledgement switch, and accessories as specified, shown on the drawings, and required for a complete and operating system. Tank monitoring/inventory control/release detection system shall be the latest version of the model indicated on the drawings with the most current software and all new components. Tank monitoring/inventory control/release detection system shall be ordered (all new) from the equipment supplier after award of contract by the EXCHANGE. Use of surplus Tank monitoring/inventory control/release detection system equipment is not allowed.

H . Provide the excavation, trenching, and backfilling required for installation of the fuel system.


I . Contractor shall prepare and pay for all required State, County, and Local permits, applications and registrations or other documents required for the installation and operation of gasoline storage and dispensing facilities. This includes preparation of documentation to satisfy the initial notification, notification of any required State or Local inspection authorities, copies of licenses, fuel system experience credentials, manufacturer’s certifications and notification of compliance status requirements under 40 CFR 63.11124. Coordinate the preparation and submission of documents with the Post or Base Environmental Office.

J . Coordinate installation construction with applicable sections within Division 26 - Electrical work.

K . Related work specified elsewhere (as applicable to the project):

1. Utility Excavating 2. Cast-in-Place Concrete 3. Mechanical Work - Division 23. 4. Electrical work - Division 26. 5. Waste Disposal

L . Contractor to refer to SECTION 00 31 00.1 - GEOTECHNICAL EXPLORATION REPORT for existing soil conditions.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A . Comply with the following codes and standards (use the most recent version):

1. Most recent State UST Technical and Installation standards (2012 IFC, NFPA with GA amendments)

2. NFPA No. 30, Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code. 3. NFPA No. 30A, Automotive and Marine Service Station Code. 4. NFPA No. 70, National Electrical Code 5. NFPA No. 329, Handling Underground Release of Flammable and Combustible

Liquids 6. EPA 40 CFR Part 280, Technical Standards and Corrective Action Requirements

for Contracting Officers and Operators of Underground Storage. 7. 40 CFR Part 63 - National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants for

Source Categories 8. OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910.106, Flammable and Combustible Liquids. 9. ASTM D2310-80, Standard Classification for Machine-Made Reinforced

Thermosetting-Resin Pipe. 10. ASTM D2517-81, Standard Specification for Reinforced Epoxy Resin Gas

Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 11. ASTM D2996-88, Standard Specification for Filament-Wound "Fiberglass" (Glass

Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe. 12. ASTM D4021, Standard Specification for Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester

Underground Petroleum Storage Tanks. 13. UL 79, Power-Operated Pumps for Petroleum Product Dispensing Systems. 14. UL 87, Power-Operated Dispensing Devices for Petroleum Products. 15. UL 567, Pipe Connections for Flammable and Combustible Liquids and LP-Gas. 16. UL 842, Valves for Flammable Fluids. 17. UL 860, Pipe Unions for Flammable and Combustible Fluids and Fire Protection

Service. 18. UL 1238, Control Equipment for Use with Flammable Liquid Dispensing Devices. 19. UL 1316, Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Underground Storage Tanks for

Petroleum Products. 20. API 1615 Installation of Underground Petroleum Storage Systems.


21. API 1628 A Guide to the Assessment and Remediation of Underground Petroleum Releases (if a release is expected).

22. California Air Resources Board (CARB) Executive Orders applicable to system. 23. California Air Resources Board (CARB) Test Procedures applicable to system. 24. PEI RP 100 Recommended Practices for Installation of Underground Storage

Systems. 25. PEI RP 300 Recommended Practices for Installation and Testing of Vapor

Recovery Systems at Vehicle Fueling Sites. 26. PEI 400 Recommended Procedures for Testing Electrical Continuity of Fuel-

Dispensing. 27. All other applicable ASTM and UL standards. 28. All applicable EPA requirements relating to release detection, spill and overfill

prevention, and corrosion protection. 29. All other applicable Local, County, State, and Federal codes, standards, licensing

and registration requirements. 30. Manufacturer’s Instructions 31. UL 971, UL listed Non-Metal Pipe 32. PEI RP 1200, Recommended Practices for the Testing and Verification of Spill,

Overfill, Leak Detection and Secondary Containment Equipment

B . Contractor Experience and Licensing:

1. Contractor shall certify that he (or his installation sub-contractor) has at least four years’ experience installing underground gasoline storage tanks and dispensing equipment and holds all certifications or licenses required by the State in which the project is to be constructed. He shall also assure that the designed gasoline fuel system shall be installed by skilled workmen, licensed by the State in which the project is constructed and certified by the equipment manufacturers. Contractor’s fuel system installer and electrician shall have prior experience with fuel systems and related equipment. As evidence of this experience, a list of the most recent three fuel system installations performed by this contractor with complete descriptions of the location, the project name, and the equipment installed and date of project shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer prior to award of contract. Contractor Certification of Licensing and Experience. Contractor shall certify that he (or his installation subcontractor is a certified installer and/or Authorized Service Contractor (manufacturer training/certification) for the following equipment manufacturers, as applicable to the system being installed:

a. Dresser Wayne. b. Veeder-Root c. Red Jacket d. OPW e. Containment Solutions / Xerxes f. NOV Fiber Glass Systems (formerly Smith Fiberglass and Ameron

International)

g. Bravo Systems (fiberglass sump entry fittings)

2. Contractor shall also certify that he (or his installation subcontractor) holds all necessary licenses and manufacturer certifications for construction and installation required under this contract (see list ablve) at the project location. These certifications shall be submitted in writing to the Contracting Officer before award of contract. Changing of subcontractors after this certification will require re-certification of the new subcontractor, showing requisite experience and re-


submittal to the Contracting Officer prior to the new subcontractor performing any work on the jobsite.

3. Contractor shall certify that the installation of the petroleum-system-related electrical components will be done by an experienced contractor or subcontractor. This petroleum electrical contractor shall have fuel electrical system experience with systems similar to those installed under this contract. (Petroleum-system-related components are those essential to the legal operation of the petroleum storage, dispensing, leak detection, and emergency equipment. They include, but are not limited to: dispensers, submersible fuel pumps, pump controllers, leak detection equipment, vapor recovery systems, emergency shut-off switches, and all conduit related to these systems.) As evidence of this experience, a list of the most recent five fuel system installations performed by this contractor with complete descriptions of the location, the project name, and the equipment installed and date of project shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer before construction begins. NOTE: It is preferred but not mandatory that the petroleum electrical subcontractor be a subcontractor to the petroleum system installer. If the petroleum electrical installer is a subcontractor of the petroleum systems installer described in 1, above, and worked on the projects submitted under that paragraph, contractor shall so certify and no additional projects need be reported.

4. The licensed, experienced and manufacturer-certified fuel system installers described in B. 1-3 above shall remain on-site during all active phases of the fuel system installation. Unlicensed, un-experienced and non-manufacturer-certified laborers may not perform substantial work without a licensed, experienced and manufacturer-certified fuel system installer present.

C . Detailed drawings of proposed departures due to actual field conditions or other causes shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer for coordination of approval. The contractor shall carefully examine the drawings and shall be responsible for the proper fitting of materials and equipment without substantial alteration. Materials and equipment installed in the system shall be suitable for the pressures and temperatures expected to be encountered and suitable to the climate and environmental conditions of the location of the project.

D . Contractor's responsibilities under this quality assurance section include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Receipt and storage of all items of equipment in a location protected from theft, vandalism, inclement weather, or other damage.

2. Providing required interconnections to product pumps and emergency disconnect systems.

3. Construction of openings, depressions, and sleeves for mechanical and electrical piping and conduit as required.

4. Providing hardware and related items as required to assure that equipment components are properly mounted, securely anchored, adequately ventilated, or where required, are adequately sealed from vapors.

5. Verifying size of components to assure space required for dispensers, consoles and interconnecting devices do not exceed designated space available as indicated on drawings.

6. Determining if unusual conditions or circumstances exist at the site (or in the vicinity of the installation) which could damage the electronic components or circuitry, or otherwise impair the proper function of the system, and incorporating, in such event, the necessary protective devices into the installation.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A . Submit shop drawings for the following in accordance with Section 01300 requirements:


1. Dispenser Sumps 2. Product piping and fittings 3. Pump Sumps 4. Spill Containers 5. Submersible fuel pumps 6. Underground fuel storage tanks 7. Tank monitoring / inventory control / release detection system

B . No work shall be performed without the shop drawings having been approved by Contracting Officer or Contracting Officer’s designee.

C . Contractor shall provide a proposed schedule of the phases of the work for the installation of the gasoline storage tanks, piping and dispensing systems.

D . Other underground fuel storage tank submittals shall include:

1. A copy of the tank manufacturer’s float-out calculation and dead men design for each tank at this specific location.

2. Contractor shall submit six copies of shop drawings for each tank of same size. Drawings shall include all critical dimensions and show locations of all fittings and accessories, i.e., manways, hold-down straps, etc. All shop drawings shall be submitted at the same time.

3. Contractor shall submit six copies of equipment information from manufacturer's catalog data, installation instructions and calibration charts.

4. Two tank conversion charts shall be left with the Facilities Manager upon the completion of construction.

5. Contractor shall reference 3.17 for testing requirements.

E . Fuel System Environmental Compliance Documentation and Records- The following documents or the state or location’s equivalent of these records will be furnished in two copies, one left at the EXCHANGE facility manager’s office and one furnished to the contracting officer for delivery to the installation environmental office:

1. UST registration for each tank including any changes to registration (“owner” is the Installation). (May be USEPA Form 7530 or extension of it.)

2. Other permits (such as Air Operation Permit). 3. Installer Certification of the UST system. (May be EPA Form 7530.) 4. As-built plans with layout of tanks and piping, photos taken during construction. 5. Third Party Certifications of leak detection systems (equipment or methods). 6. Documentation of corrosion protection, if part of the system. 7. Manufacturer’s manuals (owner’s operator’s and maintenance manuals) for all

system components and equipment (including tanks, lines, leak detection components, dispensers, nozzles, etc.). CARB Executive Order for Stage II Vapor Recovery System, if installed.

8. Manufacturer’s warranty documentation for all system components and equipment (including tanks, lines, leak detection components, dispensers, nozzles, etc.)

9. Initial Compliance Test Records (if not included with Installer Certification above).

a. Tanks b. Lines c. Stage I (CARB TP 201.1E and TP 201.3) d. Stage II Vapor Recover System (if required in the area) e. Dispenser Calibration

10. Training Roster for O & M Training given to EXCHANGE associates.


11. Fuel System Final Inspection Report. 12. Digital photographs of main stages of tank installation and other construction

activities, as shown below. Sufficient photographs to adequately document and represent the activity will be taken. Any problems encountered or authorized deviations from the drawings or specifications shall be documented with appropriate photographs. The contractor with submit the photographs via the internet to the EXCHANGE “Constructware” website as soon as possible but not later than 5 business days prior to any scheduled EXCHANGE technical inspection (or 5 business days prior to the final inspection, if documenting work done between the last EXCHANGE technical inspection by the EXCHANGE A-E and the final inspection).

13. Four copies of a chronological Installation Report of the complete tank system installation construction documenting all major activities related to the installation of the underground storage tanks, piping, dispensing and release detection equipment , Stage II Vapor recovery system (if required), and Stage I system shall be provided to EXCHANGE Contracting Officer. Contractor’s Installation Report shall include documentation of construction activities and photographs of the construction work in progress. Documentation of specific construction activities shall include, at a minimum the following:


CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES DOCUMENTED BY REMARKS

1 Excavation of Tank Hole Photographs Installation Report

Report shall include measured dimensions of the excavation and details about shoring and site conditions.

2 Final Tank Hole Excavation (with fabric liner as applicable under site specific conditions)

Photographs Installation Report

Report shall include final measured dimensions of the excavation and details about preparation for tank placement.

3 Delivery of the Underground Storage Tanks Shipping manifest Report shall note delivery condition of tanks

4 Air Test of Tanks Upon Delivery (Pre-Installation)

Statement of testing protocol with results of air testing (signed by tank contractor)

Air test must be conducted at 3-5 PSI (air gauge must be equipped with a pressure relief valve set at 5 PSI), and must follow manufacturer’s procedures

5 Deadman Anchors or Slab Construction Photographs, Field notes in Installation Report

Report shall note size and quantity of rebar used, as well as, final measured dimensions of anchoring devices

6 Placement of Tanks on Clean Backfill Photographs, Field notes in Installation Report

Report shall note placement details to include conditions like wet-hole, caving, amount of backfill beneath the tanks, etc.

7 Tank Hole Excavation Backfilling Operations Photographs, Field notes in Installation report

Report shall indicate how manufacturer’s recommended procedures were followed

8 Installing the Product Lines Photographs Follow piping manufacturer’s procedures

9 Installing the Vapor Recovery Lines Photographs Follow CARB and RP300 procedures

10 Installing the Tank Vent lines Photographs Ensure proper slope of vent lines

11 Air / Soap Testing of All Piping Photographs Field notes (signed)

Air test must follow manufacturer’s procedures (air gauge must be equipped with a pressure relief valve set @ 60 PSIG)

12 Placement of Containment Sumps Photographs Follow sump manufacturer’s procedures

13 Placement of Electrical Conduit Photographs

14 Forming / Pouring Concrete for Canopy Footings Photographs

15 Backfilling the Pipechase Photographs Document proper installation of piping

16 Installation of Dispensers Photographs

17 Purging of Product Piping of Air Field notes (signed)

18 Notification of System Testing to Regulators Copy of Notification

19 Calibration of Dispensers Field Notes (signed) Verify proper calibration tolerances

20 Flow Rate Determination Field Notes (signed) Verify flow rate not to exceed 10 GPM

21 Certification of Fueling System: Tank & Line Tightness Tests

Test Reports, copy of the Performance Criteria for the Test

Using an EPA third-party certified method

22 Certification of Vapor Recovery System: Stage I and Stage II (as required by AHJ)

Test Reports Following CARB Test Procedures

23 Certification of the Fueling Facility Operators (Training Documentation)

Outline of Course Content & Rosters

24 Installer Certification of UST Installation Affidavit/Oath Signed EPA Form 7530 or State Form

25 Registration of Tank System Copy of Registration Signed EPA Form 7530 or State Form

26 Registration of Vapor Recovery System (as required)

Copy of Registration Signed State Form

27 Warranty/Registration Paperwork for Equipment Copy of Warranty and Registration


F . Contractor shall submit six copies of catalog data of submersible turbine pumps along with proper pump selection, performance chart, and installation, operation and service manuals.

G . Contractor shall submit Documentation of contractor or installer sub-contractor and of petroleum systems electrician’s experience as required in Section 1.02 B above.

H . Contractor shall provide for approval the name of the testing company he will use to perform pressure testing of tanks and piping, and startup compliance testing of the Vapor Recovery system per manufacturers' instruction and as specified in this specification. Contractor-retained testing company shall have a minimum of three years of experience in performing such tests for retail gasoline stations and shall be responsible for notifying EXCHANGE of the schedule for testing, following proper testing protocol, and prompt notification of test results. Note: EXCHANGE may retain another independent testing agency/agent to observe and monitor the tanks and piping installation and testing performed by the contractor and his testing agency. EXCHANGE-retained testing agency shall have access to the site, work area, shop drawings and results of testing during the construction period. Any changes or comments recommended by EXCHANGE-retained agent must be approved by the Contracting Officer prior to implementation by the contractor. Any testing conducted by EXCHANGE-retained testing agency is separate and independent of the contractor’s requirements and SHALL NOT be considered a substitute for any tests required to be performed by contractor. The General Contractor’s site superintendent must be notified of any independent testing schedule so that the General Contractor may ensure his representative’s presence during any such test procedure.

I . Contractor shall provide six copies of an Operations and Maintenance (O&M) Manual. This manual will describe all systems and equipment installed by the contractor, including but not limited to: underground storage tanks, piping and distribution lines, tank monitoring and release detection systems, vapor recovery systems, dispensers, and alarms. O&M Manual will list the manufacturers (including addresses and telephone numbers), make, model and serial numbers of all equipment and systems. Photocopies of equipment warranty registrations shall be included in the O&M Manual. The O&M Manual will be written in simple language and will give the operator information necessary to operate and maintain the system. Maintenance that is required but not normally performed by the operator will be so noted. The requirement for an O&M Manual may be met by compiling copies of materials provided by the manufacturers of the systems or equipment. However, if the manufacturer’s materials do not explain how the system or equipment works as installed, Contractor will provide necessary supplemental information.

J . Six copies of the release detection system operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided as follows:

1. The EXCHANGE Service Station Manager. 2. The Local General Manager. 3. The Installation Environmental Office. 4. Three copies to the Contracting Officer for internal distribution.

K . Copies of all documents, permits, applications and registrations required State, County, and Local shall be submitted to the EXCHANGE Contracting Officer and the Base Environmental Office in a report documenting details of the installation.

L . GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AS-BUILT DRAWINGS OF COMPLETE FUELING SYSTEM TO EXCHANGE PROJECT MANAGER AND CONTRACTING OFFICER PRIOR TO TURNING OVER OF PROJECT.


1.04 UNATTENDED OPERATION

A . Contractor is on notice that the facility is to be constructed with the intention to comply with the Exchange Unattended Fueling Policy requirements (attached at the end of this specification). The Owner (Robins AFB) will obtain a waiver from the State to allow Unattended Fueling.

B . Contractor will use best professional judgment to suggest any other items that may be required by law at the project site for unattended operation or that may facilitate safe and environmentally sound, unattended operation and should identify those items to the Contracting Officer as soon as they are known.

1.05 DRAWINGS: Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The contractor shall carefully investigate the site and job conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange his work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, valves and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost.

1.06 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: Open pipe ends and equipment openings shall be closed and protected with caps or plugs (not tape) during installation. Equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical injury. Backfill material shall be kept clear of all trash and debris. Dispenser and tank sumps shall be closed or covered to prevent water and construction debris from accumulating within. Underground storage tanks and piping system shall be protected by barricades and construction fencing. Upon completion of all work, the materials and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, adjusted and operated. Belts, pulleys, gears, couplings, projecting setscrews, keys and other rotating parts shall be fully enclosed or properly guarded.

1.07 WARRANTIES

A . Contractor shall warrant the work specified according to the terms of the General Provisions. In addition, upon acceptance of the gasoline dispensing system for beneficial use by EXCHANGE, he shall provide to the Contracting Officer the manufacturer's standard equipment warranty or warranties covering both parts and labor for a minimum period of one year. Warranty service shall be provided promptly upon request within 12 hours on weekdays and 24 hours on weekends. Contractor shall be responsible for the warranty of the equipment he furnished. Contractor is responsible for defects in installation of EXCHANGE-furnished equipment.

B . Fuel storage tanks shall carry a thirty-year warranty against failure from internal or external corrosion and from structural failure. Manufacturer’s installation checklist must be completed and submitted to the manufacturer by the Contractor in order to provide a valid warranty. A photocopy of this document shall be included in the O&M manual and also be provided to the Contracting Officer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A . Contractor-furnished materials and equipment shall be as specified and/or as shown on the drawings. Equipment shall be the product of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and shall be of the best quality used for the purpose in commercial practice. Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, serial number and catalog number on a durable plate securely affixed in a conspicuous place. The nameplate of the distributing agent only will not be acceptable. Substitution of the specified equipment is only acceptable upon review and approval by the Contracting Officer or his authorized agent. To obtain approval, Contractor shall make a written request to the Contracting Officer. Contractor’s request will include or


attach all data and information available on the equipment including warranties, guarantees, and UL certifications (if applicable).

B . All tank, piping, sumps, and other fuel system parts and equipment will have all necessary State approvals and be listed as approved for use in (State) by the (State) Department of Environmental Protection as of the date work in the project commences. It is the contractor’s responsibility to point out in writing to the contracting officer prior to installation, any specified equipment that is not on the approved list as required. The contracting officer will advise the contractor in writing how to resolve the issue.

2.02 PIPING, FITTINGS AND SPECIALTIES

A . All pipes, fittings, appurtenances, manways, accessories, and valves shall be provided by the Contractor after submittal to the Contracting Officer of shop drawings showing manufacturer and model number of each.

B . All-metal flex connectors shall be used in all dispenser containment sumps, and be as shown in the drawings with all-metal tubes (no Teflon), hose ends, galvanized malleable iron nipples at both ends affixed with crimped fittings, maximum overall length 24". All flex hoses/connectors shall be compatible with ethanol based gasoline or low-sulfur diesel fuel as applicable.

C . Aboveground vent piping shall be schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with 150 lb. malleable iron screw fittings and couplings. Joints shall be connected using appropriate adhesive/sealant compatible with gasoline, alcohol-gasoline blended, and reformulated fuels. Vents shall be a minimum of 12 feet above finished grade or 24 inches above the building exterior wall. Vents shall be mounted (as shown on the drawings) to the building exterior wall or braced to stainless steel or galvanized steel pole which shall extend to 12 inches below the top of the vent. Vents shall be primed and painted with two coats of rust inhibiting paint in a CARB-Approved color that has been approved by both EXCHANGE and the installation.

D . Underground vent and vapor recovery piping (if required) shall be Underwriters Laboratory, Incorporated approved rigid fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP) pipe with molded fittings and adapters. Manufacturer for vent and vapor recovery piping is Ameron Dualoy 3000/L as manufactured by Ameron International.

E . Provide buried warning tape or line markers for all underground piping to allow for verification of the piping location in the future. Warning tape shall not be buried more than 12” below grade.

F . Fill piping and vapor recovery risers shall be schedule 40 galvanized steel piping. As a minimum, couplings and fittings should be 150-pound malleable iron. A thread sealant certified for petroleum service should be used for all fittings. Sealants certified for methanol and other fuels (for example, Ultra-low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD), ethanol and MTBE blends) should be used when these substances are to be placed in the UST system. Projects being built where there are containment requirements for fill risers shall comply with that requirement.

G . UST piping/equipment sump collars shall be provide by the tank manufacturer; diameter as shown on the drawings.

H . The Contractor shall provide FRP sumps with watertight lids as shown on the construction documents.

I . The Contractor shall provide surface manway covers as shown on the drawings. Each manway cover will be API color-coded with matching skirt, stabilizer kit and locking


mechanism. If the surface manway is the type that utilizes a tool to move/lift the lid, lifting tools will be supplied for each manway by contractor. An FRP ID plate will be provided by the manufacturer for each manway. The ID plates will specify the tank number, tank capacity, and product type. The manway cover assembly shall be as shown on the drawings.

2.03 DOUBLE-WALL PRODUCT PIPING AND SECONDARY CONTAINMENT SYSTEM

A . All underground product piping (as shown on the drawings) shall be NOV Fiber Glass Systems www.fgspipe.com (formerly AO Smith and/or Ameron) Red Thread 2 inch fiberglass primary pipe with Thread pipe fittings, or equivalent Ameron Dualoy. Ameron “LCX” piping is an acceptable alternate to the conventional “size over size” fiberglass pipe, however the proper pipe fittings and matching sump entry fittings must be provided.

B . The piping installation shall strictly follow the recommended installation practices described by the manufacturer. The secondary containment pipe shall contain product leaked from the primary product pipe and drain to the sealed pump manway enclosure for leak detection and recovery of the released product.

1. The primary piping shall be capable of successfully passing an air pressure test at fifty pounds per square inch (50psi) after bleed back pressure stabilization, which shall be established by bringing the line pressure to sixty pounds per square inch for a minimum of three hours. During the pressurizing period all fittings shall be observed for leaks by applying a soapy water solution.

2. The secondary piping shall be capable of maintaining ten pounds per square inch (10psi) for no less than three hours during integrity testing. During the pressurizing period all fittings shall be observed for leaks by applying a soapy water solution.

3. The contractor shall follow the manufacturer’s recommendation that after the primary piping has passed a 60 psig pressure test, the product line pressure should be reduced and maintained at a minimum pressure of 25 psig (60 psi maximum) until all paving has been completed, with pressure gauge assemblies in place on each line for daily observation and verification that the pipe is holding pressure.

4. Pressure gauge assemblies for testing shall be calibrated prior to use and be equipped with the proper pressure safety valve as recommended by piping manufacturer’s testing procedures.

C . Termination of product lines shall be within containment sumps with proper sealing of the ends to prevent water, liquid and debris from entering the sumps.

D . UST sump/underground sump entry fittings for flat sided sumps single-walled sump fuel piping entry fittings for conventional “size-over-size” piping shall be by Bravo Systems Angle Adjustable F-Series Entry Fittings (Model Series F-32-TS-T-ADJ-MP [3” over 2”] or F-43 –xxxx for 4” over 3”), by NOV Fiber Glass Systems as shown on the drawings. If LCX piping is installed, Bravo F-22-LS-T-MP fittings shall be used. The only acceptable alternative entry fitting is the Bravo F-32U-T.

E . UST sump/underground sump entry fittings for curved surface single-walled sump (single-walled sumps are not allowed in California) fuel piping entry fittings shall be by Bravo Systems F-Series Entry Fittings model F-32-TS-T-MP-RND-D [3” over 2”]. The only acceptable alternative entry fitting for product/vent/vapor recovery piping entry fitting is the Bravo F-32U-T

F . Underground sump electrical conduit entry fittings shall be Bravo model F-17-RR-D-RND (3/4” Rob Roy electrical conduit. Substitute “10” for “17” for 1” conduit), F-17-SS-RND


(3/4” galvanized electrical conduit. Substitute “10” for “17” for 1” conduit) or equivalent for larger diameter piping/conduit.

G . Installing contractor must be trained and certified in the installation of Bravo Systems fittings, or NOV Fiber Glass fittings. Secondary containment pipe pass-through fittings are not acceptable and will not be approved for use.

H . Non-fiberglass (rubber/flexible) sump entry fittings are not acceptable and will not be approved for use. RUBBER BOOTS OR REDUCER FITTINGS ARE NOT PERMITTED THROUGH OR INSIDE ANY UST SUMP, DISPENSER SUMP, OR TRANSITION SUMP.

I . All containment sumps shall be capable of passing a hydrostatic water test to ensure that the sumps are product and vapor tight.

2.04 ELECTRONIC FUEL DISPENSING SYSTEM: EXCHANGE - FURNISHED/ CONTRACTOR- INSTALLED

A . EXCHANGE shall furnish multi-product, dual-hose type, blending dispensers to the contractor for installation. A Wayne control data distribution box as well as an Allied Equipment isolation board shall be furnished by EXCHANGE and installed by contractor to connect the dispensers as indicated on the drawings. The dispensers shall be delivered directly to the contractor on site. The contractor is responsible for receiving, verifying, storing, uncrating and protecting the equipment. Contractor shall coordinate the delivery and installation dates with contracting officer in advance to meet the construction schedule.

B . EXCHANGE-furnished dispensers will be Dresser Wayne “Ovation” as shown on the drawings. All hoses, nozzles, swivels, safety breakaways and any other hanging hardware shall be provided by the Contractor.

C . A Dresser Wayne service representative under EXCHANGE equipment contract will review and assist the contractor during installation and will perform initial start-up of each dispenser. Actual installation of the dispenser is not the responsibility of this service representative. The general contractor is responsible for providing knowledgeable. certified Wayne equipment installers as well as coordinating the assistance of the Dresser Wayne service representative.

2.05 SUBMERSIBLE TURBINE PUMPS (STP)

A . Pumps shall have an explosion-proof motor that is electrically compatible with the local power service and shall carry UL listing. Pumps shall have standard 4" NPT tank fitting. Upper assembly shall contain all functional elements, check valve, air eliminator, expansion relief valve, siphon nozzle and venturi, siphon check valve and pressure test screw. The entire assembly shall be removable. The pump shall have a thermal overcurrent overload protector with automatic reset. Capacitors and electric disconnect shall be accessible. Lower assembly shall consist of permanent split-phase capacitor motor, 25% glass-filled "Celcon" impeller and diffuser. Impeller shall be hydraulically balanced providing a positive and evenly distributed drive. The pumps shall be designed or equipped so that no part of the system shall be subjected to pressure above its allowable working pressure. Pumps shall be designed for Class 1, Group D atmosphere. Pump shall be cooled and lubricated by discharging the pumped fluid into the storage tank regardless of dispensed quantity. An isolation valve (ball valve) shall be installed in an assembly connecting the pump to the product line to facilitate isolation of the product line during tightness testing. The contractor shall size the pumps for 8 to 10.0 gallons per minute flow rate at the nozzles.

B . Manufacturer of Pumps: Red Jacket. No other substitute pumps shall be allowed.


2.06 UNDERGROUND FUEL STORAGE TANKS - DOUBLE-WALL FRP

A . Requirements:

1. Tanks shall be capable of storing gasoline, or gasohol (minimum 50% methanol or ethanol) and ultra low sulfur diesel fuel at ambient underground temperatures.

2. All tanks shall be equipped with a fiberglass brine-filled reservoir. 3. All tanks shall show hold down strap locations. 4. All tanks shall be supplied with manufacture’s designed concrete deadman

anchoring system. 5. Tanks shall be designed to provide hydrostatic monitoring capability. Tanks shall

have one 4" NPT fitting located as per drawings for accessibility to the tank bottom between the primary and secondary walls. This fitting shall have counter-sunk pipe plug provided by manufacturer.

6. Provide glass fiber-reinforced plastic anchor straps for each tank (furnished by the tank manufacturer). Location and quantities of straps shall be as specified by manufacturer.

7. Underwriter's Laboratory label shall be permanently affixed to each individual underground storage tank.

8. Lifting lugs shall be furnished on all tanks. Lugs shall be capable of withstanding weight of tank with a safety factor of 3-to-1.

9. Tank bottom deflector gauge plates shall be provided under all primary tank fittings to prevent tank damage.

10. Containment collars shall be furnished around all tank manways. 11. Fiberglass tanks shall have hydrostatic monitoring system. System shall be an

integral part of the tank. 12. Reservoir sensor shall be as specified in paragraph 2.07 of this specification. 13. Hydrostatic monitoring system shall have third party certification that it meets

EPA and NFPA 329 criteria as a precision tank test. The test procedure shall be documented.

B . Manufacturer of Tanks:

1. Containment Solutions 2. Xerxes International

2.07 TANK INVENTORY CONTROL AND RELEASE DETECTION SYSTEM

A . Provide Veeder-Root TLS-450 “Plus” with integral printer and full VGA LCD display with SiteFax (332818-001) and USB/Ethernet dual interface module (332913-001) as required.. The Veeder-Root system consists of tank inventory control, release detection system (for tank, piping, and all sumps), control console, integral printer, tank probes, hydrostatic interstitial tank monitoring probes, sump sensors, fittings, etc., for a complete and operating system. Items below, generally describes minimum requirements for a working system. Part numbers may change or the system configuration may require additional items. Contractor must insure that modules, switches, sensors, etc, are adequate for a complete and working system that will meet installation and compliance requirements for the facility as constructed (see below, Section 13 05 00, paragraph 3.12 INSTALLATION OF INVENTORY/LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM).

1. Console – 8247 Microprocessor-based, 66MHZ system clock, 128MB RAM on Central Processing Unit. Standard model console provided with RS232 abd RS422 communication interface ports with external communication capability for automatic inventory control. Approximate console size 18.5" x 11.5" x 8.5". The console shall be wall mounted using external mounting tabs, at a height of not more than 5 feet from the floor.


2. Inventory/Leak Detection Probe: Veeder-Root Series 846390-109-MAG Plus magnetostrictive probe with phase II separation float kit and HGP aluminum housing.

3. All dispenser and tank sensors shall have an aluminum housing where an aluminum housing is an option.

4. Mag Sump Sensor: Veeder-Root Series 857080-112. 5. Digital Pressure Line Leak Detector: Complete assemblies for detecting leaks in

product piping. Veeder-Root Series DPLLD 859080-001 for TRJ Red Jacket Pumps connected to controller in the building.

6. Hydrostatic Reservoir Sensor (dual-point): Veeder-Root Series 794380-303 to be incorporated into the integral tank reservoir.

7. Dispenser Mag Sump/Pan Sensor: Veeder-Root Series 857080-111. 8. Overfill Alarm and Acknowledgement Switch: Veeder-Root Series 790091-001

for the alarm and Series 790095-001 for the acknowledgement switch. 9. Modules:

a. One SiteFax Interface Module #332818-001. b. One RS-232/RS-485 Dual Interface Module #332870-001. c. One Sixteen-Input Universal Probe/Sensor Interface Module #332812-

001. d. One Universal Input/Output Interface Module #332813-001. e. One Risk Management Software Enhancement for DPLLD #332972-008. f. One USB/Ethernet Dual Interface Module #332913-001. g. One ‘L2 Three Year Extended Storage Module #332971-003. h. Console Features: i. Printer: The console shall be equipped with an integral, thermal printer

for hard-copy documentation of reports. Reports shall be printed in rows/columns format.

j. Display: The console shall be equipped with 7.4 inch full VGA LCD touch screen display for on-site viewing of information, programming, operating and reporting functions.

k. Modem: Internal 300/115200 baud capability for future expansion. (SiteFax Modem 332818-001).

l. Remote Access/Control: Direct Access TM.

2.08 DISPENSER, TANK AND PIPING SUMPS

A . The contractor shall provide water tight UST pump (STP) and piping sump/enclosures as shown on the drawings. The sump lid shall be a “watertight” model/type. Depending upon the burial depth of the tanks, the contractor shall furnish and install the appropriate sump with the required extension/height as directed by the manufacturer, so the distance between the top of the UST piping sump lid and the underside of the surface manhole is less than eight inches (8”).

B . The sumps and accessories shall be chemically comparable with products to be stored (gasoline, gasoline with 9.5% oxinol, gasoline with 5% methanol and co-solvent, gasoline with 15% ethanol, and gasoline with 20% MTBE as well as ultra low sulfur diesel fuel).

C . All joints, connections, covers, pipe and conduit entries (including angular entries) shall be liquid-tight.

D . Sumps shall not be deformed by backfill pressure or backfilling operations.

E . The contractor shall provide liquid-tight dispenser containment sumps under the product dispensers, to prevent any leaks or spills from escaping into the environment. The dispenser sumps shall be made of non-corrosive material and shall be compatible with the product being dispensed and with the chemicals and conditions found naturally in the


underground environment. Dispenser sumps shall be “conduitless” type so penetrations in to dispenser sumps by electrical conduit is minimized or eliminated.

F . Dispenser sumps shall be specifically designed for installation with Dresser Wayne dispensers. All required stabilizers for shear valves and pipe entry conduits shall be factory-furnished. All sumps shall be liquid-tight to ground and surface water.

G . Dispenser containment sumps shall be as compatible with the piping system selected.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 NOT USED

3.02 INSTALLATION OF DOUBLE-WALL PIPING SYSTEM WITH SECONDARY CONTAINMENT

A . The Contractor shall install the double-wall piping system in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommended installation practices and instructions. Particular attention will be paid to connection of fittings according to manufacturer’s specifications.

B . Hanging hardware for dispensers shall be tested for continuity by experienced and knowledgeable personnel in accordance with PEI/RP-400-12.

C . The primary and secondary underground piping shall be tested as described in part 2.03 of this specification section (above). The contractor shall conduct at least two tests, one at the time of installation, and the other while other construction activities are underway. Pressure shall be maintained on all underground piping during construction, with verification that pressure is being maintained (holding) as the product dispensing system is being primed, calibrated and tested before pacing into service. The Contractor shall furnish written reports of the test results to the Contracting Officer.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF ALL-METAL FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A . All-Metal flexible connectors (flex connectors) are to be installed as indicated on the drawings.

B . Flexible connectors shall be installed so that there is no bends greater than 45°, radial stress, or twist in the hose when joints are assembled. Follow manufacturer’s installation instructions.

C . Flex connectors shall be UL-listed for such application and meet the requirements of NFPA 30A for being fire-safe. Teflon-lined flex connectors will not be permitted.

3.04 SLOPING OF VENT LINES AND VAPOR RETURN PIPING: A minimum slope of 1/8" per foot (sloping downward toward the tanks) is required for all underground vent and vapor return piping. No less than this minimum slope shall be used within requirements for cover over piping and depth of tanks. Only rigid FRP piping compatible with the fuel stored shall be permitted for vent and vapor return piping. Pipe cover requirements are detailed on the drawings. Piping shall be installed on pre-graded compacted bed material. No support or spacing material other than the bed and backfill will be left in contact with the piping. Sags or slumps in the piping which might cause an liquid trap in the lines and which will not be permitted.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF TANK FITTINGS, MANWAYS AND APPURTENANCES

A . Requirements for Tank Fittings, Manways, and Appurtenances:

1. Contractor shall be responsible to provide proper clearance between tank shell and submerged pumps or fill tubes. Contractor shall check the tank diameter at


the pump and fill pipe opening and make necessary adjustments to maintain the specified minimum clearance of six inches from the bottom of the tank.

2. When installing spill containment basins at the fill points and Stage I vapor recovery adapters, contractor shall provide a minimum of 3" and a maximum of 6" clearance between the top of the cap and bottom of the manway cover. Proper clearance shall be provided between the top of the automatic tank gauge and its cover, and the interstitial monitoring probe and its cover.

3. Pump and fill manways and/or connecting piping shall be self-supporting and shall not contact the tank. No spacing materials shall be allowed on the top of the tank.

4. All manway covers and lids will be API color-coded according to the following: Regular unleaded covers will be white with a black cross, mid-grade unleaded covers will be blue with a white cross, and high-grade (premium) will be red with a white cross, ultra low sulfur diesel will be yellow with a black “U”. Vapor Recovery covers will be orange. Observation well covers will be white with a black triangle. If applicable to the project, used oil covers will be marked with a purple square.

3.06 TRENCHING AND PIPE CHASES: Pipe trenches must be large enough to accommodate the piping, together with sufficient spacing and backfill material to provide protection from damage that might be caused by settlement, abrasion, vibration, expansion, contraction, or foreign materials. Vapor-return piping will be separated from product piping by at least twice the largest nominal pipe diameter, with at least six inches of distance between the piping and the trench excavation walls. Trenching width shall be sufficient to maintain the clearance between the pipes and side walls as shown on the drawings and of a depth sufficient to provide the proper bed and cover, and pitch of the lines. Note that the minimum cover to finish grade over product lines in paved areas is 12 inches and 18 inches in non-paved areas. Pipe chase in the concrete or asphalt paving shall be constructed as detailed on the drawings and as located on the plot plan. The minimum spacing between adjacent pipes is twice the pipe diameter between pipes; however, piping runs shall not be layered. Piping crossover must be minimized, but where piping runs must cross, the manufacturer's crossover fittings shall be used. Piping will be installed in a manner that will facilitate testing, resist corrosion, and prevent damage and movement of system components.

3.07 BEDDING AND BACKFILL MATERIAL

A . Pea Gravel: Standard bedding and backfill material shall be a naturally-rounded aggregate, clean and free flowing, with particle size not less than 1/8" or more than 1/2" in diameter. Prior to tank installation, Contractor shall furnish the pea gravel sieve analysis from the supplier to the Contracting Officer.

B . Storage and Handling of Bed/Backfill Material on Site:

1. Contractor shall store these materials so as not to allow bed/backfill material to intermix with any excavated soil or other material on site. Contamination of self-compacting gravel could result in need for mechanical compaction, as the minimum/maximum particle sizes specified are critical for self-compaction.

2. In freezing conditions, material must be kept dry and free of ice. 3. Do not intermix gravel, stone or gravel crushing, or sand in the same excavation

or connected excavations.

C . Poor Soil Conditions/Soils Stabilization and Filter Fabric:

1. Where soils of low bearing capacity are found such as plastic clays or where sand/sand-gravel may be of a free-flowing nature, a separation is necessary between the pea gravel backfill and the soil to prevent penetration or migration.


2. Contractor shall line the excavation completely with an inert filter fabric, as per manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Approved manufacturers are:

a. DuPont "Typar" Style 3401 - 4 oz./Sq. Yd. b. Monsanto "Bidim" C-22 - 4 oz./Sq. Yd. c. Phillips "Supac" Fabric - 4.1 oz./Sq. Yd. d. Celanese "Mirafi" 140 Fabric - 4.1 oz./Sq. Yd.

4. Material shall be cut to an appropriate width for the depth and width of the excavation so that there is sufficient material to overlay the top edges of the excavation during installation. Laps of material along the excavation should be a minimum of 2 feet.

D . Bedding of Product Lines: A minimum of six inches deep compacted bed, graded to give the proper slope of depth of pipe runs, shall be laid in the trench before pipe runs are installed. Pipe runs shall be fabricated at grade and installed and properly spaced on the completed bed. After making necessary connections of runs, branches or fittings which shall be made up in the trench, bed material should be placed back under the piping and properly compacted.

3.08 BACKFILLING OF PIPING: After satisfactory completion of required testing and observation of piping, backfilling of trenches to subgrade elevation shall be completed. A minimum of six inches of backfill shall be bedded under the piping and minimum of 18 inches of combined cover (including surface paving and backfill material) over the piping is required. Ensure that marking tape or wire (for future location of piping) has been placed in the backfill at this time.

3.09 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS AND CONTROLLERS

A . Pumps shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Installer shall be familiar with such practices and procedures and shall strictly follow the same during installation.

B . Contractor shall measure the diameter of each tank at each 4" NPT tank fitting.

C . Contractor shall verify length of submersible pump. In any case, there shall be minimum 6" clearance between the tank and the bottom of the pump.

D . Pump shall be installed in 4" tank opening with approved non-setting thread sealant. Sealant shall be compatible/suitable for use with product being stored in the tank.

E . 4" riser pipe shall be tightened and pump shall be lined up with discharge outlet and fuel lines.

F . Electrical connections shall be made with approved fittings to junction box. Install ground wire using standard color codes.

G . Submersible pumps shall not be wired to run continuously.

H . Submersible pumps shall never be used to pump water from the tank.

3.10 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND TANKS

A . Tanks shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Only pea gravel not less than 1/8" or more than 1/2" shall be used. Proper burial depth shall be determined by a float-out calculation and shall allow for sloping the piping from the dispensers back to the tanks (minimum depth is 36 inches and maximum depth is 7 feet). Anchoring and tank spacing shall be as shown on the drawings. If there is any conflict


between the procedure provided in the specification and manufacturer's instructions, contractor shall contact Contracting Officer prior to proceeding with work. EXCHANGE assumes no responsibility or liability for the consequences of any testing practice.

B . Bottom of excavation and hold-down pad or deadmen should be covered with at least 12 inches of graded and compacted backfill. Install tanks to facilitate removal of water. Carefully place backfill around bottom of one-fourth of tank and tank ends by hand shoveling and tamping to insure full and even support. Place backfill carefully to avoid damage to tanks.

C . During construction and prior to final acceptance, all installed tanks shall be ballasted as required per manufacturer's recommendations. Upon acceptance by EXCHANGE, contractor shall empty the tanks for product fill, disposing of the ballast material in an environmentally safe manner.

3.11 INSTALLATION OF FUEL DISPENSING EQUIPMENT

A . Dispensers will be mounted on islands that are protected from damage from vehicle collisions by posts, bollards or concrete bumpers as denoted on the plans. Installation shall be in strict compliance with manufacturer's written instructions. If unusual conditions or circumstances exist which could damage or impair the system and the special protective measures required are not covered in these instructions, their installation shall be coordinated directly with the manufacturer. Actual installation of equipment and related components shall be under direct supervision at all times to assure compliance with specified requirements. Shear valves or breakaway devices will be installed on each product line and on each vapor return line and carefully tested for functioning. Actuation must be free and unobstructed. Shear valves for the product line must be double-poppet. Dispenser sumps shall be placed such that the sump edge sets ½ inch above the finished surface of the dispenser island. Dispensers will be securely bolted to their mounting surface according to the manufacturer’s instructions to ensure proper functioning of the shear valves.

B . Hanging hardware for dispensers shall be tested for continuity by experienced and knowledgeable personnel, in accordance with PEI/RP 400-12.

3.12 INSTALLATION OF INVENTORY/LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM

A . Installation of Veeder-Root tank inventory control and release detection system shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. The Contractor shall retain the services of the nearest authorized Veeder-Root distributor/installer. The name of the nearest distributor can be obtained by contacting Veeder-Root. This distributor shall be responsible for receiving and storing equipment, helping contractor to locate the conduits as shown on the drawings and installing the entire system excluding conduits and power wiring. At the completion of the installation, the contractor and installer shall test and shall certify the entire system. This distributor shall provide warranty for his work excluding hardware failure.

B . Programming shall be in accordance with local operational conditions and applicable regulations. The program shall include, but not limited to, tank and line tightness monitoring, tank level monitoring, interstitial monitoring, tank overfill alarms, tank low level alarms, and tank/dispenser sump monitoring. The contractor shall print a complete Veeder-Root program report and leave with the manager. Programming and operations of the Veeder-Root system shall be documented by a certified Veeder-Root technician. A TLS-450 system and data backup is also recommended at the initial startup and on a regular schedule if a USB communication ports is installed on the console. The backup is possible using the USB FLASH drive provided with the 450 console.


C . All circuits shall be run in rigid conduit. Conduit shall be sealed off and jointed in explosion proof boxes. Conductor runs between all inventory and leak detection equipment, and the Veeder-Root system shall be made with continuous conductors (no splices). Inventory and leak detection circuits shall be in separate conduits for dispenser and pump power runs.

3.13 INSTALLATION OF OVERFILL ALARM AND ACKNOWLEDGMENT SWITCH: The mounting location for the overfill alarm and acknowledgment switch shall be in the immediate vicinity of the storage tank delivery points and shall be clearly visible to and easily accessible to the fuel delivery driver. Alarm shall activate at 90% of the tank’s actual storage capacity.

3.14 EMERGENCY SHUT-OFF SWITCH

A . Install the master emergency shut-off switch inside the building at the register areas. Add additional emergency shut-off switches outside at a well-lighted location that is not less than 20 feet from the nearest dispenser, nor more than 100 feet from the farthest dispenser. The switch shall be visible from all dispenser locations; if this requires more than one switch, the appropriate number of duplicate switches will be provided and installed. Each switch will be identified by an all weather sign with letters at least 1 inch high with text as shown in the drawings. Letters will be in contrasting color to sign background, and the sign will be mounted at least 5 feet above ground level. The switch shall be installed in such a manner this it is clearly visible from the dispensers and meets ADA requirements.

B . The emergency shut-off switch shall disconnect power to all dispensers, to all remote pumps serving dispensers, to all associated power, control, and signal circuits, and to all other electrical equipment in the hazardous (classified) locations surrounding the fuel dispensers. Power for the illumination of all dispensing areas will not be affected by the activation of the switch, not will power for the leak detection system. The switch shall be of such a design or installed in such a way that it cannot be reset by customers. Unless a fire alarm box or automatically self-dialing telephone is located adjacent to the emergency shut-off, activation of the emergency shut-off switch shall transmit an alarm to the fire station or 24 hour security desk or other emergency agency. Contractor shall coordinate with facility officials regarding the final location of the alarm transmittal. If the emergency shut-off switch automatically transmits an alarm, the contractor shall provide a sign adjacent to the emergency switch that has wording indicating a remote alarm is sent to an emergency response agency upon activation. Sign shall be aluminum with painted surface and lettering; minimum 1” high letters.

3.15 SYSTEM CHECKING

A . In addition to normal construction observation, three formal system checks shall be conducted. The Contractor shall inform the Contracting Officer and the Architect/Engineer one week (7 days) in advance (minimum) of the day and time of each test. Each test shall be performed in the presence of the Contracting Officer and the Architect/Engineer. The Contractor is cautioned that all components of the system being tested shall be installed, prepared for testing, exposed and in proper operating condition for each test. All costs associated with retesting or additional visits by the Contracting Officer, Architect/Engineer or other third-party technicians shall be at the expense of the Contractor.

B . The manufacturer’s recommendations for installation, in addition to the codes and standards listed in paragraph 1.02, A of this specification shall be referenced to determine proper installation and procedures for each system check. Documentation of each test (including copies of field notes) shall be provided to Contracting Officer and the Architect/Engineer. EXCHANGE and the Architect/Engineer assume no responsibility or liability for the consequences of any testing practice.


C . The Contractor shall provide laborers and technicians to assist the Contracting Officer and the Architect/Engineer in the system operation and testing. All testing procedures shall be conducted by the Contactor for observation by the Contracting Officer and the Architect/Engineer. At the preconstruction meeting, the Contractor will be provided a copy of the checklist used by the Contracting Officer and the Architect/Engineer for each test. The following system checks shall be conducted:

1. Tank Installation. Observed for proper installation and use of materials in conformance with plans and specifications. Pressure and soap testing of each tank. Tank bedding and deadman placement shall be observed. Bedding material shall be observed for conformance to specifications. Excavation size and maximum burial depth confirmed. Placement of the tanks observed. Backfill of tank excavation observed.

2. Product/Vent Lines and Sumps. Observed for proper installation and use of materials in conformance with plans and specifications. Observation of proper line placement, bedding and slope. Pressure test of the complete piping system prior to backfilling of piping. Soap test all pipe runs including fittings and joints. Water test all dispenser and tank pump sumps.

3. Final System Check: Observed for proper installation and use of materials in conformance with plans and specifications. Observation of dispenser sumps and sensors. Observation of tank pump, fill, vent and hydrostatic systems, sumps and sensors. Observation of Veeder-Root system programming and detection of sensors flats.

D . At the end of the each system check, all results shall be noted. The Contractor shall provide copies of the manufactures certifications indicating designation as a certified installer, authorized service contractor and technician shall be provided during final system check. Copies of the technician’s certifications (i.e. Veeder-Root) provided shall be from the individuals responsible for installation of the appropriate system component. Full documentation of test results, including the test procedure used (and a copy of the test procedure’s third-party certification) shall be provided to the Contracting Officer and the Architect/Engineer.

E . System checks listed above are not intended to be exhaustive checks or detailed inspections of the work. Therefore, EXCHANGE and the Architect/Engineer assume no responsibility or liability for the completeness or proper installation of the work. The system checks listed above do not relieve the Contractor of responsibilities under this Contract or relieve him of any portion of the system warranty.

3.16 FINAL ITEMS

A . All product piping (including dispensers) shall be bled completely of all trapped air as submerged pumps are tested. System shall be tested for tightness and proper operation of leak detectors and impact valves. At least 300 gallons (100 gallons of each product) of fuel shall be pumped through each nozzle of each dispenser to insure that all trapped air is purged from the product lines.

B . After meter calibration of each dispenser, filters shall be removed and replaced.

C . Flow restriction devices must be installed if the system is determined to dispense fuel at more than 10 gallons per minute (GPM).

D . Projects constructed where rules require Stage I Vapor Recovery Systems to meet efficiency standards, shall be successfully tested by the contractor according to CARB Test Procedures. This project is in a Stage I area, so testing is required.


E . Complete documentation of successful vapor recovery system testing will be provided by the contractor.

3.17 TESTING

A . During installation and upon completion of installation, the UST system shall be tested in the presence of the Contracting Officer or his representative. This testing shall be conducted using EPA third-party and CARB certified methods as applicable.

B . Testing shall comply with all applicable sections of 40 CFR, Part 63.

C . Stage I testing is required, since this location may have a gasoline throughput in excess of 100,000 gallons per month. Stage I tests will include CARB TP 201.1E, and TP 201.3 in addition to any other appropriate tests for the system. Certification of successful testing will be provided by Contractor and attached to the Notification of Compliance Status referred to in paragraph 1.01 of this section. Contractor is responsible for providing USEPA and applicable State offices notice of this CARB testing at least 60 days prior to conducting this test. Notification will be in writing or in written electronic format (telephone voice notification is not sufficient).

D . Contractor shall perform and report the results of a full compliance test of the Stage I vapor recovery system as noted below. At a minimum, tank and line tightness tests, and pressure decay tests of the Stage I vapor recovery system shall be performed by the contractor’s tester and a written report documenting all the results shall be provided to the Contracting Officer Following testing and certification, the system shall be shown to function under simulated actual use conditions, demonstrating the function and operation of the equipment. As a condition of acceptance, written certification shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer in evidence of full compliance with the requirements specified herein.

E . Contractor will direct or conduct tank and line tightness tests by an EPA Third-Party-Certified test method, and documentation of passing these tests will be provided prior to project close-out

F . Contractor will test and document passing tests for all secondary containment systems, as recommended by the equipment manufacturers or required by applicable regulations. This testing will include secondary containment for tanks, lines, submersible turbine pump (STP) containment, piping sumps, under-dispenser containment (UDC), and spill containment at fill points, as follows.

1. If no state or federal requirements specify tightness tests for STP containment sumps, piping sumps, UDC, or spill containment, contractor will perform hydrostatic tests.

2. Hydrostatic tests will be performed as follows.

a. UDC, STP and piping sumps must be filled with water to a level above all containment wall or bulkhead perforations or penetrations. Spill buckets must be filled with water to a level 2” below the drop tube or fill connection opening.

b. Mark the liquid line with paint or other indelible marking device. c. Let stand for one hour, minimum. d. Observe liquid level and record results. e. If an observable drop in liquid level is identified, the containment has

failed this test. Conduct any necessary repairs or replacement and repeat test until successful.

f. Submit a report documenting successful testing to the contracting officer.


3.18 TRAINING OF EXCHANGE PERSONNEL: Contractor shall provide total 8 hours of training of EXCHANGE employees on the operation and maintenance of all equipment and systems. Training shall not be conducted during final testing and testing of the tank system, so that the quality of instruction is not compromised. A training attendance roster shall be completed for each training session held. The roster shall indicate the training subject, training date, length of the training class, the name, phone number and signature of the instructor, the name of the company he represents, as well as the full name, office symbol and complete telephone number of each attendee. A copy of class rosters and accompanying photograph of the class attending each session and instructor will be placed in each copy of the O&M manual.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 21 13 00 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Wet-pipe sprinkler system. B. Dry-pipe sprinkler system. C. System design, installation, and certification. D. Fire department connections.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 28 31 00 - Fire Detection and Alarm. B. Section 21 05 00 - Common Work Results for Fire Suppression: Pipe, fittings, and valves. C. Section 21 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment. D. Section 21 05 53 - Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment. E. Section 14 91 00 - Facility Chutes: Sprinkler heads inside chutes. F. Section 22 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. G. Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. H. Section 26 27 17 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition. B. ICC-ES AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2009. C. ICC-ES AC106 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in Masonry

Elements; 2006. D. ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2010. E. ICC-ES AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete

Elements; 2009. F. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition. G. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire Protection

Association; 2010. H. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current

edition. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS AND SYSTEM DESIGN

A. The fire protection contractor shall design the system and shall provide all hydraulic calculations, piping layouts, pipe sizes, coverage areas, sprinkler head types, and all details.

B. The fire protection documents shall be signed and sealed by a licensed fire protection engineer, with a minimum of three years’ experience in design of systems of similar size and complexity.

C. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on sprinklers, valves, and specialties, including manufacturers

catalog information. Submit performance ratings, rough-in details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit preliminary layout of finished ceiling areas indicating only sprinkler locations

coordinated with ceiling installation.


2. Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, sprinklers, components and accessories. Indicate system controls.

3. D. Samples: Submit two of each style of sprinkler specified. E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations of piping from

drawings. Indicate drain and test locations. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that system has been tested and meets or exceeds specified

requirements and code requirements. G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicing requirements,

record drawings, inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and location and numbers of service depot.

H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Sprinklers: Type and size matching those installed, in quantity required by

referenced NFPA design and installation standard. 3. Sprinkler Wrenches: For each sprinkler type.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of referenced design and installation standard on site. B. Conform to UL requirements. C. Designer Qualifications: Design system under direct supervision of a Professional Fire

Protection Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

D. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

E. Equipment and Components: Provide products that bear UL label or marking. F. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories

Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.07 MOCK-UP

A. Provide components for installation in mock-up. B. Mock-up may not remain as part of the Work.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. Provide temporary

inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. 1.09 Shop Drawings, Submittals, and Product Data:

1. All submittals, plans and calculations, etc. shall be prepared by a licensed Professional Fire Protection Engineer, licensed in the state in which the work is to be constructed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Sprinklers, Valves, and Equipment: 1. Tyco Fire Suppression & Building Products: www.tyco-fire.com. 2. Viking Corporation: www.vikinggroupinc.com.

2.02 SPRINKLER SYSTEM A. Sprinkler System: Provide coverage for entire building.


B. Occupancy: Ordinary hazard, Group 1; comply with NFPA 13. C. Water Supply: Determine volume and pressure from water flow test data.

1. Revise design when test data available prior to submittals. D. Interface system with building control system. E. Provide fire department connections where indicated. F. Storage Cabinet for Spare Sprinklers and Tools: Steel, located adjacent to alarm valve. G. Pipe Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows:

1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193. 2. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.

2.03 SPRINKLERS A. Suspended Ceiling Type: Semi-recessed pendant type with matching push on escutcheon

plate. 1. Response Type: Quick. 2. Coverage Type: Standard. 3. Finish: Chrome plated. 4. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome 5. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard.

B. Exposed Area Type: Pendant upright type with guard. 1. Response Type: Quick. 2. Coverage Type: Standard. 3. Finish: Brass. 4. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard.

C. Sidewall Type: Semi-recessed horizontal sidewall type with matching push on escutcheon plate. 1. Response Type: Quick. 2. Coverage Type: Standard. 3. Finish: Chrome plated. 4. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Brushed Chrome 5. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard.

D. Dry Sprinklers: Concealed pendant type with matching push on estucheon plate. 1. Response Type: Quick. 2. Coverage Type: Standard. 3. Finish: Chrome plated. 4. Cover Plate Finish: Brushed Chrome 5. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard.

E. Storage Sprinklers: Concealed upright type with guard. 1. Response Type: Standard. 2. Finish: Chrome plated. 3. Shield Finish: Chrome. 4. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard.

F. Guards: Finish to match sprinkler finish. 2.04 PIPING:

A. Sprinkler Piping smaller than 4" shall be Schedule 40 (ASTM Specifications A-120 or A-53) black steel pipe which shall be assembled with 175 psig standard cast iron, threaded fittings or with flanged sprinkler type fittings or grooved fittings as required. Piping 4" and larger may be UL approved steel pipe with grooved or welded fittings as approved by the local authorities. Grooved fittings shall be Victaulic or approved equal, the grooving machine shall be the same as that recommended by the fittings manufacturer.


B. Schedule 10 (thin wall) sprinkler piping may be used where approved by the authorities.

C. Piping from 5'-0" outside building to alarm check valve installation shall be ductile iron piping wrapped with 3 mil polyethylene.

D. Hangers: 1. Provide necessary UL approved hangers to support the sprinkler pipings. Hangers shall

be spaced in accordance with requirements of the NFPA Chapter 13.

2.05 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Wet Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve: Check type valve with divided seat ring, rubber faced clapper

to automatically actuate water motor alarm and electric alarm, with pressure retard chamber and variable pressure trim; with test and drain valve.

B. Dry Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve: Check type valve with divided seat ring, rubber faced clapper to automatically actuate water motor alarm and electric alarm, with accelerator; with test and drain valve.

C. Water Motor Alarm: Hydraulically operated impeller type alarm with aluminum alloy chrome plated gong and motor housing, nylon bearings, and inlet strainer.

D. Electric Alarm: Electrically operated chrome plated gong with pressure alarm switch. E. Water Flow Switch: Vane type switch for mounting horizontal or vertical, with two contacts;

rated 10 amp at 125 volt AC and 2.5 amp at 24 volt DC. F. Fire Department Connections:

1. Type: Flush mounted wall type with brass finish. 2. Outlets: Two way with thread size to suit fire department hardware; threaded dust cap and

chain of matching material and finish. 3. Drain: 3/4 inch automatic drip, outside. 4. Label: "Sprinkler - Fire Department Connection".

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with referenced NFPA design and installation standard. B. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install buried shut-off valves in valve box. Provide post indicator. D. Provide approved double check valve assembly at sprinkler system water source connection. E. Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, or adjacent

Siamese connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle. F. Locate outside alarm gong on building wall as indicated. G. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work. H. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings. I. Center sprinklers in two directions in ceiling tile and provide piping offsets as required. J. Apply masking tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinklers, cover plates, and sprinkler

escutcheons do not receive field paint finish. Remove after painting. Replace painted sprinklers.

K. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter. L. Install guards on sprinklers where indicated. M. Hydrostatically test entire system. N. Require test be witnessed by Fire Marshal.


3.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Ensure required devices are installed and connected as required to fire alarm system.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 22 05 00 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 22 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following:

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Mechanical sleeve seals. 5. Sleeves. 6. Escutcheons. 7. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 8. Painting and finishing. 9. Supports and anchorages.

1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred

spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.

E. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. 2. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics

may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,

storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.06 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for plumbing installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Provide access doors and frames under this section. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Panels."


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

manufacturers specified. 2.02 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

2.03 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint,

plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure

at 180 deg F. 1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Epco Sales, Inc. b. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. c. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

D. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corp.

E. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. 1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Perfection Corp. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Victaulic Co. of America.

2.04 SLEEVES A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded

longitudinal joint. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends

and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.


D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping to permit valve servicing. G. Install piping at indicated slopes. H. Install piping free of sags and bends. I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. J. Install piping to allow application of insulation. K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure. L. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes. M. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves. N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and

roof slabs. O. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at

pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.

P. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. Q. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in

requirements. 3.02 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube

end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal

threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service

application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. G. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings

according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent

cements. 3.03 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection

to each piece of equipment.


2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

3.04 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are

not indicated. B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and

components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. 3.05 PAINTING

A. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.06 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation

to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment. 3.07 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads. END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 22 05 23 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 22 05 23 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Brass ball valves. 2. Iron, butterfly valves. 3. Bronze swing check valves.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 22 plumbing piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections

only. 2. Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and

schedules. 1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure. B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber. C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber. D. NRS: Nonrising stem. E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke. F. RS: Rising stem. G. SWP: Steam working pressure.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single

manufacturer. B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 2. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.

B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.


B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. D. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Hand lever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller. E. Valve-End Connections:

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. 2. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606. 3. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 4. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

2.02 BRASS BALL VALVES A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Hammond Valve. d. Jamesbury; a subsidiary of Metso Automation. e. Jomar International, LTD. f. Kitz Corporation. g. Milwaukee Valve Company. h. NIBCO INC. i. Red-White Valve Corporation. j. Watts.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Forged brass. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Brass. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper

size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 3.02 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.


B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball or butterfly valves. B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of

valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted. C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

3.05 DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.

2. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, brass or bronze with stainless-steel trim. 3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 1. Ball Valves NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: May be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged

ends. 2. Iron, Butterfly Valves: 200 CWP, EPDM seat, aluminum-bronze disc.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC HANGERS SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPE & EQUIPMENT ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 22 05 29 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 22 05 29 HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPE & EQUIPMENT



1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for plumbing system piping and

equipment: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 5. Fastener systems. 6. Pipe stands. 7. Pipe positioning systems. 8. Equipment supports.

1.03 DEFINITIONS A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and

Supports." 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

C. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment. 1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.


A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.02 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3

"Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types. B. Manufacturers:

1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc. 2. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports.


3. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 4. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 5. Empire Industries, Inc. 6. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 7. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc. 8. Grinnell Corp. 9. GS Metals Corp. 10. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 11. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. 12. PHS Industries, Inc. 13. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 14. Tolco Inc.

2.03 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from

structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts. 2.04 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels and other components.

B. Manufacturers: 1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div. 3. GS Metals Corp. 4. Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd. 5. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 6. Tolco Inc. 7. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.

C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish unless bare metal surfaces are indicated. 2.05 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield.

B. Manufacturers: 1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 3. PHS Industries, Inc. 4. Pipe Shields, Inc. 5. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Value Engineered Products, Inc.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier.

D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass.

E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe. F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient

air temperature. 2.06 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.


1. Manufacturers: a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. b. Empire Industries, Inc. c. Hilti, Inc. d. ITW Ramset/Red Head. e. MKT Fastening, LLC. f. Powers Fasteners.

2.07 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in

pipe spaces for plumbing fixtures for commercial applications. B. Manufacturers:

1. C & S Mfg. Corp. 2. HOLDRITE Corp.; Hubbard Enterprises. 3. Samco Stamping, Inc.

2.08 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel

shapes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or

insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of

noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8. 3. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary

pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 4. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes,

NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 5. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated

stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2. G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

Sections, install the following types: 1. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4

to NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500), if longer ends are required for riser clamps. H. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with

insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to

prevent crushing insulation.


3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. I. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not

specified in piping system Sections. J. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not

specified in piping system Sections. K. Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete

construction. L. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and

waste piping for plumbing fixtures. 3.02 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or

install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. D. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and

other accessories. E. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. F. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping

systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

G. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. H. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional

attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping.

I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.

3.03 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support

equipment above floor. 3.04 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours

of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches. 3.06 PAINTING

A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 22 05 53 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT



1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:

1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Stencils. 5. Valve tags. 6. Warning tags.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1.04 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing. C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both

directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.02 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;

machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 22 05 53 - 2 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 20 feet along each run.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC PLUMBING INSULATION ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 22 07 00 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 22 07 00 PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Insulation Materials:

a. Flexible elastomeric. b. Mineral fiber.

2. Adhesives. 3. Mastics. 4. Sealants. 5. Factory-applied jackets. 6. Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh. 7. Field-applied cloths. 8. Field-applied jackets. 9. Tapes. 10. Securements.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and

jackets (both factory and field applied, if any). B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.

D. Field quality-control reports. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 150 or less. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division

22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application and

equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. 1.06 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.


B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok. b. Knauf Insulation; 1000(Pipe Insulation. c. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K. d. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.

2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.02 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding

insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated. B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.

2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.03 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with

MIL-C-19565C, Type II. B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient

services. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-35. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90. c. Vimasco Corporation; 749.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.

2.04 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When

factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a

removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 2.05 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.


1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835. b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

2.06 SECUREMENTS A. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.


A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of

defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will

adversely affect insulation application. 3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with

adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,

supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to

insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

3. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.


K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.

Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Testing agency labels and stamps. 2. Nameplates and data plates. 3. Cleanouts.

3.04 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):

Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. B. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" and

fire-resistive joint sealers. C. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07

Section "Penetration Firestopping." 3.05 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with

continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly

against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Bond pieces with adhesive.


4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

3.06 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least

1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.07 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. Insulation is required where copper tubing is noted for use in mechanical rooms. Refer to drawings for size and extent.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Underground piping.

3.08 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Domestic Cold Water:

1. Insulation shall be the following:


a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. May be reduced o ½” thick in walls and chases.

B. Domestic Hot Water: 1. Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. May be reduced to ½” thick in walls and chases.

C. Horizontal Storm Piping 1. Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type l: 1 inch thick. Insulation shall turn up or down onto vertical section. Cover entire roof drain body.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC DOMESTIC WATER PIPING ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 22 11 16 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING



1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:

1. Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties inside the building.

2. Flexible connectors. 3. Escutcheons. 4. Sleeves and sleeve seals. 5. Wall penetration systems.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following products:

1. Piping Materials. 2. Escutcheons. 3. Sleeves and sleeve seals. 4. Water penetration systems.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic, potable domestic water piping and components. C. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.02 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) water tube, drawn temper.

1. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings. 2. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings. 3. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. 4. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with

ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends. 2.03 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 1. Standard-Pattern, Mechanical-Joint Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron. 2. Compact-Pattern, Mechanical-Joint Fittings: AWWA C153, ductile iron.

a. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

B. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 1. Standard-Pattern, Push-on-Joint Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron.

a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.


b. Compact-Pattern, Push-on-Joint Fittings: AWWA C153, ductile iron. 1) Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.

2.04 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick or ASME

B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to

ASTM B 813. D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for

general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated. 2.05 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. EPCO Sales, Inc. d. Hart Industries International, Inc. e. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products. g. Description:

1) Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 2) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. EPCO Sales, Inc. d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Description:

1) Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. 2) Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 3) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded

solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. 2.06 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Fabricated of cast iron, and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc-coated, with plain ends.


PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.

C. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting. D. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with

requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for pressure-reducing valves.

E. Install domestic water piping level and plumb. F. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's

requirements. G. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants

unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. H. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right

angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

I. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

J. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance. K. Install piping to permit valve servicing. L. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher

than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. M. Install piping free of sags and bends. N. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. O. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and

specialty. P. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping from each plumbing pump and

packaged booster pump. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages.

3.02 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before

assembly. C. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both

piping systems. 3.03 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for valve installations.

B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller.


C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." 1. Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches.

3.04 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

3.05 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing

Piping and Equipment" for seismic-restraint devices. B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping

and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation. 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch. E. Install hangers for piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod

diameters: 1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 36inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 60inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 84 inches with 1/2-inch rod.

F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. 3.06 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join

dissimilar piping materials. D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect

to the following: 1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections for connection sizes.

3.07 SLEEVE INSTALLATION A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in

floors, partitions, roofs, and walls. B. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes. C. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at

pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for firestop materials and installations.

3.08 WALL PENETRATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install wall penetration systems in new, exterior concrete walls. B. Assemble wall penetration system components with sleeve pipe. Install so that end of sleeve

pipe and face of housing are flush with wall. Adjust locking devices to secure sleeve pipe in housing.


3.09 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification for

Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and installation. B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Piping Inspections:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe

tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or

inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having

jurisdiction. C. Piping Tests:

1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required. D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.11 ADJUSTING A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.12 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at

outlets.


b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: 1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of

chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of

chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours. 3) Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from

system after the standing time. 4) Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat

procedures if biological examination shows contamination. B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.13 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used

in applications below unless otherwise indicated. B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Under-building-slab, domestic water piping, NPS 3” and smaller, shall be the following:

1. 1. Ductile Iron. D. Aboveground domestic water piping, located in ceiling of first floor level and risers, shall be the

following: 1. Provide Type L copper tube for all hot, cold, and hot return piping in mechanical rooms.

3.14 VALVE SCHEDULE A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the

following requirements apply: 1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. 2. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment. END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 22 11 19 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 22 11 19 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES



1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:

1. Water pressure-reducing valves. 2. Strainers. 3. Outlet boxes. 4. Hose bibbs. 5. Wall hydrants. 6. Drain valves. 7. Trap-seal primer valves.

1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig unless otherwise

indicated. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality-control test reports. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. NSF Compliance: 1. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1

through 9." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 HOSE BIBBS

A. Hose Bibbs HB: 1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets. 2. Body Material: Bronze. 3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable. 4. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet. 5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker

complying with ASSE 1011. 8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated. 9. Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze. 10. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated. 11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key. 12. Operation for Service Areas: Operating key. 13. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key. 14. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb. 15. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 22 11 19 - 2 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

2.02 WALL HYDRANTS A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants WH:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Prier Products, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. f. Watts Drainage Products Inc. g. Woodford Manufacturing Company. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.

3. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for concealed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants. 4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 5. Operation: Loose key. 6. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall clamp. 7. Inlet: NPS 3/4. 8. Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7. 9. Box: Deep, flush mounting with cover. 10. Box and Cover Finish: Polished nickel bronze. 11. Outlet: Exposed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7. 12. Nozzle and Wall-Plate Finish: Polished nickel bronze. 13. Operating Keys(s): Two with each wall hydrant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with memory-stop balancing valve. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.

C. Install outlet boxes recessed in wall. Install 2-by-4-inch fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking wall reinforcement between studs. Fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking is specified in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."

D. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201. E. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a

minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.

3.02 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate

general arrangement of piping and specialties. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified above.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 22 13 16 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING



1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following for soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic

piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping.


A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.02 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining

materials. 2.03 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent. 1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste,

and vent patterns. B. Solvent Cement and Adhesive Primer:

1. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. PVC Pipe shall not be used in any return air. Provide no-hub cast iron in plenums.


PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated. B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints (except return plenums).

C. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 and larger shall be the following: 1. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints (except return

plenums). D. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints (except return plenums).

E. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 5 and larger shall be the following: 1. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints (except return

plenums). F. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. G. Underground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 and larger shall be the following:

1. Solid-wall, Schedule 40, PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints. 3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers.

C. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

D. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

E. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 2” and

smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3” and larger. 2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

F. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing.

G. Install PVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2665. H. Install underground PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321. I. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by

authorities having jurisdiction.


3.03 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common

Work Results for Plumbing." 3.04 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following: 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. B. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod

diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 6: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod.

C. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches. D. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written

instructions. 3.05 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join

dissimilar piping materials. C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must

be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in

after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe

tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,

make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction

or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.


3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.07 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and

to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.08 PROTECTION A. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of

water-based latex paint. END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 22 13 19 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 22 13 19 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES



1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties:

1. Cleanouts. 2. Floor drains. 3. Roof flashing assemblies. 4. Through-penetration firestop assemblies. 5. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties. 6. Flashing materials.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary

piping specialty components. 1.04 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CLEANOUTS

A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. g. Josam Company; Blucher-Josam Div.

4. Size: Same as connected drainage piping 5. Body Material: Match connected piping. 6. Closure: Raised-head plastic plug. 7. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.

2.02 FLOOR DRAINS A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains: FD




3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Watts Drainage Products Inc. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

4. Standard: ASME A112.6.3. 5. Pattern: Floor drain. 6. Body Material: Gray iron. 7. Outlet: Bottom. 8. Top or Strainer Material: Bronze. 9. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze. 10. Top Shape: Round. 11. Dimensions of Top or Strainer: 6”

2.03 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials,

joint construction, and basic installation requirements. B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,

unless otherwise indicated: 1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless

larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for

larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.

D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set

with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii: 3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and

adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless

otherwise indicated. F. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 2 inches above floor. G. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains. H. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer

connection. 1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.

I. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties. J. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is

indicated.


K. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.


general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

2.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

2.06 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and

to prevent damage from traffic or construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC PLUMBING EQUIPMENT ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 22 30 00 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 22 30 00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT


A. Water heaters. B. Pumps.

1. Circulators. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 22 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. B. Section 26 27 17 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. C. Refer to 22 40 00 for specified water heaters.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI Z21.10.3 - Gas Water Heaters - Volume III - Storage Water Heaters with Input Ratings

Above 75,000 Btu per Hour, Circulating and Instantaneous Water Heaters; 2008. B. ASME (BPV VIII, 1) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 - Rules for

Construction of Pressure Vessels; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 1 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures. B. Product Data:

1. Provide dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other equipment and piping.

2. Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements. 3. Provide certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump and

system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. 4. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate heat exchanger dimensions, size of tappings, and performance data. 2. Indicate dimensions of tanks, tank lining methods, anchors, attachments, lifting points,

tappings, and drains. D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's

name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.

B. Identification: Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model number, and rating/capacity identified by permanently attached label.

C. Performance: Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.

1.06 CERTIFICATIONS A. Gas Water Heaters: Certified by CSA International to ANSI Z21.10.1 or ANSI Z21.10.3, as

applicable, in addition to requirements specified elsewhere. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. 1.08 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.


B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for domestic water heaters. d PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER HEATER MANUFACTURERS

A. A.O. Smith Water Products Co: www.hotwater.com. B. Locinvar Water Heaters C. Rheem Manufacturing Company: www.rheem.com. D. Refer to section 224000 for specific requirements.

2.02 COMMERCIAL GAS FIRED WATER HEATERS A. Type: Automatic, high efficiency condensing, natural gas-fired, vertical storage as scheduled. B. Tank: Glass lined welded steel ASME labelled; multiple flue passages, 4 inch diameter

inspection port, thermally insulated with minimum 2 inches glass fiber, encased in corrosion-resistant steel jacket; baked-on enamel finish; floor shield and legs.

C. Accessories: Provide: 1. Water Connections: Brass. 2. Dip tube: Brass. 3. Drain Valve. 4. Anode: Magnesium. 5. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve: ASME labelled.

D. Certification: As automatic storage water heater and automatic circulating tank water heater for operation at 180 degrees F (82 degrees C) for operation on combustible floors for high altitude installation.

E. Controls: Automatic water thermostat with temperature range adjustable from 120 to 180 degrees F, automatic reset high temperature limiting thermostat factory set at 195 degrees F, gas pressure regulator, multi-ribbon or tubular burner, 100 percent safety shut-off pilot and thermocouple, flue baffle and draft hood.

2.03 DIAPHRAGM-TYPE COMPRESSION TANKS A. Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME (BPV VIII, 1);

supplied with National Board Form U-1, rated for working pressure of 125 psig, with flexible EPDM diaphragm sealed into tank, and steel legs or saddles.

B. Accessories: Pressure gage and air-charging fitting, tank drain; precharge to 12 psig. 2.04 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong Pumps Inc: www.armstrongpumps.com. 2. ITT Bell & Gossett: www.bellgossett.com. 3. Sterling Fluid Systems: www.sterlingfluid.com.

B. Casing: Bronze, rated for 125 psig working pressure, with stainless steel rotor assembly. C. Impeller: Bronze. D. Shaft: Alloy steel with integral thrust collar and two oil lubricated bronze sleeve bearings. E. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat. F. Drive: Flexible coupling.


A. Install plumbing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as required by code, and complying with conditions of certification, if any.

B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related fuel piping work to achieve operating system.


C. Pumps: 1. Ensure shaft length allows sump pumps to be located minimum 24 inches below lowest

invert into sump pit and minimum 6 inches clearance from bottom of sump pit. 2. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings. 3. Provide line sized isolating valve and strainer on suction and line sized soft seated check

valve and balancing valve on discharge. 4. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping

adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. Provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches and over.

5. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC PLUMBING FIXTURES ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 22 40 00 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES



1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related components:

1. Faucets for lavatories, showers, and sinks. 2. Toilet seats. 3. Water closets. 4. Lavatories. 5. Individual showers. 6. Kitchen sinks. 7. Service basins. 8. Fixtures, Drains, and Equipment. 9. Related Sections include the following:

a. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for backflow preventers, floor drains, and specialty fixtures not included in this Section.

1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with

disabilities. B. Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture. Fittings

specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves are included where indicated.

C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.

D. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

E. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible.


F. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures: 1. Solid-Surface-Material Lavatories and Sinks: ANSI/ICPA SS-1. 2. Stainless-Steel Residential Sinks: ASME A112.19.3. 3. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M. 4. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for

lavatory and sink faucets: a. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME A112.18.3M. b. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME

A112.18.3M. c. Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025. d. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1. e. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011. f. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. g. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. h. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61. i. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. j. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1. k. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.

5. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for shower faucets: a. Backflow Protection Devices for Hand-Held Showers: ASME A112.18.3M. b. Combination, Pressure-Equalizing and Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets:

ASSE 1016. c. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1. d. Hand-Held Showers: ASSE 1014. e. High-Temperature-Limit Controls for Thermal-Shock-Preventing Devices: ASTM F

445. f. Manual-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444. g. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. h. Pressure-Equalizing-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.

6. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous fittings: a. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. b. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1. c. Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409. d. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.

7. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components: a. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6. b. Floor Drains: ASME A112.6.3. c. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446. d. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. e. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M. f. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. g. Plastic Shower Receptors: ANSI Z124.2. h. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5. i. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.

1.06 WARRANTY A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of whirlpools that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:


a. Structural failures of unit shell. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use. c. Warranty Period for Commercial Applications: One year from date of Substantial

Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LAVATORY FAUCETS

A. Lavatory Faucets: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Delta Faucet Company. b. Zurn. c. Symmons.

2.02 SHOWER FAUCETS A. Shower Faucets:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include:

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Standard Companies, Inc. b. Delta Faucet Company. c. Kohler Co. d. Speakman Company. e. Symmons Industries, Inc. f. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; AquaSpec Commercial Faucet Operation.

2.03 SINK FAUCETS A. Sink Faucets:


2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Delta Faucet Company. b. Zurn. c. Symmons.

2.04 TOILET SEATS A. Toilet Seats:


2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Bemis Manufacturing Company. b. Centoco Manufacturing Corp. c. Church Seats. d. Description: Toilet seat for water-closet-type fixture.

1) Material: Molded, solid plastic. 2) Configuration: Closed front with cover. 3) Size: Elongated.


4) Hinge Type: SS, self-sustaining. 5) Class: Residential. 6) Color: White.

2.05 FIXTURE SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: 1. Josam Company. 2. MIFAB Manufacturing Inc. 3. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. 4. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. 5. Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc. 6. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 7. Lavatory Supports:

a. Description: Type II, lavatory carrier with concealed arms and tie rod for wall-mounting, lavatory-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.

2.06 WATER CLOSETS A. Water Closets:


2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Standard Companies, Inc. b. Zurn. c. Kohler Co. d. TOTO, USA Inc.

2.07 LAVATORIES A. Lavatories:


2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Standard Companies, Inc. b. Zurn. c. Kohler Co. d. TOTO USA, Inc.

2.08 SINKS A. Sinks:


2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Kohler Co. b. Elkay Manufacturing Co. c. Just Manufacturing Company.

2.09 SERVICE BASINS A. Service Basins:


2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products.


b. Stern-Williams Co., Inc. 2.10 DRAINS

A. Mechanical Room Floor Drain (MFD): J.R. Smith #2230 with sediment bucket and Trap-Guard Assembly. Provide deep seal trap and coordinate exact location with HVAC equipment.

B. Floor Drain (FD): J.R. Smith #2005 with 6” nickel bronze grate and Guardian Trap-Guard Assembly, with two security keys.

C. Trap Primer (TP): Proset trap-guard assembly sized for each type drain used. D. Can Wash Drain (CWD): J.R. Smith 2142 with sediment bucket. E. Floor Sink (FS): J.R. Smith 3400 with bottom strainer and 3/4 grate, with Guardian Tap Guard

Assembly, with two security keys.

2.11 WALL HYDRANT A. J.R. Smith #5519 ASSE 1052 listed wall hydrant, with integral backflow preventer, latching

cover, freeze-proof and all bronze box. Provide casing of sufficient length in order that valve seat will be on building side of exterior wall insulation. Install with center line 24" above finish grade and provide Owner with one (1) loose key for each wall hydrant.

B. B. Hose Bibb (HB): Woodford #24 with vacuum breaker. C. C. Post Hydrant (PH): Woodford #Y2, freeze proof with backflow protection.

2.12 CLEANOUTS A. Furnish and install cleanouts where indicated on drawings and at all 90-degree bends, angle,

upper terminals and not over 75 feet apart on straight runs. All cleanouts to have bronze countersunk tapered slotted plugs, Flush-with-floor cleanout access covers shall have non-skid covers. All wall cleanout access covers shall have polished satin finish. All cleanouts shall be full size of pipe, piping larger than 6" shall have minimum 6" cleanout covers.

B. Exposed Cleanouts: Cast brass plug type, J.R. Smith #4470. C. Wall type cleanout plug and access covers, J.R. Smith #4472. Cleanout plug must be within 1"

of finish wall and must be tapped for access cover. D. Install wall cleanouts on stacks at tank type water closets 12" above top of tank,12" above finish

floor on sinks, lavatories and water coolers and 12" above grab bars at fixtures with grab bars. Locate cleanouts to clear baseboard at floor.

E. Floor type cleanout access covers: J.R. Smith #4248-NB. Plug must be within 3" of finished floor. Provide J.R. Smith #4188 where installed in terrazzo floors and J.R. Smith #4168 where located in floor with asphalt or vinyl tile covering. Grout cleanout below access cover to seal watertight. Provide option "Y" cleanout carpet markers where installed in carpeted floors.

F. Outside Cleanouts: J.R. Smith #4258 cleanout access encased in a 18" X 18" X 6" deep concrete pad. See Detail on Drawings

G. Coordinate location of cleanouts in finished areas with Architect. 2.13 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT

A. Unless otherwise specified, all fixtures complete as catalogued, commercial grade, white color, exposed metal trim chromium plated.

B. Fixtures and brass shall be securely anchored. Carriers shall be securely anchored to floor with bolts in all holes as recommended by the manufacturer.

C. Handles on A.D.A. water closets to be installed on wide side of room or stall. D. Seal wall hung fixtures at wall with white silicone sealant. Seal countertop fixtures with clear

silicone sealant. E. Mount all fixtures at standard mounting height unless otherwise noted.


F. Furnish sinks and lavatories with correct number of drillings required for the faucet and accessories. Hole covers are not acceptable.

G. All similar products shall be by the same manufacturer. H. All fixtures noted to be A.D.A. approved must be set with great care to assure proper mounting

height and proper distance from wall. I. All items complete as catalogued as follows:

J. P-1 WATER CLOSET (ADA): 1. KOHLER K-4330 COMPLETE, SLOAN #111-1.6 FLUSH VALVE WITH YJ BRACKET,

CHURCH “DURA GUARD” MODEL #2155SC SEAT AND J.R. SMITH SERIES 100 OR 200 CARRIER AND FITTING. MOUNT WITH RIM AT 17” ABOVE FINISH FLOOR. MUST MEET A.D.A.

K. P-2 WATER CLOSET: 1. KOHLER K-4330 COMPLETE, SLOAN #111-1.6 FLUSH VALVE WITH YJ BRACKET,

CHURCH “DURA GUARD” MODEL #2155SC SEAT AND J.R. SMITH SERIES 100 OR 200 CARRIER AND FITTING.

L. P-3 LAVATORY (ADA): 1. KOHLER 2005, 21” X 18” VITREOUS CHINA LAVATORY WITH ZURN

#Z6913-CWB-CP4-TMV-F SENSOR OPERATED HARDWIRED FAUCET COMPLETE WITH P6000-HW6 POWER CONVERTER. 4” COVER PLATE, THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE, MCGUIRE #2165 SUPPLIES WITH STOPS, AND MCGUIRE 8872 1¼” CHROMIUM PLATED CAST BRASS P-TRAP WITH CLEANOUT AND CHROMIUM PLATED 17 GAUGE TUBING DRAIN TO WALL WITH ESCUTCHEON. PROVIDE JR SMITH SERIES 700 CARRIER AT SET WITH RIM AT 34” AFF. INCLUDE PLUMBEREX #427 TRAP AND SUPPLY COVERS. PROVIDE 0.5 GPM AERATOR WITH FAUCET.

M. P-4 URINAL (ADA): 1. ZURN Z5738.205.00 ECOVANTAGE SYSTEM COMPLETE WITH .125GPF URINAL,

ZEG6003EV BATTERY POWERED, SENSOR FLUSH VALVE AND Z1222 CARRIER. SET WITH LIP AT 17" ABOVE FINISH FLOOR. MUST MEET ALL ADA REQUIREMENTS.

N. P-5 NOT USED

O. P-6 HAND WASH SINK: 1. KOHLER K-2005, 21” X 18” VITREOUS CHINA LAVATORY COMPLETE WITH ZURN

#Z6913-ACA-CP4-TMV SENSOR OPERATED HARDWIRED FAUCET COMPLETE WITH POWER ADAPTOR, 4” COVER PLATE, THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE AND GRID DRAIN, MCGUIRE #2167, ½” SUPPLIES WITH STOPS, MCGUIRE 155A TAILPIECE, MCGUIRE 8872 P-TRAP AND HEAVY DUTY FLOOR SUPPORTED JR SMITH SERIES 700 CHAIR CARRIER WITH CONCEALED ARMS. SET WITH RIM AT 31” AFF. PROVIDE 0.5 GPM AERATOR WITH FAUCET.

P. P-7 JANITORS SINK JANITORS RECEPTOR: 1. STERN WILLIAMS MTB-2424, PRE-CAST TERRAZZO WITH ALUNIMUM GUARDS ON

EXPOSED SIDES. PROVIDE T&S B-667-RGH FAUCET SET AT 42” ABOVE FINISH FLOOR.

Q. P-8 ICE MACHINE

1. FURNISHED BY OTHERS, PROVIDE BALL VALVE STOP ON COLD WATER SUPPLY AND EXTEDN DRAING TO FLOOR SINK. ROUGHE AND CONNECT COMPLETE.


R. P-9 HOT & COLD WATER HYDRANT 1. J.R. SMITH 5560QT NON-FREEZE WITH BRONZE BOX AND COVER.

S. P-10 NOT USED

T. P-11 NOT USED

U. P-12 ELEC. WATER COOLER 1. ELKAY #EZSTL8C BI-LEVEL WATER COOLER WITH WATERWAYS THAT ARE MANUFACTURED OF 100% LEAD FREE MATERIAL, J.R. SMITH #834 FIXTURE SUPPORT EBC 125 P-TRAP WITH EBC IK INSULATOR KIT AND PROVIDE COLOR CHART FOR ARCHITECT COLOR SELECTION. INSTALL WITH LOWER SPOUT OUTLT MAXIMUM 36” AFF. MUST MEET A.D.A.


A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation.

B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures. C. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building

substrate. D. Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports. E. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework. F. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. G. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water

distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

H. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to sanitary drainage system.

I. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of compartment.

J. Install toilet seats on water closets. K. Install traps on fixture outlets.

1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps. L. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within

cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

M. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant.


general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.


B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where

installed. B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified

components. C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace

malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly.

3.05 ADJUSTING A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures,

fittings, and controls. B. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.

3.06 CLEANING A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods

and materials. Do the following: 1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers

and spouts. 2. Remove sediment and debris from drains. 3. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings,

inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes. 3.07 PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings. 1. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by

Owner. END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 23 05 10 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 23 05 10 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Description of Basic Mechanical Requirements that apply to all Divisions 23 sections.

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Protect mechanical equipment from damage during construction, when

installation is complete clean equipment and touch up paint. B. Install all equipment to provide normal service access to all components, install in

accordance with manufacturer’s instruction. If manufacturer’s instructions conflict with contract documents obtain engineer of records decision before proceeding.

C. Contractor shall provide shop drawings verifying clearances routings and tie-ins on piping and ductwork prior to fabrication and installation of new work.

D. Care shall be exercised during site fabrication to ensure that no interference with facility operations or operating equipment occurs. All work to be completed in concurrent work areas shall be fully coordinated with the contracting officer's representative prior to commencing work. All work performed is to be isolated as to insure no dust, debris, vapors, etc. enter occupied operating spaces.

E. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic and subject to requirements of the architectural drawings and conditions existing in the field. Mechanical drawings indicate generally the location of components and are not intended to show all fittings or all details of the work.

F. Follow the drawings closely, coordinate dimensions with architectural drawings and field conditions. Do not scale mechanical drawings for locations of system components.

G. Make no changes without the Contracting officer's written permission. In case of doubt, obtain Contracting officer's decision before proceeding with work. Failure to follow this instruction shall make the contractor liable for damage to other work and responsible for removing and repairing defective or mis-located work in proper manner.

H. Do not scale drawings to locate diffusers and equipment, coordinate with new and existing lighting, electrical conduit, smoke detectors, ceiling grids, and existing field conditions.

I. If systems interfere or conflict the Contracting officer's representative shall decide which equipment to relocate regardless of which was installed first.

J. The mechanical contractor shall be responsible for fire stopping wall penetrations at fire rated walls where ductwork or piping are installed. Fire stopping shall be


performed immediately after the work is installed. do not leave penetrations unprotected overnight.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Requirements of Division 1, General Provisions.

B. Division 1 - ALTERNATES: Coordinate related with Division 23 work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each Alternate.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. "Provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for operation.

1.5 REFERENCES A. AGA: American Gas Association. B. ANSI: American National Standards Institute, Inc. C. AMCA: Air Movement & Control Association. D. ARI: American Refrigeration Institute. E. ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers. F. ASME: American Society for Mechanical Engineers. G. ASSE: American Society of Sanitary Engineers. H. ASTM: American Society of Testing and Materials. I. AWWA: American Water Works Association. J. CISPI: Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. K. FM: Factory Mutual. L. NAIMA: North American Insulation Manufacturers Association. M. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association. N. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association. O. NSF: National Sanitation Foundation. P. MSS: Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry. Q. PDI: Plumbing and Drainage Institute. R. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association. S. UL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. All work shall conform to UFC manuals 2012, IBC 2015, IBC mechanical code 2015 and IBC plumbing 2015 regulations and codes. All work must conform to AAFES standards and the following codes and standards.


1. ADA - American’s with Disabilities Act. 2. ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. 3. ASHRAE 62 - Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality. 4. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Code. 5. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems 6. NFPA 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code 7. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code 8. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code 9. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 10. NFPA 96 - Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations 11. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code

B. Permits, Licenses, Inspections and Fees. 1. Obtain and pay for all permits, licenses, inspections and fees, and comply

with all rules, laws and ordinances pertaining to the Contractor’s portion of the Work.

2. Obtain and pay for certificates of required inspections and include all certificates with the close out documents.

1.7 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide new standard, first-grade materials throughout.

B. Multiple items of similar equipment shall be the product of the same manufacturer.

C. Substitutions:

1. Comply with the provisions of Division 1, for product requirements, substitutions and alternates, and the following.

2. When several manufacturers are named in the specifications, the corresponding products and models made by the specified manufacturers will be accepted and Contractor may base his bid on any one of those products. However, if the Contractor’s bid is based on products other than the scheduled or specified basis of design, it shall be understood that there will be no extra cost involved whatsoever, and the effect on other trades has been included in the Contractor’s proposal. Coordination with other trades for substituted equipment or use of products other than the named basis of design shall be the responsibility of the Contractor furnishing the equipment.

3. The basis of design manufacturer’s equipment has been used to determine space requirements. Should another approved manufacturer’s equipment be used in preparing proposals, Contractor shall be responsible for determining that said equipment will fit space allocated. Submission of shop drawings or product data on such equipment shall be considered as indicating that the Contractor has reviewed the space requirements and the


submitted equipment will fit the space allocated with due consideration given to access required for maintenance and code purposes.

4. Each bidder may submit to the Architect a list of any substitutes which he proposes to use in lieu of the equipment or material named in the specifications with a request for the approval of proposed substitutes. To be considered, such requests must be delivered to the office of the Architect not later than 10 days prior to bid due date. The submittal shall include the following:

a. Specific equipment or material proposed for substitution giving manufacturer, catalog and model number.

b. All performance and dimensional data necessary for comparison of the proposed substitute with the equipment or material specified.

c. A statement setting forth any changes in other materials, equipment or other Work that incorporation of the substitute may require.

5. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitute is upon the proposer. The Architect’s decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution is final.

6. All bidders will be advised by addenda of proposed substitutes which are found to be acceptable. Do not rely upon approvals made in any other manner.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Division 1 and Division 23 sections for submittals and submittal procedures as well as the following:

B. Product Data: For each type of product, equipment, material and services

specified in Division 23 specification sections. Submittals shall be provided with specified shop drawings. Provide to the architect or prime consultant, a complete vendor submittal fully marked to identify exactly what is to be provided as follows.

1. All submittals shall be submitted in electronic pdf format and shall be be

organized in accordance with the specifications. 2. All submittals shall be completely marked with manufacturer’s names,

model number, dimensions, weights, performance ratings, efficiencies, features, and accessories to be provided.

3. Capacities, dimensions, weights, and etc. shall be in the terms specified (inch-pound or SI).

4. Call attention to and clearly identify deviations from specified items as to operation and physical dimensions, capacities and performance.

5. Performance curves for equipment such as fans and pumps shall be included and shall be clearly marked with operating points, and efficiency.


C. The contractor shall obtain reviewed submittals form the Engineer that have been returned and marked as follows:

1. APPROVED – Contractor approved to order equipment. 2. APPROVED AS CORRECTED – Contractor to correct submittal and

approved to order equipment. Corrected submittal shall be re-submitted for record purposes.

3. REVISE AND RESUBMIT – Contractor to correct submittal and resubmit to the A/E team for approval. Re-submittal shall be clearly marked as such.

4. SUBMIT SPECIFIC ITEM – Contractor to submit material, equipment, or product requested by the reviewer.

5. REJECTED – Contractor must review comments for rejection and resubmit product, material, equipment, etc. for approval. Re-submittal shall be clearly marked as such.

D. Final equipment or material orders shall not be placed until submittals have been returned marked either “APPROVED” OR “APPROVED AS CORRECTED” without exception.

E. Shop Drawings: Before starting any work submit and obtain approved shop

drawings from the Engineer of Record. Shop drawings shall fully detail all mechanical work to be performed. Shop drawing shall be submitted with the submittals required above. Failure to submit shop drawings will make the Contractor responsible for changes required to facilitate installation of mechanical work and other affected disciplines. Shop drawings shall be fully dimensioned from column lines, and floors with elevations. Shop drawings shall be submitted in electronic pdf format and shall comply with the following:

1. All shop drawings shall be drawn to 1/4” = 1’-0” scale. 1/8” – 1’-0” scale may be used when approved by the engineer of record.

2. Ductwork shop drawing shall include the following at a minimum: a. Bottom of duct elevations. b. Dimensions from columns lines. c. Duct sizes (including insulation) d. Insulation thickness. e. Sheet metal gauges. f. Pressure class. g. Seal class. h. Connection details. i. Locations of turning vanes, manual dampers, control dampers and

control devices. j. Ductwork construction details. k. Ductwork support details and support locations. l. Ductwork seismic restraint details.

3. Piping shop drawing shall include the following at a minimum:


a. Bottom of pipe elevations. b. Dimensions from columns lines. c. Pipe sizes and schedules (including insulation) d. Insulation thickness. e. Fluid type. f. Pipe support location. g. Pipe support details. h. Seismic Restraint Details. i. Location of automatic valves and system isolation valves. j. Equipment connection details

4. Mechanical Equipment Room shop drawings shall include the following at

a minimum: a. Equipment layouts b. Location of support columns. c. Location and dimensions of equipment foundation and pads. d. Location and dimension of equipment and apparatus including

electrical control panels, starters, service and coil pull areas. e. Coordinate with Electrical Contractor and indicate electrical

equipment location(s) i.e., panels, electrical conduit runs and stubs for motors, code clearances, etc.

f. Dimensioned floor drain locations.

F. Shop Drawing for Building Automation Systems or Automatic Temperature Control Systems:

1. Submit complete Control System shop drawing in accordance with requirements for in the control system specification.


A. Installer’s Qualifications: Firm experienced in installation of systems similar in complexity to those required for this project, plus the following: 1. Licensed in the state in which the work is to occur for a minimum of 3 years 2. Acceptable to or certified by equipment, of material manufacturer. 3. Not less than 3 years’ experience with systems. 4. Successfully completed not less than 5 comparable scale projects using

similar equipment and components. 5. HVAC/Mechanical Subcontractors: In addition to above, shall be, or have had

in his employ continuously for at least 3 years, a Professional Engineer registered in the State in which the work is to occur and who is actively connected with the air conditioning department of subcontractor’s company and thoroughly experienced with the work.

6. Control System Contractors: In addition to above, shall be, or have had in his employ continuously for at least 3 years, a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Alabama, who is actively connected with the air conditioning department of subcontractor’s company and thoroughly experienced with the work.


1.10 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Scope: Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for the completion of all mechanical work shown or specified, except work specified to be done or furnished by others, complete and ready for operation.

B. Equipment Furnished by Others.

1. Connect or install equipment shown on mechanical drawings that requires mechanical connections.

2. Provide piping, shut-off valves and unions required for a complete installation. 3. Equipment furnished by others includes:

a. Ice machines b. Kitchen food service equipment c. Freezers d. Coolers e. Casework and fixtures

1.11 DRAWING INTERPRETATION AND COORDINATION

A. Plans are intended to show size, capacity, approximate location, direction and general relationship of the work, but not exact detail or arrangement.

B. Do not scale drawings for location of system components. Coordinate all

measurements, location of pipe, ductwork, lighting, ceiling grids, sprinkler piping, sprinkler heads, equipment and equipment pads and supports with architectural, structural, and electrical drawings as well as conditions existing in the field and lay out work so as to fit in with ceiling grids, lighting and other parts.

C. Make minor adjustments in the field as required to provide the optimum result to

facilitate ease of service, efficient operation and best appearance. D. Where doubt arises as to the meaning of the plans and specifications, obtain the

Architect’s written decision before proceeding with parts affected; otherwise assume liability for damage to other work and for making necessary corrections to work in question.

E. Refer to Architectural Drawings for all dimensions, and locations of ceiling

diffusers and sprinkler heads. 1.12 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Visiting Site: Visit site and become familiar with location and various conditions affecting work. No additional allowance will be granted because of lack of knowledge of such conditions.

B. Determine sizes and verify locations of existing utilities near site.


C. Cause as little interference or interruption of existing utilities and services as

possible. Schedule work which will cause interference or interruption in advance with Owner, authorities having jurisdiction, and all affected trades.

1.13 PROJECT CLOSE OUT

A. Submit project close out documents after the final inspection and all punch list items are complete.

B. Record Drawings shall include: 1. Ductwork, piping and control system record drawings shall be provided. 2. Record drawings shall be an accurate record of corrections, variations,

and deviations, including those required by change orders to the contract documents.

3. Record changes daily on a set of plans kept at the job site. 4. Submit record drawing marked as noted above to Architect for review

prior to request for final payment. 5. Marked record drawings will be returned to Contractor for use in

preparing final record drawings. 6. Final Record Drawings: Provide one complete set of prints, and one

electronic copy in AutoCAD format indicating the actual completed installation of the Work.

C. Prior to the issuance of a certificate for final payment, submit to Architect and

obtain his approval of the following: 1. Record drawings – As noted above. 2. Control manufacturer's letter of certification (Electronic pfd). 3. Air balance report (Electronic pfd). 4. Water balance report (Electronic pfd). 5. Equipment Submittal Data (Electronic pfd). 6. Equipment operating and maintenance manuals (Electronic pfd and 2

hard copies). 7. Equipment warranty dates and guarantees (Electronic pfd and 2 hard

copies). 8. Pressure vessel certificates (Electronic pfd). 9. List of Owner's Personnel who have received operating and maintenance

instructions. 10. Letter certifying that the cleaning program for the chilled water, hot water

and condenser water systems has been completed in accordance to the Specifications.

11. Letter certifying and signed by Owner or his representative that the Owner or his representative has received the extra materials specified for each system:

a. Spare filters. b. Spare variable frequency controllers.


c. Spare pumps seals 12. Submit factory start-up/field reports for:

a. Building Automation System (Point to Point Checks) b. Ground Packaged AC Units c. Kitchen hood ventilation equipment d. Variable frequency controllers e. Kitchen hood fire suppression system

1.14 TEMPORARY USE OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Use of newly installed mechanical equipment to provide heating, air conditioning, and ventilation during construction will be permitted subject to compliance with the following provisions: 1. Equipment specified to have factory supervised start-up shall have had

such start-up and factory start-up reports shall have been submitted and certified by the mechanical contractor to contain no deficiencies.

2. All safeties, and interlocks shall be installed and functionally tested. 3. Correct fuses, breakers, and overloads shall have been installed. 4. All fire safeties and interlocks with smoke detectors and fire alarm

systems shall have been installed and functionally tested. 5. Units shall be properly lubricated, balanced, aligned and free of

vibrations. 6. Automatic temperature control systems for preheat coils shall function

properly and all safety controls shall function to prevent coil freeze-up damage.

7. The air filtering system utilized shall be that which is designed for the system when complete. All filter elements shall be maintained and replaced during construction when dirty (pressure drop > 0.5” wg); filters shall be replaced at completion of construction and prior to test, adjust and balance of the system.

8. All return air and outside air openings shall have temporary filter media installed over inlet side of opening and secured air tight there to.

B. The mechanical contractor shall provide procedures detailing parties responsible

for operating the equipment and the manner in which the equipment will be operated and controlled.

C. Prior to final inspection, the equipment or parts used which show wear and tear beyond normal, shall be replaced with identical replacements, at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Warranty dates shall start at Date of Substantial Completion, operation of the

equipment on a temporary basis during construction does not constitute substantial completion or beneficial use by the owner. Provide extended warranty from manufacturer to cover time between start-up and substantial


completion or beneficial use. E. The contractor shall maintain all equipment during temporary use, including

routine maintenance, and repairs of any component failures. F. This paragraph shall not reduce the requirements of the mechanical specification

sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not Used END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 23 05 13 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT


A. Single phase electric motors. B. Variable Frequency Controllers C. Three phase electric motors.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ABMA STD 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; American Bearing

Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 1990 (Reapproved 2008). B. IEEE 112 - IEEE Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators;

Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers; 2004. C. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2009,

Revision 1 - 2010. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition

Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and connection

requirements. C. Test Reports: Indicate test results verifying nominal efficiency and power factor for three phase

motors larger than 1/2 horsepower. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate setting, mechanical connections, lubrication,

and wiring instructions. E. Operation Data: Include instructions for safe operating procedures. F. Maintenance Data: Include assembly drawings, bearing data including replacement sizes, and

lubrication instructions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of electric motors for Commercial use, and their accessories, with minimum three years documented product development, testing, and manufacturing experience.

B. Conform to NFPA 70. C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories

Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and suitable weather-proof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipment and store separately.

1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for motors larger than 20 horsepower.


A. General Electric: www.ge.com.


B. Gould: www.gould.com C. Marathon Electric: www.marathonelectric.com

2.02 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Service:

1. Motors 1/2 HP and Smaller: 115 volts, single phase, 60 Hz. 2. Motors Larger than 1/2 Horsepower: 208 volts, three phase, 60 Hz.

B. Construction: 1. Open drip-proof type except where specifically noted otherwise. 2. Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment. 3. Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class,

service factor, and motor enclosure type. 4. Motors with frame sizes 254T and larger: Energy Efficient Type.

C. Visible Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM, full load amps, locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number, service factor, power factor, efficiency.

D. Wiring Terminations: 1. Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials

indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70, threaded for conduit. 2. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide threaded

conduit connection in end frame. 2.03 APPLICATIONS

A. Exception: Motors less than 250 watts, for intermittent service may be the equipment manufacturer's standard and need not conform to these specifications.

B. Single phase motors for shaft mounted fans or blowers: Permanent split capacitor type. 2.04 SINGLE PHASE POWER - SPLIT PHASE MOTORS

A. Starting Torque: Less than 150 percent of full load torque. B. Starting Current: Up to seven times full load current. C. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 200 percent of full load torque. D. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service

Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings. E. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor,

prelubricated ball bearings. 2.05 SINGLE PHASE POWER - PERMANENT-SPLIT CAPACITOR MOTORS

A. Starting Torque: Exceeding one fourth of full load torque. B. Starting Current: Up to six times full load current. C. Open Drip-proof or Enclosed Air Over Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise)

insulation, minimum 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings, automatic reset overload protector.

2.06 THREE PHASE POWER - SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS A. Starting Torque: Between 1 and 1-1/2 times full load torque. B. Starting Current: Six times full load current. C. Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pull Out Torque: NEMA Design B

characteristics. D. Design, Construction, Testing, and Performance: Conform to NEMA MG 1 for Design B motors. E. Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better.


F. Testing Procedure: In accordance with IEEE 112. Load test motors to determine free from electrical or mechanical defects in compliance with performance data.

G. Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T-Frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with end brackets of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts.

H. Thermistor System (Motor Frame Sizes 254T and Larger): Three PTC thermistors imbedded in motor windings and epoxy encapsulated solid state control relay for wiring into motor starter.

I. Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged provision for relubrication, rated for minimum ABMA STD 9, L-10 life of 20,000 hours. Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt center line at end of NEMA standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate.

J. Sound Power Levels: To NEMA MG 1. K. Weatherproof Epoxy Sealed Motors: Epoxy seal windings using vacuum and pressure with

rotor and starter surfaces protected with epoxy enamel; bearings double shielded with waterproof non-washing grease.

L. Nominal Efficiency: As scheduled at full load and rated voltage when tested in accordance with IEEE 112.

M. Nominal Power Factor: As scheduled at full load and rated voltage when tested in accordance with IEEE 112.

2.07 STARTERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Allen-Bradley 2. Siemens 3. General Electric 4. Square D 5. Westinghouse

B. NEMA rated only. IEC rated starters not acceptable. C. Use only one manufacturer for all motor starter equipment on this project. D. Magnetic Motor Starters:

1. Line Voltage Non-Reversing. a. Horsepower rated, tested, labeled and sized per NEMA, with field replaceable main

contacts, external manual resets, melting-alloy overload protection in all phases [and low voltage/phase loss protection].

E. Combination Magnetic Motor Starters: 1. Magnetic starters as specified above. 2. Rejection fuse clips sized for dual element fuses. 3. Quick-make/quick-break switching mechanism. 4. Defeatable cover interlocks. 5. Padlockable indicating handles.

F. Enclosure: 1. NEMA Type 1 enclosures for general purpose interior dry locations. 2. NEMA Type 3R enclosures in exterior or damp locations. 3. NEMA Type 4 enclosures in wet locations.

G. Accessories: 1. Each starter shall incorporate

a. Hand-Off-Automatic selector switch with legend plate. b. Control power transformer sized to support those devices shown on the drawings

with 120V secondary coil with 2 primary and 1 secondary fuses. c. Provide number of N.O. and N.C. auxiliary contacts as required by control sequence.

2. Pushbutton Station momentary contact type with green start button, red stop button and legend plate.


H. Manual Motor Starters: 1. For single phase motors, without internal thermal overload protection, provide manual

motor starters mounted in single gang electrical box. 2. Outside equipment rooms provide flush mounted enclosure with cover plate and identify. 3. Overload protection: Size according to nameplate current. Not required on single phase

motors equipped with internal thermal protection. 4. Provide integral pilot light where scheduled.

2.08 VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS A. For each motor so specified provide variable frequency drive (VFD). VFD shall be

self-contained with all components in a NEMA 1 enclosure. B. VFD shall utilize pulse width modulation (PWM) technology. C. The complete VFD, including all specified options, shall be UL listed. D. The VFD shall have a DC link reactor to minimize power line harmonics. VFD's without a DC

link reactor shall provide a 3% impedance line reactor. (Input current rating of drive shall not exceed output rating. Submit data for compliance.)

E. The VFD's full load amp rating shall meet or exceed NEC Table 430-150. The VFD shall be able to provide full rated output current continuously, 110% of rated current for 60 seconds and 220% of rated current for up to 1 second while starting.

F. Input and output power circuit switching can be done without interlocks or damage to the VFD. (If manufacturer requires, contractor to provide interlock devices and wiring.)

G. Protective Features 1. Class 20 I2t electronic motor overload protection for single motor applications and

thermal-mechanical overloads for multiple motor applications. 2. Protection against input transients, loss of AC line phase, short circuit, ground fault, over

voltage, under voltage, drive over temperature and motor. 3. Protect VFD from sustained power or phase loss. The VFD shall incorporate a 5 second

control power loss ride through to eliminate nuisance tripping. 4. Drive shall have semi-conductor rated input fuses to protect power components. 5. The drive shall be fitted with output line reactors. 6. Drive shall catch a rotating motor operating forward or reverse up to full speed.

H. Interface Features 1. Local/Hand, Stop/Reset and Remote/Auto selector switches shall be provided to start and

stop the drive and determine the speed reference. 2. Manual speed control. 3. A red FAULT light and a green POWER-ON light shall be provided. 4. The drive shall be fitted with an RS 232 or 485 serial communications port and be

supplied with software to display all monitoring, fault, alarm and status signals. 5. Set point control interface (PID control) shall be standard in the unit. 6. Floating point control interface shall be provided to increase/decrease speed in response

to switch closures. 7. The following displays shall be accessible from the control panel in actual units: Reference

Signal Percent, Output Frequency, Output Amps, Motor HP, Motor kW, kWhr, Output Voltage, No Load Warning, DC Bus Voltage, Drive Temperature (% until trip) and Motor Speed (in percent speed).

8. Drive will sense the loss of load and signal a no load/broken belt warning or fault. 9. Eight programmable digital inputs shall be provided for interfacing with the systems control

and safety interlock circuitry. 10. Two programmable relay outputs shall be provided for remote indication of drive status. 11. Two programmable analog inputs shall be provided and shall accept a direct-or-reverse

acting signal. Analog reference inputs accepted shall include 0-10 V dc, 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA.


12. Two programmable analog outputs shall be provided for indication of drive status. These outputs shall be programmable for output speed, voltage, frequency, amps and input kW.

13. Under fire mode conditions the VFD shall automatically default to a preset speed. 14. Provide simple connection for 2 position safety limit controls to shut down drive under all

operating modes (local, auto). I. Adjustments:

1. VFD shall have an adjustable carrier frequency of 2 to 14 kHz through 60 HP and 2 to 4.5 kHz above 60 HP.

2. Two preset speeds shall be provided. 3. Adjustable acceleration and deceleration ramps shall be provided. 4. Adjustable current limit settings shall be provided. 5. If VFD trips on one of the following conditions, the VFD shall be programmable for

automatic or manual reset: under voltage, over voltage, current limit, inverter overload and motor overload.

6. The number of restart attempts shall be selectable from 0 through 10 and the time between attempts shall be adjustable from 0 through 10 seconds.

7. VFD's are priced now such that can provide spare drive for about same cost as a by-pass. Also, one drive size may be able to be spare for several motors. See equipment schedule for spare options. UAB wants bypass.

J. Bypass 1. Unless noted otherwise, provide a manual bypass consisting of a door interlocked main

fused disconnect padlockable in the off position, a built-in motor starter and a four position DRIVE/OFF/LINE/TEST switch controlling three contactors. in the DRIVE position, the motor is operated at an adjustable speed from the drive. in the OFF position, the motor and drive are disconnected. in the LINE position, the motor is operated at full speed from the AC power line and power is disconnected from the drive, so that service can be performed. In the TEST position, the motor is operated at full speed from the AC line power.

K. Service Conditions 1. Ambient temperature, -10 to 40°C (14 to 104°F). 2. 0 to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing. 3. AC line voltage variation, -10 to +10% of nominal with full output. 4. Drive shall be capable of operating a motor up to 50 feet away without derating or field

modification. 5. Provide output filter to limit voltage at motor terminals for all drives located more than 50

feet from motor (cooling tower). L. Quality Assurance

1. The complete VFD shall be factory tested. 2. All optional features shall be functionally tested at the factory for proper operation.

M. Start-up Service 1. Provide factory star-up commissioning of the variable frequency drive and its optional

circuits by a factory certified service technician who is experienced in start-up and repair services. The commissioning personnel shall be the same personnel that will provide the factory service and warranty repairs at the customer's site. Start-up services shall include checking for proper operation and installation for the VFD, its options and its interface wiring to the building automation system and programming in step-overs for critical fan speeds [verify critical speeds with cooling tower manufacturer].

N. Provide factory check-out and start-up service. Verify with cooling tower supplier critical speeds and provide step-overs as required.

O. Approved manufacturers: AC Tech QC300 series, Graham, Cutter Hammer, ABB or approved equal.



A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors with shaft in any position. C. Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 23 05 53 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 23 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment labels. 2. Pipe labels. 3. Duct labels. 4. Stencils.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Valve numbering scheme and Schedule 1: valve chart & schedule, including valve tag number & location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Brady Corporation.

2. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

3. Lettering: Stamped. 4. Minimum Label Size: 1 – ½ inch diameter. 5. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws.

B. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Brady Corporation.

2. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

3. Letter Color: Black. 4. Background Color: White.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=9462

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123456944705




5. Minimum Label Size: 1-1/2 inch diameter. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 PIPE LABELS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Brady Corporation.

B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction according to ASME A13.1.

C. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both

directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2.3 STENCILS

A. Stencils for Ducts: 1. Lettering Size: Minimum letter height of 2-1/2 inches. 2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.




3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels, complying with ASME A13.1, with painted, color-coded bands or rectangles on each piping system. 1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background. 2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.

B. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible

enclosures. 4. At access doors and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 20 feet along each run.

C. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.

3.5 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Stenciled Duct Label Option: Stenciled labels showing service and flow direction may be provided instead of plastic-laminated duct labels, at Installer's option.

B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into and exit from concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 20 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.

END OF SECTION 23 05 53

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 23 05 93 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 23 05 93

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Balancing Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems. 2. Control system verification.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. BAS: Building automation systems.

C. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

D. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

E. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

F. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform TAB work.

G. TDH: Total dynamic head.


A. All tests shall be made by the contractor in the presence of the owner or his representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are applicable for intended purpose and are accessible.

B. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.


C. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

D. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Confirm the following: 1. Duct systems are complete. 2. Volume, smoke, and fire dampers are open and functional. 3. Clean filters are installed. 4. Fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction. 5. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 6. Ceilings are installed. 7. Windows and doors are installed. 8. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures. 1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness

as used to construct ducts.

B. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

C. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

B. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge.

C. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

D. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

E. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

F. Check for airflow blockages.

G. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

H. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1. Measure total airflow.


a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates minimum outdoor-air conditions.

b. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses to obtain total airflow.

c. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil traverse may be acceptable.

d. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse or coil traverse is not possible, measure airflow at terminals and calculate the total airflow.

2. Measure fan static pressures as follows: a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling

system. d. Report artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured.

3. Obtain approval from Owner for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance.

4. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload occurs. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows. 1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts. 2. Adjust submain and branch duct volume dampers for specified airflow. 3. Re-measure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted.

C. Adjust air inlets and outlets for each space to indicated airflows. 1. Set airflow patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 2. Measure inlets and outlets airflow. 3. Adjust each inlet and outlet for specified airflow. 4. Re-measure each inlet and outlet after they have been adjusted.

D. Verify final system conditions. 1. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are within

design. Readjust to design if necessary. 2. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design. 3. Re-measure all final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, and static profile. 4. Mark all final settings. 5. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary. 6. Measure and record all operating data. 7. Record final fan-performance data.

3.6 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's airflow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.


CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC DUCT INSULATION ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 23 07 13 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION


A. Duct insulation. B. Duct Liner. C. Fire-Proofing Duct Wrap D. Insulation jackets.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 23 05 53 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment. B. Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings: Glass fiber ducts.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2007. B. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate;

2007. C. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by

Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010. D. ASTM C553 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and

Industrial Applications; 2008. E. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation;

2010. F. ASTM C916 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation; 1985

(Reapproved 2007). G. ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and

Sound Absorbing Material); 2005e1. H. ASTM C1338 - Standard Test Method for Determining Fungi Resistance of Insulation Materials

and Facings; 2008. I. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2010b. J. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010. K. ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to

Fungi; 2009. L. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

National Fire Protection Association; 2006. M. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and

Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005. N. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and

thickness for each service, and locations. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures necessary to ensure acceptable

workmanship and that installation standards will be achieved.


1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type

specified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this

section, with minimum 3 years of experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness.

B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,

mastics, and insulation cements. B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION

A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.

2.02 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE A. Manufacturer:

1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com. 2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. 3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 4. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.

B. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket. 1. 'K' value: 0.26 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 450 degrees F. 3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight.

C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM

E96/E96M. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.

D. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage. 2.03 GLASS FIBER, RIGID

A. Manufacturer: 1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com. 2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. 3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 4. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.

B. Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible blanket. 1. 'K' value: 0.24 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518. 2. Maximum service temperature: 450 degrees F. 3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent. 4. Maximum Density: 8.0 lb/cu ft.

C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.


2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.

3. Secure with two coats of vapor barrier mastic and glass tape. D. Vapor Barrier Tape:

1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive.

E. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish: 1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color.

2.04 JACKETS A. Canvas Jacket: UL listed 6 oz/sq yd plain weave cotton fabric treated with dilute fire retardant

lagging adhesive. B. Mineral Fiber (Outdoor) Jacket: Asphalt impregnated and coated sheet, 50 lb/square. C. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M).

1. Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet. 2. Finish: Smooth. 3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps. 4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner. 5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum. 6. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.010 inch thick stainless steel.

2.05 FIREPROOFING DUCT WRAP A. Manufacturer: Thermal Ceramics “FireMaster Duct Wrap.” B. Grease Duct Enclosure: UL 1978/ASTM E119; flexible, foil laminated fire barrier system

designed to provide two-hour fire protection and zero clearance in grease duct applications. 1. Regulatory Requirements: U.L. Listed and SBCCI approved. 2. Density: 6.0 lb/cu ft. 3. Maximum service temperature: 23000 degrees F. 4. 'K' value: ASTM C518, 0.22 at 70 degrees F.

C. Jacket: 1. Aluminum foil bonded to blanket.

D. Banding Material: 1. ¾ inch wide, 0.015 inch thick stainless steel banding.

E. Mechanical Fasteners: 1. 10 gage, 4 inch long, copper coated steel pins with 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch speed clips.

2.06 DUCT LINER A. Manufacturers:

1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com. 2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. 3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 4. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.

B. Insulation: Non-corrosive, incombustible glass fiber complying with ASTM C1071; rigid board; impregnated surface and edges coated with poly vinyl acetate polymer or acrylic polymer. 1. Fungi Resistance: ASTM G21. 2. Apparent Thermal Conductivity: Maximum of 0.31 at 75 degrees F. 3. Service Temperature: Up to 250 degrees F. 4. Rated Velocity on Coated Air Side for Air Erosion: 5,000 fpm, minimum. 5. Minimum Noise Reduction Coefficients:

a. 1/2 inch Thickness: 0.30. b. 1 inch Thickness: 0.45. c. 1-1/2 inches Thickness: 0.60.


d. 2 inch Thickness: 0.70. C. Adhesive: Waterproof, fire-retardant type, ASTM C916. D. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, impact applied or welded with integral or press-on head.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that ducts have been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. C. Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature:

1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections,

and expansion joints. D. Insulated ducts conveying air above ambient temperature:

1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket. 2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of

insulation. E. Ducts Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (below 10 feet above

finished floor): Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting. F. Exterior Applications: Provide insulation with vapor barrier jacket. Cover with with calked

aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal duct section. G. External Duct Insulation Application:

1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier adhesive or tape to match jacket.

2. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires. 3. Install without sag on underside of duct. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where

necessary to prevent sagging. Lift duct off trapeze hangers and insert spacers. 4. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive. 5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation

without disturbing wrapping. H. Fire-Proofing Duct Wrap Application

1. Attach fireproofing to ductwork per duct wrap manufacturer's instructions. 2. Wrap hanger support system per duct wrap manufacturer's instructions. 3. Provide removable covers protected with duct wrap for access to duct access doors.

I. Duct and Plenum Liner Application: 1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 90 percent coverage. 2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible for spacing. 3. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints. 4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive. 5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase duct

size to allow for insulation thickness. 3.03 SCHEDULES

A. Exhaust Ducts: Flexible Glass Fiber Insulation, 2" thick minimum R6 indoor, and R8 outdoor.


B. Supply, outside air and Return Air Ducts: Flexible Glass Fiber Insulation, 2" thick, minimum R6 indoor, and R8 outdoor.

C. Kitchen Hood Grease Exhaust Ducts 1. Grease duct fireproofing duct wrap thickness as required to provide UL Listed, 2 hour

grease duct enclosure rating and zero clearance to combustible materials. 2. Extent: Entire duct from hood to outdoors unless noted otherwise.

D. Transfer Ducts: Duct Liner, 1" Thick. END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC HVAC PIPING INSULATION ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 23 07 19 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION


A. Piping insulation. B. Jackets and accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. B. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping. C. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Painting insulation jacket. E. Section 23 23 00 - Refrigerant Piping: Placement of inserts.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. E. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement; 2007. F. ASTM C449 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and

Finishing Cement; 2007. G. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation;

2009. H. ASTM C534/C534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular

Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2008. I. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2007e1. J. O. ASTM D1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Sponge or Expanded

Rubber; 2007. P. R. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010. S. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

National Fire Protection Association; 2006. T. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and

thickness for each service, and locations. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and

thickness. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION

A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.

2.02 GLASS FIBER A. Manufacturers:


1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com. 2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. 3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 4. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible. 1. 'K' value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.

C. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; semi-rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket. 1. 'K' value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 650 degrees F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.

D. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.02 perm-inches.

E. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers. F. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive:

1. Compatible with insulation. G. Insulating Cement/Mastic:

1. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool. H. Fibrous Glass Fabric:

1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight. 2. Blanket: 1.0 lb/cu ft density. 3. Weave: 5x5.

I. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish: 1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight. 2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, black color.

J. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic: 1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color.

K. Outdoor Breather Mastic: 1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color.

L. Insulating Cement: 1. ASTM C449/C449M.

2.03 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION A. Manufacturer:

1. Armacell International: www.armacell.com. B. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C534

Grade 3; use molded tubular material wherever possible. 1. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F. 3. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.

C. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation. 2.05 JACKETS

A. PVC Plastic. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. 2. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color.


a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F. b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F. c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in accordance

with ASTM E96/E96M. d. Thickness: 10 mil. e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.

3. Covering Adhesive Mastic: a. Compatible with insulation.

B. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) formed aluminum sheet. 1. Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet. 2. Finish: Smooth. 3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps. 4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner. 5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.010 inch thick stainless steel.


A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including

fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints.

E. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. 4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining

insulation; may be factory fabricated. 5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating

material suitable for the planned temperature range. F. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at

supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section 07 84 00. G. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with

insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping.

3.03 SCHEDULE A. Cooling Systems:

1. Condensate Drains from Cooling Coils: a. All pipe sizes: Foamed Plastic Pipe Insulation, 1/2 inch thick.

3. Refrigerant Suction: a. 1 inch and smaller pipe size: Foamed Plastic Pipe Insulation, 1/2 inch thick. b. 1-1/4 inch to 2 inch pipe size: Foamed Plastic Pipe Insulation, 3/4 inch thick. c. 2-1/2 inch and larger pipe size: Foamed Plastic Pipe Insulation, 1 inch thick.


4. Refrigerant Hot Gas: Same as Refrigerant Suction. END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS HVAC ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 23 09 13 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 23 09 13 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC


A. Thermostats. B. Humidistats. C. Automatic dampers. d. Damper operators. g. Miscellaneous accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Installation of automatic dampers. B. Section 23 09 23 - Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC. C. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices: Elevation of exposed components. D. Section 26 27 17 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AMCA 500-D - Laboratory Methods for Testing Dampers for Rating; Air Movement and Control

Association International, Inc.; 2007. B. NEMA DC 3 - Residential Controls - Electrical Wall-Mounted Room Thermostats; National

Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008. C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical

Manufacturers Association; 2008. D. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilation Systems; National

Fire Protection Association; 2009. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Pre-installation Meeting: Conduct a pre-installation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide description and engineering data for each control system component.

Include sizing as requested. Provide data for each system component and software module. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate complete operating data, system drawings, wiring diagrams, and

written detailed operational description of sequences. Submit schedule of valves indicating size, flow, and pressure drop for each valve. For automatic dampers indicate arrangement, velocities, and static pressure drops for each system.

D. Design Data: Provide design data for sizing and selection of compressor. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide for all manufactured components. F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including panels,

thermostats, and sensors. Accurately record actual location of control components, including panels, thermostats, and sensors. 1. Revise shop drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include inspection period, cleaning methods, recommended cleaning materials, and calibration tolerances.

H. Warranty: Submit manufacturers warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owner s name and registered with manufacturer.


1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

minimum 3 years experience approved by manufacturer. C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories

Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.07 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 78 39 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Johnson Controls, Siemens, Honeywell, Trane, or approved equal. B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 EQUIPMENT - GENERAL A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories

Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 2.03 CONTROL PANELS

A. Unitized cabinet type for each system under automatic control with relays and controls mounted in cabinet and temperature indicators, pressure gages, pilot lights, push buttons and switches flush on cabinet panel face.

B. NEMA 250, general purpose utility enclosures with enamelled finished face panel. C. Provide common keying for all panels.

2.04 DAMPERS A. Performance: Test in accordance with AMCA 500-D. B. Frames: Galvanized steel, welded or riveted with corner reinforcement, minimum 12 gage. C. Blades: Galvanized steel, maximum blade size 8 inches wide, 48 inches long, minimum 22

gage, attached to minimum 1/2 inch shafts with set screws. D. Blade Seals: Synthetic elastomeric inflatable mechanically attached, field replaceable. E. Jamb Seals: Spring stainless steel. F. Shaft Bearings: Oil impregnated sintered bronze. G. Linkage Bearings: Oil impregnated sintered bronze. H. Leakage: Less than one percent based on approach velocity of 2000 ft/min and 4 inches wg. I. Maximum Pressure Differential: 6 inches wg. J. Temperature Limits: -40 to 200 degrees F.

2.05 DAMPER OPERATORS A. General: Provide smooth proportional control with sufficient power for air velocities 20 percent

greater than maximum design velocity and to provide tight seal against maximum system pressures. Provide spring return for two position control and for fail safe operation. 1. Provide sufficient number of operators to achieve unrestricted movement throughout

damper range. 2. Provide one operator for maximum 36 sq ft damper section.

B. Pilot Positioners: Starting point adjustable from 2 to 12 psig and operating span adjustable from 5 to 13 psig.

C. Electric Operators:


1. Spring return, adjustable stroke motor having oil immersed gear train, with auxiliary end switch.

D. Inlet Vane Operators: 1. High pressure with pilot positioners and sufficient force to move vanes when fan is started

with vanes in closed position. Return vane operator to closed position on fan shutdown. 2.06 HUMIDISTATS

A. Room Humidistats: 1. Wall mounted, proportioning type. 2. Throttling range: Adjustable 2 percent relative humidity. 3. Operating range: 30 to 80 percent. 4. Maximum temperature: 110 degrees F. 5. Cover: Set point indication.

B. Limit Duct Humidistat: 1. Insertion, two position type. 2. Throttling range: Adjustable 2 percent relative humidity. 3. Operating range: 20 to 80 percent. 4. Maximum temperature: 150 degrees F.

2.07 INPUT/OUTPUT SENSORS A. Temperature Sensors: B. Humidity Sensors:

1. Elements: Accurate within 5 percent full range with linear output. 2. Room Sensors: With locking cover matching pneumatic thermostats used, span of 10 to

60 percent relative humidity. C. Static Pressure Sensors:

1. Unidirectional with ranges not exceeding 150 percent of maximum expected input. 2. Temperature compensate with typical thermal error or 0.06 percent of full scale in

temperature range of 40 to 100 degrees F. 3. Accuracy: One percent of full scale with repeatability 0.3 percent. 4. Output: 0 - 5 vdc with power at 12 to 28 vdc. 5. Product:

D. Equipment Operation Sensors: 1. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential pressure switch with adjustable range of 0 to 5 inches

wg. 2. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential pressure switch piped across pump with adjustable

pressure differential range of 8 to 60 psi. 3. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Current sensing relay with current transformers,

adjustable and set to 175 percent of rated motor current. 4. Product:

E. Carbon Monoxide Detectors: 1. Single or multichannel dual level detectors, using solid state sensors with three year

minimum life. Sensor replacement shall take maximum 15 minutes. Suitable over temperature range of 23 to 130 degrees F.

2. Provide individual indicators and contractors for each level, initially calibrated for 50 ppm and 100 ppm.

3. Maximum response time to 100 ppm CO calibration gas: Two minutes. 4. Product:

a. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.08 THERMOSTATS

A. Electric Room Thermostats: 1. Type: NEMA DC 3, 24 volts, with setback/setup temperature control.


2. Service: cooling and heating. 3. Covers: Locking with set point adjustment, with thermometer.

B. Line Voltage Thermostats: 1. Integral manual On/Off/Auto selector switch, single or two pole as required. 2. Dead band: Maximum 2 degrees F. 3. Cover: Locking with set point adjustment, with thermometer. 4. Rating: Motor load.

C. Room Thermostat Accessories: 1. Thermostat Covers: Brushed aluminum. 2. Insulating Bases: For thermostats located on exterior walls. 3. Thermostat Guards: Metal mounted on separate base. 4. Adjusting Key: As required for device.

D. Outdoor Reset Thermostat: 1. Remote bulb or bimetal rod and tube type, proportioning action with adjustable throttling

range, adjustable setpoint. 2. Scale range: -10 to 70 degrees F.

E. Immersion Thermostat: 1. Remote bulb or bimetallic rod and tube type, proportional action with adjustable setpoint

and adjustable throttling range. F. Airstream Thermostats:

1. Remote bulb or bimetallic rod and tube type, proportional action with adjustable setpoint in middle of range and adjustable throttling range.

2. Averaging service remote bulb element: 7.5 feet. G. Electric Low Limit Duct Thermostat:

1. Snap acting, single pole, single throw, manual reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb length is equal to or below setpoint,

2. Bulb length: Minimum 20 feet. 3. Provide one thermostat for every 20 sq ft of coil surface.

H. Fire Thermostats: 1. UL labeled, factory set in accordance with NFPA 90A. 2. Normally closed contacts, manual reset.

I. Heating/Cooling Valve Top Thermostats: 1. Proportional acting for proportional flow, molded rubber diaphragm, remote bulb liquid

filled element, direct and reverse acting at differential pressure to 25 psig, cast housing with position indicator and adjusting knob.

2.09 TRANSMITTERS A. Building Static Pressure Transmitter:

1. One pipe, direct acting, double bell, scale range 0.01 to 6.0 inch wg positive or negative, and sensitivity of 0.0005 inch wg. Transmit electronic signal to receiver with matching scale range.

B. Pressure Transmitters: 1. One pipe direct acting indicating type for gas, liquid, or steam service, range suitable for

system, proportional electronic output. C. Temperature Transmitters:

1. One pipe, directly proportional output signal to measured variable, linearity within plus or minus 1/2 percent of range for 200 degree F span and plus or minus 1 percent for 50 degree F span, with 50 degrees F temperature range, compensated bulb, averaging capillary, or rod and tube operation on 20 psig input pressure and 3 to 15 psig output.

D. Humidity Transmitters:


1. One pipe, directly proportioned output signal to measured variable, linearity within plus or minus 1 percent for 70 percent relative humidity span, capable of withstanding 95 percent relative humidity without loss of calibration.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that systems are ready to receive work. C. Sequence work to ensure installation of components is complementary to installation of similar

components in other systems. D. Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical systems

equipment such as air handling units and air terminal units. E. Ensure installation of components is complementary to installation of similar components. F. Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical systems

equipment such as air handling units and air terminal units. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Check and verify location of thermostats with plans and room details before installation. Locate

60 inches above floor. Align with lighting switches and humidistats. Refer to Section 26 27 26. C. Provide guards on thermostats in entrances. D. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas. Do not install motors in locations at

outdoor temperatures. E. Mount control panels adjacent to associated equipment on vibration free walls or free standing

angle iron supports. One cabinet may accommodate more than one system in same equipment room. Provide engraved plastic nameplates for instruments and controls inside cabinet and engraved plastic nameplates on cabinet face.

F. Install "hand/off/auto" selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in "hand" position.

G. Provide conduit and electrical wiring in accordance with Section 26 27 17. Electrical material and installation shall be in accordance with appropriate requirements of Division 26.

3.03 MAINTENANCE A. Provide service and maintenance of control system for one year from Date of Substantial

Completion. B. Provide complete service of controls systems, including call backs, and submit written report of

each service call. C. In addition to normal service calls, make minimum of 2 complete normal inspections of

approximately 2 hours duration to inspect, calibrate, and adjust controls. END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 23 09 23 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 23 09 23 DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC


A. Control equipment. B. Software.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 23 09 13 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition

Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Automatic temperature control field monitoring and control system using field programmable

micro-processor based units. B. Base system on distributed system of fully intelligent, stand-alone controllers, operating in a

multi-tasking, multi-user environment on token passing network, with central and remote hardware, software, and interconnecting wire and conduit.

C. Include computer software and hardware, operator input/output devices, control units, local area networks (LAN), sensors, control devices, actuators.

D. Controls for variable air volume terminals, radiation, reheat coils, unit heaters, fan coils, and the like when directly connected to the control units. Individual terminal unit control is specified in Section 23 09 13.

E. Provide control systems consisting of thermostats, control valves, dampers and operators, indicating devices, interface equipment and other apparatus and accessories required to operate mechanical systems, and to perform functions specified.

F. Include installation and calibration, supervision, adjustments, and fine tuning necessary for complete and fully operational system.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for each system component and software module. C. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate trunk cable schematic showing programmable control unit locations, and trunk data conductors.

2. List connected data points, including connected control unit and input device. 3. Indicate system graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated)

point addresses, and operator notations. Provide demonstration diskette containing graphics.

4. Show system configuration with peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies, diagrams, modems, and interconnections.

5. Indicate description and sequence of operation of operating, user, and application software.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate manufacturer's installation instructions for all manufactured components.

E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including control units, thermostats, and sensors. 1. Revise shop drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences. 2. Include submittals data in final "Record Documents" form.


F. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Include interconnection wiring diagrams complete field installed systems with identified

and numbered, system components and devices. 2. Include keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator

function. 3. Include inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and

calibration tolerances. G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owner s

name and registered with manufacturer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work in accordance with NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

minimum 3 years experience approved by manufacturer. D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories

Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A. Convene one week before starting work of this Section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting the work of this Section.

1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 39 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty for field programmable micro-processor based units.

1.09 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Provide service and maintenance of energy management and control systems for one years

from Date of Substantial Completion. B. Provide two complete inspections per year, one in each season, to inspect, calibrate, and

adjust controls as required, and submit written reports. C. Provide complete service of systems, including call backs. Make minimum of 2 complete

normal inspections of approximately 4 hours duration in addition to normal service calls to inspect, calibrate, and adjust controls, and submit written reports.

1.10 PROTECTION OF SOFTWARE RIGHTS A. Prior to delivery of software, the Owner and the party providing the software will enter into a

software license agreement with provisions for the following: 1. Limiting use of software to equipment provided under these specifications. 2. Limiting copying. 3. Preserving confidentiality. 4. Prohibiting transfer to a third party.


A. Honeywell: www.honeywell.com. B. Johnson Controls, Inc: www.johnsoncontrols.com. C. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc: www.sbt.siemens.com. D. Trane, Inc.: www.trane.com.


2.02 OPERATOR STATION A. Work Station:

1. Configuration: IBM-compatible Intel Core i7 based microcomputer system or better. 2. Minimum memory: 4000 Mb RAM. 3. Display: 21 " LCD Super video color graphics adapter (SVGA). 4. Keyboard: Low profile, detachable, having Qwerty layout plus a 10 key numeric keypad,

dedicated function keys. 5. Hard disk drive: 500 Gb. 6. Mouse: Software supported mouse with support software including self building menus

and displays of system operations and functions. 7. Printer: Support color printer. 8. Operating System: Windows 7 Professional.

2.03 CONTROL UNITS A. Units: Modular in design and consisting of processor board with programmable RAM memory,

local operator access and display panel, and integral interface equipment. B. Battery Backup: For minimum of 48 hours for complete system including RAM without

interruption, with automatic battery charger. C. Control Units Functions:

1. Monitor or control each input/output point. 2. Completely independent with hardware clock/calendar and software to maintain control

independently. 3. Acquire, process, and transfer information to operator station or other control units on

network. 4. Accept, process, and execute commands from other control unit's or devices or operator

stations. 5. Access both data base and control functions simultaneously. 6. Record, evaluate, and report changes of state or value that occur among associated

points. Continue to perform associated control functions regardless of status of network. 7. Perform in stand-alone mode:

a. Start/stop. b. Duty cycling. c. Automatic Temperature Control. d. Demand control via a sliding window, predictive algorithm. e. Event initiated control. f. Calculated point. g. Scanning and alarm processing. h. Full direct digital control. i. Trend logging. j. Global communications. k. Maintenance scheduling.

D. Global Communications: 1. Broadcast point data onto network, making that information available to all other system

control units. 2. Transmit any or all input/output points onto network for use by other control units and

utilize data from other control units. E. Input/Output Capability:

1. Discrete/digital input (contact status). 2. Discrete/digital output. 3. Analog input. 4. Analog output.


F. Monitor, control, or address data points. Mix shall include analog inputs, analog outputs, pulse inputs, pulse outputs and discrete inputs/outputs, as required. Install control unit's with minimum 30 percent spare capacity.

G. Point Scanning: Set scan or execution speed of each point to operator selected time from 1 to 250 seconds.

H. Upload/Download Capability: Download from or upload to operator station. Upload/Download time for entire control unit database maximum 10 seconds on hard wired LAN, or 60 seconds over voice grade phone lines.

I. Test Mode Operation: Place input/output points in test mode to allow testing and developing of control algorithms on line without disrupting field hardware and controlled environment. In test mode:

J. Local display and adjustment panel: Integral to control unit, containing digital display, and numerical keyboard. Display and adjust: 1. Input/output point information and status. 2. Controller set points. 3. Controller tuning constants. 4. Program execution times. 5. High and low limit values. 6. Limit differential. 7. Set/display date and time. 8. Control outputs connected to the network. 9. Automatic control outputs. 10. Perform control unit diagnostic testing. 11. Points in "Test" mode.

2.04 LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN) A. Provide communication between control units over local area network (LAN). B. LAN Capacity: Not less than 60 stations or nodes. C. Break in Communication Path: Alarm and automatically initiate LAN reconfiguration. D. Communication Techniques: Allow interface into network by multiple operation stations and by

auto-answer/auto-dial modems. Support communication over telephone lines utilizing modems. E. Transmission Median: Fiber optic or single pair of solid 24 gauge twisted, shielded copper

cable. F. Network Support: Time for global point to be received by any station, shall be less than 3

seconds. Provide automatic reconfiguration if any station is added or lost. If transmission cable is cut, reconfigure two sections with no disruption to system's operation, without operator intervention.

2.05 OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE A. Input/Output Capability From Operator Station:

1. Request display of current values or status in tabular or graphic format. 2. Command selected equipment to specified state. 3. Initiate logs and reports. 4. Change analog limits. 5. Add, delete, or change points within each control unit or application routine. 6. Change point input/output descriptors, status, alarm descriptors, and engineering unit

descriptors. 7. Add new control units to system. 8. Modify and set up maintenance scheduling parameters. 9. Develop, modify, delete or display full range of color graphic displays. 10. Automatically archive select data even when running third party software.


11. Provide capability to sort and extract data from archived files and to generate custom reports.

12. Support two printer operations. a. Alarm printer: Print alarms, operator acknowledgements, action messages, system

alarms, operator sign-on and sign-off. b. Data printer: Print reports, page prints, and data base prints.

13. Select daily, weekly or monthly as scheduled frequency to synchronize time and date in digital control units. Accommodate daylight savings time adjustments.

14. Print selected control unit data base. B. Operator System Access: Via software password with minimum 30 access levels at work

station and minimum 3 access levels at each control unit. C. Data Base Creation and Support: Changes shall utilize standard procedures. Control unit shall

automatically check work station data base files upon connection and verify data base match. Minimum capability shall include: 1. Add and delete points. 2. Modify any point parameter. 3. Change, add, or delete English language descriptors. 4. Add, modify, or delete alarm limits. 5. Add, modify, or delete points in start/stop programs, trend logs, etc. 6. Create custom relationship between points. 7. Create or modify DDC loops and parameters. 8. Create or modify override parameters. 9. Add, modify, and delete any applications program. 10. Add, delete, develop, or modify dynamic color graphic displays.

D. Dynamic Color Graphic Displays: 1. Utilizes custom symbols or system supported library of symbols. 2. Sixteen (16) colors. 3. Sixty (60) outputs of real time, live dynamic data per graphic. 4. Dynamic graphic data. 5. 1,000 separate graphic pages. 6. Modify graphic screen refresh rate between 1 and 60 seconds.

E. Operator Station: 1. Accept data from LAN as needed without scanning entire network for updated point data. 2. Interrogate LAN for updated point data when requested. 3. Allow operator command of devices. 4. Allow operator to place specific control units in or out of service. 5. Allow parameter editing of control units. 6. Store duplicate data base for every control unit and allow down loading while system is on

line. 7. Control or modify specific programs. 8. Develop, store and modify dynamic color graphics. 9. Provide data archiving of assigned points and support overlay graphing of this data

utilizing up to four (4) variables. F. Alarm Processing:

1. Off normal condition: Cause alarm and appropriate message, including time, system, point descriptor, and alarm condition. Select alarm state/value and which alarms shall cause automatic dial-out.

2. Critical alarm or change-of-state: Display message, stored on disk for review and sort, or print.

3. Print on line changeable message, up to 60 characters in length, for each alarm point specified.

4. Display alarm reports on video. Display multiple alarms in order of occurrence. 5. Define time delay for equipment start-up or shutdown.


6. Allow unique routing of specific alarms. 7. Operator specifies if alarm requires acknowledgement. 8. Continue to indicate unacknowledged alarms after return to normal. 9. Alarm notification:

a. Automatic print. b. Display indicating alarm condition. c. Selectable audible alarm indication.

G. Event Processing: Automatically initiate commands, user defined messages, take specific control actions or change control strategy and application programs resulting from event condition. Event condition may be value crossing operator defined limit, change-of-state, specified state, or alarm occurrence or return to normal.

H. Automatic Restart: Automatically restart field equipment on restoration of power. Provide time delay between individual equipment restart and time of day start/stop.

I. Messages: 1. Automatically display or print user-defined message subsequent to occurrence of selected

events. 2. Compose, change, or delete any message. 3. Display or log any message at any time. 4. Assign any message to any event.

J. Reports: 1. Manually requested with time and date. 2. Long term data archiving to hard disk. 3. Automatic directives to download to transportable media such as floppy diskettes for

storage. 4. Data selection methods to include data base search and manipulation. 5. Data extraction with mathematical manipulation. 6. Data reports shall allow development of XY curve plotting, tabular reports (both statistical

and summary), and multi-point timed based plots with not less than four (4) variables displayed.

7. Generating reports either normally at operator direction, or automatically under work station direction.

8. Reports may either manually displayed or printed, or may be printed automatically on daily, weekly, monthly, yearly or scheduled basis.

9. Include capability for statistical data manipulation and extraction. 10. Provide capability to generate four types of reports: Statistical detail reports, summary

reports, trend graphic plots, x-y graphic plots. K. Parameter Save/Restore: Store most current operating system, parameter changes, and

modifications on disk or diskette. L. Data Collection:

1. Automatically collect and store in disk files. 2. Daily electrical energy consumption, peak demand, and time of peak demand for up to

electrical meters over 2 year period. 3. Daily consumption for up to 30 meters over a 2 year period. 4. Daily billable electrical energy consumption and time for up to 1024 zones over a 10 year

period. 5. Provide archiving of stored data for use with system supplied custom reports.

M. Graphic Display: Support graphic development on work station with software features: 1. Page linking. 2. Generate, store, and retrieve library symbols. 3. Single or double height characters. 4. Sixty (60) dynamic points of data per graphic page. 5. Pixel level resolution.


6. Animated graphics for discrete points. 7. Analog bar graphs. 8. Display real time value of each input or output line diagram fashion.

N. Maintenance Management: 1. Run time monitoring, per point. 2. Maintenance scheduling targets with automatic annunciation, scheduling and shutdown. 3. Equipment safety targets. 4. Display of maintenance material and estimated labor. 5. Target point reset, per point.

O. Advisories: 1. Summary which contains status of points in locked out condition. 2. Continuous operational or not operational report of interrogation of system hardware and

programmable control units for failure. 3. Report of power failure detection, time and date. 4. Report of communication failure with operator device, field interface unit, point,

programmable control unit. 2.06 LOAD CONTROL PROGRAMS

A. General: Support inch-pounds and SI (metric) units of measurement. B. Automatic Time Scheduling:

1. Self-contained programs for automatic start/stop/scheduling of building loads. 2. Support up to seven (7) normal day schedules, seven (7) "special day" schedules and two

(2) temporary day schedules. 3. Special days schedule shall support up to 30 unique date/duration combinations. 4. Any number of loads assigned to any time program; each load can have individual time

program. 5. Each load assigned at least 16 control actions per day with 1 minute resolution. 6. Time schedule operations may be:

a. Start. b. Optimized Start. c. Stop. d. Optimized Stop. e. Cycle. f. Optimized Cycle.

7. Minimum of 30 holiday periods up to 100 days in length may be specified for the year. 8. Create temporary schedules. 9. Broadcast temporary "special day" date and duration.

C. Start/Stop Time Optimization: 1. Perform optimized start/stop as function of outside conditions, inside conditions, or both. 2. Adaptive and self-tuning, adjusting to changing conditions unattended. 3. For each point under control, establish and modify:

a. Occupancy period. b. Desired temperature at beginning of occupancy period. c. Desired temperature at end of occupancy period.

D. Night Setback/Setup Program: Reduce heating space temperature setpoint or raise cooling space temperature setpoint during unoccupied hours; in conjunction with scheduled start/stop and optimum start/stop programs.

E. Calculated Points: Define calculations and totalization computed from monitored points (analog/digital points), constants, or other calculated points. 1. Employ arithmetic, algebraic, Boolean, and special function operations. 2. Treat calculated values like any other analog value, use for any function that a "hard wired

point" might be used.


F. Event Initiated Programming: Event may be initiated by any data point, causing series of controls in a sequence. 1. Define time interval between each control action between 0 to 3600 seconds. 2. Output may be analog value. 3. Provide for "skip" logic. 4. Verify completion of one action before proceeding to next. If not verified, program shall be

able to skip to next action. G. Direct Digital Control: Each control unit shall provide Direct Digital Control software so that the

operator may customize control strategies and sequences of operation by defining the appropriate control loop algorithms and choosing the optimum loop parameters. 1. Control loops: Defined using "modules" that are analogous to standard control devices. 2. Output: Paired or individual digital outputs for pulse-width modulation, and analog outputs,

as required. 3. Firmware:

a. PID with analog or pulse-width modulation output. b. Floating control with pulse-width modulated outputs. c. Two-position control. d. Primary and secondary reset schedule selector. e. Hi/Lo signal selector. f. Single pole double throw relay. g. Single pole double throw time delay relay with delay before break, delay before make

and interval time capabilities. 4. Direct Digital Control loops: Downloaded upon creation or on operator request. On sensor

failure, program shall execute user defined failsafe output. 5. Display: Value or state of each of the lines which interconnect DDC modules.

H. Fine Tuning Direct Digital Control PID or floating loops: 1. Display information:

a. Control loop being tuned b. Input (process) variable c. Output (control) variable d. Setpoint of loop e. Proportional band f. Integral (reset) Interval g. Derivative (rate) Interval

2. Display format: Graphic, with automatic scaling; with input and output variable superimposed on graph of "time" vs "variable".

I. Trend logging: 1. Each control unit will store samples of control unit's data points. 2. Update file continuously at discretely assignable intervals. 3. Automatically initiate upload request and then store data on hard disk. 4. Time synchronize sampling at operator specified times and intervals with sample

resolution of one minute. 5. Co-ordinate sampling with on/off state of specified point. 6. Display trend samples on work station in graphic format. Automatically scale trend graph

with minimum 60 samples of data in plot of time vs data. 2.07 HVAC CONTROL PROGRAMS

A. General: 1. Support Inch-pounds and SI (metric) units of measurement. 2. Identify each HVAC Control system.

B. Optimal Run Time: 1. Control start-up and shutdown times of HVAC equipment for both heating and cooling.


2. Base on occupancy schedules, outside air temperature, seasonal requirements, and interior room mass temperature.

3. Start-up systems by using outside air temperature, room mass temperatures, and adaptive model prediction for how long building takes to warm up or cool down under different conditions.

4. Use outside air temperature to determine early shut down with ventilation override. 5. Analyze multiple building mass sensors to determine seasonal mode and worse case

condition for each day. 6. Operator commands:

a. Define term schedule b. Add/delete fan status point. c. Add/delete outside air temperature point. d. Add/delete mass temperature point. e. Define heating/cooling parameters. f. Define mass sensor heating/cooling parameters. g. Lock/unlock program. h. Request optimal run time control summary. i. Request optimal run time mass temperature summary. j. Request HVAC point summary. k. Request HVAC saving profile summary.

7. Control Summary: a. HVAC Control system begin/end status. b. Optimal run time lock/unlock control status. c. Heating/cooling mode status. d. Optimal run time schedule. e. Start/Stop times. f. Selected mass temperature point ID. g. Optimal run time system normal start times. h. Occupancy and vacancy times. i. Optimal run time system heating/cooling mode parameters.

8. Mass temperature summary: a. Mass temperature point type and ID. b. Desired and current mass temperature values. c. Calculated warm-up/cool-down time for each mass temperature. d. Heating/cooling season limits. e. Break point temperature for cooling mode analysis.

9. HVAC point summary: a. Control system identifier and status. b. Point ID and status. c. Outside air temperature point ID and status. d. Mass temperature point ID and point. e. Calculated optimal start and stop times. f. Period start.

C. Supply Air Reset: 1. Monitor heating and cooling loads in building spaces, terminal reheat systems, both hot

deck and cold deck temperatures on dual duct and multizone systems, single zone unit discharge temperatures.

2. Adjust discharge temperatures to most energy efficient levels satisfying measured load by: a. Raising cooling temperatures to highest possible value. b. Reducing heating temperatures to lowest possible level.

3. Operator commands: a. Add/delete fan status point. b. Lock/unlock program. c. Request HVAC point summary.


d. Add/Delete discharge controller point. e. Define discharge controller parameters. f. Add/delete air flow rate. g. Define space load and load parameters. h. Request space load summary.

4. Control summary: a. HVAC control system status (begin/end). b. Supply air reset system status. c. Optimal run time system status. d. Heating and cooling loop. e. High/low limits. f. Deadband. g. Response timer. h. Reset times.

5. Space load summary: a. HVAC system status. b. Optimal run time status. c. Heating/cooling loop status. d. Space load point ID. e. Current space load point value. f. Control heat/cool limited. g. Gain factor. h. Calculated reset values. i. Fan status point ID and status. j. Control discharge temperature point ID and status. k. Space load point ID and status. l. Air flow rate point ID and status.

2.08 PROGRAMMING APPLICATION FEATURES A. Trend Point:

1. Sample up to 10 points, real or computed, with each point capable of collecting 10 samples at intervals specified in minutes, hours, days, or month.

2. Output trend logs as line graphs or bar graphs. Output graphic on terminal, with each point for line and bar graphs designated with a unique pattern, vertical scale either actual values or percent of range, and horizontal scale time base. Print trend logs up to 12 columns of one point/column.

B. Alarm Messages: 1. Allow definition of minimum of 10 messages, each having minimum length of 255

characters for each individual message. 2. Assign alarm messages to system messages including point's alarm condition, point's

off-normal condition, totalized point's warning limit, hardware elements advisories. 3. Output assigned alarm with "message requiring acknowledgement". 4. Operator commands include define, modify, or delete; output summary listing current

alarms and assignments; output summary defining assigned points. C. Weekly Scheduling:

1. Automatically initiate equipment or system commands, based on preselected time schedule for points specified.

2. Provide program times for each day of week, per point, with one minute resolution. 3. Automatically generate alarm output for points not responding to command. 4. Provide for holidays, minimum of 366 consecutive holidays. 5. Operator commands:

a. System logs and summaries. b. Start of stop point. c. Lock or unlock control or alarm input.


d. Add, delete, or modify analog limits and differentials. e. Adjust point operation position. f. Change point operational mode. g. Open or close point. h. Enable/disable, lock/unlock, or execute interlock sequence or computation profile. i. Begin or end point totalization. j. Modify totalization values and limits. k. Access or secure point. l. Begin or end HVAC or load control system. m. Modify load parameter. n. Modify demand limiting and duty cycle targets.

6. Output summary: Listing of programmed function points, associated program times, and respective day of week programmed points by software groups or time of day.

D. Interlocking: 1. Permit events to occur, based on changing condition of one or more associated master

points. 2. Binary contact, high/low limit of analog point or computed point shall be capable of being

utilized as master. Same master may monitor or command multiple slaves. 3. Operator commands:

a. Define single master/multiple master interlock process. b. Define logic interlock process. c. Lock/unlock program. d. Enable/disable interlock process. e. Execute terminate interlock process. f. Request interlock type summary.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that conditioned power supply is available to the control units and to the operator work

station. Verify that field end devices, wiring, and pneumatic tubing is installed prior to installation proceeding.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install control units and other hardware in position on permanent walls where not subject to

excessive vibration. B. Install software in control units and in operator work station. Implement all features of programs

to specified requirements and appropriate to sequence of operation. Refer to Section 23 09 93. C. Provide conduit and electrical wiring in accordance with Section 26 27 17. Electrical material

and installation shall be in accordance with appropriate requirements of Division 26. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Start and commission systems. Allow sufficient time for start-up and commissioning prior to placing control systems in permanent operation.

B. Provide service engineer to instruct Owner's representative in operation of systems plant and equipment for 3 day period.

3.04 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate complete and operating system to Owner.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC REFRIGERANT PIPING ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 23 23 00 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING


A. Piping. B. Refrigerant. C. Moisture and liquid indicators. D. Valves. E. Strainers. F. Filter-driers.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 31 00 - Access Doors and Panels. B. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating. C. Section 23 07 16 - HVAC Equipment Insulation. D. Section 23 07 19 - HVAC Piping Insulation. E. Section 23 62 13 - Packaged Air-Cooled Refrigerant Compressor and Condenser Units. F. Section 26 27 17 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AHRI 710 - Performance Rating of Liquid-Line Driers; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and

Refrigeration Institute; 2009. B. ASHRAE Std 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems; American Society of Heating,

Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2010 (ANSI/ASHRAE Std 15). C. ASME (BPV IX) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding and Brazing

Qualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2010. D. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The

American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005). E. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings For Flared Copper Tubes; The American Society of

Mechanical Engineers; 2006. F. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components; The American Society of

Mechanical Engineers; 2006. G. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2008

(ANSI/ASME B31.9). H. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron

and Steel Products; 2009. I. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009. J. ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2005. K. ASTM B280 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and

Refrigeration Field Service; 2008. L. AWS A5.8/A5.8M - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding; American

Welding Society; 2004 and errata. M. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture, Selection,

Application, and Installation; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2009.


1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Where more than one piping system material is specified ensure system components are

compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided.

B. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.5 unless indicated otherwise.

C. Liquid Indicators: 1. Use line size liquid indicators in main liquid line leaving condenser. 2. If receiver is provided, install in liquid line leaving receiver. 3. Use line size on leaving side of liquid solenoid valves.

D. Valves: 1. Use service valves on suction and discharge of compressors. 2. Use gage taps at compressor inlet and outlet. 3. Use gage taps at hot gas bypass regulators, inlet and outlet. 4. Use check valves on compressor discharge. 5. Use check valves on condenser liquid lines on multiple condenser systems.

E. Refrigerant Charging (Packed Angle) Valve: Use in liquid line between receiver shut-off valve and expansion valve.

F. Strainers: 1. Use line size strainer upstream of each automatic valve. 2. Where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers are used, use single main liquid

line strainer. G. Pressure Relief Valves: Use on ASME receivers and pipe to outdoors. H. Filter-Driers:

1. Use a filter-drier immediately ahead of liquid-line controls, such as thermostatic expansion valves, solenoid valves, and moisture indicators.

I. Receivers: 1. Use on systems with long piping runs.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide general assembly of specialties, including manufacturers catalogue

information. Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate schematic layout of system, including equipment, critical dimensions,

and sizes. D. Design Data: Submit design data indicating pipe sizing. Indicate load carrying capacity of

trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. E. Test Reports: Indicate results of leak test, acid test. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate support, connection requirements, and

isolation for servicing. G. Project Record Documents: Record exact locations of equipment and refrigeration accessories

on record drawings. H. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for changing cartridges, assembly views, spare parts

lists. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section, with minimum 3 years of documented experience.


1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ASME B31.9 for installation of piping system. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME (BPV IX) and applicable state labor

regulations. C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL, as suitable for the

purpose indicated. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver and store piping and specialties in shipping containers with labeling in place. B. Protect piping and specialties from entry of contaminating material by leaving end caps and

plugs in place until installation. C. Dehydrate and charge components such as piping and receivers, seal prior to shipment, until

connected into system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B280, H58 hard drawn or O60 soft annealed. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper. 2. Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy.

B. Copper Tube to 7/8 inch OD: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type K (A), annealed. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.26 cast copper. 2. Joints: Flared.

C. Pipe Supports and Anchors: 1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Malleable iron adjustable swivel, split ring. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 3. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 4. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. 5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel

clamp. 6. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 7. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. 8. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded. 9. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded

connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.

10. Rooftop Supports for Low-Slope Roofs: Steel pedestals with bases that rest on top of roofing membrane, not requiring any attachment to the roof structure and not penetrating the roofing assembly, with support fixtures as specified; and as follows: a. Bases: High density polypropylene. b. Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing

assembly. c. Steel Components: Stainless steel, or carbon steel hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M. d. Attachment/Support Fixtures: As recommended by manufacturer, same type as

indicated for equivalent indoor hangers and supports; corrosion resistant material. e. Height: Provide minimum clearance of 6 inches under pipe to top of roofing.

2.02 REFRIGERANT A. Refrigerant: R-410a, Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane as defined in ASHRAE Std 34.

2.03 MOISTURE AND LIQUID INDICATORS A. Manufacturers:


1. Henry Technologies: www.henrytech.com. 2. Parker Hannifin/Refrigeration and Air Conditioning: www.parker.com. 3. Sporlan Valve Company: www.sporlan.com.

B. Indicators: Single port type, UL listed, with copper or brass body, flared or solder ends, sight glass, color coded paper moisture indicator with removable element cartridge and plastic cap; for maximum temperature of 200 degrees F and maximum working pressure of 500 psi.

2.04 VALVES A. Manufacturers:

1. Hansen Technologies Corporation: www.hantech.com. 2. Henry Technologies: www.henrytech.com. 3. Danfoss Flomatic: www.flomatic.com.

B. Diaphragm Packless Valves: 1. UL listed, globe or angle pattern, forged brass body and bonnet, phosphor bronze and

stainless steel diaphragms, rising stem and handwheel, stainless steel spring, nylon seat disc, solder or flared ends, with positive backseating; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 275 degrees F.

C. Ball Valves: 1. Two piece bolted forged brass body with teflon ball seals and copper tube extensions,

brass bonnet and seal cap, chrome plated ball, stem with neoprene ring stem seals; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 300 degrees F.

D. Service Valves: 1. Forged brass body with copper stubs, brass caps, removable valve core, integral ball

check valve, flared or solder ends, for maximum pressure of 500 psi. 2.05 STRAINERS

A. Straight Line or Angle Line Type: 1. Brass or steel shell, steel cap and flange, and replaceable cartridge, with screen of

stainless steel wire or monel reinforced with brass; for maximum working pressure of 430 psi.

2.06 CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers:

1. Hansen Technologies Corporation: www.hantech.com. 2. Parker Hannifin/Refrigeration and Air Conditioning: www.parker.com. 3. Sporlan Valve Company: www.sporlan.com.

B. Globe Type: 1. Cast bronze or forged brass body, forged brass cap with neoprene seal, brass guide and

disc holder, phosphor-bronze or stainless steel spring, teflon seat disc; for maximum temperature of 300 degrees F and maximum working pressure of 425 psi.

C. Straight Through Type: 1. Brass body and disc, phosphor-bronze or stainless steel spring, neoprene seat; for

maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 200 degrees F. 2.07 FILTER-DRIERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Flow Controls Division of Emerson Electric: www.emersonflowcontrols.com. 2. Parker Hannifin/Refrigeration and Air Conditioning: www.parker.com. 3. Sporlan Valve Company: www.sporlan.com.

B. Performance: 1. Flow Capacity - Liquid Line: As indicated in schedule, minimum, rated in accordance with

AHRI 710. 2. Pressure Drop: 2 psi, maximum, when operating at full connected evaporator capacity. 3. Design Working Pressure: 350 psi, minimum.


C. Cores: Molded or loose-fill molecular sieve desiccant compatible with refrigerant, activated alumina, activated charcoal, and filtration to 40 microns, with secondary filtration to 20 microns; of construction that will not pass into refrigerant lines.

D. Construction: UL listed. 1. Replaceable Core Type: Steel shell with removable cap. 2. Connections: As specified for applicable pipe type.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install refrigeration specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Route piping in orderly manner, with plumbing parallel to building structure, and maintain

gradient. C. Install piping to conserve building space and avoid interference with use of space. D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations and locations. Slope piping one percent

in direction of oil return. E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected

equipment. F. Inserts:

1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork. 2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of

reinforced concrete beams. 3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4

inches. 4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. 5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt

with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab. G. Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.5. 2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. 3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and

adjacent work. 4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. 5. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of

connected horizontal piping. 6. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or

trapeze hangers. 7. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

H. Arrange piping to return oil to compressor. Provide traps and loops in piping, and provide double risers as required. Slope horizontal piping 0.40 percent in direction of flow.

I. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. J. Provide access to concealed valves and fittings. Coordinate size and location of access doors

with Section 08 31 00. K. Flood piping system with nitrogen when brazing. L. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building frame, brush clean, and apply

one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.


M. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 09 90 00.

N. Insulate piping and equipment; refer to Section and Section 23 07 16. O. Follow ASHRAE Std 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and for disposal of

refrigerant. P. Install flexible connectors at right angles to axial movement of compressor, parallel to

crankshaft. Q. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5. B. Pressure test system with dry nitrogen to 200 psi. Perform final tests at 27 inches vacuum and

200 psi using halide torch. Test to no leakage. 3.04 SCHEDULES

A. Hanger Spacing for Copper Tubing. 1. 1/2 inch, 5/8 inch, and 7/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. 1-1/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. 1-3/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. 1-5/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. 2-1/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. 2-5/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 1

SECTION 23 31 13

METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Duct liner. 5. Sealants and gaskets. 6. Hangers and supports. 7. Seismic-restraint devices.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts.

2. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.




A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Liners and adhesives. 2. Sealants and gaskets. 3. Seismic-restraint devices.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work.

2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure

classes. 4. Elevation of top of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and joint construction. 9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access

doors and panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building

attachment, seismic restraints, and vibration isolation.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction, building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout.

2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which duct will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. f. Perimeter moldings.



B. Welding certificates.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum

supports. 3. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."



2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.


a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. McGill AirFlow LLC. c. SEMCO LLC. d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.

B. Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and diameter of the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor dimension).

C. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

E. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90 (Z275). 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.









C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts.

D. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article.

E. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view.

F. Factory- or Shop-Applied Antimicrobial Coating:

1. Apply to the surface of sheet metal that will form the interior surface of the duct. An untreated clear coating shall be applied to the exterior surface.

2. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems.

3. Coating containing the antimicrobial compound shall have a hardness of 2H, minimum, when tested according to ASTM D 3363.

4. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

5. Shop-Applied Coating Color: White. 6. Antimicrobial coating on sheet metal is not required for duct containing liner

treated with antimicrobial coating.

G. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

H. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).

2.4 DUCT LINER

A. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."


a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.






c. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning.

1) Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.039 W/m x K) at 75 deg F (24 deg C) mean temperature.

2) Type II, Rigid: 0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.033 W/m x K) at 75 deg F (24 deg C) mean temperature.

2. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion-resistant coating. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems.

3. Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916.

B. Insulation Pins and Washers:

1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch- (3.5-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) galvanized carbon-steel washer.

2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm-) thick galvanized steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter.

C. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 7-11, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."

1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.

2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing.

3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive. 4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure

butted-edge overlapping. 5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners

of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary.

6. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm (12.7 m/s).

7. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches (100 mm) from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches (300 mm) transversely; at 3 inches (75 mm) from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches (450 mm) longitudinally.

8. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations:





a. Fan discharges. b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct. c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher

than 2500 fpm (12.7 m/s) or where indicated.

9. Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform distance from outer shell without compressing insulation.

a. Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch (2.4-mm) diameter, with an overall open area of 23 percent.

10. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.

2.5 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.

2. Tape Width: 6 inches (152 mm). 3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive and negative. 7. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 93 deg C). 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare),

stainless steel, or aluminum. 10. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less

when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 11. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.



3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare),

stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.

D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. 6. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less

when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.

F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

H. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.



3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate.

2.7 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. B-line, an Eaton business. 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 3. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International.

B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

C. Channel Support System: Shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces and with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end. Include matching components and corrosion-resistant coating.

D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603, galvanized-steel cables with end connections made of cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with an automatic-locking and clamping device or double-cable clips.

E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod.

F. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.







B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.

J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.

L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.



E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.

3.3 ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMERCIAL KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCT

A. Install commercial kitchen hood exhaust ducts without dips and traps that may hold grease, and sloped a minimum of 2 percent to drain grease back to the hood.

B. Install fire-rated access panel assemblies at each change in direction and at maximum intervals of 12 feet (3.7 m) in horizontal ducts, and at every floor for vertical ducts, or as indicated on Drawings.

C. Do not penetrate fire-rated assemblies except as allowed by applicable building codes and authorities having jurisdiction.

3.4 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A. 3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 4. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class A. 5. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg (500 Pa)

and Lower: Seal Class B. 6. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch

wg (500 Pa): Seal Class A. 7. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 8. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B. 9. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg (500 Pa)

and Lower: Seal Class C. 10. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch

wg (500 Pa): Seal Class B. 11. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B. 12. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.

3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."



B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and

completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate

concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate

concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches (610 mm) of each elbow and within 48 inches (1200 mm) of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet (5 m).

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.6 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT-DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against seismic forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems."

1. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet (12 m) o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet (24 m) o.c.

2. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet (3.7 m).

B. Select seismic-restraint devices with capacities adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads.

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

D. Install cable restraints on ducts that are suspended with vibration isolators.

E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.



F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing and restraints to structure, to flanges of beams, to upper truss chords of bar joists, or to concrete members.

G. Drilling for and Setting Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcement or embedded items during drilling. Notify the Architect if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior applications and stainless-steel

anchors for applications exposed to weather.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.8 PAINTING

A. Paint exposed metal ducts and grilles, apply two coats of paint (Selected by Architect) over a compatible galvanized steel primer. All metal ducts specified to be painted shall be paint grip finish.

B. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

3.9 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Use service openings for entry and inspection.

1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for



insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.

C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.

2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building.

D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling

supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.

3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.

4. Coils and related components. 5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling

plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.

E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure.

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.

4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.

5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins.

6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures. 7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if

fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.



3.10 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows:

B. Supply Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Constant-Volume Rooftop units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg (500 Pa). b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 12.

C. Return Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Packaged Air Conditioning Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg (500 Pa). b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 12.

D. Exhaust Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:

a. Pressure Class: Negative 1-inch wg (250 Pa). b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A if negative pressure, and A if positive

pressure. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 12.

2. Ducts Connected to Commercial Kitchen Hoods: Comply with NFPA 96.

a. Exposed to View: Type 304, stainless-steel sheet, No. 4 finish. b. Concealed: Carbon-steel sheet. c. Welded seams and joints. d. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 6-inch wg (1000 Pa). e. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: Welded seams, joints, and penetrations.

E. Outdoor-Air (Not Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Rooftop Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg (250 Pa). b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 12.



F. Intermediate Reinforcement:

1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel. G. Liner: Line the following in additions to external duct wrap.

1. Return Air Ducts 6’ nearest AC unit: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch (25 mm) thick. 2. Supply air Ducts 6’ nearest AC unit: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch (25 mm) thick.

H. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.

b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s):

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two

vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

c. Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two

vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two

vanes. c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."



a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments.

1) Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow.

2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow.

3) Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow.

4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.

b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches (305 mm) and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.

c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches (356 mm) and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam.

I. Branch Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.

2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.

a. Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower: 90-degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): Conical tap. c. Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher: 45-degree lateral.

END OF SECTION 233113

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 23 33 00 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 23 33 00

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers. 2. Manual volume dampers. 3. Control dampers. 4. Fire dampers. 5. Combination fire and smoke dampers. 6. Turning vanes. 7. Duct-mounted access doors. 8. Flexible connectors. 9. Flexible ducts.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

B. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

2.3 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Price or equal.

B. Description: Gravity balanced.



C. Maximum Air Velocity: 1000 fpm.

D. Maximum System Pressure: 1-inch wg.

E. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.05-inch- with welded corners or mechanically attached and mounting flange.

F. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, center pivoted, off-center pivoted, end pivoted, maximum 6-inch width, with sealed edges.

G. Blade Action: Parallel.

H. Blade Seals: Felt.

I. Blade Axles: 1. Material: Nonferrous metal. 2. Diameter: 0.20 inch.

J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

L. Bearings: Steel ball.

M. Accessories: 1. 90-degree stops.

2.4 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Price or equal.

2. Standard leakage rating. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames:

a. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. b. Mitered and welded corners. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

5. Blades: a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick.

6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 7. Bearings:

a. Oil-impregnated bronze. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full

length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.



2.5 FIRE DAMPERS


B. Type: Static; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.

C. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 and 3 hours.

D. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel. 1. Minimum Thickness: 0.138 inch thick, as indicated, and of length to suit application. 2. Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter

mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must comply with sleeve requirements.

F. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

G. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.024-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.

H. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.

I. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links.

2.6 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS


B. Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 and UL 555S by an NRTL.

C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 2000-fpm velocity.

D. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 and 3 hours.

E. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange.

F. Heat-Responsive Device: Electric resettable device and switch package, factory installed, rated.

G. Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single-point connection.

H. Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking, 0.063-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel.

I. Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.

J. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.039-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall or floor application.




K. Master control panel for use in dynamic smoke-management systems.

L. Damper Motors: Modulating or two-position action.

2.7 TURNING VANES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Titus or equal.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. 1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated

faces and fibrous-glass fill.

C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

D. Vane Construction: Double wall.

2.8 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS


B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2 (7-2M), "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."

2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

2.10 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Thermaflex 2. ATCO






B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized vapor-barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg positive and 0.5-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F. 4. Insulation R-Value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

2.11 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts.

B. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel. 1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.

D. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

E. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

F. Install fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing.


CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 23 34 16 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 23 34 16 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS


A. Airfoil centrifugal fans. B. Radial centrifugal fans. C. Inline centrifugal fans. D. Motors and drives. E. Fan accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 23 05 13 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 07 13 - Duct Insulation. C. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Backdraft dampers.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ABMA STD 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; American Bearing

Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 1990 (Reapproved 2008). B. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.;

2010. C. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating; Air

Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2007 (ANSI/AMCA 210, same as ANSI/ASHRAE 51).

D. AMCA (DIR) - Products Licensed Under AMCA International Certified Ratings Program; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; http://www.amca.org/licenses/search.aspx.

E. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2008.

F. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2006.

G. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2009, Revision 1 - 2010.

H. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Performance Ratings: Determined in accordance with AMCA 210 and bearing the AMCA

Certified Rating Seal. B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal. C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99. D. Performance Base: Sea level conditions. E. Temperature Limit: Maximum 300 degrees F. F. Static and Dynamic Balance: Eliminate vibration or noise transmission to occupied areas.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on centrifugal fans and accessories including fan curves with

specified operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.


C. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly of centrifugal fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include complete installation instructions. E. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare

parts list, and wiring diagrams. F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Fan Belts: One set for each individual fan.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products

specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories

Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering.

B. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points. C. Protect motors, shafts, and bearings from weather and construction dust.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Permanent fans may be used for ventilation during construction only after ductwork is clean,

filters are in place, bearings have been lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Greenheck: www.greenheck.com B. ACME Engineering and Manufacturing Corporation: www.acmefan.com. C. Loren Cook Company: www.lorencook.com. D. PennBarry: www.pennbarry.com.

2.02 WHEEL AND INLET A. Airfoil Wheel: Steel construction with smooth curved inlet flange, heavy back plate die formed

hollow airfoil shaped blades continuously welded at tip flange, and back plate; cast iron or cast steel hub riveted to back plate and keyed to shaft with set screws.

2.03 HOUSING A. Heavy gage steel, spot welded for AMCA 99 Class I and II fans, and continuously welded for

Class III, adequately braced, designed to minimize turbulence with spun inlet bell and shaped cut

B. Factory finish before assembly to manufacturer's standard. For fans handling air downstream of humidifiers, provide two additional coats of paint. Prime coating on aluminum parts is not required.

C. Provide bolted construction with horizontal flanged split housing, where indicated. 2.04 BEARINGS AND DRIVES

A. Bearings: Heavy duty pillow block type, selfgreasing ball bearings, with ABMA 9 life at 50,000 hours.

B. Shafts: Hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with keyway, protectively coated with lubricating oil, and shaft guard.


C. Drive: Cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, keyed. Variable and adjustable pitch sheaves for motors 15 hp and under, selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid Fixed sheave for 20 hp and over, matched belts, and drive rated as recommended by manufacturer or minimum 1.5 times nameplate rating of the motor.

D. Belt Guard: Fabricate to SMACNA Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; 0.106 inch thick, 3/4 inch diamond mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation, with provision for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place.

2.05 INLINE FANS A. Fan Unit: In-line, belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, outlet guide vanes,

fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, mounting brackets, and accessories.

B. Housing: Split, spun aluminum with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet flanges, and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.

C. Direct-Driven Units: Motor encased in housing outside of airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing.

D. Belt-Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside of fan housing.

E. Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub. 2.06 ACCESSORIES

A. Fixed Inlet Vanes: Steel construction with fixed cantilevered inlet guide vanes welded to inlet bell.

B. Adjustable Inlet Vanes: Steel construction with blades supported at both ends with two permanently lubricated bearings, variable mechanism out of air stream terminating in single control lever with control shaft for double width fans and locking quadrant.

C. Discharge Dampers: Parallel blade heavy duty steel damper assembly with blades constructed of two plates formed around and welded to shaft, channel frame, sealed ball bearings, with blades linked out of air stream to single control lever.

D. Inlet/Outlet Screens: Galvanized steel welded grid. E. Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll, with quick opening latches and gaskets. F. Scroll Drain: 1/2 inch steel pipe coupling welded to low point of fan scroll.


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads. Refer to Section 23 05 48. C. Install flexible connections between fan inlet and discharge ductwork; refer to Section 23 33 00.

Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and fan while running.

D. Install fan restraining snubbers; refer to Section 23 05 48. Adjust snubbers to prevent tension in flexible connectors when fan is operating.

E. Provide fixed sheaves required for final air balance. F. Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed. G. Pipe scroll drains to nearest floor drain. H. Provide backdraft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans and as indicated; refer to Section 23

33 00.


3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan

wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.

5. Adjust belt tension. 6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 9. Refer to Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and balancing

procedures. 10. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC HVAC POWER VENTILATORS ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 23 34 23 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 23 34 23 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS


A. Roof exhausters. B. Ceiling exhaust fans.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 23 05 13 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Backdraft dampers.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.;

2010. B. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating; Air

Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2007 (ANSI/AMCA 210, same as ANSI/ASHRAE 51).

C. AMCA (DIR) - [Directory of] Products Licensed Under AMCA International Certified Ratings Program; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; http://www.amca.org/licenses/search.aspx.

D. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2008.

E. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2006.

F. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2009, Revision 1 - 2010.

G. NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations; National Fire Protection Association; 2011.

H. UL 705 - Power Ventilators; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on fans and accessories including fan curves with specified

operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions. D. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare

parts list, and wiring diagrams. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Fan Belts: One set for each individual fan.


specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering.

B. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.


C. Protect motors, shafts, and bearings from weather and construction dust. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Permanent ventilators may be used for ventilation during construction only after ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings have been lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.


A. Greenheck: www.greenheck.com. B. Loren Cook Company: www.lorencook.com. C. PennBarry: www.pennbarry.com.

2.02 POWER VENTILATORS - GENERAL A. Performance Ratings: Determined in accordance with AMCA 210 and bearing the AMCA

Certified Rating Seal. B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bearing AMCA Certified Sound Rating

Seal. C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99. D. UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with

UL 705. E. Electrical Components: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for

the purpose specified and indicated. F. Kitchen Range Hood Exhaust Fans: Comply with requirements of NFPA 96 and UL762.

2.03 ROOF EXHAUSTERS A. Performance Ratings:

1. Motor: Refer to Section 23 05 13. B. Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven as indicated, with spun aluminum housing; resilient mounted

motor; 1/2 inch mesh, 0.62 inch thick aluminum wire birdscreen; square base to suit roof curb with continuous curb gaskets.

C. Roof Curb: 14 inch high self-flashing of galvanized steel with continuously welded seams, built-in cant strips, interior baffle with acoustic insulation, curb bottom, and factory installed nailer strip.

D. Disconnect Switch: Factory wired, non-fusible, in housing for thermal overload protected motor and wall mounted solid state speed controller.

E. Backdraft Damper: Gravity actuated, aluminum multiple blade construction, felt edged with offset hinge pin, nylon bearings, and blades linked.

F. Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable and adjustable pitch motor sheave selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position; fan shaft with self-aligning pre-lubricated ball bearings.

G. Kitchen Range Hood Exhaust Fans: Comply with requirements of NFPA 96 and UL762.

2.04 CABINET AND CEILING EXHAUST FANS A. Performance Ratings:

1. Motor: Refer to Section 23 05 13. B. Centrifugal Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven with galvanized steel housing lined with acoustic

insulation, resilient mounted motor, gravity backdraft damper in discharge.


C. Disconnect Switch: Cord and plug in housing for thermal overload protected motor and wall mounted solid state speed controller.

D. Grille: Molded white plastic. E. Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable and

adjustable pitch motor sheaves selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position; fan shaft with self-aligning pre-lubricated ball bearings.

2.05 PROPELLER FANS

A. Housing: Galvanized-steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with baked-enamel finish coat applied after assembly.

B. Fan Wheel: Replaceable, cast-aluminum, airfoil blades fastened to cast-aluminum hub; factory set pitch angle of blades.

C. Fan Drive: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing.

D. Fan Drive: 1. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings

E. Accessories: See Construction Documents.

F. Capacities and Characteristics: See Construction Documents.


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure roof exhausters with cadmium plated steel lag screws to roof curb. C. Extend ducts to roof exhausters into roof curb. Counter flash duct to roof opening. D. Hung Cabinet Fans:

1. Install fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads. 2. Install flexible connections specified in Section 23 33 00 between fan and ductwork.

Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and fan while running.

E. Provide sheaves required for final air balance. F. Install backdraft dampers on inlet to roof and wall exhausters. G. Provide backdraft dampers on outlet from cabinet and ceiling exhauster fans and as indicated.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Equipment Startup Checks:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan

wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.


5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 7. Disable automatic temperature-control operators.

B. Starting Procedures: 1. Energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm. 2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.

C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

E. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators. F. Refer to "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. G. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow. H. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements

are made. I. On completion of installation, internally clean fans according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum fan wheel and cabinet. J. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed finish.

Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes. END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC AIR CURTAINS ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 23 34 33 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 23 34 33 AIR CURTAINS


A. Air curtains. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AMCA 220 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Air Curtains for Aerodynamic Performance Ratings; 2005.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature for products specified in this section;

indicate options specified. 1. Manufacturer's instructions: Printed installation instructions for each product specified.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate installation and connection details for air curtains. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's printed instructions for operating and

maintaining air curtain components. E. Warranty Documents: Issued and executed by manufacturer.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products of this section in manufacturer's unopened packaging until installation. B. Maintain dry, heated storage area for products of this section until installation of products.

1.05 WARRANTY A. Supply manufacturer's standard warranty against defects in product workmanship and

materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Berner International Corp.: www.berner.com. B. MARS Air Systems: www.marsair.com.

2.02 AIR CURTAINS A. Product Description: Self-contained electrically-operated air curtain for mounting at head of

door openings. 1. Maximum Mounting Height: 7 feet. 2. Maximum Door Width: 6 feet.

B. Housing: 1. Material: Galvanized steel. 2. Finish: Painted epoxy. 3. Color: White.

C. Blower Assembly: Heavy-duty motor;. forward curved centrifugal fans, double inlet, double width.

D. Performance: Tested in accordance with AMCA 220. 1. Average Outlet Velocity: 1400 feet per minute. 2. Air Flow: 1900 cubic feet per minute.

a. Volume Adjustment: Discharge dampers. E. Control: ON/OFF control; air curtain turns on when door is opened and off when door is closed. F. Operating Noise Level: 54 dBA.

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC AIR CURTAINS ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 23 34 33 - 2 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

1. Measured 10 feet from unit. G. No heat.


A. Verify that required utilities are in correct location and are of correct capacities for specified products.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces have sufficient strength to support units. C. Verify that space is ready for installation of units. D. Verify clearances required to maintain the units and to protect combustible materials.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install air curtains in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's printed installation

instructions. B. Maintain clearances required to maintain the units and to protect combustible materials. C. Ensure proper connection to utilities.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 23 37 00 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS


A. Diffusers. B. Registers/grilles. C. Louvers. D. Roof hoods. E. Goosenecks.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Painting of ducts visible behind outlets and inlets.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; Air Movement and Control

Association International, Inc.; 2007. B. ASHRAE Std 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets;

American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2006. C. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and

Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as

to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level.

C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70. B. Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500-L.


specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Krueger: www.krueger-hvac.com. B. Price Industries: www.price-hvac.com. C. Titus: www.titus-hvac.com. D. Tuttle and Bailey: www.tuttleandbailey.com.

2.02 RECTANGULAR LOUVER FACE FACE CEILING DIFFUSERS (S1/S2) A. Basis of Design Product: Titus TDC. B. Type: Square and rectangular, multi-louvered diffuser to discharge air in one way, two way,

three way or four way pattern as scheduled with sectorizing baffles where indicated. C. Frame: Inverted T-bar type. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster frame and ceiling frame. D. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel off-white finish. E. Accessories: SEE PLANS.


2.03 ARCHITECTURL ROUND PLAQUE CEILINGDIFFUSERS (S3) A. Basis of Design Product: Titus TMR. B. Type: Round plaque, surface mounted three cones. C. Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions with factory baked enamel finish. D. Color: To be selected by Contracting Officer's Representative from manufacturer's standard

range. E. Round neck, with damper, back pan thermal isolation.

2.04 CEILING EGG CRATE EXHAUST AND RETURN GRILLES (R1, E1, T1) A. Basis of Design Product: Titus Model 50F. B. Type: Egg crate style face consisting of 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 inch grid core. C. Fabrication: Grid core consists of aluminum with baked enamel finish. D. Color: To be selected by Contracting Officer's Representative from manufacturer's standard

range. E. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting. F. Accessories: Provide integral, gang & face operated opposed blade damper and plaster frame

2.05 WALL SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES (S5) A. Basis of Design Product: Titus 300F B. Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch

maximum spacing with spring or other device to set blades, vertical face, double deflection. C. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket. D. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, steel and

aluminum with 20 gage minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel finish.

E. Color: To be selected by Contracting Officer's Representative from manufacturer's standard range.

F. Damper: Integral, gang-operated opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face.

2.06 WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES (R2, E2, T2) A. Basis of Design Product: Titus 355ZRL B. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 1/2" inch maximum spacing, with spring or

other device to set blades, vertical face. C. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting. D. Fabrication: Steel frames and blades, with factory baked enamel finish. E. Color: To be selected by Contracting Officer's Representative from manufacturer's standard

range. F. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable

from face. 2.07 LOUVERS

A. Type: 4 inch deep with blades on 45 degree slope with center baffle and return bend, heavy channel frame, 1/2 inch square mesh screen over exhaust and 1/2 inch square mesh screen over intake.

B. Fabrication: 16 gage thick galvanized steel welded assembly, with factory prime coat finish. C. Color: To be selected by Contracting Officer's Representative from manufacturer's standard

range. D. Mounting: Furnish with interior flat flange for installation.


2.08 GOOSENECKS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible, of minimum 18 gage galvanized steel. B. Mount on minimum 12 inch high curb base where size exceeds 9 x 9 inch.


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform

with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite

whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly. E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Section 09 90 00.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC AIR DIFFUSERS ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 23 37 13.13 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

AIR DIFFUSERS 233713.13 Page 1 of 2

SECTION 23 37 13.13

AIR DIFFUSERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers. 2. Perforated diffusers. 3. Louver face diffusers.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and

performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings. 2. Diffuser Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number,

size, and accessories furnished.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECTANGULAR AND SQUARE CEILING DIFFUSERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company. 2. Carnes Company. 3. Krueger. 4. Titus. 5. Tuttle & Bailey.

B. Material: Steel.

C. Finish: Baked enamel, white.

2.2 PERFORATED DIFFUSERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company. 2. Carnes Company. 3. Krueger. 4. Titus. 5. Tuttle & Bailey.













CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC AIR DIFFUSERS ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 23 37 13.13 - 2 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

AIR DIFFUSERS 233713.13 Page 2 of 2

B. Material: Steel backpan and pattern controllers, with steel face.


2.3 LOUVER FACE DIFFUSERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company. 2. Carnes Company. 3. Titus. 4. Tuttle & Bailey.

B. Material: Steel.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where registers and grilles are installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install registers and grilles level and plumb.

B. Outlets and Inlets Locations: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install registers and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust registers and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.

END OF SECTION 23 37 13.13






CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC REGISTERS AND GRILLES ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 23 37 13.23 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 23 37 13.23

AIR REGISTERS AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Registers and grilles.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and

performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings. 2. Register and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity,

model number, size, and accessories furnished.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 REGISTERS & GRILLES

A. Fixed Face Register & Grille: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company. b. Carnes Company. c. Krueger. d. Titus. e. Tuttle & Bailey.

2. Material: Steel. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where registers and grilles are installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install registers and grilles level and plumb.







CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC REGISTERS AND GRILLES ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 23 37 13.23 - 2 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

B. Outlets and Inlets Locations: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install registers and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust registers and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.

END OF SECTION 23 37 13.23

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC COMMERCIAL KITCHEN HOODS ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 23 38 13 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 23 38 13 COMMERCIAL KITCHEN HOODS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes Type I and Type II commercial kitchen hoods.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Listed Hood: A hood, factory fabricated and tested for compliance with UL 710 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standard Hood: A hood, usually field fabricated, which complies with design, construction, and performance criteria of applicable national and local codes.

C. Type I Hood: A hood designed for grease exhaust applications.

D. Type II Hood: A hood designed for heat and steam removal and for other non-grease applications.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Kitchen hoods. 2. Filters/baffles. 3. Fire-suppression systems. 4. Lighting fixtures.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

1. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot (1:50). 2. Show plan view, elevation view, sections, roughing-in dimensions, service requirements,

duct connection sizes, and attachments to other work. 3. Show cooking equipment plan and elevation to confirm minimum code-required overhang. 4. Indicate performance, exhaust and makeup air airflow, and pressure loss at actual

Project-site elevation. 5. Show water-supply and drain piping connections. 6. Show control cabinets. 7. Show fire-protection cylinders, piping, actuation devices, and manual control devices.


8. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

9. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints. 10. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 11. Piping Diagrams: Detail fire-suppression piping and components and differentiate

between manufacturer-installed and field-installed piping. Include roughing-in requirements for drain connections. Show cooking equipment plan and elevation to illustrate fire-suppression nozzle locations.

a. Piping Diagram Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot (1:50).

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Coordination Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot (1:50). 2. Suspended ceiling assembly components. 3. Structural members to which equipment will be attached. 4. Roof framing and support members for duct penetrations. 5. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. f. Moldings on hoods and accessory equipment.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that commercial kitchen hoods, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

F. Field quality-control test reports.



A. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D 1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports; and AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for joint and seam welding.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate equipment layout and installation with adjacent Work, including lighting fixtures, HVAC equipment, plumbing, and fire-suppression system components.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Furnish one complete set(s) of grease filters/baffles.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HOOD MATERIALS

A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.050 inch (1.3 mm). 2. Finish: Comply with SSINA's "Finishes for Stainless Steel" for recommendations for

applying and designating finishes.

a. Finish shall be free from tool and die marks and stretch lines and shall have uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Grain shall run with long dimension of each piece.

3. Concealed Stainless-Steel Surfaces: ASTM A 480/A 480M, No. 2B finish (bright, cold-rolled, unpolished finish).

4. Exposed Surfaces: ASTM A 480/A 480M, No. 3 finish (intermediate polished surface). 5. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign

matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

B. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, cold-rolled sheets; commercial quality; with oiled, exposed matte finish.


1. Minimum Thickness: 0.043 inch (1.09 mm).

C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation.

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 inch (1.32 mm).

D. Zinc-Coated Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated according to ASTM A 123/A 123M requirements.

E. Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. Elastomeric sealant shall be NSF certified for commercial kitchen hood application. Sealants, when cured and washed, shall comply with requirements in 21 CFR, Section 177.2600, for use in areas that come in contact with food.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene, in diameter larger than joint width.

F. Sound Dampening: NSF-certified, nonabsorbent, hard-drying, sound-deadening compound for permanent adhesion to metal in minimum 1/8-inch (3-mm) thickness that does not chip, flake, or blister.

G. Gaskets: NSF certified for end-use application indicated; of resilient rubber, neoprene, or PVC that is nontoxic, stable, odorless, nonabsorbent, and unaffected by exposure to foods and cleaning compounds, and that passes testing according to UL 710.

2.2 GENERAL HOOD FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Welding: Use welding rod of same composition as metal being welded. Use methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metal. Make ductile welds free of mechanical imperfections such as gas holes, pits, or cracks.

1. Welded Butt Joints: Full-penetration welds for full-joint length. Make joints flat, continuous, and homogenous with sheet metal without relying on straps under seams, filling in with solder, or spot welding.

2. Grind exposed welded joints flush with adjoining material and polish to match adjoining surfaces.

3. Where fasteners are welded to underside of equipment, finish reverse side of weld smooth and flush.

4. Coat concealed stainless-steel welded joints with metallic-based paint to prevent corrosion.

5. After zinc-coated steel is welded, clean welds and abraded areas and apply SSPC-Paint 20, high-zinc-dust-content, galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

B. For metal butt joints, comply with SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines."

C. Where stainless steel is joined to a dissimilar metal, use stainless-steel welding material or fastening devices.

D. Form metal with break bends that are not flaky, scaly, or cracked in appearance; where breaks mar uniform surface appearance of material, remove marks by grinding, polishing, and finishing.


E. Sheared Metal Edges: Finish free of burrs, fins, and irregular projections.

F. In food zones, as defined in NSF, fabricate surfaces free from exposed fasteners.

G. Cap exposed fastener threads, including those inside cabinets, with stainless-steel lock washers and stainless-steel cap (acorn) nuts.

H. Fabricate pipe slots on equipment with turned-up edges sized to accommodate service and utility lines and mechanical connections.

I. Fabricate enclosures, including panels, housings, and skirts, to conceal service lines, operating components, and mechanical and electrical devices including those inside cabinets, unless otherwise indicated.

J. Fabricate seismic restraints according to SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines," Appendix 1, "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Kitchen Equipment."

K. Fabricate equipment edges and backsplashes according to SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines."

L. Fabricate enclosure panels to ceiling and wall as follows:

1. Fabricate panels on all exposed side(s) with same material as hood, and extend from ceiling to top of hood canopy and from canopy to wall.

2. Wall Offset Spacer: Minimum of 3 inches (75 mm). 3. Wall Shelves and Overshelves: Fabricate according to SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment

Fabrication Guidelines," with minimum 0.0625-inch- (1.58-mm-) thick, stainless-steel shelf tops.

2.3 TYPE I EXHAUST HOOD FABRICATION

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

C. Basis-of-Design Product: The hood provide shall be CaptiveAire model BD-2.

D. Weld all joints exposed to grease with continuous welds, and make filters/baffles or grease extractors and makeup air diffusers easily accessible for cleaning.

1. Fabricate hoods according to NSF 2, "Food Equipment." 2. Hoods shall be listed and labeled, according to UL 710, by a testing agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Hoods shall be designed, fabricated, and installed according to NFPA 96. 4. Include access panels as required for access to fire dampers and fusible links. 5. Duct Collars: Minimum 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick steel at least 3 inches (75 mm) long,

continuously welded to top of hood and at corners. Fabricate a collar with a 0.5-inch- (13-mm-) wide duct flange.

6. Duct-Collar Fire Dampers: Collar and damper shall comply with UL 710 testing and listing required for the entire hood.


a. Collar: Minimum 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick stainless steel, at least 3 inches (75 mm) long, continuously welded to top of hood and at corners. Fabricate a collar with a minimum 0.5-inch- (13-mm-) wide duct flange.

b. Blades: Minimum 0.1046-inch- (2.7-mm-) thick stainless steel, counterbalanced to remain closed after actuation.

c. Blade Pivot and Spring: Stainless steel. d. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 212 deg F (100 deg C) rated.

E. Hood Configuration: Exhaust 1. Makeup air shall be introduced through the rooftop air conditioning equipment.

F. Hood Style: See Schedules

G. Filters/Baffles: Removable, stainless-steel. Fabricate stainless steel for filter frame and removable collection cup and pitched trough. Exposed surfaces shall be pitched to drain to collection cup. Filters/baffles shall be tested according to UL 1046, "Grease Filters for Exhaust Ducts," by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

H. Lighting Fixtures: Surface-mounted incandescent fixtures and lamps with lenses sealed vapor-tight. Wiring shall be installed in conduit on hood exterior. Number and location of fixtures shall provide a minimum of 70 fc (753 lx) at 30 inches (762 mm) above finished floor.

1. Light switches shall be mounted on front panel of hood canopy or in hood control panel. 2. Lighting Fixtures: Incandescent complying with UL 1598.

I. Hood Controls: Hood or Wall-mounting control cabinet, factory wired to control groups of adjacent hoods, and fabricated of stainless steel.

1. Exhaust Fan: On-off switches shall start and stop the exhaust fan. Interlock exhaust fan with fire-suppression system to operate fan(s) during fire-suppression-agent release and to remain in operation until manually stopped. Include red pilot light to indicate fan operation. Motor starters shall comply with Division 26 Section "Enclosed Controllers."

2. Photocell and Temperature Control: Cycle makeup air and exhaust-air fans on and off, based on temperature at hood discharge and opacity of smoke in hood. Interlock fan control with fire-suppression system to operate during fire-suppression-agent release and to remain in operation until manually stopped. Provide air-purge fan and conduit to photocell and reflector to avoid grease accumulation that will negatively affect performance of system.

3. Photocell and Temperature Control: Change speed (off, low, and high) of makeup air and exhaust-air fans with speed switch, based on temperature at hood discharge and opacity of smoke in hood. Interlock fan control with fire-suppression system to operate at high speed during fire-suppression-agent release and to remain in high-speed operation until manually stopped. Provide air-purge fan and conduit to photocell and reflector to avoid grease accumulation that will negatively affect performance of system. Controller shall limit exhaust-duct velocity between <Insert minimum velocity> and <Insert maximum velocity>. Controller shall limit supply quantity to <Insert minimum quantity> for proper operation of makeup air unit.

4. Photocell and Temperature Control: Vary speed of makeup air and exhaust-air fans with variable-frequency controllers, based on temperature at hood discharge and opacity of smoke in hood. Interlock fan control with fire-suppression system to operate at high speed during fire-suppression-agent release and to remain in high-speed operation until manually stopped. Provide air-purge fan and conduit to photocell and reflector to avoid grease accumulation that will negatively affect performance of system. Controller shall limit exhaust-duct velocity between <Insert minimum velocity> and <Insert maximum


velocity>. Controller shall limit supply quantity to <Insert minimum quantity> for proper operation of makeup air unit.

5. High-Temperature Control: Alarm shall sound and cooking equipment shall shut down before hood discharge temperature rises to actuation temperature of fire-suppression system.

J. Capacities and Characteristics: See schedules.

2.4 TYPE II EXHAUST HOOD FABRICATION



C. Basis-of-Design Product: Hood shall be Captive-Aire Model ND-2 as scheduled.

D. Fabricate hoods according to NSF 2, "Food Equipment."

E. Fabricate hoods to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards: Metal and Flexible."

F. Hood Configuration: Exhaust.

G. Hood Type: Heat and vapor and Condensate removal.

H. Hood Style: See Schedule

I. Condensate Hood Baffles: Removable, stainless-steel baffles to drain into a hood drain trough, and stainless-steel drain piping.

J. Capacities and Characteristics: See Schedules

2.5 WET-CHEMICAL FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEM



C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Ansul Incorporated; a Tyco International Ltd. Company. 2. Kidde Fire Systems. 3. Pyro Chem.

D. Description: Engineered distribution piping designed for automatic detection and release or manual release of fire-suppression agent by hood operator. Fire-suppression system shall be


listed and labeled for complying with NFPA 17A, "Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems," by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Steel Pipe, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade A, Schedule 40, plain ends.

2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300. 3. Piping, fusible links and release mechanism, tank containing the suppression agent, and

controls shall be factory installed. Controls shall be in stainless-steel control cabinet mounted on wall. Furnish manual pull station for wall mounting. Exposed piping shall be covered with chrome-plated aluminum tubing. Exposed fittings shall be chrome plated.

4. Liquid Extinguishing Agent: Noncorrosive, low-pH liquid. 5. Furnish electric-operated gas shutoff valve with clearly marked open and closed indicator

for field installation. 6. Fire-suppression system controls shall be integrated with controls for fans, lights, and fuel

supply and located in a single cabinet for each group of hoods immediately adjacent. 7. Wiring shall have color-coded, numbered terminal blocks and grounding bar. Spare

terminals for fire alarm, optional wiring to start fan with fire alarm, red pilot light to indicate fan operation, and control switches shall all be factory wired in control cabinet with relays or starters. Include spare terminals for fire alarm, and wiring to start fan with fire alarm.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Complete field assembly of hoods where required.

1. Make closed butt and contact joints that do not require filler. 2. Grind field welds on stainless-steel equipment smooth, and polish to match adjacent

finish. Comply with welding requirements in Part 2 "General Hood Fabrication Requirements" Article.

B. Install hoods and associated services with clearances and access for maintaining, cleaning, and servicing hoods, filters/baffles, grease extractor, and fire-suppression systems according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Make cutouts in hoods where required to run service lines and to make final connections, and seal openings according to UL 1978.

D. Securely anchor and attach items and accessories to walls, floors, or bases with stainless-steel fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.


E. Install hoods to operate free from vibration.

F. Install seismic restraints according to SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines," Appendix 1, "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Kitchen Equipment."

G. Install trim strips and similar items requiring fasteners in a bed of sealant. Fasten with stainless-steel fasteners at 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. maximum.

H. Install sealant in joints between equipment and abutting surfaces with continuous joint backing, unless otherwise indicated. Provide airtight, watertight, vermin-proof, sanitary joints.

I. Install lamps, with maximum recommended wattage, in equipment with integral lighting.

J. Set initial temperatures, and calibrate sensors.

K. Set field-adjustable switches.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping with clearance to allow service and maintenance.

C. Install reduced-pressure backflow preventer on washer-water supply. Backflow preventer is specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

D. Install washer-water drain piping full size of hood connection to an adjacent floor drain or floor sink.

E. Makeup Water Connection: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for valves and accessories on piping connections to water-cooled units.

F. Connect ducts according to requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." Install flexible connectors on makeup air supply duct. Weld exhaust-duct connections with continuous liquidtight joint.

G. Install fire-suppression piping for remote-mounted suppression systems according to NFPA 17A, "Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems."

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.

C. Perform tests and inspections.


1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Test each equipment item for proper operation. Repair or replace equipment that is defective, including units that operate below required capacity or that operate with excessive noise or vibration.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3. Test water, drain, gas, and liquid-carrying components for leaks. Repair or replace leaking components.

4. Perform hood performance tests required by authorities having jurisdiction. 5. Perform fire-suppression system performance tests required by authorities having

jurisdiction.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain commercial kitchen hoods. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC HIGH INTENSITY GAS FIRED RADIANT HEATERS ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 23 55 23.16 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 23 55 23.16

HIGH-INTENSITY, GAS-FIRED, RADIANT HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. High-intensity, infrared, gas-fired, radiant heaters.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and

furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Detail fabrication and assembly of high-intensity, gas-fired, radiant heaters, as well as

procedures and diagrams. 2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For gas-fired, radiant heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of radiant heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: All warranty periods listed below are from date of Substantial

Completion. a. Heater Components: 10 year(s).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with ANSI Z83.19A. 1. UL listed and labeled, with UL label clearly visible on units.

2.2 HIGH-INTENSITY, INFRARED, GAS-FIRED, RADIANT HEATERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:



1. Detroit Radiant Products Company. 2. Roberts-Gordon, Inc. 3. Solaronics, Inc. 4. Space-Ray; a division of Gas-Fired Products Inc. Contact: Evelyn Kelch, National

Accounts Manager, (888) 383-5965; FAX: (800) 869-7485.

2.3 U-TUBE HEATERS

A. The heaters shall utilize factory assembled, highly-efficient aluminum reflectors with a reflectivity of 97.5% and designed for U-tube heaters. The tube body and u-bend shall be totally enclosed with a single reflector to maximize emitter temperature and radiant heat exchange between the firing and exhaust legs. In addition, the reflector ends shall be enclosed for maximum radiant heat output and minimum convection losses. The single reflector design shall cover the firing and exhaust legs as well as the entire u-bend. U-tube configuration made of straight tubes with individual reflectors covering the firing and exhaust legs shall not be accepted.

B. The heater's emitter tube shall operate at an average surface temperature of 750ºF-900ºF and shall be made of 16-gauge calorized aluminized steel or calorized titanium alloy Alumi-Therm steel for long life (3" O.D. for LTU40-75 and 4" O.D. for LTU80-250). The emitter tube shall be calorized for longevity, corrosion resistance, and high radiant efficiency. The measured surface emissivity shall be 0.83-0.86 at operating temperature. The calorization process shall produce an emitter tube that is highly radiant absorptive on the interior (0.95) and highly radiant emissive (0.83-0.86) on the exterior. The system shall have a radiant efficiency (or radiant coefficient) of 65%.

C. To assure a high degree of safety and increased radiant efficiency, the heaters shall operate under negative pressure at all times during operation to preclude the escape of combustion gases inside the building. The heater exhaust assembly shall include a 120-volt draft inducer. The draft inducer shall be equipped with a permanently lubricated, totally enclosed and shielded, fan cooled, and heavy-duty ball bearing motor. The motor shall not require maintenance or lubrication for the life of the unit. The draft inducer assembly shall be capable of rotating 90º for vertical or horizontal venting.

D. Heaters shall be equipped with a 24-volt direct spark ignition with automatic 100% shutoff system. Power supplied to each heater shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hz. The heater controls shall include a pressure switch designed to provide complete unit shutoff in the event of combustion air or flue blockage. The heaters shall be equipped with an on-line diagnosis monitoring light system. The three lights shall monitor the power to the heater, insufficient airflow, and the spark ignition and the combination gas valve operation.

E. The heater's burner shall consist of a heavy-duty cast iron atmospheric burner. The flame characteristics shall be highly luminous for maximum radiant heat transfer through the emitter tube wall.

F. Heaters shall operate satisfactorily in any position from horizontal to forty-five degrees (45º) from horizontal, and shall be suitable for vented/indirect vented applications. Heaters shall be designed to operate on natural or propane gas.






2.4 STRAIGHT TUBE HEATERS

A. The heaters shall utilize factory assembled, highly efficient aluminum reflectors with a reflectivity of 97.5%. The reflector ends shall be enclosed for maximum radiant heat output and minimum convection losses. Heaters shall be equipped with a 24-volt direct spark ignition with automatic 100% shutoff system. Power supplied to each heater shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hz. The heater controls shall include a pressure switch designed to provide complete unit shutoff in the event of combustion air or flue blockage. The heaters shall be equipped with an on-line diagnosis monitoring light system. The three lights shall monitor the power to the heater, insufficient airflow and the spark ignition and combination gas valve operation.

B. The heater's burner shall consist of a heavy-duty cast iron atmospheric burner. The flame characteristics shall be highly luminous for maximum radiant heat transfer through the emitter tube wall.

C. The heater's emitter tube shall operate at an average surface temperature of 700ºF - 800ºF and shall be made of 16-gauge calorized aluminized steel or calorized titanium alloy Alumi-Therm steel for long life (4" O.D.). The emitter tube shall be calorized for longevity, corrosion resistance, and high radiant efficiency. The measured surface emissivity shall be 0.83 - 0.86 at operating temperature. The calorization process shall produce an emitter tube that is highly radiant absorptive (0.95) on the interior and highly radiant emissive (0.83-0.86) on the exterior. The system shall have a radiant efficiency (or radiant coefficient) of 58%.

D. To assure a high degree of safety and increased radiant efficiency, the heaters shall operate under negative pressure at all times during operation to preclude the escape of combustion gases inside the building. The heater exhaust assembly shall include a 120-volt draft inducer. The draft inducer shall be equipped with a permanently lubricated, totally enclosed and shield-ed, fan cooled, and heavy-duty ball bearing motor. The motor shall not require maintenance or lubrication for the life of the unit. The draft inducer assembly shall be capable of rotating 90º for vertical or horizontal venting.

E. The heaters will be CSA design certified for vertical or horizontal venting, maximum 75 feet hor-izontal sidewall venting, and for 50 feet outside combustion air inlet duct. There shall be no draft hoods. The combustion chamber shall be totally enclosed.

F. The heaters shall be factory assembled and tested. The heaters shall not require any field ad-justments to assure maximum performance and safety. Heaters shall operate satisfactorily in any position from horizontal to forty-five degrees (45º) from horizontal, and incline mounted up to 2/12 pitch, and shall be suitable for vented/indirect vented applications. Heaters shall be de-signed to operate on natural or propane gas.

2.5 CONTROLS AND SAFETIES

A. Failure Safeguards: 100 percent main gas shutoff on pilot or power failure.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Installation: Install gas-fired, radiant heaters and associated gas features and systems according to NFPA 54.

B. Suspended Units: Mount to substrate using rigid mounting kits or brackets, supplied by manufacturer or manufactured.

C. Maintain manufacturers' recommended clearances for combustibles.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Gas Piping: Connect gas piping to gas train inlet; provide union with enough clearance for burner removal and service. 1. Gas Connections: Connect gas piping to radiant heaters according to NFPA 54.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to gas-fired, radiant heaters, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Electrical Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 1. Install electrical devices furnished with heaters but not specified to be factory mounted.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial-temperature set points.

B. Adjust burner and other unit components for optimum heating performance and efficiency.

END OF SECTION 235523.16

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC GAS FIRED UNIT HEATERS ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 23 55 33.16 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 23 55 33.16

GAS-FIRED UNIT HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes gas-fired unit heaters.


A. Product Data: For each type of gas-fired unit heater. 1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For gas-fired unit heaters. 1. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Include diagrams for power and control wiring.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For gas-fired unit heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace heat exchanger of gas-fired unit heater that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Lennox Industries, Inc.; Lennox International. Contact: Katie L. Schmitter, National

Accounts Manager; Telephone: (847) 289-1181; FAX: (847) 289-1182; Email: [email protected].

2. Modine Manufacturing Company.





3. REZNOR; Thomas & Betts Corporation, a member of ABB Group. 4. Sterling HVAC Products; a Mestek company.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired, and complying with ANSI Z83.8/CSA 2.6.

B. Gas Type: Design burner for natural gas having characteristics same as those of gas available at Project site.

C. Type of Venting: Indoor, separated combustion, vented.

D. Housing: Steel, with integral draft hood and inserts for suspension mounting rods.

E. Heat Exchanger: Aluminized steel.

F. Burner Material: Aluminized steel with stainless-steel inserts.

G. Unit Fan:

H. Controls: Regulated redundant gas valve containing pilot solenoid valve, electric gas valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff all in one body. 1. Gas Control Valve: Single stage. 2. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark with flame sensor. 3. Fan Thermal Switch: Operates fan on heat-exchanger temperature. 4. Control transformer. 5. High Limit: Thermal switch or fuse to stop burner. 6. Wall-Mounted Thermostat:

a. Single stage. b. Fan on-off-automatic switch. c. 50 to 90 deg F operating range.

I. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single electrical connection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install and connect gas-fired unit heaters and associated gas and vent features and systems according to NFPA 54, applicable local codes and regulations, and manufacturer's written instructions.




3.2 EQUIPMENT MOUNTING

A. Suspended Units: Suspend from substrate using threaded rods, spring hangers, and building attachments. Secure rods to unit hanger attachments. Adjust hangers so unit is level and plumb.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to gas-fired unit heater, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Gas Piping: Comply with Section 231123 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping." Connect gas piping to gas train inlet; provide union with enough clearance for burner removal and service.

D. Vent Connections: Comply with Division 23 Sections.

E. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Sections Systems.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial temperature set points.

B. Adjust burner and other unit components for optimum heating performance and efficiency.

END OF SECTION 235533.16

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 23 74 13 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 23 74 13

PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes packaged, outdoor, packaged air conditioning units with the following components and accessories:

1. Direct-expansion cooling. 2. Hot-gas reheat. 3. Gas furnace. 4. Economizer outdoor- and return-air damper section. 5. Integral, space temperature controls.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct-digital controls.

B. ECM: Electrically commutated motor.

C. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the outdoor-air stream to reject heat during cooling operations and to absorb heat during heating operations. "Outdoor air" is defined as the air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated through the system.

D. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant-Coil Fan: The outdoor-air refrigerant-coil fan in air conditioning units. "Outdoor air" is defined as the air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated through the system.

E. Supply-Air Fan: The fan providing supply air to conditioned space. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.

F. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the supply-air stream to absorb heat (provide cooling) during cooling operations and to reject heat (provide heating) during heating operations. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each AHU, including rated capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.


B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For air conditioning unit supports indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

2. Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof curb to roof structure. Indicate coordinating requirements with roof membrane system.

3. Wind and Seismic-Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of wind and seismic restraints and snubbers. Show anchorage details and indicate quantity, diameter, and depth of penetration of anchors.

D. Manufacturer Wind Loading Qualification Certification: Submit certification that specified equipment will withstand wind forces identified in "Performance Requirements" Article and in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculations.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of wind force and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.


E. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that air conditioning units, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in "Performance Requirements" Article and in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.


F. Coordination Drawings: Plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Structural members to which air conditioning units will be attached. 2. Roof openings 3. Roof curbs and flashing.

G. Field quality-control test reports.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air conditioning units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

I. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.



A. ARI Compliance:

1. Comply with ARI 210/240 and ARI 340/360 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for air conditioning units.

2. Comply with ARI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for air conditioning units.

B. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. Comply with ASHRAE 15 for refrigeration system safety. 2. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling and heating coils. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Staair conditioning unitp."

C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

E. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995.

F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace components of air conditioning unit’s that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years from date of Substantial Completion.

2. Warranty Period for Gas Furnace Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fan Belts: One set for each belt-driven fan. 2. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS




C. Basis-of-Design Product: TRANE or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Carrier Corporation. 2. Lennox Industries Inc. 3. Trane. 4. YORK International Corporation.

2.2 CASING

A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: Formed and reinforced double-wall insulated panels, fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints between sections sealed.

B. Exterior Casing Material: Galvanized steel with factory-painted finish, with pitched roof panels and knockouts with grommet seals for electrical and piping connections and lifting lugs.

1. Exterior Casing Thickness: 0.0626 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

C. Inner Casing Fabrication Requirements:

1. Inside Casing: Galvanized steel, 0.028 inch (0.7 mm) thick.

D. Casing Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

1. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm) or 1 inch (25 mm). 3. Liner materials shall have air-stream surface coated with an erosion- and temperature-

resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric. 4. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

E. Condensate Drain Pans: Formed sections of stainless-steel sheet, a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) deep, and complying with ASHRAE 62.1-2004].

1. Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with foam insulation and seal moisture tight.

2. Drain Connections: Threaded nipple both sides of drain pan. 3. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Corrosion-resistant compound.

F. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.

2.3 FANS

A. Direct-Driven Supply-Air Fans: Double width, forward curved or backward inclined, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, multispeed or ECM motor resiliently mounted in the fan inlet. Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and galvanized- or painted-steel fan scrolls.

B. Belt-Driven Supply-Air Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, single-speed motor installed on an adjustable fan base resiliently mounted in the casing. Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and galvanized- or painted-steel fan scrolls.


C. Condenser-Coil Fan: Propeller, mounted on shaft of permanently lubricated motor.

D. Relief-Air Fan: Propeller Forward-curved, or Backward inclined, shaft mounted on permanently lubricated motor.

E. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate fan section, internal mounting frame and attachment to fans, fan housings, motors, casings, accessories, and other fan section components with reinforcement strong enough to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" when fan-mounted frame and air conditioning unit-mounted frame are anchored to building structure.

F. Fan Motor: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

2.4 COILS

A. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil:

1. Aluminum fin and seamless internally grooved copper tube in steel casing with equalizing-type vertical distributor.

2. Coil Split: Interlaced. 3. Baked phenolic or Cathodic epoxy coating. 4. Condensate Drain Pan: Stainless steel formed with pitch and drain

connections complying with ASHRAE 62.1-2004.

B. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant Coil:

1. Aluminum fin and seamless internally grooved copper tube in steel casing with equalizing-type vertical distributor.

2. Baked phenolic or Cathodic epoxy coating.

C. Hot-Gas Reheat Refrigerant Coil:

1. Aluminum plate fin and seamless internally grooved copper tube in steel casing with equalizing-type vertical distributor.

D. Electric-Resistance Heating:

1. Open Heating Elements: Resistance wire of 80 percent nickel and 20 percent chromium, supported and insulated by floating ceramic bushings recessed into casing openings, fastened to supporting brackets, and mounted in galvanized-steel frame. Terminate elements in stainless-steel machine-staked terminals secured with stainless-steel hardware.

2. Over-temperature Protection: Disk-type, automatically reset, thermal-cutout, safety device; serviceable through terminal box.

3. Overcurrent Protection: Manual-reset thermal cutouts, factory wired in each heater stage.

4. Control Panel: Unit mounted with disconnecting means and overcurrent protection. Include the following controls:

a. Magnetic contactors. b. Step Controller: Pilot lights and override toggle switch for each step. c. SCR Controller: Pilot lights operate on load ratio, a minimum of five steps. d. Time-delay relay.


e. Airflow proving switch.

2.5 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT COMPONENTS

A. Number of Refrigerant Circuits: One for units 5 ton and less, two for units over 5 ton.

B. Compressor: Hermetic, scroll, mounted on vibration isolators; with internal overcurrent and high-temperature protection, internal pressure relief, and crankcase heater.

C. Refrigeration Specialties: 1. Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410A. 2. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element. 3. Refrigerant filter/dryer. 4. Manual-reset high-pressure safety switch. 5. Automatic-reset low-pressure safety switch. 6. Minimum off-time relay. 7. Automatic-reset compressor motor thermal overload. 8. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines. 9. Low-ambient kit high-pressure sensor. 10. Hot-gas reheat solenoid valve with a replaceable magnetic coil. 11. Hot-gas bypass solenoid valve with a replaceable magnetic coil. 12. Four-way reversing valve with a replaceable magnetic coil, thermostatic expansion valves

with bypass check valves, and a suction line accumulator.

2.6 AIR FILTRATION

A. Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2. 1. Pleated: Minimum MERV 8.

2.7 GAS FURNACE

A. Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired; complying with ANSI Z21.47 and NFPA 54.

1. CSA Approval: Designed and certified by and bearing label of CSA.

B. Burners: Stainless steel.

1. Fuel: Natural gas. 2. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark or hot-surface igniter with flame sensor.

C. Heat-Exchanger and Drain Pan: Stainless steel.

D. Venting: Gravity vented with vertical extension.

E. Safety Controls:

1. Gas Control Valve: Modulating. 2. Gas Train: Single-body, regulated, redundant, 24-V ac gas valve assembly containing

pilot solenoid valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff.


2.8 DAMPERS

A. Outdoor-Air Damper: Motorized dampers with linked damper blades, for 0 to 100 percent outdoor air.

B. Outdoor- and Return-Air Mixing Dampers: Parallel- or opposed-blade galvanized-steel dampers mechanically fastened to cadmium plated for galvanized-steel operating rod in reinforced cabinet. Connect operating rods with common linkage and interconnect linkages so dampers operate simultaneously.

1. Damper Motor: Modulating with adjustable minimum position. 2. Relief-Air Damper: Gravity actuated or motorized, as required by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-

2004, with bird screen and hood.

2.9 ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTION

A. Provide for single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted disconnect switch accessible from outside unit and control-circuit transformer with built-in overcurrent protection.

2.10 CONTROLS

A. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."

B. Basic Unit Controls:

1. Control-voltage transformer. 2. Wall-mounted thermostat or sensor with the following features:

a. Heat-cool-off switch. b. Fan on-auto switch. c. Fan-speed switch. d. Automatic changeover. e. Adjustable deadband. f. Exposed set point. g. Concealed indication. h. Degree F indication. i. Unoccupied-period-override push button.

3. Wall-mounted humidistat or sensor with the following features:

a. Exposed set point. b. Exposed indication.

4. Remote Wall-Mounted Annunciator Panel for Each Unit:

a. Lights to indicate power on, cooling, heating, fan running, filter dirty, and unit alarm or failure.

b. DDC controller or programmable timer and interface with HVAC instrumentation and control system.

c. Digital display of outdoor-air temperature, supply-air temperature, return-air temperature, economizer damper position, indoor-air quality, and control parameters.


C. DDC Controller:

1. Controller shall have volatile-memory backup. 2. Safety Control Operation:

a. Smoke Detectors: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if smoke is detected. Provide additional contacts for alarm interface to fire alarm control panel.

b. Firestats: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if air greater than 130 deg F (54 deg C) enters unit. Provide additional contacts for alarm interface to fire alarm control panel.

c. Fire Alarm Control Panel Interface: Provide control interface to coordinate with operating sequence described in Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm."

d. Low-Discharge Temperature: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if supply air temperature is less than 17 deg F.

e. Defrost Control for Condenser Coil: Pressure differential switch to initiate defrost sequence.

3. Scheduled Operation: Occupied and unoccupied periods on [seven] [365]-day clock with a minimum of [two] [four] programmable periods per day.

4. Unoccupied Period:

a. Heating Setback: 10 deg F (5.6 deg C). b. Cooling Setback: System off. c. Override Operation: Two hours.

5. Supply Fan Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Run fan continuously. b. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle fan to maintain setback temperature.

6. Refrigerant Circuit Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Cycle or stage compressors to match compressor output to cooling load to maintain room temperature and humidity. Cycle condenser fans to maintain maximum hot-gas pressure. Operate low-ambient control kit to maintain minimum hot-gas pressure.

7. Gas Furnace Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Cycle Stage or Modulate burner to maintain room temperature. b. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle burner to maintain setback temperature.

8. Electric-Heating-Coil Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Cycle Stage or Modulate coil to maintain room temperature. b. Unoccupied Periods: Energize coil to maintain setback temperature.

9. Fixed Minimum Outdoor-Air Damper Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Open to 20 percent. b. Unoccupied Periods: Close the outdoor-air damper.

10. Economizer Outdoor-Air Damper Operation:


a. Occupied Periods: Open to 10 25 percent fixed minimum intake, and maximum 100 percent of the fan capacity to comply with ASHRAE Cycle II. Controller shall permit air-side economizer operation when outdoor air is less than 60 deg F (15 deg C). Use outdoor-air temperature to adjust mixing dampers, Start relief-air fan with end switch on outdoor-air damper. During economizer cycle operation, lock out cooling.

b. Unoccupied Periods: Close outdoor-air damper and open return-air damper. c. Outdoor-Airflow Monitor: Accuracy maximum plus or minus 5 percent within 15

and 100 percent of total outdoor air. Monitor microprocessor shall adjust for temperature, and output shall range from 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA.

11. Carbon Dioxide Sensor Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Reset minimum outdoor-air ratio down to minimum to maintain maximum 200 ppm above outdoor are Co2 concentration.

b. Unoccupied Periods: Close outdoor-air damper and open return-air damper.

D. Interface Requirements for HVAC Instrumentation and Control System:

1. Interface relay for scheduled operation. 2. Interface relay to provide indication of fault at the central workstation and diagnostic code

storage. 3. Provide BACnet compatible interface for central HVAC control workstation for the

following:

a. Adjusting set points. b. Monitoring supply fan start, stop, and operation. c. Inquiring data to include outdoor-air damper position, supply- and room-air

temperature and humidity. d. Monitoring occupied and unoccupied operations. e. Monitoring constant and variable motor loads. f. Monitoring variable-frequency drive operation. g. Monitoring cooling load. h. Monitoring economizer cycles. i. Monitoring air-distribution static pressure and ventilation air volume.

2.11 ACCESSORIES

A. Duplex, 115-V, ground-fault-interrupter outlet with 15-A overcurrent protection. Include transformer if required. Outlet shall be energized even if the unit main disconnect is open.

B. Low-ambient kit using staged or variable-speed condenser fans for operation down to 10 deg F.

C. Filter differential pressure switch with sensor tubing on either side of filter. Set for final filter pressure loss.

D. Coil guards of painted, galvanized-steel wire.

E. Hail guards of galvanized steel, painted to match casing.

F. Concentric diffuser with white louvers and polished aluminum return grilles, insulated diffuser box with mounting flanges, and interior transition.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of air conditioning units.

B. Examine roughing-in for air conditioning units to verify actual locations of piping and duct connections before equipment installation.

C. Examine roofs for suitable conditions where air conditioning units will be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger than supported equipment and minimum 6 inches (150 mm) above finished ground elevation.

2. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

3. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 4. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install air conditioning units on 6” CONCRETE PAD using elastomeric pads.

1. Minimum Deflection: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

C. Unit Support: Install unit level on structural curbs. Coordinate wall penetrations and flashing with wall construction. Secure air conditioning units to structural support with anchor bolts.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with trap and indirect connection to nearest roof drain or area drain.

B. Install piping adjacent to air conditioning units to allow service and maintenance.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.


1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. Report results in writing.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing air conditioning units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls

and equipment.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.5 START UP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform start up service.

B. Complete installation and start up checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do the following:

1. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing. 2. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber. 3. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, coils, and fans. 4. Inspect internal insulation. 5. Verify that labels are clearly visible. 6. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing. 7. Verify that controls are connected and operable. 8. Verify that filters are installed. 9. Clean condenser coil and inspect for construction debris. 10. Clean furnace flue and inspect for construction debris. 11. Connect and purge gas line. 12. Remove packing from vibration isolators. 13. Inspect operation of barometric relief dampers. 14. Verify lubrication on fan and motor bearings. 15. Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and binding. 16. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension. 17. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.

a. Start refrigeration system. b. Do not operate below recommended low-ambient temperature. c. Complete start up services sheets and attach copy with Contractor's start up

service report.

18. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences. 19. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer. 20. Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing. Adjust burner for

peak efficiency.

a. Measure gas pressure on manifold. b. Inspect operation of power vents. c. Measure combustion-air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber.


d. Measure flue-gas temperature at furnace discharge. e. Perform flue-gas analysis. Measure and record flue-gas carbon dioxide and

oxygen concentration. f. Measure supply-air temperature and volume when burner is at maximum firing rate

and when burner is off. Calculate useful heat to supply air.

21. Calibrate thermostats. 22. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits. 23. Inspect outdoor-air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with return-air dampers. 24. Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following when ambient is a

minimum of 15 deg F (8 deg C) above return-air temperature:

a. Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures. b. Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures. c. Outdoor-air, dry-bulb temperature. d. Outdoor-air-coil, discharge-air, dry-bulb temperature.

25. Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and normal and emergency shutdown.

26. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on fan curve.

a. Supply-air volume. b. Return-air volume. c. Relief-air volume. d. Outdoor-air intake volume.

27. Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following:

a. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas pressures. b. Short circuiting of air through condenser coil or from condenser fans to outdoor-air

intake.

28. Verify operation of remote panel including pilot-light operation and failure modes. Inspect the following:

a. High-temperature limit on gas-fired heat exchanger. b. Low-temperature safety operation. c. Filter high-pressure differential alarm. d. Economizer to minimum outdoor-air changeover. e. Relief-air fan operation. f. Smoke and firestat alarms.

29. After start up and performance testing and prior to Substantial Completion, replace existing filters with new filters.

3.6 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to site during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

B. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air conditioning unit and air-distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filters.


END OF SECTION


CONTRACTOR'S RECORD LETTER OF CONFORMANCE

SECTION 23 74 13 – PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS

Project Location: Date: ________________

(City & State)

Project Number: Store Number:

Statement of Conformance: This Record Letter of Conformance is provided as a Record Document in accordance with Sec-tion 017700 – Closeout Procedures. The undersigned hereby declares that the packaged, out-door, central-station air-handling units are installed and are in general conformance with the Contract Documents, applicable Codes, and shop drawings. The packaged, outdoor, central-station air-handling units have been provided and placed in operational condition in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions and the Contract Documents. To be accepted, all signatures must be original ink signatures (copies are not allowed).

PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNIT INSTALLER:

(Subcontractor Signature)

Phone Number: ( ) (Subcontractor name and address)

CONTRACTOR:

____________ (Contractor Signature)

____________ Phone Number: ( ) (Contractor name and address)

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC SMALL SPLIT SYSTEMS ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 23 81 27 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 23 81 27 SMALL SPLIT-SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING


A. Air-source heat pumps. B. Indoor ductless fan & coil units. C. Controls.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping: Indoor coil condensate drain. B. Section 26 27 17 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections and

installation and wiring of thermostats and other controls components. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AHRI 210/240 - Standard for Performance Rating of Unitary Air Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2008.

B. AHRI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2008.

C. AHRI 520 - Performance Rating of Positive Displacement Condensing Units; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2004.

D. ASHRAE Std 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2010 (ANSI/ASHRAE Std 15).

E. ASHRAE Std 23 - Methods of Testing for Rating Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressors and Condensing Units; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2005.

F. ASHRAE Std 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2007, Including All Addenda (ANSI/AHSRAE/

G. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2009.

H. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2009.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide rated capacities, weights, accessories, electrical nameplate data, and

wiring diagrams. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, required clearances, and location and size of field

connections. D. Design Data: Indicate refrigerant pipe sizing. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate rigging, assembly, and installation instructions. F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and connections. G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating

instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing. H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owner s

name and registered with manufacturer.



specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

minimum 3 years of experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.06 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 78 39 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. 1.07 LEED CERTIFICATION

A. Achievement of the US Green Building Council (USGBC) LEED (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design) Silver Certification is an essential part of this project.

B. The list of LEED Credits applicable to this project is located in Specification Section 01 35 14.01.

C. All bidding General Contractors, Subcontractors, and Material Suppliers must review all of the applicable LEED Credits/Prerequisites and all of the LEED On-line Templates that are necessary for documentation for the applicable LEED Credits prior to submitting a bid.

D. The successful General Contractor, Subcontractors, and Material Suppliers are required to provide all necessary documentation to prove compliance with the LEED Credits/Prerequisites that are applicable to this project (both “Construction” and “Design” Credits).

E. Submittal of LEED documentation and the review of the documentation by the Green Building Certification Institute (GBCI) will extend past the conclusion of the construction. The General Contractor, Subcontractors, and Material Suppliers must continue their documentation and response to comments from the GBCI until the award of LEED Silver Certification for this project.

F. Shop Drawings, Submittals, and Product Data: 1. All submittals shall indicate the specific contribution of the product, assembly, or process

toward accomplishing the LEED Certification goal. Generic data or marketing information is not acceptable.


A. Sanyo Inc.: www.sanyo.com. B. Mitsubishi Inc: www.mitsubishipro.com. C. Daikin Inc: www.daikin.com.

2.02 SYSTEM DESIGN A. Split-System Ductless Heat Pumps :Self-contained, packaged, matched factory-engineered and

assembled, pre-wired indoor and outdoor units; UL listed. 1. Heating and Cooling: Air-source electric heat pump located in outdoor unit with

evaporator. 2. Provide refrigerant lines internal to units and between indoor and outdoor units, factory

cleaned, dried, pressurized and sealed, with insulated suction line. B. Performance Requirements: See Schedule for additional requirements..

1. Efficiency: a. Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio: 13, minimum. b. Heating Seasonal Performance Factor: 7.2, minimum.

C. Electrical Characteristics: 1. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch on equipment under provisions of

Section 26 27 17.


2.03 INDOOR UNITS FOR DUCTLESS SYSTEMS A. Indoor Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled, pre-wired unit consisting of cabinet,

supply fan, evaporator coil, and controls; wired for single power connection with control transformer. Inter connecting wiring shall be provided by the manufacturer. 1. Location: Ceiling or Wall as scheduled. 2. Cabinet: Galvanized steel.

a. Finish: White. 3. Fan: Line-flow fan direct driven by a single motor. 4. Filter return air with washable, antioxidant pre-filter and a pleated anti-allergy enzyme

filter. B. Evaporator Coils: Copper tube aluminum fin assembly, galvanized or polymer drain pan sloped

in all directions to drain, drain connection, refrigerant piping connections, restricted distributor or thermostatic expansion valve. 1. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with AHRI 210/240 and UL listed. 2. Manufacturer: System manufacturer.

C. Remote Actuators: 2.04 OUTDOOR UNITS

A. Outdoor Units: Self-contained, packaged, pre-wired unit consisting of cabinet, with compressor and condenser. 1. Comply with AHRI 210. 2. Refrigerant: R-410A. 3. Cabinet: Galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, easily removed and secured access

doors with safety interlock switches, glass fiber insulation with reflective liner. 4. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with AHRI 210/240 with testing in accordance

with ASHRAE Std 23 and UL listed. B. Compressor: AHRI 520; hermetic, two speed 1800 and 3600 rpm, resiliently mounted integral

with condenser, with positive lubrication, crankcase heater, high pressure control, motor overload protection, service valves and drier. Provide time delay control to prevent short cycling and rapid speed changes.

C. Air Cooled Condenser: ARI 520; Aluminum fin and copper tube coil, with direct drive axial propeller fan resiliently mounted, galvanized fan guard.

D. Accessories: Filter drier, high pressure switch (manual reset), low pressure switch (automatic reset), service valves and gage ports, thermometer well (in liquid line). 1. Provide thermostatic expansion valves. 2. Provide heat pump reversing valves.

E. Operating Controls: 1. Control by room thermostat to maintain room temperature setting. 2. Low Ambient Kit: Provide refrigerant pressure switch to cycle condenser fan on when

condenser refrigerant pressure is above 285 psig and off when pressure drops below 140 psig for operation to 0 degrees F.

F. Mounting Pad: Precast concrete parking bumpers, minimum 4 inches square; minimum of two located under cabinet feet.

2.05 ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT A. Room Programmable Thermostat: Wall-mounted, electric solid state microcomputer based

room thermostat with remote sensor to maintain temperature setting; low-voltage; with following features: 1. System selector switch (heat-off-cool) and fan control switch (auto-on). 2. Automatic switching from heating to cooling. 3. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from setpoint. 4. Set-up for four separate temperatures per day. 5. Instant override of setpoint for continuous or timed period from one hour to 31 days.


6. Short cycle protection. 7. Programming based on weekdays, Saturday and Sunday. 8. Selection features including degree F or degree C display, 12 or 24 hour clock, keyboard

disable, remote sensor, fan on-auto. 9. Battery replacement without program loss. 10. Thermostat display:

a. Time of day. b. Actual room temperature. c. Programmed temperature. d. System mode indication: heating, cooling, fan auto, off, and on, auto or on, off.


A. Verify that substrates are ready for installation of units and openings are as indicated on shop drawings.

B. Verify that proper power supply is available and in correct location. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. C. Install refrigeration systems in accordance with ASHRAE Std 15. D. Pipe drain from unit to nearest floor drain.

3.03 STARTUP SERVICE A. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and

perform the following: 1. Inspect for physical damage to unit casing. 2. Verify that access doors move freely and are weathertight. 3. Clean units and inspect for construction debris. 4. Verify that all bolts and screws are tight. 5. Adjust vibration isolation and flexible connections. 6. Verify that controls are connected and operational.

B. Lubricate bearings on fans. C. Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or binding. D. Verify proper operation of condenser capacity control device. E. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission

to structure. END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC ELECTRICAL-GENERAL PROVISIONS ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 26 01 01 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001

SECTION 26 01 01

ELECTRICAL – GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS

A. The accompanying General Conditions shall apply to and form a part of this Section.

1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Carefully examine General Conditions, other specification Sections, and other drawings (in addition to electrical), in order to be fully acquainted with their effect on electrical work.

B. Do all work in compliance with all applicable codes, laws and ordinances, the National Electrical Code (hereinafter referred to as "Code" or "NEC"), and the regulations of the local authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain and pay for any and all required permits, inspections, certificates of inspections and approval, and the like, and deliver such certificates to the Contracting Officer.

C. Cooperate with other trades and contractors at job. Perform work in such manner and at such times as not to delay work of other trades. Complete all work as soon as the condition of the structure and installation of equipment will permit. Patch, in a satisfactory manner and by the proper craft, any work damaged by electrical workmen.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Provide: Furnish all materials, hardware, equipment, labor and services required for the installation of complete and properly working equipment and/or systems as shown on the drawings and described herein.

B. Wire: Furnish all conduit, wiring, materials, hardware, equipment, labor and services required for complete and proper operation and/or control of equipment and/or systems as shown on the drawings and described herein.

C. Install: Furnish all conduit, wiring, materials, hardware, equipment, labor and services required for the complete and properly working installation of equipment and/or systems as shown on the drawings and described herein.

D. Work: A complete and properly working installation of materials for equipment and/or systems as shown on the drawings and described herein.

E. AWG: American Wire Gage.

F. NEC: National Electrical Code – NFPA 70, 2014 addition.

G. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association.

H. OSHA: Occupation Safety and Health Administration.

I. UL: Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.

J. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association.

K. IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.

L. IBC: International Building Code, 2015 Edition.

M. UFC: Unified Facility Criteria 3-600-001, August 8th, 2016 Edition.

ELECTRICAL-GENERAL PROVISIONS CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC 26 01 01 - 2 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA

AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001

1.04 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE

A. Note that this is an operating facility. Any work that may cause a disturbance or interruption in the normal operation of this facility must be carefully coordinated with the Contracting Officer and Owner.

B. Electrical service interruptions to equipment, panelboards serving equipment, or equipment vital to the continued operation of this facility shall be avoided where possible.

C. Special steps shall be taken to minimize such occurrences, however, when a service interruption or a disruption to normal building operation is unavoidable, the owner shall be notified a minimum of two (2) weeks in advance, in writing. No electrical service interruptions to the normal operation shall take place without written approval of the submitted request.

D. The request for electrical service interruption shall clearly indicate all equipment affected by the service interruption, the anticipated duration of the interruption, and a detailed description of arrangements for temporary service(s), if required.

E. All service interruptions shall be scheduled for early morning hours, or other off peak times, as directed by the owner. The electrical contractor shall include in his bid, all premium time charges for such scheduling.

F. Commercial electrical service interruptions may require temporary service arrangements to be made by the electrical contractor. Where an existing stand-by generator is not available for use during the interruption, or is not of sufficient capacity to maintain normal operation during the interruption, the electrical contractor shall include in his bid, the costs of providing such temporary services and standby generation equipment as is required.

G. Electrical service to systems necessary for continued operation shall be maintained in all instances with only a minimum of service interruption time being permissible. Where extended service interruptions to such equipment are unavoidable, the electrical contractor shall furnish and install temporary services as required to maintain operations.

H. No allowances will be made for additional costs incurred by the electrical contractor for premium time work or for the provision of standby generation equipment and/or temporary services after a contract is entered into.

1.05 DRAWINGS

A. Indicate only diagrammatically the extent, general character and approximate location of work. Where work is indicated but with minor details omitted, furnish and install it complete and so as to perform its intended functions. For building details and mechanical equipment follow architectural, structural, and mechanical drawings and fit electrical work thereto.

B. Take finish dimensions at the job site in preference to scale dimensions.

C. Except as above noted, make no changes or deviations from the work as shown or specified except on written order of the Contracting Officer.

D. Obtain from manufacturer's data on all equipment, the dimensions of which may affect electrical work. Use this data to coordinate proper service characteristics, entry locations, etc., and to ensure minimum clearances are maintained.


1.06 QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTOR

A. The electrical contractor shall have had experience of at least the same size and scope as this project, on at least two other projects, within the last 5 years in order to be qualified to bid this project. This qualification shall also apply to his subcontractors.

B. Workmen shall be experienced in their respective trade. Workmanship of installed work shall be first class and will be so judged by the Contracting Officer. Substandard work shall be removed and replaced.

C. Qualifications stated for the electrical contractor shall also apply to any subcontractors employed by the electrical contractor during the course of this work.

1.07 SITE VISIT

A. The Bidders shall visit the site to thoroughly familiarize themselves with existing conditions prior to submitting their bid. No allowances will be made for lack of knowledge of existing conditions.

1.08 ELECTRICAL SERVICE CHARACTERISTICS

A. Main services are as shown on drawings.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. See GENERAL CONDITIONS (one-Year warranty of conformance with drawings and specifications).

B. In addition to the foregoing warranty, Contractor shall and does hereby warrant all materials and equipment furnished under this Division of the Specifications to be free from defects and to function or operate satisfactorily for one year after final acceptance of the work, and that any items not meeting this requirement will be made good by him without cost to owner, provided such defects or failures are not due to abuse, neglect, or lack of reasonable and ordinary maintenance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 APPROVED MATERIALS AND DEVICES

A. Where not otherwise specified, provide only new, standard first grade materials throughout, conforming to standards established by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., and so marked and labeled, together with manufacturer's brand or trademark. All equipment subject to approval of Contracting Officer before installation. All like items shall be of one manufacture.

B. Any equipment or materials shown on the drawings to be removed and reinstalled shall be cleaned and, if necessary repaired to first class condition prior to reinstallation.

2.02 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Where shown on the drawings or specified herein, furnish and install electrical equipment.

B. Furnish all materials, hardware, equipment, labor and services required for the installation of complete and properly working installations as shown on the drawings and described herein.

C. References in these specifications to a particular manufacturer or model number shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. Equipment by manufacturers other than those specified shall be submitted for review in accord with Section 26 01 02.

ELECTRICAL-GENERAL PROVISIONS CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC 26 01 01 - 4 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA


D. All equipment shall be installed by qualified a workman who shall have reviewed all manufacturer's data for purposes of coordinating service characteristics, entry locations, mounting requirements, dimensions, etc.

E. The contractor shall cooperate with the Owner, other trades, etc. for coordination of their requirements or the effects of the installed equipment on the overall project.

2.03 AUXILIARY SYSTEMS

A. Where shown on the drawings or specified herein, furnish and install electrical auxiliary systems.

B. Furnish all materials, hardware, equipment, labor and services required for the installation of a complete and properly working systems as shown on the drawings and described herein.

C. References in these specifications to a particular manufacturer or model number shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. Equipment by manufacturers other than those specified shall be submitted for review in accord with Section 26 01 02.

D. All systems equipment shall be installed by qualified systems technicians in the employ of the systems contractor, or by qualified workmen in the employ of the Contractor under the supervision of qualified representatives of the manufacturer. "Qualified representatives" shall be factory authorized or certified by the systems equipment manufacturer.

E. The systems technicians and/or contractor shall cooperate with the Government, other trades, etc. for coordination of their requirements or the effects of the installed systems on the overall project.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 WORKMANSHIP

A. The work shall be in accordance with the NEC and the rules and regulations of local bodies having jurisdiction.

B. All work shall be executed in a workmanlike manner and shall present a neat and mechanical appearance upon completion.

C. Care shall be exercised that all items are plumb, straight, level.

D. Care shall be exercised so that not less than code clearance is allowed for all panels, switchboards, etc. Do not allow other trades to infringe on this clearance. Minimum code clearance shall be as required by Article 110 of the NEC.

E. Care shall be exercised that no piping, ducts, or equipment foreign to the electrical equipment or architectural appurtenances shall be allowed to be installed in, enter or pass through the exclusively dedicated spaces above, adjacent to and below switchboards and panelboards as set forth in Article 384, paragraph 4, of the NEC.

F. Balance load as equally as practicable on all feeders, circuits and panelboard buses.

3.02 ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A. Upon completion of work, the entire wiring system shall be tested, and shall be shown to be in perfect working condition in accordance with the intent of the specifications and drawings. It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to have all systems ready for operation and to have an electrician available to operate same in accordance with and under the supervision of the inspection


representative of the Contracting Officer. The electrician shall be available to assist in removal of panelboard fronts, etc., to permit inspection as required.

3.03 TESTS

A. Upon completion of the work, test the individual systems including all feeders, branches, outlets, lighting, motors, apparatus and appliance, with a 1000 VDC insulation tester (with a 0-200 megohm full scale). All conductors shall have insulation tested when the wiring system is complete and a log kept of the circuit name, date and megger readings.

B. Test each new receptacle and record the ground loop impedance adjacent to the device on the "As-Built" drawings.

C. Test each new GFI protected outlet with a 5 ma test current and record the trip time adjacent to the device on the "As-Built" drawings.

D. Provide all instruments, labor and materials required for tests designated.

E. All test reports shall be typed and signed by the person who made the tests.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC ELECTRICAL-SCOPE OF WORKROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 26 01 02 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001

SECTION 26 01 02

ELECTRICAL – SCOPE OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK REQUIRED

A. Arrange with local utility companies for such services as shown or herein specified.

B. Removal or relocation of all electrical services located on or crossing through the project area, either above or below, which would obstruct the construction of the project or conflict in any manner with the completed project or any code pertaining thereto.

C. Complete electric lighting systems, power systems and auxiliary systems as shown or herein specified.

D. Furnishing and installation of all electrical items shown on plans or herein specified, unless shown or specified otherwise.

E. Furnishing and installation of disconnect switches for motors.

F. Connection of all equipment requiring electrical connection, mentioned in this Section or shown on drawings, whether furnished by electrical contractor or others.

G. Complete system of conduit raceways, outlet boxes and backboards for voice/data system.

H. Complete emergency lighting system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PROPOSED SUBSTITUTES

A. Submit to Contracting Officer ten (10) days prior to bid date three (3) copies of any items which are proposed as substitutes for those specified.

B. Requested Lighting Substitutions require full photometric calculations with print-outs for

all spaces as noted in the fixture schedule notes.

2.02 SHOP DRAWINGS AND CATALOG DATA

A. Submit to Contracting Officer within fifteen (15) days after award of contract, prior to purchasing, six (6) copies of manufacturer's shop drawings and catalog data for the items listed below.

B. All shop drawings of a specific item or system shall be in one submittal and shall be marked to clearly identify the manufacturer, the intended use of the item, and if not readily apparent, the intended location for installation of the item.

C. Shop drawings of all power equipment shall contain exact details of device placement, phasing and numbering, in form of elevations, for each piece of equipment.

D. Shop drawings submittals shall include:

Safety Switches

Lighting Fixtures

Wire ways

ELECTRICAL-SCOPE OF WORK CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC

26 01 02 - 2 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIAAAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001

Transformer

Switchboard and panelboards

Cable

Wiring Devices

Fire Alarm & Emergency Communications System

As required by individual sections of these Specifications

E. Shop Drawings for the following items may consist of typewritten lists, listing manufacture with description, to be used (one only for each item).

Building Wire

Conduit: Rigid, I.M.C., E.M.T.

EMT Couplings and Connectors

Wire Connectors

F. Obtain manufacturer's data on all equipment requiring electrical service and review it for purposes of coordinating service characteristics, entry locations, mounting requirements, dimensions, etc. Verify that the electrical service requirements are as shown on the electrical drawings or, if at variance to that shown, indicate the area of nonconformance. Submit one copy of this data with shop drawings, along with a statement of the following:

1. The information contained in the submittal includes data on all equipment within the scope of this project which will require electrical service or coordination with electrical work.

2. The information contained in the submittal has been reviewed by the electrical contractor, with the general contractor's project manager, and that the electrical service requirements will be coordinated with the information obtained from the manufacturer's data.

The statement shall identify the source of the information and shall be signed by the representative of the electrical contractor responsible for obtaining and coordinating the information and the general contractor's project manager. Failure to submit confirmation of equipment coordination shall be construed as the contractor’s acknowledgment that any changes to and/or additional electrical work and/or materials required due to equipment electrical service requirements which do not conform to the electrical drawings will be provided at no additional cost.

H. Obtain data on all ceilings and review it for purposes of coordinating mounting requirements, dimensions, recess depth etc., of light fixtures. Verify that the proposed mounting trim and hardware are correct for the ceiling to be utilized and that depth of recessed light fixtures will not be in conflict with HVAC equipment, ductwork, structural members, etc. Submit one copy of this data with shop drawings, along with a statement of the following:

The information contained in the submittal has been reviewed by the electrical contractor and the general contractor' project manager and the mounting details are correct for the proposed application.

The statement shall identify the source of the information and shall be signed by the representative of the electrical contractor and the general contractor's project manager. Failure to submit confirmation of ceiling coordination shall be construed as the contractor’s


acknowledgment that all electrical work in the ceiling has been coordinated and that any changes and/or additional work or materials, if required due to conflicts in or above the ceiling, will be provided at no additional cost.

I. Obtain data on all casework and review it for purposes of coordinating electrical service to equipment, mounting requirements, dimensions, etc. Submit a statement of the following:

All casework within the scope of this project which will require coordination with electrical work has been reviewed and coordinated by the electrical contractor with the general contractor's project manager.

The statement shall identify the source of the information and shall be signed by the representative of the electrical contractor responsible for obtaining and coordinating the information and the general contractor's project manager. Failure to submit confirmation of casework coordination shall be construed as the contractor’s acknowledgment that all electrical work in, near, or associated with casework has been coordinated and that any changes and/or additional work or materials, if required due to conflicts will be provided at no additional cost.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 MOTORS STARTERS AND CONTROLS

A. Unless otherwise specified or shown, all motors will be furnished and installed under other sections of these specifications.

B. Unless otherwise specified or shown, all individually mounted starters and/or equipment control contactors shall be furnished but not installed under other sections of these specifications.

C. Installation of individual mounted starters, equipment control contactors and all power wiring connections to all motors, starters, equipment control contactors and equipment shall be performed under this section of these specifications.

D. Unless otherwise specified or shown, all control items will be furnished, installed and wired in conduit under other sections of these specifications. The electrical contractor shall furnish and install a control power circuit to each HVAC or plumbing control panel or junction box requiring same. Control circuits shall, unless noted otherwise, be individual 20 ampere, 120-volt circuits run from the nearest receptacle panel.

E. Where required by the NEC or local codes, each motor or piece of equipment required to have a disconnecting means within sight of the motor or equipment shall be so equipped. All such disconnects shall be furnished and installed under this section of these specifications unless provided as part of an equipment package furnished under other sections. This requirement shall apply whether shown on the drawings or not.

F. Where required by the NEC or local codes, each piece of HVAC equipment required to have a 15 ampere, 120-volt, receptacle within sight of the motor or equipment shall be so equipped. All such receptacles shall be furnished and installed under this section of these specifications unless provided as part of an equipment package furnished under other sections. Receptacles shall be equipped with weatherproof covers and Class "A" ground fault protection where located out of doors or subject to moisture and shall be wired to the nearest general convenience outlet circuit. This requirement shall apply whether shown on the drawings or not.

G. Where shown on the HVAC or electrical drawings for exhaust fans to be controlled with room lights, the electrical contractor shall furnish, install and wire complete a control relay for each exhaust fan. Exhaust fan control relays shall be mounted in NEMA 1 enclosures, at the exhaust fan, and shall have coil voltage to match lighting system and contacts as required by motor voltage and amperage.



H. A power circuit shall be supplied for plenum lighting in each HVAC air handling units (AHU) equipped with light fixtures. The electrical contractor shall furnish, install and wire complete a 120 volt circuit from the nearest receptacle circuit in the AHU room.

3.02 EXCAVATION, CUTTING, PATCHING

A. Perform all excavating and cutting as required to receive electrical work, and after inspection and approval of work by Contracting Officer, do all required backfilling, patching and repairing. Obtain specific approval of Contracting Officer before cutting into any structural members.

B. For all such work employ competent workmen, and finish a neat and workmanlike manner, equal to quality and appearance to adjacent work.

3.03 FIRESTOPPING

A. Wall, floor and smoke/fire barrier penetrations shall be sealed as required to maintain the fire rating of the penetrated barrier. Sealant materials shall be UL listed for use in the fire barrier in which they are to be applied. Application of fire barrier sealants shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturers UL listed assembly per NEC 300-21, SBC705.4 and other applicable codes.

B. Fire protection sealants may be applied in moldable putty, wraps, strips or with a caulking gun as required by jobsite conditions. Penetrations which are too large for sealing with caulk alone shall be repaired to match existing and then sealed with moldable putty, strips or wraps as required by the sealant manufacturer to achieve a fire rating equal, or exceeding, the partition penetrated.

C. Fire protection sealants shall be as follows (NO EXCEPTIONS):

3M Brand:

Fire Barrier - Moldable Putty MPS-2 STIXFire Barrier - CP 25WP/ CP 25WP+ CaulkFire Barrier - FS-195 / FS-195+ Wrap or StripInteram Firedam 150 Caulk

Flame Stop Distribution, Inc.

Flame Stop VFlame Stop VP with Retaining Fixture

Specified Technologies, Inc.

Specseal SealantSpecseal PuttySpecseal MortarSpecseal Collar

Metacaulk Fire Stop by Rectorseal CorporationMetacaulk 950

Hilti

Hilti FS 605, High Performance Firestop SealantHilti FS 611A, Intumescent Firestop SealantHilti FS 635, Trowelable Firestop Compound

D. Rated wall penetrations for voice, data and other auxiliary systems cables, not run in conduit completely to backboards, shall be made with combination pathway and firestop sleeves


consisting of individual 3 inch by 3 inch by 10.5 inch long wireways with preinstalled intumescent material which expands when exposed to fire or excessive heat to completely seal the pathway irregardless of the number and/or size of cables contained. Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, furnish at least four sleeves at each penetration indicated. Furnish greater quantities of sleeves where required to run full width of each cable tray system terminating outside of a voice/data equipment room. Combination cable pathway and firestop devices shall be EZ-Path as manufactured by Specified Technologies, Inc. or approved equal.

E. Panelboards, equipment enclosures, outlet boxes, etc. installed in fire rated partitions shall be boxed in with wall board or other suitable fire rated material as required to maintain or restore the fire rating of the assembly.

3.04 ROOF PENETRATION

A. Furnish roof flashings for all equipment installed under this Section that penetrates the roof. Appropriate flashings are specified under Roofing and Sheet Metal Section. Supply these flashings for installation under Roofing and Sheet Metal Section.

3.05 PAINTING

A. Finish painting of any exposed raceways is not included in this Section. (See Painting and Finishing Section).

3.06 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identification nameplates shall be laminated plastic.

B. Each panelboard shall be equipped with a nameplate with 1/4" minimum letters.

C. Each individual mounted circuit breaker, switch, starter, contactor and/or any other control or protective device shall be equipped with a nameplate with 1/4" minimum letters. Nameplates on fusible equipment shall state fuse size.

D. Each branch circuit in a panelboard shall be identified.

1. Panelboards with covers and directory pockets shall have typewritten directories.

2. Panelboards without directories shall have a nameplate with 1/8" minimum letters installed adjacent to each circuit device stating equipment fed and fuse size, if applicable.

E. Nameplates shall be white micarta with black core.

F. Each junction box shall be marked to identify the system it serves. The following color coding system shall be spray painted, with plenum rated paint, on each box cover:

1. Normal Power System - Galvanized

2. Fire Alarm System - Red

G. Junction boxes containing power circuits shall have associated panel and circuit numbers printed on the cover.

3.07 STORAGE OF MATERIALS

A. Store all materials to prevent damage from rust, corrosion, physical injury, etc.



B. Keep site clean of accumulation of cartons, trash, debris, etc.

3.08 "AS BUILT" DRAWINGS

A. A set of electrical plans shall be kept on the job site on which all changes from the contract drawings are recorded, in red, on a day-to-day basis.

B. As-built single line diagram shall be laminated in 10 mil plastic and hung on the wall next to the main switchboard.

3.09 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION

A. At the completion of the job, the electrical contractor shall turn over to Owner one (1) set of marked "as built" drawings, three (3) sets of all equipment catalog and maintenance data and three (3) sets of shop drawings on all equipment requiring same. The contractor shall explain and demonstrate all systems to the Owner's representative(s).

3.10 ACCESS PANELS

A. Access panels for electrical equipment, devices, junction boxes, etc., shall be provided where building finishes do not allow access. This Contractor shall furnish and have installed appropriate access panels except when such panels are specified otherwise in other sections of these specifications, in which case, this Contractor shall coordinate panel locations with the installing Contractor.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC CONDUCTORS - MEDIUM VOLTAGE

ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 26 05 13.16 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001

SECTION 26 05 13.16

CONDUCTORS - MEDIUM VOLTAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Medium voltage cable (1,000 volts and above), shall be furnished and installed as shown on the plans and herein specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CABLES

A. 15 KV primary cable shall be copper, for solidly grounded systems, and with 90-degree C. continuous rating, 130-degree C. emergency rating and 250-degree C. short circuit rating. Primary cables shall meet or exceed applicable requirements of NEMA, ICEA S-68-516, AEIC CS6 and UL 1072.

B. Cable insulation shall be of ethylene-propylene rubber base with a thickness of 220 mils.

C. Cable shielding shall be uncoated copper tape helically applied with 12.5% nominal overlap.

D. The cable jacket shall be black PVC with a thickness of 80 mils.

2.02 LIVE FRONT TERMINATIONS

A. See specification section 26 10 01.

2.03 DEAD FRONT TERMINATIONS


2.04 SPLICES


2.05 MANUFACTURERS

A. Primary cable shall be as manufactured by the Okonite Company, Southwire or approved equal.

B. Primary cable terminations shall be as specified in specification section 26 10 01. Cable shield grounding adapters shall be furnished for metallic tape shield.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. All conduits shall be cleaned of foreign matter prior to installation of cable and close attention shall be paid to ensure cable is not damaged during installation. Pulling eyes shall be used on cable installations where required by pulling tensions to avoid insulation damage.

3.02 TESTING

A. After the cable installation is complete and all splices and terminations are made, each cable shall be DC acceptance tested for a period of 15 minutes.

CONDUCTORS - MEDIUM VOLTAGE CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC

26 05 13.16 - 2 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA


B. Test voltages shall be 65 KV for 15 KV cable with 220 mil insulations. Leakage currents shall be recorded after 15, 30, 45, 60 seconds and at one-minute intervals thereafter.

C. Test results shall be graphically presented and shall indicate the time and weather conditions during testing.

D. Three (3) copies of the test report, signed and sealed by a registered Professional Engineer, shall be furnished to the Architect.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC CONDUCTORS ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 26 05 19 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001

SECTION 26 05 19

CONDUCTORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. This section outlines the quality and type of conductors to be used in the various systems, locations and conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 WIRE AND CABLE 600 VOLT

A. Conductors shall have current carrying capacities as per NEC, #12 minimum except for controls, and fixture wire.

B. Conductors for general use, sized #10 and smaller, shall be solid copper. Conductors #8 and larger, and any size to motors or vibrating equipment shall be stranded copper.

C. All conductor insulation shall be 600 volt.

D. Insulation for branch circuits in dry locations only, sized #10 and smaller, shall be color coded, nylon jacketed, PVC, type THHN-THWN.

E. Insulation for feeders, #8 and larger, and for circuits run in wet locations and below grade shall be cross-linked polyethylene insulation type RHH-RHW/USE or type XHHW.

F. Conductor color codes shall be as set forth below.

2.02 FIXTURE WIRE

A. Fixture wire shall be Type SF-2 except that type THHN or XHHW may be used in the channel of and flex to fluorescent fixtures.

2.03 CONTROL WIRE

A. Control wire shall be #14, 19 strand, type THHN-THWN, rated 90 degrees C full color range.

2.04 MANUFACTURER

A. Wire and cable shall be manufactured by Rome, Cerro, Colonial, General Cable, Essex, Aetna, AIW, Encore or Southwire.

2.05 WIRE CONNECTIONS

A. Wire connections, #10 and smaller, shall be made with T&B Sta-Kon wire joints PT Series complete with insulating caps, (installed with WT161 Tool or C WT2000 Tool), Ideal Wing Nuts, or Buchanan Elec. Products B Cap or Series 2000 Pres-sure connectors complete with nylon snap-on insulators (installed with C24 pressure tool).

B. On wire larger than #10, shall be made with approved solderless connectors and covered with Scotch #33 electrical tape so that the insulation is equal to conductor insulation.

C. Connection of stranded conductors, #8 and larger, to bus bars in switchboards, panelboards, equipment enclosures, junction boxes, etc. shall be made with individual lugs, size as required by conductor, bolted to bus bar with full size bolts and nuts with lock washers.

CONDUCTORS CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC 26 05 19 - 2 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF WIRE AND CABLE

A. No conductor shall be smaller than #12 except where designated on the drawings or hereinafter specified.

B. Multi-wire lighting branch circuits, properly phased as required to share the system neutral, shall be utilized as indicated on the drawings. No more than three (3) branch circuits may be installed in a conduit raceway unless specifically shown on the drawings.

C. Conductors in 120 volt, branch circuit homeruns which exceed 75 feet in length from the panelboard to the first outlet shall be increased at least one AWG size to compensate for voltage drop,

D. All joints and splices in wire shall be made with approved solder-less connectors, and covered so that insulation is equal to the conductor insulation.

E. Conductors and conduits shall be continuous between outlets. No splices shall be pulled into conduit.

F. No conductor shall be pulled until conduit is cleaned of all foreign matter.

G. Where installed in panelboards, cabinets, wireways, switches and equipment wire and cable shall be neatly formed and tied.

H. Where conductors are run in parallel, each conductor making up the feeder shall be exactly the same length, the same size, and the same type of conductor with the same insulation. Further, each group of conductors making up a phase or neutral must be bonded at both ends in the same manner.

I. In installing the main service, additional slack conductors shall be provided as required by the electric utility for connection to their equipment.

3.02 OUTLETS AND BRANCH CIRCUITS

A. Outlets shall be connected to branch circuits as indicated on drawings by circuit number adjacent to outlet symbols. No more outlets than are indicated shall be connected to a circuit.

3.03 WIRE AND CABLE COLOR CODING

A. A color coding system as listed below shall be followed throughout the entire network of branch circuits.

Voltage 120/208 Phase Color

A Black A-Neutral White/Black Stripe B Red

B-Neutral White/Red Stripe C Blue C-Neutral White/Blue Stripe Equipment Ground Green Isolated Ground Green/Yellow Stripe

B. Phase conductors sized #10 AWG and below, and neutral and grounding conductors sized #6 and below, shall have permanently colored insulation. Phase conductors sized #8 AWG and above, and neutral and grounding conductors sized #4 and above, shall be color coded by either permanently colored insulation or by means of colored tape applied to the conductor within 12" of each

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC CONDUCTORS ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 26 05 19 - 3 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001

termination and in each enclosure, junction box, etc.

C. Control Conductors: Shall be color coded by use of color coded "tracers". No control circuit shall have two identical conductors.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC METALLIC SHEATHED CABLEROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 26 05 19.2 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001

SECTION 26 05 19.2

METALLIC SHEATHED CABLE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. This section outlines the quality and type of wiring assemblies specified as metallic sheathed cable assemblies for use in the various systems, locations and conditions.

1.02 PERMITTED USE

A. Metallic sheathed cable may be considered for use only where in accordance with requirements of all local and state authorities, the owner and all applicable codes.

B. Metallic sheathed cable may be utilized a fixture whips 6’-0” or less, motor connections 2’-0” or less and other equipment subject to vibration 2’-0” or less.

C. Feeders and motor circuits shall be run in EMT, IMC or rigid as specified.

1.03 PRODUCT LISTING

A. All Metallic sheathed cable, fittings, etc., shall be UL listed.

1.04 MANUFACTURER

A. Metallic sheathed cable assemblies shall be manufactured by AFC, Southwire or approved equal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 METALLIC SHEATHED CABLE

A. Type MC cable shall consist of manufactured cables containing insulated copper phase, neutral and grounding conductors, #12 AWG minimum, in an aluminum or galvanized steel, spiral wrapped, flexible jacket. ½” size minimum conductor insulation shall be color coded, rated 90°C. Insulation on grounding conductors shall be green.

2.02 CONDUCTORS

A. All conductors shall be copper with 600-volt insulation, #12 minimum shall be solid with color coded, insulation type THW, THHN-THWN or equivalent.

B. An individual neutral conductor shall be run for each phase conductor. Insulation for each individual neutral conductor shall be white with a colored stripe to match the phase conductor served.

C. A separate, full size, insulated copper equipment grounding conductor shall be run in each cable. Insulation for equipment grounding conductors shall be green.

D. Where noted as isolated ground circuits, "IG", a separate, full size, insulated copper, isolated grounding conductor shall be run in addition to the equipment grounding conductor. Insulation for isolated grounding conductors shall be green with a yellow stripe, insulation for equipment grounding conductors shall be green.

2.03 METALLIC SHEATH

A. Metallic cable sheath consist of flexible aluminum or galvanized steel spiral wrapped around

METALLIC SHEATHED CABLE CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC



conductors to form a complete assembly.

2.04 FITTINGS

A. Fittings and connectors utilized with type MC cable shall be specifically rated for use with the installed cable. Terminations to equipment enclosures, junction/outlet boxes, etc. shall be made with fittings with insulated throats.

2.05 WIRE CONNECTIONS

A. #10 and smaller connections shall be made with T&B Sta-Kon wire joints PT Series complete with insulating caps, (installed with WT161 Tool or C WT2000 Tool), Ideal Wing Nuts, or Buchanan Elec. Products B Cap or Series 2000 Pres-sure connectors complete with nylon snap-on insulators (installed with C24 pressure tool).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF METALLIC SHEATHED CABLE

A. Follow methods which are appropriate and approved for the location and conditions involved. Where not otherwise shown, specified, or approved in a particular case, run all wiring concealed.

B. Installation of MC cable shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. The Electrical Contractor shall use the cable manufacturer's specified tools for cutting and stripping cable metal jacket and installing fittings. These tools shall be available for inspection at each project visit by the Contracting Officer or his representative.

C. Installation of Metallic sheathed cable shall be in accordance with Article 334 of the NEC.

D. All joints and splices in wire shall be made with approved solder-less connectors and covered so that insulation is equal to the conductor insulation.

E. Connectors shall be steel, set screw or compression type, equipped with insulating throats, specifically listed for use with type MC cable.

F. Where cables enter boxes, they shall be secured in place with approved insulating fittings.

G. Install cable runs to avoid proximity to steam or hot water pipes. In no place shall a cable be run within 6" of such pipes except where crossing is unavoidable, then cable shall be kept at least 3" from the covering of the pipe crossed.

H. Before installing cables for motors and fixed appliances, check location of motor and/or appliance connections to locate and arrange cables appropriately. Connections to all motors and/or any equipment which has moving, or vibrating parts shall be flexible, and shall generally not exceed 24" in length.

I. Fasten cable securely in place by means of approved clamps, hangers, supports and fastenings. Arrangement and methods of fastening all cables shall be subject to Contracting Officer's direction and approval. Use only approved clamps, galvanized wire may not be used in any instance.

J. All cables shall be supported at each coupling, fitting, outlet box, junction box, cabinet or equipment enclosure in accordance with the NEC. Supports shall be independent of ducts, plumbing piping, ceiling supports, etc. Cables shall not be supported by junction boxes, pull boxes, fixtures, etc.

3.02 OUTLETS AND BRANCH CIRCUITS

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC METALLIC SHEATHED CABLEROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 26 05 19.2 - 3AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001

A. Outlets shall be connected to branch circuits as indicated on drawings by circuit number adjacent to outlet symbols. No more outlets than are indicated shall be connected to a circuit.

B. A color coding system as listed below shall be followed throughout the entire network of branch circuits.

Voltage 120/208

Phase Color

A Black

A-Neutral White/Black Stripe

B Red

B-Neutral White/Red Stripe

C Blue

C-Neutral White/Blue Stripe

Equipment Ground Green

Isolated Ground Green/Yellow Stripe

C. Conductors shall have permanently colored insulation.

3.03 TESTING

A. All MC cable shall be megger tested and the results submitted with close-out documents.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC GROUNDINGROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 26 05 26 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001

SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. This section deals with the grounding of non-current carrying conductive surfaces of equipment.

B. All grounded connections shall be installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code and all local codes and requirements. Such codes shall be considered minimum requirements and installation of the grounding system shall insure freedom from dangerous shock voltage exposure and provide a low impedance ground fault path to permit operation of overcurrent and ground fault protection devices.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUCTORS

A. Grounding conductors shall be insulated copper unless specifically shown or specified otherwise.

B. Grounding conductors shall be identified by green insulation or by green tape.

C. All buried grounding system wire shall be bare, solid, soft-drawn, annealed, copper sized #4/0 AWG minimum, or as shown on drawings.

2.02 GROUND RODS

A. Ground rods shall be 5/8 inch by 10 feet, copperweld unless noted otherwise on the drawings.

2.03 CONNECTIONS

A. The connection of a grounding conductor to ground rods or building steel shall be by means of a cadweld or thermoweld process.

B. Grounding conductor connections to conduit terminations shall be made with approved ground bushings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CADWELDING

A. Cadwelding shall be performed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.

B. All personnel performing cadwelding shall have been trained by factory certified representatives and proof of this training shall be presented to the Architect/ Engineer at the time of Cadweld inspection.

C. Cadwelding shall not be performed during conditions of high humidity which inhibit the process from proper bonding. Consult the Manufacturer's instructions for acceptable conditions and do not attempt any Cadwelding during such times as these conditions do not exist.

D. Cadweld molds shall be sized and configured for the specific welding application. Molds which have been field modified for application other than their original purpose will not be utilized under any circumstance. Cadweld "one shot" connections shall not be utilized.

E. In no circumstances will worn out or loose Cadweld molds be utilized. Molds which experience "blow out" during the welding process shall be replaced immediately and any welds made which exhibit evidence of incomplete welding shall be cut off and rewelded.

GROUNDING CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC

26 05 26 - 2 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA


3.02 SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS

A. Separately derived systems (dry type transformers with primary and secondary electrically isolated and secondary having a grounded circuit neutral conductor) shall be grounded in accordance with NEC Section 250-30.

B. The grounding electrode shall be the nearest available effectively grounded structural member and the nearest available effectively grounded cold-water pipe. Where the cold-water bonding point is not the point of entry into the building, a #1/0 copper (min.) jumper shall be installed around any valve, pressure regulator, water meter, etc., which is within the building between the bonding point and the point of entry into the building.

3.03 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. An equipment grounding conductor (sized in accordance with Table 250-122 of the NEC unless shown or specified elsewhere to be larger) shall be installed in the same raceway with all circuit conductors.

B. Equipment grounding conductors shall be bonded at each enclosure. Where an equipment grounding bus, bonded to the equipment enclosure, is provided, all equipment grounding conductors shall be connected thereto. Where an equipment grounding bus is not provided, grounding bushings shall be utilized on enclosure terminations of conduits.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC RACEWAYS-METALROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 26 05 33.1 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001

SECTION 26 05 33.1

RACEWAYS - METAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. This section deals with the materials to be used as metal raceways, connections, and supports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Conduit: Rigid and IMC shall be galvanized outside and inside by hot dipping. EMT shall be Electro-Galvanized. Conduit shall be as manufactured by Republic, Wheatland, Triangle, Pittsburgh Standard, Youngstown, or Allied.

B. Sealtight flexible metal conduit shall consist of flexible galvanized steel tubing with a liquid tight jacket of PVC. All flexible conduit shall have a copper bonding conductor wound into conduit body.

C. Couplings and connectors on rigid and IMC shall be standard threaded type, galvanized outside and inside by hot dipping. Clamp type and threadless are not acceptable. Couplings and connectors, for rigid and IMC shall be as manufactured by Raco or Appleton.

D. EMT connectors shall be compression type, equipped with insulating throats. Compression couplings shall be O-Z/Gedney 7000ST or 7000RST series, T & B 5123 - 5623 series, Midwest Electric series 1650, or equal series of Raco. Cast metal couplings will not be approved for any location.

E. EMT couplings shall be compression type. Compression type connectors shall be O-Z/Gedney 6000S or 6000RS series, T & B 5120 - 5620 series, Midwest Electric series 660, or equal series of Raco. Cast metal connectors will not be approved for any location.

F. Connectors raintight: Meyers or approved equal.

G. Bushings on rigid and IMC shall be threaded malleable iron with integral noncombustible insulator. Rigid and IMC bushings shall be O-Z/Gedney "IBC" series, T & B BIM series, Midwest Electric series 1031 - 1043 or equal by Penn Union. Grounding bushings shall be O-Z/Gedney "IBC-L" series, T & B 3870 - 3999 series, Midwest Electric GLL series or equal by Penn Union.

H. Watertight Flex Connectors: O-Z/Gedney, Raco, or Midwest Electric with insulating throat.

I. Conduit clamps and supports shall be as manufactured by T & B, Midwest Electric, or O-Z/Gedney.

J. Conduit fittings shall be manufactured by Pyle-National, Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, or Russellstoll.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CONDUIT, TYPE OF INSTALLATION

A. EMT may be utilized for branch circuits and auxiliary systems where concealed in ceiling or walls and exposed where there is no danger of mechanical injury in accordance with paragraph "B", below.

B. Unless shown or specified otherwise, rigid or IMC conduit shall be used as follows:

(a) For service entrances

(b) In all cases in floor slabs,

(c) For exterior use or other areas exposed to moisture,

RACEWAYS-METAL CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC



(d) Where danger of mechanical injury exists,

(e) For feeders, and

(f) Where EMT or non-metallic conduit is not specifically permitted.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT EMT, IMC, RIGID

A. Conduits shall be sized in accordance with the latest National Electrical Code except where shown to be larger on the drawings or when required by local Code.

B. Follow methods which are appropriate and approved for the location and conditions involved. Where not otherwise shown, specified, or approved in a particular case, run all wiring concealed.

C. Where rigid and/or IMC conduits enter boxes, they shall be secured in place by approved locknuts and bushing.

D. Where EMT enters boxes, they shall be secured in place with approved insulating fittings.

E. Conduit ends shall be plugged during construction.

F. Any auxiliary systems conduit not run complete to an outlet box or enclosure shall be terminated with an insulating bushing to protect the system cable. This includes, but is not limited to conduits stubbed out above lay-in ceilings, run across sections of non-accessible ceilings, stubbed out at terminal boards, stubbed out to cable trays, sleeves through walls, etc.

G. Empty conduits shall be equipped with a 100 lb. test nylon pull cord.

H. The use of running threads is absolutely prohibited. All conduit shall be jointed with approved conduit couplings. All couplings on IMC and rigid conduit shall be threaded.

I. Install conduit runs to avoid proximity to steam or hot water pipes. In no place shall a conduit be run within 6" of such pipes except where crossing is unavoidable, then conduit shall be kept at least 3" from the covering of the pipe crossed.

J. Before installing raceways for motors and fixed appliances, check location of motor and appliances connections to locate and arrange raceways appropriately. Provide flexible conduit connections to all motors and/or any equipment which has moving or vibrating parts. Flexible conduit shall generally not exceed 24" in length and shall in all cases be equipped with a ground wire, bonded at both ends. Sealtight flexible conduit shall be used in all areas exposed to moisture.

K. Exposed conduit runs shall be run parallel and/or right angles to building walls and/or partitions.

L. Fasten conduit securely in place by means of approved conduit clamps, hangers, supports and fastenings. Arrangement and methods of fastening all conduits shall be subject to Contracting Officer's direction and approval. Use only approved clamps, galvanized wire may not be used in any instance.

M. Junction or outlet boxes in or above ceilings shall be supported independently from conduits or ceiling support by all thread rod secured to roof or floor structure above

N. All conduits shall be supported within 3 feet of each coupling, fitting, outlet box, junction box, cabinet or equipment enclosure Conduit supports shall be independent of ducts, plumbing piping, ceiling

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC RACEWAYS-METALROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 26 05 33.1 - 3AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001

supports, etc. Conduits shall not be supported by junction boxes, pull boxes, fixtures, etc.

O. Multiple conduit runs shall be supported by trapeze hangers, run tight against the ceiling.

P. All conduit connections to sheet metal cabinets or enclosures subject to the elements shall terminate by use of raintight hubs.

Q. All exposed conduit threads, metal supports, etc., exposed to the elements or exterior of building shall be painted with rust preventive paint.

R. No conduit with an external diameter larger than 1/3 the thickness of the slab, shall be placed in the slab and conduits in the slab shall not be spaced closer than 3 diameters on center.

S. No conduit shall be run in slag or fill under the ground floor slab. Where running in the slab is not permissible, conduits shall be run in trenches, 18" minimum, below grade and backfilled.

T. Where conduit crosses a structural expansion joint an approved conduit expansion fitting will be installed.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 26 05 33.3 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001

SECTION 26 05 33.3

OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. This section outlines the quality, type and installation of outlet and junction boxes for general and special use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CEILING AND WALL OUTLET BOXES

A. Outlet boxes shall be standard type, with knockouts, made of hot dipped galvanized steel, Steel City, Raco, Appleton, or Bowers.

B. Single wall outlet boxes shall be two gang with single gang trim rings.

C. Wall outlet boxes installed in 4” or greater walls shall be 3-½” deep. Wall outlet boxes installed

walls less than 4” shall be maximum depth permitted wall construction.

D. Ceiling outlet boxes shall be 4" octagon 2-1/8" deep or larger as required due to number of wires.

E. Boxes shall be provided with approved 3/8" fixture studs when required to support stem mounted light fixtures.

F. Except when located in exposed concrete block, switch and receptacle boxes shall be 4" square with trim ring for single gang installation. Appropriate gang boxes shall be used for mounting ganged switches.

G. When installed in exposed concrete block, switch and receptacle boxes shall be square type designed for exposed block installation.

2.02 JUNCTION BOXES

A. Sheet metal junction boxes, through 4-11/16", shall be standard type of hot dipped galvanized steel, with knockouts, Steel City, Raco, Appleton, Bowers or approved equal.

B. Cast metal junction boxes, through 4-11/16", shall be type FS, FD, JB, GS, or SEH as required for application.

C. Sheet metal junction boxes larger than 4-11/16" shall be NEMA 1, Code gauge steel, flush or surface mounted as indicated and shall be Hoffman or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF CEILING OUTLET BOXES

A. Outlet boxes in or above ceilings shall be securely fastened directly to structural members or suspended from structural members by all-thread rod. Ceiling mounted boxes shall not be supported by ceiling tiles or ceiling suspension wires.

B. There shall be no more knockouts opened in any outlet box than are actually required.

OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC 26 05 33.3 - 2 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA


C. Chandeliers shall be supported independently of outlet boxes by 3/8" fixture studs.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF WALL OUTLET BOXES

A. Outlet boxes shall be securely fastened to structural members and shall not be supported by dry wall, gypsum board, plaster, etc. The device or plate installed in conjunction with the outlet box shall not be used for support.

B. Surface fixture outlet boxes shall be set so edge of cover comes flush with finished surface.

C. There shall be no more knockouts opened in any outlet box than are actually required.

D. Boxes shall be sealed during construction.

E. Under no circumstances shall through-the-wall boxes be used. Back to back boxes shall be staggered at least 3 inches, except in fire rated partitions, in which case, back to back boxes shall be staggered at least 24 inches.

F. Outlet boxes two gangs and wider shall not be supported by attachment clips or any means which supports the boxes from less than two opposite sides of the box. Such outlet boxes in stud walls shall be supported securely by support members spanning between studs.

G. Conduit entry into wall outlet boxes shall not utilize center knockouts. Knockouts to either left or right of center shall be utilized to allow more room for wire or cable routing to devices mounted on single gang trim rings.

H. Outlet boxes installed in fire rated partitions shall be boxed in with wall board or other suitable fire rated material as required to maintain or restore the fire rating of the assembly.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF JUNCTION BOXES

A. Provide junction or pull boxes where shown on the drawings and as required to facilitate installing conductors. Such boxes shall be "Code" sized unless required to be larger by the plans or other sections of these specifications. All junction boxes shall be accessible.

B. Junction boxes shall be securely fastened to be securely fastened directly to structural members or suspended from structural members by all-thread rod, independent of ductwork, plumbing, etc. Ceiling mounted junction boxes shall not be supported by EMT conduit fittings, ceiling tiles or ceiling suspension wires.

C. There shall not be more knockouts opened in any box than are actually required.

D. Boxes shall be properly protected during construction and shall be cleaned of all foreign matter before conductors are installed.

E. Boxes to be imbedded in concrete shall be properly leveled and anchored in place before the concrete is poured.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC PRIMARY DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 26 10 01 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001

SECTION 26 10 01

PRIMARY DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. The contractor shall furnish and install complete medium voltage primary power systems as

shown on the Drawings and specified herein. The primary power systems shall consist of

medium voltage cables, terminations, transformers, duct banks, etc.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 BASIC REQUIREMENTS

A. All products for use in the primary distribution system shall be rated for use with voltage and current conditions as shown on the drawings.

2.02 TERMINATIONS

A. Live Front:

1. Medium voltage cables shall be terminated using approved pre-formed

stress cone and termination assemblies.

a. 500 kcmil: PCT 15H4 or 3M5636

b. 4/0 A106: PCT 1544 or 3M5635

c. #2AWG PCT 1541 or 3M5633

B. Dead Front:

1. Medium voltage cables shall be terminated using load break elbows

which shall combine the function of cable termination, connector and

load-break switch and shall be utilized where specified or noted on the

drawings.

2. Load break elbows shall have the following ratings:

Voltage 8.3 KV phase to ground

14.4 KV phase to phase

BIL 95 KV

Withstand 34 KV, 60 Hz, 1 minute

53 KV, DC, 15 minutes

Corona Extinction 11 KV

Current-Continuous 200 amperes

Current-Momentary 10,000 amperes, 0.17 seconds

Operations 10 load break and 10 load make

at 200A, 70-80% PF

PRIMARY DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC



3. Load break elbows shall be fully shielded, fully submersible and hot stick

operable. A capacitive test point shall be provided.

4. A cable shield grounding adapter shall be installed in conjunction with the

load break elbow to facilitate proper termination of primary cable metallic

tape or drain wire shields.

5. Load break elbows shall be Cooper LEJ215 XXX, Raychem ELB-210 or

equal by Elastimold. Cable shield grounding adapters shall be furnished

as required.

2.03 SPLICES

A. Medium voltage cables shall be spliced in manholes only utilizing approved splice kits.

1. 500 KCMIL:

a. Prysmian Elaspeed Splice Kit 155H4Ce-500 (133% insulation

level).

b. 3M Cold Shrink Q5-111 Splice Kit 5515A-500-CU.

2. 4/0 AWG:

a. Prysmian Elaspeed Splice Kit 155EJCe-4/0-CU (133% insulation

level).

b. 3M Cold Shrink Q5-111 Splice Kit 5514A-4/0-CU.

3. #2 AWG:

a. Prysmian Elaspeed Splice Kit 15E4Ce-2 (133% insulation level).

b. 3M Cold Shrink Q5-111 Splice Kit 5513A-Z-CU.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. All equipment and materials shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturer's

instructions.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC TRANSFORMERS - PAD MOUNT, OIL-FILLEDROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 26 12 13 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001

SECTION 26 12 13

TRANSFORMERS - PAD MOUNT, OIL-FILLED

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Furnish and install an oiled filled, dead front, pad mount transformers as shown on the drawings

and specified herein.

B. Except where specific requirements are shown on drawings, transformers shall conform to the

following specification and to applicable ANSI and NEMA requirements.

1.02 RATING

C. Transformer ratings shall be as shown on the drawings, based on 55 degrees rise above 30

degrees C average ambient self-cooled. Transformer no-load losses shall not exceed 0.10% of

full load KVA. Full load efficiency shall be not less than 99.4% for transformers 750 KVA and

larger, and 99.25% for transformers through 500 KVA. Primary voltage shall be 7.2/12.47 kV

wye; secondary voltage shall be 120/208 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire wye, or as shown on the

drawings.

1.03 MANUFACTURER

A. Transformers shall be manufactured by General Electric, Hevi-Duty, ABB, Square D or Cooper

Industries.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CONSTRUCTION

A. Coils shall be wound with copper conductors. Core and coil assembly shall be the five-legged wound core type, using high grade, grain-oriented silicon steel laminations carefully annealed after fabrication to restore high magnetic permeability. Magnetic flux is to be kept well below the saturation point.

B. Transformer construction shall be such that it is completely enclosed when terminal compartment doors are closed. There shall be no grilles, louvers, cracks, or other openings that would allow access to an energized component by inserting a wire, screwdriver, or other implement. Terminal compartments shall be protected by hinged, removable doors with padlock provision. Secondary terminal compartment shall be separated from the primary compartment by a steel barrier and the latch or retaining means for the primary compartment shall be within the secondary compartment. The terminal compartment shall have a removable sill or other provision for skidding the transformer into position without damaging conduit stubs. Transformers shall be finished by cleaning, rust inhibiting treatment, prime paint, and finish paint, Robins AFB Brown #48. Transformer cabinet shall be furnished with stainless steel door pins and hinges. Transformer and cabinet base shall be stainless steel.

C. Secondary Terminal Compartment - Secondary terminal compartment shall contain secondary terminals, oil level gauge, ground pad, oil temperature gauge, pressure relief valve, provision for pressure-vacuum gauge, and other accessories specified below. Terminals shall consist of

TRANSFORMERS - PAD MOUNT, OIL-FILLEDCONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC



a porcelain bushing with tinned copper spade drilled to take cable lugs of size and number shown on drawings. In addition, the neutral (XO) terminal shall have a copper strap connected to the ground pad.

D. Primary Terminal Compartment - Primary terminal compartment shall contain primary terminals, oil fill and drain valves with plugs, ground pad, tap-changer control, oil-immersed fuses and other accessories specified below. Parking stands shall be provided beside each primary bushing.

2.02 HIGH VOLTAGE TERMINALS

A. High voltage terminals shall consist of bushings that will accept load break bushing inserts for

load-break elbows specified elsewhere; parking brackets for accessories shall be provided.

B. There shall be six high voltage terminals arranged for loop feed. Loop operation shall be

determined by proper connection of cables and elbows. Furnish load break bushing inserts for

all six terminals. Furnish grounded protective caps for all unused bushings and insulated

parking stands for all unconnected cables.

2.03 LOW VOLTAGE TERMINALS

A. Low voltage terminals shall be solid copper, tin-plated lugs, drilled to accept standard NEMA

configuration heavy duty, solid copper, long barrel two-hole, compression-type lugs.

B. All cable connections to lugs shall be made with solid copper, long barrel, two-hole,

compression-type lugs, T&B 54800 series, or approved equal by Burndy, size as required by

cable, and shall be crimped with tool as recommended by the lug manufacturer. Lugs shall be

bolted to bus with two full-size bolts and nuts, with lock washers.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Lightning Arresters - Furnish three valve type arresters equipped with load break elbows for

connection to transformer bushings. Arresters shall be rated 9 KV.

B. Taps - Primary shall have four 2 1/2% full-capacity taps. 2 taps below and 2 taps above. Tap

changing shall be accomplished by an externally operated, non-load tap-changer located

within primary compartment.

C. Load break primary switch- two positions, On-Off, load break, gang operated oil immersed

switch. Switch handle with eye for operations with hot stick shall be located within the high

voltage compartment.

D. Provide current limiting fuses installed in the tank in series with current sensing bayonet fuses

rated 200% of the primary full load amps of the transformer.

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC TRANSFORMERS - PAD MOUNT, OIL-FILLEDROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 26 12 13 - 3AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Pad mount transformer shall be installed on concrete pad to manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Pad shall be as shown on the drawings. Coordinate exact pad location with other trades to

minimize conflicts and to provide at least 3'-0" clearance on back and sides and 12'-0"

clearance at front.

C. Where exposed to vehicular traffic, provide 4" steel pipe bumpers, concrete filled, to protect

transformer. Pad shall be a minimum of 4" above finished grade.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC FRONT ACCESSIBLE SWITCHBOARD


SECTION 26 24 13.1

FRONT ACCESSIBLE SWITCHBOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. This section deals with requirements for Main Switchboard MSA.

B. Switchboards shall be provided complete with circuit breakers, and all accessories as shown on drawings and as specified.

1.02 STANDARDS

A. The switchboards shall be designed, built, and tested in accordance with the applicable portions of the latest editions of NEMA PB-2 and UL-891 standards, and the National Electrical Code. All sections and devices shall be UL listed, and so labeled.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION

A. The switchboard shall be a dead front, completely front accessible, metal enclosed, self-supporting structure consisting of vertical sections welded or bolted together to form one rigid unit.

B. The basic structure shall be of the universal frame type utilizing die-formed members bolted and braced to form a rigid framework.

C. The sides and top shall be covered with removable, panels of code gauge (minimum) steel, screw attached to rigid frame. Enclosing panels shall not exceed 36" x 48". All panel edges shall be formed and finished to eliminate sharp points or edges.

D. The switchboard shall be assembled in sections as shown on the drawings. Each section shall be completely isolated from other sections by a full depth barrier of glass polyester insulation or 10-gauge (minimum) aluminum.

E. The switchboard shall be provided with adequate lifting means and shall be capable of being rolled or moved into installation position and bolted directly to the floor without the use of floor sills.

F. Individual shipping sections shall be designed for bolting together at installation site. All necessary bolting hardware as well as main bus splices shall be supplied between adjacent shipping sections.

G. All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the switchboard shall be properly cleaned and finished with gray baked enamel over a rust-inhibiting phosphatized coating.

2.02 BUSSING

A. Bus shall be of 98% conductivity copper sized to carry current noted on plans with a minimum of 55 degrees C rise above 40 degrees C ambient. Minimum bus size shall be based on a maximum current density of 1000 ampere per square inch of cross sectional area but the above noted temperature rise shall take precedent.

B. Where parallel runs of multiple bars are utilized to meet amperage requirements, a 1/4" minimum air gap shall be provided between bars. Each bar shall be individually insulated to allow free air circulation.

C. All joints shall overlap full bus width and shall be silver plated. Bus edges shall be rounded and smoothed to a 1/8" minimum radius. Each connection shall be accessible and shall be bolted with four bolts equipped with Belleville washers.

D. The entire bussing assembly shall be braced and rated to withstand fault currents of 65,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. Bracing and bus supports shall be of high impact, non-tracking insulating material.

FRONT ACCESSIBLE SWITCHBOARD CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC



E. The switchboard neutral bus shall be full sized and shall extend the entire length of the switchboard.

F. The switchboard ground bus shall be sized 25% of main bus but shall not be less that of a 1/4"x 2" copper bus. The ground bus shall extend the entire length of the switchboard and shall be bonded to each cubicle.

G. Main, neutral and ground bussing shall have provisions for future extensions at each end cubicle.

2.03 CABLE CONNECTIONS

A. All cable connections to bus shall be made with solid copper, long barrel, two-hole, compression-type lugs, T&B 54800 series, or approved equal by Burndy, size as required by cable, and shall be crimped with tool as recommended by the lug manufacturer. Lugs shall be bolted to bus with two full-size bolts and nuts, with lock washers.

2.04 MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER

A. Main circuit breaker shall be individually mounted with hinged front doors and shall be completely compartmentalized with side steel barriers and top, rear, and bottom glass polyester or aluminum barriers.

B. Main circuit breaker shall be individually mounted, insulated case, manually-operated, with a stored energy type mechanism to provide quick-make, quick-break operation. Manual operation shall be by means of low torque rotary handle located on the front of the circuit breaker. A push button to open the breaker shall also be included and mounted on the breaker cover. Breaker shall be provided with solid-state trip unit, with adjustable long time pickup and delay, short time pickup and delay (I2t in or out) and instantaneous pickup. Breaker shall be rated 240 volts, with a minimum interrupting rating of 65,000 RMS symmetrical amperes at 240 volts.

2.05 FEEDER BREAKERS

A. Feeder breaker shall be group mounted, thermal magnetic, manually operated with a stored energy type mechanism to provide a quick make, quick break operation.

B. Feeder breakers shall be rated 240V with a minimum interrupting rating of 65,000 RMS symmetrical amperes.

2.06 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide one (1) surge arrester, in NEMA 4 enclosure, mounted within the switchboard:

1. The surge arrester shall be listed in accordance with UL1449, to include section 37.3 highest fault current category, and shall be UL1283 listed.

2. The surge arrester shall provide for all modes of protection: L-N, L-G, N-G in wye system.

3. The surge arrester shall be modular in design, with two (2) modules per phase for redundancy.

4. Each mode, including N-G, shall be fused with a 200KAIC surge rated fuse, with thermal contact device.

5. The surge arrester shall be provided with diagnostic monitoring and alarm. Provide with one (1) set of form “C” contacts for remote monitoring.

6. Minimum surge current capacity shall be minimum 300KA per phase. Suppression (clamping) voltage rating shall not exceed 400V (L-N, L-G, N-G). Maximum continuous operating voltage shall be greater than 110% of normal system voltage.

7. Surge arrester shall have a minimum EMI/RFI filtering of 50dB at 100kHz per MIL-STD-220A.

8. Surge arrester shall be warranted for a minimum of five (5) years.

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC FRONT ACCESSIBLE SWITCHBOARD


9. Surge arrester shall be manufactured by Advanced Protection Technologies (APT), EFI Electronics, Current Technologies, or approved equal.

10. Coordinate requirements of lightning/surge arrester with lightning protection system supplier prior to bid. See Section 26 4100.

B. Surge arresters shall be protected by a 40-ampere circuit breaker located as close as possible to the main service point of entry and wired with #8 copper, minimum, conductors routed and connected so that no sharp bends of less than 8" radius are made.

C. All wiring terminals for front panel mounted devices, including meters, fusing, indicators, etc. shall be completely enclosed by clear insulating barriers. Rigid frames, connected to the panel door, shall provide mounting means for screw attaching insulating panels.

D. Each "Normal" device shall be equipped with a white/black core engraved nameplate. Engraved letters shall be 1/4" minimum.

E. Furnish 30" wide rubber mat the full length of the switchboard.

F. Provide one (1) multifunction digital power meter. The meter shall accept 3-phase current and voltage inputs from current and potential transformers connected to the switchboard main bus. All output displays shall be true-RMS, and, at a minimum shall include

1. Phase-to-phase voltage

2. Phase-to-neutral voltage

3. Phase current

4. Neutral current

5. Real power (KW)

6. Apparent power (KVA)

7. Reactive power (KVAR)

8. Power factor

9. Frequency

G. The meter shall provide both instantaneous and average readings, as well as peak readings. All readings must be available for each phase. Provide connection for communications for remote monitoring. Output shall be vial LCD/LED readout.

2.07 EQUIPMENT RATING

A. The switchboard, as a complete unit, shall have a single minimum integrated equipment rating of 65,000 AIC which shall certify that all equipment is capable of withstanding the stresses of a fault of that magnitude. Such rating shall be established by actual tests by the manufacturer on similar equipment construction as the subject switchboard. This test data shall be available and shall be furnished to the Engineer, if requested, with or before the submittal of approved drawings.

2.08 MANUFACTURERS

A. Switchboards shall be manufactured by GE, Square D, Cutter Hammer or Siemens.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Submit complete shop drawings which include:

1. Front and end views.

2. A sectional view of each section which includes bussing, cabling, etc.

3. Schematic and Wiring Diagrams for all components.

FRONT ACCESSIBLE SWITCHBOARD CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC



4. Detailed descriptions of circuit breakers including coordination curves.

5. Plotted time current curves, at recommended settings, for all protective devices in the switchboards.

B. The switchboard shall be mounted on a 4" concrete pad. The pad shall extend a minimum of 4" to each side; all pad edges shall be beveled.

C. The switchboard shall be completely assembled, tested and calibrated in the factory and shipped separately. The Engineer shall be notified when the equipment is ready for testing so that representatives of the Owner can inspect the switchboard and witness the tests if desired.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC PANELBOARDS-LIGHTING/RECEPTACLE ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 26 24 16.1 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001

SECTION 26 24 16.1

PANELBOARDS-LIGHTING/RECEPTACLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Furnish and install circuit breaker lighting and/or receptacle panelboards as shown on the drawings and

as specified herein. Panelboards shall be dead front type manufactured in accordance with Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., standard of panelboards and enclosing cabinets and be so labeled.

B. Panelboards shall be factory assembled. C. Where required, lighting/receptacle panelboards shall be labeled for use as service entrance equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PANELBOARD BOXES A. Panelboard boxes shall be fabricated from sheet steel (galvanized or equivalent rust-resistant). The size

of the wiring gutters and gauge of steel shall be in accordance with NEMA and U.L. Standards for panelboards unless shown or specified to be larger.

B. Boxes shall not be furnished with pre-punched knockouts except where otherwise noted. C. Boxes for panelboards shall be 20 inches wide. 2.02 PANELBOARD FRONTS AND TRIMS A. Fronts shall be designed for surface or flush mounting as shown on the drawings and shall include

hinged door, lock and latch. B. Fronts for flush panels shall overlap the box by a minimum of 3/4 inch all around. Surface fronts shall

have the same overall dimensions as the box. C. Fronts shall be secured to one side of the enclosure with screws and hinged to allow he entire cover

assembly to be opened to provide access to bussing and panelboard live parts without removal of the complete cover. A hinged inner door, with key lock, shall provide access to circuit breaker trip handles only and shall expose no live parts.

D. Fronts shall be Code gauge steel with interior and exterior surfaces cleaned and finished with gray

baked enamel over a rust-inhibiting phosphatized coating. E. Locks shall be flush, cylinder type, held in place by concealed screws to a captive nuts welded to the

inside of the door. All panelboard locks shall be keyed alike. F. A framed circuit directory with clear plastic cover shall be affixed to the inside of the door. G. Panelboards shall have no exposed or accessible live parts when the front is installed whether the door

is open or closed.

PANELBOARDS-LIGHTING/RECEPTACLE CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC 26 24 16.1 - 2 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001

2.02 PANELBOARD BUS ASSEMBLY A. Bus bars shall be silver plated copper. All connectors shall be plated. B. Bussing shall be arranged for distributed phase arrangement so that one, two, and/or three pole

breakers may be installed in any location. The removal, replacement or installation of circuit breaker units shall be allowable without disturbing adjacent units and without drilling or tapping.

C. Ampacity, service voltage, service entrance (main breakers or lugs) and branch breakers shall be as

shown on the drawings.

D. Neutral bars shall be full sized and equipped with lugs to accommodate all conductors to be connected. Where indicated, neutral bars and feeder lugs shall be rated for doubled neutral conductors.

E. Ground bars shall be furnished in all panelboards, equipped with lugs to accommodate all conductors to

be connected. Where more than one ground bar is furnished, each shall be interconnected with a conductor sized not less than the panelboard feeder grounding conductor.

F. Panelboards having more than 42 poles shall be furnished in equal bus sections not exceeding 42 poles

each, and mounted in equal sized enclosures. 2.03 CIRCUIT BREAKER ARRANGEMENT A. Circuit breakers shall be bolt-on, factory installed. B. The entire left row shall be filled, then begin top right. C. Breakers shall be numbered vertically beginning top left. Multi-section panelboards shall be numbered

consecutively through all sections. D. Circuit breaker numbers shall be plastic or metallic, permanently attached to trim. Stick-on paper

numbers will not be accepted. 2.04 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal magnetic, trip indicating, molded case type,

alternating current. Breakers shall trip free of the handle and tripping shall be indicated by the handle assuming a position between "OFF" and "ON". Multiple pole breakers shall have internal common trip with single operating handle; external handle ties are not acceptable.

B. Single pole breakers shall be UL listed as "Switching Breakers" and shall carry the "SWD" marking. C. Breakers shall be bolt-on type. D. Where noted on the panelboard schedule or on the plans ground fault circuit protection breakers shall

be provided: 1. Circuit breakers sized 15 ampere, 20 ampere, and 30 ampere, 1 and 2 pole, shall have integral

Class A ground fault protection (5 milliampere sensitivity). This feature shall not require additional panelboard space.

2. Circuit breakers sized 40 amperes and above and all 3 pole units shall utilize external sensors

and control circuit breakers via shunt trip units. Sensitivity shall be adjustable from 4 to 12 amperes. Each circuit breaker unit shall be equipped with all necessary wiring, hardware, etc.,

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC PANELBOARDS-LIGHTING/RECEPTACLE ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 26 24 16.1 - 3 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001

required for a complete independently functioning unit. Current transformers and controls may be externally mounted to panelboards in NEMA 1 enclosures or if space permits, mounted in panelboard enclosure. Reset controls shall be readily accessible and shall not require the removal of panelboard covers, etc.

E. Main Breakers shall be industrial frame equal to GE "E" frame. F. Other breaker accessories shall be furnished as shown on the drawings. 2.05 PANELBOARD EQUIPMENT SHORT CIRCUIT RATING A. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the

integrated equipment rating shown on the panelboard schedule or on the plans. This rating shall be established by testing with the overcurrent devices mounted in the panelboard. Where rating is not shown larger on the drawings, the minimum integrated equipment short circuit rating shall be 10,000 amperes symmetrical. Panelboards shall be marked with their maximum short circuit current rating at the supply voltage.

2.06 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Any special requirements on the drawings, such as for increased interrupting rating, ground fault protection, etc., shall supersede these specifications, but only insofar as that particular requirement is concerned.

B. Manufacturer's data on actual equipment electrical service requirements shall be utilized for selection

of overcurrent protective device ratings. Verify equipment coordination with the electrical contractor as set forth in Section 16011 of these specifications.

C. Changes in overcurrent protection device ratings to coordinate with actual equipment electrical

service requirements shall be provided at no additional cost. D. Panelboards larger than 400A shall conform to the requirements for power panels. 2.07 SPARE CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND SPACES A. Each panelboard shall be equipped with spare 20 ampere, 1 pole circuit breakers and full circuit breaker

frame size, 1 pole spaces each equipped with necessary bussing and hardware for installation of additional circuit breakers. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, each panelboard shall be equipped with spare 20 ampere, 1 pole circuit breakers in quantity no less than 10% of the active circuit breaker pole spaces and 20% space only units for full size, 1 pole circuit breakers.

2.08 MANUFACTURER A. Panelboards shall be as manufactured by GE, Siemens, Square "D", Cutler Hammer or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All panelboard dimensions shall be carefully checked and coordinated with the proper trades to ensure

proper mounting space and support.

PANELBOARDS-LIGHTING/RECEPTACLE CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC 26 24 16.1 - 4 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001

B. Panelboards to be surface mounted on exterior walls shall be secured to two (2) vertical runs of 7/8" x 1-5/8" steel strut each 8'- 0" minimum in length and securely anchored to the wall by means of lead anchors or toggle bolts.

C. Wiring in panelboard gutters shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner. Wiring shall be grouped

into neat bundles and secured with NON-METALLIC tie wraps. D. Panelboard directories shall be typewritten and shall be field verified by the contractor to ensure

accuracy. Directories shall include adequate descriptions to allow accurate identification of the load and location served.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC BASIC DEVICES ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 26 27 26 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001

SECTION 26 27 26

BASIC DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. This section outlines the quality and requirements of the Basic Devices, switches, receptacles, etc., to be used and the installation instructions for the devices.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 WIRING DEVICES

A. Switches and receptacles shall be specification grade AC type as manufactured by Hubbell, Leviton or P & S.

B. Switches shall be silent operation toggle rated 20 amperes, 120/277 volts AC. All switches shall be equipped with screw terminals for bonding grounding electrode conductors. Switches shall be Hubbell CSB120 series or equal.

C. Receptacles shall be side wired, specification grade, in NEMA configuration as shown on drawings. Unless otherwise noted, general use outlets shall be 20 ampere, 120 volt duplex receptacles, Hubbell Catalog #5362 or equal.

D. Where noted on the drawings, and/or required by code, receptacles shall be GFCI protected by integral Class “A” ground fault protection (5 milliampere sensitivity). Unless noted otherwise all "GFI" receptacles shall be duplex, rated 20 amperes, 120 volts with "TEST" and "RESET" buttons and feed through feature for ground fault protection of all devices on the load side of the unit. "GFI" receptacles shall be Hubbell Catalog #GF-5362 or equal.

2.02 PLATES AND ACCESSORIES

A. All devices shall have proper plates, trim, etc.

B. Plates shall be standard size and of the same manufacturer as devices. Oversize plates are not acceptable.

C. Where plates are required to be engraved, the engraving shall be 3/16 inch high. Letters shall be permanent, non-smear black. Stamping shall not be considered equal to engraving.

D. Plates shall be 302 stainless steel or brass except where other-wise specified or noted on the drawings.

E. Receptacles installed in wet locations shall be equipped with a device plate and hinged outlet cover assembly which is UL listed for wet locations while in use. Receptacles shall be listed for use in wet locations. The hinged cover shall be gasketed on the top and sides and equipped with reliefs on the bottom to permit cords to exit while the cover is closed. The cover shall also be gasketed to seal to the outlet box. Wet location covers shall be manufactured by TayMac or approved equal.

F. Surface mounted devices with exposed conduit in unfinished areas shall have galvanized metal plates with rounded edges.

BASIC DEVICES CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC 26 27 26 - 2 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0632-13000003 | PWBA 130701


2.03 FINISHES

A. Devices and plates shall be grey with stainless steel, brown with brass, grey with galvanized metal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 MOUNTING HEIGHTS AND LOCATIONS

A. Symbols on drawings and mounting heights are approximate. Exact locations and mounting heights shall be determined on the job and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to coordinate with all trades to ensure correct installation, i.e., over counters in or above back-splashes, in block walls, tile, and other specific construction features.

B. Outlets, unless otherwise shown shall be located with the center line of outlet boxes the following distance above the finished floor:

Receptacles, General: 1'-6" Telephone Outlets: 1'-6" Receptacles Over Counters: 3'-8" or 2" above backsplash Switches, General: 4'-0" Fire Alarm Manual Stations: 4'-0" (handle) Fire Alarm Visual Alarm Devices: 6'-8" Clock Outlets: 7'-6" Bells, Interior: 7'-6" Bells, Exterior: 10'-0"

C. All device mounting heights shall be in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and all Federal, State, and Local requirements for making buildings accessible to the handicapped.

3.02 GENERAL MOUNTING

A. Verify all door swings with Architectural. Locate boxes for light switches within 4 inches of door trim on the strike side.

B. Where switches are shown grouped together they shall be installed under a single plate. Where required, barriers shall be provided in the outlet box.

C. Where receptacles, telephone outlets, and auxiliary system outlets are shown on the drawings grouped together they shall be installed with 4 inches between outlets.

D. All receptacles installed out of doors and in bathrooms, kitchens, break rooms, laundry rooms, attics, basements etc, and within 6'- 0" of sinks, showers or normally wet or damp locations shall be GFCI protected.

E. All receptacles for vending machines and drinking fountains shall be GFCI protected.

F. All GFCI protected receptacles or devices shall be located to be readily accessible for reset without moving appliances or equipment and without requiring the use of ladders.

G. Devices and associated plates shall not be used as support. Outlet boxes shall be rigidly supported from structural members.

3.03 SAFETY OUTLETS

A. All receptacles in areas accessible to children under twelve years of age shall be tamperproof, GFCI protected.

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC BASIC DEVICES ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 26 27 26 - 3 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001

B. All receptacles in areas accessible to students on the first floor shall be tamperproof, GFCI protected

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC FUSES ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 26 28 13 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001

SECTION 26 28 13 FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Furnish and install fuses as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1.02 MANUFACTURER A. Fuses shall be as manufactured by Bussman Manufacturing Company, Shawmut, Littlefuse, or

approved equal. Numbers shown in this Specification are those of Bussman. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FUSES A. Shall be time-delay type U.L. listed with a minimum interrupting rating of 100,000 amperes

symmetrical. B. Shall be dual element, Fusetron. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Fuses shall be sized as shown on Drawings. B. One spare set of fuses shall be furnished for each size used. One additional spare set of fuses

shall be furnished for each five sets of same size fuses used. END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC SAFETY SWITCHES ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 26 28 16.1 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001

SECTION 26 28 16.1

SAFETY SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. This section deals with fused and non-fused safety switches.

B. All safety switches shall be NEMA Heavy duty type.

1.02 SERVICE RATING

A. Where required, safety switches shall be labeled for use as service entrance equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SAFETY SWITCHES

A. Shall be quick-make, quick-break, fused or non-fused as shown. Switch blades shall be fully visible in the off position with the door open.

B. General use fusible switches shall have provisions for dual element fuses, UL Class K-5.

C. Disconnect switches for isolating motors served by VFD”s shall have one set of form “C” auxiliary

contacts as required by the VFD equipment supplier to signal the VFD to shut down if the switch is opened while the motor is running.

D. The switch cover shall have a defeatable dual interlock to prevent inadvertent opening of the cover with the switch in the "ON" position. Handles shall provisions for padlocking in the "OFF" position.

E. Switches shall be horsepower rated.

2.02 NEUTRALS

A. Insulated neutrals bars shall be furnished in all safety switch enclosures which contain neutral conductors.

2.03 GROUND BARS

A. Ground bars shall be furnished in all safety switch enclosures.

2.04 MANUFACTURER

A. Switches shall be as manufactured by Square "D", Siemens, Cutler Hammer or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SAFETY SWITCHES

A. Safety switches shall be installed as shown on the plans and in accordance with the NEC.

B. Disconnect switches for motors shall be rated in horsepower and shall be sized for motor served.

C. Disconnect switches for non-motor loads shall be sized in accordance with equipment full load current.

SAFETY SWITCHES CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC 26 28 16.1 - 2 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA


D. Disconnect switches for isolating motors served by VFD’s shall have 2 #12 control conductors, run

with the service conductors from the VFD, to connect the form “C” auxiliary contacts in the

disconnect switch to the VFD to shut down the VFD if the switch is opened while the motor is running. Provide an engraved white micarta nameplate with ¼” black letters at each motor

isolation switch stating:

“CAUTION, THIS SWITCH IS FOR ISOLATION PURPOSES ONLY, DO NOT OPEN UNDER

LOAD. THIS MOTOR IS SERVED BY A VFD IN ROOM ____. THE DISCONNECT IN THE VFD MUST BE OPENED PRIOR TO SERVICING THIS MOTOR.

E. Safety switches installed indoors, in dry locations, shall be NEMA I. Safety switches installed in locations subject to moisture shall be rain-tight, NEMA 3R, except where other types of enclosures are shown on the plans.

F. Adequate support shall be provided for mounting safety switches. Safety switches shall be securely attached to building structure in all possible instances.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC LIGHTING MATERIALS AND METHODS ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 26 50 00 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001

SECTION 26 50 00

LIGHTING MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This section outlines the quality and installation requirements for lighting fixtures, LED’s, drivers,

pole mounted luminaires poles and mounting hardware.

B. Lighting fixtures shall be manufactured in accordance with Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., and so labeled.

C. All LED fixtures shall be provided with a full five (5) year replacement warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIXTURES

A. Lighting fixtures shall be furnished as shown in Lighting Fixtures Schedule on drawing.

B. It shall specifically be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify the exact type ceiling and depth of all recessed fixtures and to furnish correct mounting trims and accessories for the specified and/or approved fixtures as required for the ceiling in which the fixtures are to be installed.

C. Recessed fixtures shall be equipped with pre-wired junction boxes and mounting hardware as

required.

D. Recessed fixtures shall be rated for type ceiling installed. Units installed in insulated or lay-in ceiling shall be either insulated ceiling (IC) rated or shall be thermally protected (TP).

E. Each luminaire shall be equipped with a line side disconnecting means in compliance with NEC

Article 410.73, paragraph G. 2.02 LED LUMINAIRES AND DRIVERS

A. All Luminaires

1. Comply with IES LM-79-08 Approved Method for measuring lumen maintenance of LED light sources.

2. Comply with IES LM-80-08 Approved Method for electrical and photometric measurement of

SSL product. 3. Comply with In-Situ testing for more reliable results. 4. LED’s shall be Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive (RoHS) compliant. 5. LED arrays shall be sealed, high performance, long life type; minimum 70% rated output at

50,000 hours. 6. LED luminaires shall deliver a minimum of 60 lumens per watt. LED’s shall be “Bin No. 1”

quality.

LIGHTING MATERIALS AND METHODS CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC 26 50 00 - 2 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA


7. Drivers shall be solid state and accept 120 through 277 VAC at 60 Hz input. 8. The LED light source shall be fully dimmable to 1% with use of compatible dimmer switch

designated for low voltage loads. 9. LED color temperatures:

CRI> 85, 2700°K as noted +/- 145°K. CRI> 85, 3000°K as noted +/- 200°K CRI> 85, 4000°K as noted +/- 275°K. CRI> 85, 5000°K as noted +/- 283°K.

10. Luminaires shall have internal thermal protection. 11. Luminaires shall not draw power in the off state. Luminaires with integral occupancy, motion,

photo-controls, or individually addressable luminaires with external control and intelligence are exempt from this requirement. The power draw for such luminaires shall not exceed 0.5 watts when in the off state.

12. Color spatial uniformity shall be within .004 of CIE 1976 diagram. 13. Color maintenance over rated life shall be within .007 of CIE 1976. 14. Indoor luminaires shall have a minimum CRI of 85. 15. Luminaire manufacturers shall adhere to device manufacturer guidelines, certification

programs, and test procedures for thermal management. 16. LED package(s)/module(s)/array(s) used in qualified luminaires shall deliver a minimum 70%

of initial lumens, when installed, for a minimum of 50,000 hours. 17. Luminaires shall be fully accessible from below ceiling plane for changing drivers, power

supplies and arrays. 18. Luminaires shall be furnished with a 10kV/10kA surge suppressor per IEEE/ANSI C6241

CAT A.

B. Power Supplies and Drivers

1. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher. 2. Maximum driver case temperature not to exceed driver manufacturer recommended

operation.

3. Output operating frequency: 60Hz.

4. Interference: EMI and RFI compliant with FCC 47 CFR Part 15. 5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: 10% Maximum. 6. Meet electrical and thermal conditions as described in LM-80 Section 5.0. 7. Primary Current: Confirm primary current with Drawings. 8. Secondary Current: Confirm secondary current specified by individual luminaire

manufacturers. 9. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with individually specified luminaire and

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC LIGHTING MATERIALS AND METHODS ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 26 50 00 - 3 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001

individually specified control components. 10. Solid-state control components to be integral or external per each specified luminaire.

Remote control gear to be enclosed in Class 1, Class 2, or NEMA 3R enclosures as required.

2.03 STANDBY BATTERY PACKS

A. Standby battery packs installed in fixtures shall be self-contained, factory installed units complete with a Nicad battery pack, charger and transfer mechanism mounted in the with a test button and derangement signal mounted so that unit can be tested or monitored without opening doors, covers, etc.

B. Standby battery packs installed in fixtures shall be capable producing a minimum output of 1400

lumens for a minimum of 90 minutes upon normal power failure.

C. Standby battery packs shall be as manufactured by Chloride, Bodine, IOTA or approved equal. 2.04 STEMS

A. Fixture stems shall be ball aligner type, swivel below canopy, 30 degrees from vertical and shall be painted to match fixture trim.

B. Individually mounted fixtures shall be threaded into ball aligner sockets which are suspended from

fixture studs, 3/8-inch minimum, in a ceiling outlet box secured to building structural members.

C. In finished areas stems shall be painted to match fixtures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES

A. Support of all fixtures shall be responsibility of the Electrical Contractor.

B. Lay-in fixtures for grid type ceilings:

1. Shall be supported independently of the ceiling grid, from ceiling structural, at 4 points.

2. Shall each be independently wired from an above ceiling junction box by a flexible conduit not exceeding 6'- 0" nor less than 4'- 0" in length. Under no circumstances shall grid fixtures be nippled together.

3. Troffers installed in gyp board ceilings shall be lay-in type for mounting in grid ceilings and

furnished with ceiling frame kits to be mounted in the ceiling and permit the troffer to be wired with flex and dropped-in as in a grid ceiling installation. Each frame shall be supported at 4 points from structure above ceiling.

C. All flex shall contain an insulated grounding conductor secured to fixture body and junction box by

means of bonding screws.

D. Ceiling mounted fixtures shall be supported independently of ceiling or ceiling tiles from structural members of building.

E. Surface mounted light fixtures shall be mounted with provisions for air circulation, generally 1/2"

minimum.

F. Fixtures in continuous rows, other than recessed grid type, shall be connected by nipples with

LIGHTING MATERIALS AND METHODS CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC 26 50 00 - 4 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA


locknuts and bushings and wired together through fixture channels. G. Suspended fixtures shall be chain hung and wired with flexible cord from a ceiling mounted outlet

box. H. Stems on individual fixtures shall utilize ball aligner sockets secured to fixture studs in ceiling outlet

boxes. Safety chains shall be secured from ceiling structural to the fixture body to prevent the fixture from falling in the event the normal mounting should fail. Large surface or pendant incandescent luminaires (in excess of 20 pounds) shall be secured with a 3/8" rod run through the outlet box to structure above and anchored independent of ceiling and conduit systems.

I. All stems utilized for electrical service to light fixtures shall contain an insulated grounding conductor

secured to fixture body and junction box by means of bonding screws.

3.02 WARRANTY

A. Fixtures shall be furnished with a five (5) year manufacturer replacement warranty.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC FIRE ALARM SYSTEM/LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 28 31 00 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001

SECTION 28 31 00

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM / LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL


A. This section is a Division 28 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division 28 section making reference to fire alarm systems.

B. Drawings and General Provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-

tions, Division 01 Specification sections and all Division 28 sections, apply to this section.

1.02 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide all design, equipment, installation and testing for the system herein described and ob-tain the Authority Having Jurisdiction’s acceptance.

B. Quantity or Placement of Devices: This specification makes no representation to the quantity or

location of devices required to satisfy the authority having jurisdiction. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate with the Authority Having Jurisdiction to ensure that the completed installation satisfies all requirements of the governing codes.

1.03 SIGNAL SUBCONTRACTOR

A. The Signal Subcontractor shall submit written certification that the proposed fire alarm system complies with the following. These certifications shall accompany submittals:

1. Compliance with NFPA Standards 72, 101 and 110 as applicable. The design, engineer-

ing and construction will be in accordance with Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) 4-740-06 and UFC 3-600-01.

2. All equipment installed in the system including the interconnecting wiring is UL listed for

the purpose and appropriately 3. All equipment installed in the system including the interconnecting wiring is UL listed for

the purpose and appropriately cross listed. 4. UFC 4-021-01 Compliant Mass Notification/Life Safety System.

B. A proposed maintenance agreement contract for this project shall be included with submittals

indicating:

1. The installation is covered by a maintenance agreement between the Government and a UL listed fire alarm company whereby the service company issuing the certificate bears responsibility for inspecting, testing, maintaining, and providing any necessary repairs.

2. Documentation is maintained on the alarm system including description of system opera-

tion, location of alarm equipment throughout the area protected, initial acceptance tests and the performance of periodic testing and maintenance.

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM/LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC 28 31 00 - 2 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA


3. An executed maintenance agreement for the system shall also be forwarded to the Con-tracting Officer, upon certification of this fire alarm system, for the Contracting Officer’s consideration in selecting a system maintenance and confidence testing fire alarm com-pany.

C. Authority Having Jurisdiction: The Authority Having Jurisdiction for this project is Robins AFB

78 CEG.

1.04 LISTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Listing Requirements: All fire detection and alarm components furnished under this section shall be UL listed in the fire equipment list or FM, approved for fire signaling or fire suppression use. All accessory equipment shall be manufactured with UL listed components.

B. Reference Standards (Edition currently adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction):

NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code NFPA 101 Life Safety Code UFC Uniform Fire Code UFC 4-021-01 Mass Notification Systems, Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) UFC 3-600-01 Fire Protection Engineering for Facilities Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) NFPA 70 National Electrical Code with local amendments

NFPA 110 Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems

UMC Uniform Mechanical Code (duct smoke detectors) with local amendments ADA American Disabilities Act

1.05 DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTATION

A. Fire Alarm / Mass Notification System Drawings:

1. The Contractor shall evaluate, evacuate and prepare a voice system design as required for proper detection and alarm annunciation consistent with the characteristics of the products he proposes to incorporate into the system.

2. Contractor shall prepare a design which includes all design equipment and installation

necessary to obtain Authority Having Jurisdiction acceptance.

B. Submittal Data:

1. Design and Installation Drawings:

a) Drawings shall be reproduced electronically in digital format in DXF format on 24”x36” velum plots or approved equal. Submitted drawings shall have Authority Having Jurisdiction approval marked thereon. Layout plan drawings, interconnect drawings, and wiring diagrams submitted without Authority Having Jurisdiction ap-proval will not be reviewed.


b) Show a general layout of the complete system including equipment arrangement. It shall be the responsibility of the fire alarm contractor to verify dimensions and assure compatibility all other systems interfacing with the fire alarm system.

c) Identify on the drawings the Class A raceway system and conductor sizes and types

with number of conductors in each conduit. Provide each raceway and device with a unique alphanumeric identification.

d) Indicate on the point to point wiring diagrams, interconnecting wiring within the panel

between modules, and connecting wiring to the field device terminals. e) Designs of attachments to building structure shall meet the requirements of UBC,

Seismic Zone as directed by Authority Having Jurisdiction. Submit detailed mathe-matical analysis of the design.

f) Interconnect Drawings: Show only external connections between equipment and de-

vices. All wires shall be identified with alphanumeric designators and all termination points shall show the correct terminal identification.

g) Wiring Diagrams: Show the general physical arrangement of the component parts of

the equipment and the connection of all internal wiring. All components, wires, termi-nal strips and terminals shall be identified with alphanumeric designators. Wiring system shall be Class A.

h) Equipment mounting details: Show the mounting location for all floor and wall mount-

ed equipment including distance from floor and column lines, and fabrication details for all special mounting brackets. Details shall also provide any special installation instructions. These details may be included on the plan drawings if space allows.

i) Layout Plan Drawings: Show every device provided under this section in its relative

spatial location. Sections and elevations shall be utilized as necessary to accurately describe the installed location of all devices.

2. Provide voltage drop calculations indicating the system ability to furnish power at a mini-

mum of 90 percent of nameplate listing in a standby power condition with all devices in alarm utilizing the proposed wire type and size. It shall be demonstrated that no single wire run between a circuit and its most remote device exceeds the manufacturers rec-ommendations for wire length, circuit resistance or circuit wire to wire and wire to ground capacity.

3. Itemize all battery loads under standby and alarm conditions. Auxiliary power supplies

and transponder battery calculations shall demonstrate the ability of the batteries to sup-ply the required secondary power for a period of twenty four hours with no external power applied and furnish power for worst case alarm signaling for five minutes at the end of this period with all devices in alarm and all device LED’s lighted. Battery sizing shall be at a factor of 1.5 times the results of this mathematical requirement to account for battery aging between replacements and for system modifications and expansions.

4. Catalog sheets: Show the color, configuration and dimensions of the equipment or device

described. Provide technical specifications, such as operating voltage, operating tem-perature and humidity limitations, mounting and wiring information and a description of the function and operation of the device.



5. Recommended Spare Parts List: Submit a listing of all devices and components recom-mended for Contracting Officer purchase as spare parts to support the system herein. The list shall include recommended quantities for all items. Unit prices guaranteed for 90 days after submittal shall be listed for all items.

6. Scheduled Testing: Include step-by-step procedures for performance testing every fire

alarm device and system output to demonstrate functionality in accordance with specifi-cation requirements.

7. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Refer to Division 26, Section ‘Common Work Re-

sults for Electrical Systems’. Manuals shall be typewritten or printed instructions which contain the following minimum information:

a) Complete operating instructions b) Preventative maintenance instructions c) Catalog sheets on all devices and equipment d) Manufacturers operation and maintenance instructions e) Reduced 11”x17” copies of all system drawings

8. Record Drawings: All review drawings shall be revised to reflect the accurate As-Built

condition. Working plans shall show actual, accurate locations of devices, and actual routing of conduit and location of end of line devices. The Contractor shall provide five sets of vellum plots and three electronic CD’s of the Record Drawings.

1.06 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. The system shall provide for multiple zones of alarm including the following:

1. Sprinkler water flow and tamper switch(es) 2. Smoke detection 3. Heat detection 4. Cooking hood fire suppression 5. Other fire suppression systems 6. Manual pull stations 7. Spares 8. Mass Notification 9. Class A Wiring System in ¾” conduit 10. Provide other additional zones as required by Authority Having Jurisdiction 11. Provide single mode 2-strand fiber optic cable to fire alarm cabinet from Base demarc

backboard in inner duct within 1” conduit, per facility standards. 12. Reader boards shall be electronic at all exit door locations. 13. Provide wireless transceivers for reporting all zones to facility Fire Department with 12

spare zones.

B. Thermal detectors:

1. Shall be provided to detect a high temperature condition in required areas. 2. Thermal detectors shall be located in accordance with guidelines in NFPA 72E or manufac-

turers UL (or FM, if applicable) listed spacing. 3. Thermal detectors shall not be installed immediately above heating appliances.


4. Thermal detectors, rated as required, shall be provided to detect a high temperature condi-

tion in ceiling and roof structure cavities as required by code authority.

C. A combination of ionization and photoelectric detectors shall be provided to detect fire condi-tions in the required areas. Detectors shall be installed where required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Detectors shall be located in accordance with the NFPA guidelines on the spacing not to exceed 30 lineal feet and 900 square feet.

D. A rechargeable battery supply shall be provided to automatically operate the entire fire detec-

tion and alarm system, including detectors, control panel, remote fire annunciator, alarm sound-ing devices and auxiliary control equipment (unless otherwise specified herein) in the event of a loss of primary power for 72 hours. The batteries shall be sized at 150 percent of size pre-scribed by code.

E. Manual fire alarm stations, connected to alarm zones, shall be provided as required by the Au-

thority Having Jurisdiction. F. Audible and visual evacuation alarms shall be provided as required by the Authority Having Ju-

risdiction and comply with ADA requirements. All notification appliance circuits shall be Class A, Style Z. All notification appliance circuits shall have a minimum circuit output rating of 2 amps at 24 V dc; 50 watts at 25 V audio and 35 watts at 70 V audio. The notification circuits shall be power limited.

G. Remote fire annunciators shall be provided and installed to individually annunciate alarms for

each of the fire zones, and a fire alarm control panel (FACP) trouble condition. H. Provide a weatherproof audible and visual evacuation alarm (95 dB at 10 feet minimum) on

building exterior at side of building directed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. I. Provide automatic releases for all doors as required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Con-

nection to door hardware shall be made as directed by door hardware manufacturer. Coordi-nate device requirements with doors, hardware, and adjacent mounting surfaces to assure that doors are held in a position acceptable to the Contracting Officer and Authority Having Jurisdic-tion.

J. System shall be capable of remote monitoring at either a monitoring station or the fire depart-

ment. Coordinate the interface requirements with the Contracting Officer. Provide remote radio transmitter per Government requirements.

K. Interfaces between air handling and fire suppression systems and the fire alarm system shall

be accomplished utilizing interposing relays with a dry contact. See requirements in Divisions 23 and 26. Provide for each zone of alarm and duct detector that actuates in an alarm condi-tion. Coordinate with Divisions 23 and 26 to insure proper sequencing of air handling and fire suppression systems.

L. Provide interface to the mass notification panel to shut down the fire alarm signals both audible

and visual, upon a mass notification alarm condition. During any mass notification alert mes-sage, the fire alarm horns/strobes shall be silenced so that the mass notification message can be heard throughout.

1.07 SYSTEM OPERATION

A. Activation of any alarm causing device (manual station, smoke detector, water flow switch, heat detector, etc.) shall cause the following actions and indications:



1. Initiate a pre-signal alarm at main control panel, and begin a time delay sequence. If the staff can confirm that the alarm is false, the general alarm shall be cancelled. If the alarm condition is valid, the general alarm shall be initiated after the time delay.

2. Indicate the fire device and/or fire zone on remote annunciators and/or graphic annuncia-

tors.

3. Initiate shut down and/or start of supply and exhaust fans through the interposing relays to evacuate or restrain smoke movement.

4. Energize extinguishing systems for containment of the fire where appropriate.

5. Close all fire doors, smoke doors, and fire dampers.

6. Activate the off-site alarm (central reporting).

B. Activation of any supervisory condition causing device (tamper switch, valve supervision de-

vice, fire pump trouble, generator trouble, low temperature thermostat, low water level) shall ini-tiate a supervisory alarm signal at main control panel, and remote annunciators.

C. Any system trouble caused by wiring failure including open circuits, grounded circuits and

shorted circuits on circuitry required to be supervised in this manner; communications loss, de-vice removal, battery low voltage, power loss, charger failure or failure in any device shall cause the following actions and indications:

1. Initiate a fire alarm system trouble signal at the fire alarm control panel.

2. Indicate a trouble condition at remote annunciators and/or graphic annunciators.

D. All signal circuits including evacuation circuits, trouble circuits and supervisory indicating cir-

cuits, but not including water flow indication circuits, shall be acknowledged by means of a switch on the control panel front. Subsequent alarm receptions shall cause the alarm signals to resound indicating the reception of a new alarm condition. The signals shall also be caused to resound by the re-operation of the signal silence switch allowing evacuation signaling from the silence switch without keyboard commands when an alarm condition exists.

E. Labels: Indicating lights and controls shall be permanently labeled as to their function.

1.08 ACCEPTANCE TEST PROCEDURE

A. Submit for approval, prior to testing, an acceptance testing procedure meeting the requirements of this section.

B. Submit, for system record, all required data as compiled during installation and testing upon

completion of the acceptance testing procedure. This data shall be loose-leaf bound and la-beled as system acceptance testing information.

C. Submit for system record, a completed ‘fire alarm/mass notification system certification and de-

scription’ as included in NFPA 72, 2016 Edition.


PART 2-PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT

A. All equipment shall be new and the latest state of the art equipment as marketed by a single manufacturer. The equipment shall be installed in a fashion consistent with the listings to per-form all functions and indications as described herein. All equipment shall be listed for fire alarm system use by the UL or listed by FM. The system shall be comprised of all equipment, software, firmware, raceways, wire and wiring as required to furnish a complete and operating system in full compliance with this specification and the contract documents.

B. Fire Alarm /Mass Notification Control Panel: The FACP shall be the addressable type and

modular in construction and shall be comprised of but not limited to the hardware, and software required to perform the required functions. The fire alarm control panel shall consist of:

1. Surface mounted steel cabinet with indicator viewing window, hinged door and cylinder

lock, factory finished in baked enamel.

2. System power supplies, including necessary transformers rectifiers, regulators, filters and surge protection as required for system operation, capable of powering the system in a worst-case condition with all devices in an alarm condition and local alarm devices lighted without exceeding the listed ratings.

3. System processors capable of processing all incoming alarm signals and issuing any out-

put commands required as a result of the alarm reception.

4. Emergency power supply batteries shall be sealed, gelled-electrolyte, designed for fire alarm service.

5. A completely automatic, solid state battery charger shall be provided to maintain the batter-

ies in fully charged condition. The charger shall be capable of charging the batteries from 75 percent of full charge to 100 percent of full charge within 24 hours.

6. Common module shall supply the power necessary for the FACP and all detectors that re-

quire power. A green AC power-on LED shall indicate the normal condition of the system. Common alarm and trouble LEDs, voltage outputs, and relays shall be provided. Individual yellow supervisory LEDs shall be provided for primary AC power failure indication, ground fault detection, reverse polarity feature disconnect, low battery voltage, indicating circuit trouble. An audible trouble signal shall sound when any trouble condition occurs. A silence switch shall be provided to silence the audible signal but the trouble LEDs shall remain lighted until the trouble condition is repaired and the system is reset. To prevent the si-lence switch from being inadvertently left in an abnormal position, the switch shall be self-restoring and any new trouble occurrence shall reinitiate the audible signal.

7. System ground fault detection shall be provided for the entire FACP. Upon detection of a

resistance to ground indicating deterioration of the circuit, the common trouble signal shall be activated and the ground fault LED shall light. Fault conditions shall be designated style D for initiating devices and Style 6 for signaling circuit.

8. Provide a reverse polarity circuit that is a distinct circuit utilized for no other purpose. A re-

verse polarity switch shall be provided for system testing. The reverse polarity yellow LED shall light whenever the reverse polarity circuit is disconnected and a trouble signal shall be indicated. Output terminal connections shall be provided for a central station transmitter. Transmitter is not part of this contract and shall be supplied by the Owner. Provide wire in conduit to the telephone panel.



9. Accessory relay module shall have relays suitable for fan shutdown, damper positioning, and door holder release. Relays shall have a minimum contact rating of five amperes, re-sistive, at 120 volts AC or 28 volts DC. Screw terminals for wiring terminations shall be provided.

C. Monitoring and Control: The fire alarm control panel shall include the following capabilities and

features:

1. Detector real time condition readout in an analog value to allow tracking of detector condi-tion and maintenance. Scheduling as well as performing required NFPA calibrated sensi-tivity testing. Detectors reaching a pre-defined percentage of the individually programmed alarm setting and maintaining that setting for a period of 24 hours shall display an alarm message to indicate the need for maintenance.

2. The ability to individually assign any automatic smoke detector to perform an alarm verifica-

tion cycle as defined by the UL to eliminate false alarms as a result of transitory environ-mental smoke, electrical transients all system processors to accomplish an automatic re-start if required, generate a trouble message and revert to the default, stand alone mode if necessary.

D. Remote Annunciators: Remote annunciator panels shall provide visual indication and be dead

front construction with nomenclature for alphanumeric annunciation applied with a photo emul-sion technology and finish trim in anodized aluminum. Locate adjacent to entry designated by Authority Having Jurisdiction for fire department use. Provide an indicator for each zone. Pro-vide additional indicators as required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

E. System Power:

1. Primary power for the FACP and the secondary power battery chargers shall each be ob-

tained from the power panelboard. Connect primary power circuit to emergency generator if available.

2. Secondary Power Supply:

a) Provide sealed gelled electrolyte batteries as the secondary power supply for the fire

alarm control panel and each system transponder. The battery supply shall be calcu-lated to operate its load in a supervisory mode for a period of 72 hours with no prima-ry power applied and at the end of that period operate its alarm mode for a period of fifteen minutes. Batteries shall be sized to carry 1.5 times the calculated size to compensate for deterioration and aging during the battery life cycle. Batteries shall be housed in the control cabinet or a separate cabinet with adequate cell separation to prevent accidental discharge. Batteries shall be equipped with post and nut or one blade terminals. Slip on tap terminals are not acceptable. If housed in a separate cabinet, a fuse block shall be provided within the battery cabinet.

b) Provide battery charging circuitry for each standby battery bank in the system low

voltage power supply or as a separate circuit. The charger shall be automatic in de-sign, adjusting the charge rate to the condition of the batteries. Battery charge rate and terminal voltage shall be read using the fire alarm control panel LCD display in the service mode and indicated directly in volts and amps. Meters reading in per-centage are not acceptable. Charger shall be housed in the main fire alarm control panel or the battery cabinet.


F. Manual Stations: Provide double action type with no break glass/plastic bar feature, keyed flush or surface mounted devices as required. Station shall be equipped with terminal strip and pressure style screw terminals for the connection of field wiring. Devices utilizing rotary switch-es, pins, jumpers or staples are not acceptable. Surface mounted stations shall be mounted using a baked red enamel outlet box. Manual pull boxes shall open with a screwdriver or an Al-len wrench.

G. Heat detectors shall be rate compensated type, rated at 135 degrees (except where noted oth-

erwise). Detectors shall be constructed to compensate for the thermal inertia inherent in detec-tors due to the thermal mass, and alarm at the set point. Detector bases shall be of the twist lock style and shall be provided with an indicating light to verify operation which shall latch on in an alarm condition and screw type pressure terminals for the connection of field wiring. Re-moval of the detector from its base shall cause a system trouble signal. Devices utilizing rotary switches, pins, jumpers or staples are not acceptable.

H. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: Light refraction technology smoke detectors shall have a high

rejection of false signals caused by electrical noise and electrical transients and shall be capa-ble of being checked for sensitivity without being removed from its twist lock base. The reading of the detector sensitivity shall yield a discrete electrical value for logging and tracking of status to determine the maintenance and cleaning requirements. Detectors not yielding a calibrated value indicating sensitivity shall not be acceptable. The detector shall be readily dissembled to gain access to the detection chamber for cleaning and maintenance. Detectors shall be used for open area protective coverage and shall be insensitive to air velocity.

I. Ionization Smoke Detectors: Dual chamber and self-compensating for ambient temperature and

humidity and shall be capable of being checked for sensitivity without being removed from its twist lock base. The reading of the detector sensitivity shall yield a discrete electrical value for logging and tracking of status to determine the maintenance and cleaning requirements. The detector shall be readily dissembled to gain access to the detection chamber for cleaning and maintenance. Detectors shall be used for open area protective coverage and shall be insensi-tive to air velocity.

J. Duct Detectors:

1. Air duct smoke detectors shall be sampling photoelectric or ionization type for sensing of

products of combustion within the air stream of ducted fan systems. The devices shall in-clude necessary sampling tube extensions and sensitivity adjustments for detection of products of combustion across the width of the duct. The device shall actuate upon nomi-nal two percent light obscuration per foot. Visual indication of normal and alarm/trouble shall be incorporated into the exposed surface of the device. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided for connection to stop the respective fan system. Wiring for fan shut down shall be installed by the Contractor.

2. The detectors furnished shall be approved for use in environments as covered by FM, UL

268a and UL 268. Detectors furnished shall be available in the following configurations to serve all possibilities:

a) High Velocity: As listed for use in HVAC duct detection applications of air velocities of

up to 1200 feet per minute. b) Low Velocity: As listed for use in HVAC duct detection applications of velocities be-

tween 500 and 4000 feet per minute.



3. Detector bases are to be low profile twist lock type with screw clamp terminals and self-wiping contacts. A security lock shall be installed in those areas where indicated on the drawings as requiring tamper resistant installation. Bases shall be capable of installation on a four-inch square or octagonal electrical outlet box. The detector base shall be equipped with an indicating LED that shall flash to indicate system communications and shall change state to a steady ‘on’ when the detector reaches the selected threshold for alarm and communicates that alarm to the system. The specified LED functions shall indi-cate detector state whether the system is in the normal mode or the standby power mode. Removal of the detector from the base shall cause a system trouble condition with and dis-play a distinctive trouble code on the control panel display indicating the zone of the trouble condition.

K. Evacuation Alarm Signals:

1. Evacuation alarm devices shall be combination ceiling mounted speakers and white strobe

lights to provide both audible and visual indications. All notification appliance circuits shall be Class A, Style Z. The notification circuits shall be power limited.

2. Provide flush ceiling speakers and outside wall mounted speakers for audible alarm gener-

ation. Sound pressure levels shall comply with applicable codes and shall satisfy the Au-thority Having Jurisdiction.

3. Provide a strobe type integral with assembly. Intensity per ADA requirements.

4. The device shall be fully enclosed, heavy duty, suitable for mounting on a standard four-

inch square outlet box.

5. Network Wiring: The system supplied shall utilize node-to-node, direct-wired multi-priority peer-to-peer network operations. The system shall utilize independently addressed, output modules. The peer-to-peer network shall contain multiple nodes consisting of the main controller, remote control panels and LED/LED nodes. Each node is an equal, active func-tional node of the network, which is capable of making all local decisions and generating network tasks to other nodes in the event of node failure or communication failures be-tween nodes.

L. Smoke Door Release Mechanisms: Where required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction, pro-

vide combination door closer/holder as a separately mounted device. Electrical characteristics of door holder mechanisms shall be coordinated for proper operation of magnetic release from fire alarm system. Manual override release shall be possible at any time.

M. Remote Indicators: Indicator (LED or lamp) mounted in escutcheon plate for flush mounting in

ceiling or wall. Normal condition shall be compatible with area smoke detector indicators (i.e. il-lumination upon alarm, extinguish upon return to normal).

N. Spare Parts: Deliver the following:

One zone module of each type Two of each type of detector One manual pull station One alarm horn/strobe unit


PART 3-EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. The installation of the system shall meet all requirements of NFPA 70. B. Breakers in the panels feeding the control panel shall be fitted with suitable guard, such that the

breaker cannot be turned off but fixed so the breaker can trip and requiring the removal of a screw to remove the guard. Separate breakers shall be provided for each control panel main power and trouble circuits. Breakers shall be lockable in ON position.

C. Conductors shall be copper and shall be of the type and AWG size to Authority Having Jurisdic-

tion. D. Provide adequate evacuation alarm devices for appropriate signal level throughout building. E. Remote Indicators: Provide in an adjacent area where readily visible for all concealed detec-

tors. F. General smoke Detector spacing: Smoke detector spacing shall be in accordance with the

listed spacing, the manufacturers recommendations and the requirements of NFPA 72E. De-tectors shall not be located within five feet of a supply air register nor within twelve inches of a lighting fixture.

G. Duct smoke Detector Location:

1. Location shall be in accordance with the listed spacing, the manufacturers recommenda-tions and the requirements of NFPA.

2. Coordinate installation of detectors with sheet metal installer for mounting; electrically con-

nect and provide remote indicator lights (for duct smoke detectors) where the detector is lo-cated above a suspended ceiling or in an area which is not readily accessible. Coordinate interposing relay operation to shutdown fan system.

H. Visual Indicators: Locate to meet ADA requirements and be ceiling mounted. I. Devices: Relays and other devices to be mounted in auxiliary panels are to be securely fas-

tened to avoid false indications and failures due to shock or vibration. J. Wiring:

1. Within sub-panels: Shall be arranged and routed to allow accessibility to equipment for ad-justment and maintenance.

2. Terminals: Spade lugs with upset legs and insulation sleeves sized for the conductors. 3. Each conductor shall be identified as specified herein with wire markers at every splice and

terminal point. Attach the wire markers within two inches of the wire termination. Mark both ends with alphanumeric wire markers.

4. Raceways carrying notification and Class A fire alarm signals shall have supply and return

conductors installed in separate conduits and be identified by color coding. Paint cover plates of fire alarm J-boxes red. In ceiling spaces and other unfinished areas, apply red paint to the raceway at ten-foot intervals to identify the raceway as fire alarm. All wiring shall be in conduit.



5. Voltages shall not be mixed in any junction box, housing, or device, except those contain-ing power supplies and control relays. Electrical metallic tubing conduit is acceptable in dry locations not enclosed in concrete or where not subject to mechanical damage. Conceal conduit in finished areas of new construction and wherever practicable in existing construc-tion. The use of flexible conduit not exceeding a 6-foot length shall be permitted in initiating device circuits. Run conduit or tubing concealed unless specifically shown otherwise on the drawings. Shielded wiring shall be utilized where recommended by the manufacturer. For shielded wiring, the shield shall be grounded at only one point, that shall be in or adja-cent to the FACP. Pigtail or T-tap connections to signal line circuits. Initiating device cir-cuits, supervisory alarm circuits, and notification appliance circuits are prohibited. Color coding is required for circuits and shall be maintained throughout the circuit. Conductors used for the same functions shall be similarly color coded. Wiring shall conform to NFPA 70.

6. Conductor Terminations: Labeling of conductors at terminal blocks in terminal cabinets, and

remote-control units shall be provided at each conductor connection. Each conductor or cable shall have a shrink-wrap label to provide a unique and specific designation. Each terminal cabinet and fire alarm control unit shall contain a laminated drawing that indicates each conductor, its label, circuit, and terminal. The laminated drawing shall be neat, using 12-point lettering minimum size, and mounted within each cabinet, panel, or unit so that it does not interfere with the wiring or terminals. Maintain existing color code scheme where connecting to existing equipment.

3.02 TESTING

A. All test equipment, instruments, tools and labor required to conduct the system tests shall be furnished by the installing Contractor.

B. The Contractor shall use test instruments that bear valid calibration stamp showing date of cali-

bration and the expiration date of the stamp. Calibration and accuracy of test instruments shall be certified by an independent testing laboratory having standards traceable to the National In-stitute of Standards and Technology.

C. In addition to the testing specified to be performed by the installing contractor, the installation

shall be subject to test by Robins 78 CEG and Base Fire Marshall.

3.03 AUXILIARY CONTROLS

A. Conductors and power supplies of sufficient size shall be installed to minimize voltage drop consistent with the proper operation of all devices. Destructive link smoke dampers shall not be connected to the fire alarm system. Fan shutdown control circuits, smoke removal control cir-cuits supervised (subject to NFPA requirements) and may be incorporated into the fire alarm raceway system, except that limited energy circuits shall be routed separately from line voltage circuits as required by Code (NEC Article 760).

3.04 CERTIFICATION

A. Following the final acceptance testing, the manufacturer’s representative shall submit a letter to the Contracting Officer with a copy to the Construction Manager stating he has inspected the system installation and found it in compliance with the manufacturer’s installation standards and acceptable in all respects.

3.05 ACCEPTANCE TESTING


A. A written acceptance test procedure for testing the fire alarm system components and installa-

tion will be prepared by signal subcontractor in accordance with NFPA 72 and this specification. The signal subcontractor shall be responsible for the performance of the acceptance test pro-cedure, demonstrating the functionality of the system and verifying the correct operation of all system components, circuits, and programming.

B. A program matrix shall be prepared by the signal subcontractor, referencing each alarm input to

every output function affected as a result of an alarm condition on that input. In the case of outputs programmed using more complex logic functions involving ‘any’, ‘or’, ‘not’, ‘count’, ‘time’, and ‘timer’ statements; the complete output equation shall be referenced in the matrix.

C. A complete listing of all device labels for alphanumeric annunciator displays and logging print-

ers shall be prepared prior to the acceptance test procedure. D. The signal subcontractor’s acceptance inspector shall use the system As-Built drawings in

combination with the documents specified herein, during the test procedure to verify operation as programmed. In conducting the acceptance test procedure, the acceptance inspector shall request demonstration of any or all input and/or output functions.

E. Class A system wiring shall be tested to demonstrate correct system response and correct sub-

sequent system operation in the event of:

Open loop Shorted loop Grounded loop Open communication link Shorted communication link Grounded communication link Open zone wiring Grounded zone wiring Open signal circuit wiring Shorted signal circuit wiring Grounded signal circuit wiring Initiating device removal Battery disconnected Primary power disconnected Connection to EMS system, where applicable

F. System evacuation alarm signaling shall be demonstrated as follows:

1. All signals actuate as programmed 2. Signal audibility

G. System indications shall be demonstrated as follows:

1. Correct message display for each alarm input 2. Correct annunciator light for each alarm input 3. System charging current shall be normal trickle charge for a full charged battery bank

3.06 DOCUMENTATION



A. System documentation shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer and Government and shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. The contractor shall maintain a set of drawings on site to record as-built construction. The

drawings shall be updated on a daily basis and shall be available for review at all times. These drawings shall not be used for construction prints. As-built drawings shall show de-tails of installation including conduit/cable locations, device locations, wire counts, equip-ment locations and such other details of construction required for a complete record of the construction. Upon completion of the construction the on-site as-built drawings shall be formally produced in a CAD format for turnover to the government as part of the required documentation package.

2. System operation, installation, maintenance and programming manuals.

3. System menu driven instructions for the alteration, addition or deletion of zones, modifica-

tion, addition or deletion of zone messages and the modification, deletion or addition of log-ic modules as required for system operation.

3.07 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

A. Per ADA requirements, all mounting heights indicated are the distances from the finished floor level to the top of the device box:

Manual Stations 48"

Speaker/Strobes Ceiling/wall 84” Control Panel 60" (depending on control panel) Annunciator 60"


A. Testing Procedures: Detailed test procedures, prepared and signed by a Registered Profes-sional Engineer or a NICET Level 3 Fire Alarm Technician, and signed by representative of the installing company, for the fire detection and alarm system 60 days prior to performing system tests. Detailed test procedures shall list all components of the installed system such as initiat-ing devices and circuits, notification appliances and circuits, signaling line devices and circuits, control devices/equipment, batteries, transmitting and receiving equipment, power sources/supply, annunciators, special hazard equipment, emergency communication equip-ment, interface equipment, Guard’s Tour equipment, and transient (surge) suppressors. Test procedures shall include sequence of testing, time estimate for each test, and sample test data forms. The test data forms shall be in a check-off format (pass/fail with space to add applicable test data) and shall be used for the preliminary testing and the acceptance testing. The test da-ta forms shall record the test results and shall:

1. Identify the NFPA Class of all Initiating Device Circuits (IDC), Notification Appliance Circuits

(NAC), Voice Notification System, and Signaling Line Circuits (SLC). 2. Identify each test required by NFPA 72 Test Methods and required test herein to be per-

formed on each component, and describe how this test shall be performed. 3. Identify each component and circuit as to type, location within the facility, and unique identi-

ty within the installed system. Provide necessary floor plan sheets showing each compo-nent location, test location, and alphanumeric identity.

4. Identify all test equipment and personnel required to perform each test (including equip-

ment necessary for testing smoke detectors using real smoke).


5. Provide space to identify the date and time of each test. Provide space to identify the

names and signatures of the individuals conducting and witnessing each test.

B. Test States:

1. Preliminary Testing: Conduct preliminary tests to ensure that devices and circuits area functioning properly. Tests shall meet the requirements of paragraph entitled ‘Minimum System Tests. After preliminary testing is complete, provide a letter certifying that the in-stallation is complete and fully operable. The letter shall state that each initiating and indi-cating device was tested in place and functioned properly. The letter shall also state that panel functions were tested and operating properly. The letter shall include the names and titles of the witnesses to the preliminary tests. The Contractor and an authorized repre-sentative from each supplier of equipment shall be in attendance at the preliminary testing to make necessary adjustments.

2. Request for Formal Inspection and Tests: When tests have been completed and correc-

tions made, submit a signed, dated certificate with a request for formal inspection and tests to the Contracting Officers Designated Representative (COR).

3. Final Testing: Notify the Contracting Officer in writing when the system is ready for final ac-

ceptance testing. Submit request for test at least 15 calendar days prior to the test date. The tests shall be performed in accordance with the approved test procedures in the pres-ence of the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall furnish instruments and personnel re-quired for the tests. A final acceptance test will not be scheduled until the operation and maintenance (O&M) Manuals are furnished to the Contracting Officer and the following are provided at the job site:

a. The systems manufacturer’s technical representative b. Marked-up red line drawings of the system as actually installed. c. Megger test results d. Loop resistance test results e. Complete program printout including input/output addresses

4. The final tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Offices Designated Representative

(COR). At this time, any and all required tests shall be repeated at their discretion. Follow-ing acceptance of the system, as-built drawings and O&M Manuals shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer for review and acceptance.

C. Minimum System Tests: Test the system in accordance with the procedures outlined in NFPA

72, IEC 60849, IEC 60268-16. The required tests are as follows:

1. Megger Tests: After wiring has been installed, and prior to making any connections to pan-els or devices, wiring shall be megger tested for insulation resistance, grounds, and/or shorts. Conductors with 300 volt rated insulation shall be tested at a minimum of 250 VDC. Conductors with 600 volt rated insulation shall be tested at a minimum of 500 VDC. The tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer and test results recorded for use at the final acceptance test.



2. Loop Resistance Tests: Measure and record the resistance of each circuit with each pair of conductors in the circuit short-circuited at the farthest point from the circuit origin. The tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer and test results recorded for use at the final acceptance test.

3. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground. The tests

shall be accomplished at the preliminary test with results available at the final system test.

4. Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer’s O&M Manual.

5. Test each initiating and indicating device and circuit for proper operation and response at

the control unit. Smoke sensors shall be tested in accordance with manufacturer’s recom-mended calibrated test method. Use of magnets is prohibited. Testing of duct smoke de-tectors shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 72.

6. Test the system for specified functions in accordance with the contract drawings and speci-

fications and the manufacturer’s O&M Manual. 7. Test both primary power and secondary power. Verify, by test, the secondary power sys-

tem is capable of operating the system for the time period and in the manner specified. 8. Determine that the system is operable under trouble conditions as specified. 9. Visually inspect wiring. 10. Test the battery charger and batteries. 11. Verify that software control and data files have been entered or programmed into the

FACP. Hard copy records of the software shall be provided to the Contracting Officer. 12. Verify that red-line drawings are accurate. 13. Measure the current in circuits to ensure there is the calculated spare capacity for the cir-

cuits. 14. Measure voltage readings for circuits to ensure that voltage drop is not excessive. 15. Disconnect the verification feature for smoke sensors during tests to minimize the amount

of smoke needed to activate the sensor. Testing of smoke sensors shall be conducted us-ing real smoke. The use of canned smoke is prohibited.

16. Measure the voltage drop at the most remote appliance (based on wire length) on each no-

tification appliance circuit. 17. Audibility intelligibility testing of the voice evacuation notification system shall be accom-

plished law NFPA 72 for voice evacuation systems, IEC 60268-16, and ANSI S3.2. 18. Opening the circuit at not less than 10% of alarm initiating devices and notification appli-

ances to test the wiring supervisory feature. 19. The Contractor shall demonstrate modem communications with remote sites as specified

by the COR. Dial in capability shall also be demonstrated, using specified security. 20. The Contractor shall demonstrate fiber optic communications with remote sites as specified

by the COR. Dial in capability shall also be demonstrated, using specified security.


3.09 DRAWINGS, MANUALS, TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS

A. Upon completion of the installation and prior to final inspection, the contractor shall furnish ‘as-built’ drawings as indicated above. In addition, the contractor shall furnish five (5) copies of a manual, including wiring diagrams, giving complete instructions for the operation, inspection, testing and maintenance of the system. Any special tools necessary for the maintenance of the equipment shall be furnished, as well as one spare set of fuses of each type and size required. As soon as practicable after approval of the list of equipment, the contractor shall furnish copies of spare parts data for each different item of equipment listed. The data shall include a com-plete list of parts and supplies with current unit prices.

3.10 INSTRUCTION OF GOVERNMENT EMPLOYEES

A. Equipment manufacturer shall provide one day on site and five days of technical training to the Government at the manufacturing facility. Training shall allow for classroom instruction as well as individual hands on programming, troubleshooting and diagnostics exercises. Room and travel costs shall be included for two Government personnel. Factory training shall occur within six months of system acceptance.

B. Instructor: Include in the project the services of an instructor, who shall have received specific

training from the manufacturer for the training of other persons regarding the inspection, test-ing, and maintenance of the system provided. The instructor shall train the Government em-ployees designated by the Contracting Officer, in the care, adjustment, maintenance, and oper-ation of the fire alarm and fire detection/mass notification system.

C. Qualifications: Each instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of this installation. The

instructor shall be trained in operating theory as well as in practical O&M work. D. Required Instruction Time: Provide eight hours of instruction after final acceptance of the sys-

tem. The instruction shall be given during regular working hours on such dates and times as are selected by the Contracting Officer. The instruction may be divided into two or more peri-ods at the discretion of the Contracting Officer. The training shall allow for rescheduling for un-foreseen maintenance and/or fire department responses.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC FIRE ALARM SYSTEM AND ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 28 31 00.1 - 1

SECTION 28 31 00.1

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM AND EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Furnish, install, and place into operating condition, a complete fire alarm and emergency

communications system as described herein and as shown on the plans.

B. All fire alarm and emergency communications system equipment shall be listed as a product of a

single fire alarm and emergency communications system manufacturer under the appropriate

category by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and shall bear the "U.L." label.

C. The complete installation shall conform to the applicable sections of NFPA-72, NEC 760, Life

Safety Code 101, UFC 4-021-1 and Local authorities having jurisdiction.

D. All electronic equipment shall be completely solid-state.

E. The fire alarm and emergency communications contractor shall be a factory authorized supplier or

contractor for the equipment manufacturer. The fire alarm and notification system contractor shall

have, and have had for the past 5 years, a service department within 125 miles of the job site.

F. All fire alarm and emergency communications system equipment and its related wiring shall be

installed by, or under the direct supervision of, a qualified technician in the employ of the fire alarm

and emergency communications system contractor.

G. The fire alarm and emergency communications system shall be complete with the control panel,

manual pull stations, smoke detectors, heat detectors, strobe lights, horns, speakers, Local

Operating Consoles (LOC), all wiring, outlet boxes, and all other necessary material for a complete

operating system. Any additional equipment, hardware, conduit, installation material, wiring and

labor required for a complete operating system conforming to the intent of the drawings and these

specifications shall be furnished and installed as a part of this system at no additional cost to the

Owner.

H. The system shall have sufficient capacity to incorporate all new equipment and perform all

functions as stipulated within the drawings and these specifications.

I. All non-standard boxes shall be furnished by the fire alarm and voice notification system contractor

and installed by the electrical contractor. All standard boxes and raceways shall be furnished and

installed by the electrical contractor.

J. It shall be the responsibility of the electrical contractor to coordinate related work with all trades

involved.

1.02 GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The system is an electrically operated, closed circuit, supervised system consisting of a main

control and supervisory panel, Local Operating Console, manual and automatic alarm initiating

devices, alarm signals, speakers, wiring, and accessories as required for system operation.

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM AND CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 28 31 00.1 - 2 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-0000

B. The system functions to monitor manual and automatic fire alarm initiating devices and, on initiation

of an alarm condition, notify the occupants of the building and the post monitoring location. In

addition, the system provides voice notification to the occupants of the building of emergency

conditions either locally or by communication with the post monitoring location. Communications

with post monitoring locations shall be via an approved Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter

(DACT), and shall utilize a single IP transmitter.

1.03 OPERATION

A. Alarm Initiation - Alarm initiation shall be by manual and/or automatic initiating devices specified for

the purpose and shall be independent of control and supervisory panel incoming line power

variations. Alarm initiating devices shall be non-coded with normally open alarm contacts. Each

zone shall consist of an alarm initiating circuit.

1. The system alarm operation subsequent to the alarm activation of any manual station,

automatic detection device, or sprinkler flow switch shall be as follows:

a. All audible alarm indicating appliances shall sound a continuous fire alarm signal,

and all visible alarm indicating appliances shall flash, until silenced by the alarm

silence switch at the control panel.

b. All doors normally held open by door control devices shall release.

c. All elevators shall be signaled for recall.

d. Mechanical controls shall be signaled activate the air handling systems in

accordance with Section 15 of these specifications

2. Alarm indicating appliances shall operate. Any subsequent zone alarm shall reactivate

the alarm indicating appliances.

B. Alarm Signals - Audible alarm signals shall consist of horns or chimes and flashing lights as shown

on the plans. Alarm signals shall be continuous until the initiating device/devices have been

restored to normal and the control panel has been reset or until the alarm silence switch on the

control panel is operated. The control panel shall indicate trouble when the alarm silence switch is

left in the "silence" position and the system is reset. An alarm resound feature shall be furnished to

override the silence switch should an alarm be initiated from a new zone.

C. Supervision - All circuits shall be supervised unless otherwise noted. Any malfunction in supervised

circuits shall activate a trouble buzzer and light at the supervisory control panel. Commercial power

failure shall activate a trouble condition.

D. The control panel shall contain the Autonomous Control Unit (ACU) for the voice notification

system. The ACU shall monitor and control the notification appliance network for voice notification.

The ACU shall allow building personnel to initiate delivery of pre-recorded messages, provide live

voice instructions, and initiate visual appliances. The ACU is connected to the post monitoring

center, which can initiate pre-recorded messages or live voice instructions from the remote

location. Actions taken at the ACU take precedence over actions at other locations or the

operation of the fire alarm and voice notification system.

E. The system shall be equipped with internal, MOV based, surge protection on the AC power input

and, where applicable, on telephone connections to the municipal fire department or remote alarm

monitoring. System initiation and alarm circuits which exit the building shall also be equipped by

surge protection on each circuit.


F. Standby Power – The system standby battery power supply shall have capacity to power the entire

system for a period as required by NFPA in the supervisory and alarm condition.

G. Installation Fire Department Notification - Initiation of a fire alarm shall automatically cause the

municipal fire department to be notified by the post radio monitoring system. Communications with

post monitoring locations shall be via an approved Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter

(DACT), and shall utilize a single IP transmitter.

The contractor shall arrange to have communications verified at the completion of the project. The

contractor is responsible for reliable communications at the end of the project unless he has

documented deficiencies with the system prior to beginning work.

1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Shop drawings shall include detailed information on all system components and system standby

battery calculations, in bound booklet form.

B. Shop drawings shall include system and component drawings:

1. Elevations of the supervisory control panel. 2. Riser and wiring diagrams

a. The number, size and function of wires and/or cables, with conduit size, shall

be indicated for each circuit.

b. Wire color coding and numerical marking shall be indicated.

c. All junctions containing more than 12 terminations shall be shown.

d. Terminal block diagrams for terminal cabinets shall be included.

3. Floor plan drawings

a. All devices, panels, terminal cabinets, sprinkler system waterflow and valve

tamper monitoring points, etc., shall be indicated.

b. Device zoning shall be identified.

c. Wiring and/or cables and conduits shall be indicated for each circuit.

d. Audible alarm sound pressure levels shall be calculated for each room or

area, at the anticipated point of lowest sound pressure level in the room or

area. Rooms or areas found to not achieve minimum sound pressure levels

shall be supplemented with additional audible devices and recalculated.

e. Plan drawings shall be no smaller than 1/16 inch scale.

4. One (1) set of as-built reproducible drawings shall be provided at completion.


C. The fire alarm and emergency communications system contractor shall furnish and install all

equipment and hardware required to coordinate fire alarm system interface with the building

sprinkler system to insure that all waterflow and valve tamper switches are monitored. The fire

alarm system contractor shall obtain building sprinkler system shop drawings for the purpose of

coordinating quantity and locations of sprinkler waterflow and tamper switches, conduit entry

locations, mounting requirements, dimensions, etc. One copy of this data shall be submitted with

the fire alarm and voice notification system shop drawing booklets, along with a statement of the

following:

1. The information contained in the fire alarm system submittal includes data on all building

sprinkler system equipment within the scope of this project which will require monitoring and/or coordination with the fire alarm system.

2. The information contained in the submittal has been reviewed by the fire alarm system

contractor with the electrical contractor, the building sprinkler system contractor and the general contractor's project manager. The fire alarm system will be coordinated with the information obtained from the building sprinkler system contractor’s data.

D. The statement shall identify the source of the information and shall be signed by the representative

of the fire alarm system contractor responsible for obtaining and coordinating the information and

representatives of the electrical contractor, the building sprinkler system contractor and the general

contractor's project manager.

1.05 MANUFACTURER

A. The fire alarm and emergency communications system shall be as manufactured by Notifier,

Gamewell, Simplex, or prior approve equal. All new equipment shall be manufactured by the same

manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MAIN CONTROL AND SUPERVISORY PANEL

A. The main control panel shall be provided with all devices and accessories as required. New

modules shall be solid state control circuit assemblies.

B. The control panel shall contain the following modules:

1. Alarm Initiation 2. Signal Circuits 3. Power supply upgrade as required. 4. Program modules as required. 5. Battery Charger upgrade as required 6. Additional switch modules shall be provided for override of new air handling unit shut

down, audible silence, and other functions required. 7. New relay modules shall be furnished as required for auxiliary functions shown on the

drawings. These would include, but not be limited to, elevator recall, HVAC shutdown, etc.

8. MOV based, surge protection on the AC power input and, where applicable, on telephone connections to the municipal fire department or remote alarm monitoring.


2.02 MANUAL STATION

A. Manual stations shall be double action non-coded initiating devices having normally open contacts.

B. Stations shall be semi-flush, finished in fire alarm red and the pull lever shall be flush with the face

of the station. When the lever is pulled to initiate an alarm it shall not be restorable to the normal

position except by an authorized person having a key. In the alarm position, the pull lever shall

serve as a flag to provide visual indication that the station has been pulled. Operating instructions

shall be stamped on the cover in raised letters.

C. Each station shall have a glass cover plate that crumbles into harmless particles when the station is

operated. The station shall be operable as a non-break-glass station without affecting any of its

operating features.

2.03 THERMAL DETECTORS

A. Automatic thermal detectors shall be non-coded initiation devices. Thermal detectors shall be fixed

temperature devices with replaceable elements or rate of rise as shown on the drawings. Rating of

the fusible element shall be 135 degrees Fahrenheit except in high temperature environments, in

which case the rating shall be 200 degrees Fahrenheit.

2.04 AUTOMATIC SMOKE DETECTOR (PHOTOELECTRIC)

A. Automatic smoke detectors shall be U.L. listed. The detector shall be a plug in type fire detection

and the other for reference to maintain stable operation under varying ambient conditions.

B. Each detector shall have a lamp installed to indicate when it is in alarm and shall have terminals for

connection of remote indicators. All detector and lamp power will be supplied by the initiating circuit

wiring.

C. Each detector shall have an adjustable sensitivity setting.

D. Detectors shall be equipped with surface or flush mount bases as required.

2.05 ALARM SIGNALS

A. Fire alarm signals shall be horns with flashing lights, chimes with flashing lights, flashing lights,

horns or chimes as shown on the plans. Alarm signals shall be complete with flush trims and

backboxes.

B. Flashing lights shall be strobe units, ADA and UL listed for Fire Alarm service. The lens shall be

marked with the letters "Fire" so as to be visible from either side or front. Where horn and light units

are shown as an assembly they shall be furnished as an integral unit.

C. Emergency communications signals shall be speakers with flashing lights or speakers as shown on

the plans. Device housings shall be white. The lens shall be marked with the letters "ALERT" so as

to be visible from either side or front. Flashing light lens shall be amber. Strobes shall comply with

ADA and UL 1971, with a maximum pulse duration of 0.2 seconds. Speakers shall be equipped

with field selectable output taps from 0.5 to 2.0 watts. Minimum frequency response of speakers

shall be 400 to 4,000 hertz. Speakers shall meet audibility requirements of NFPA 72.

D All signals shall be 24 VDC.

2.06 DUCT DETECTORS


A. Where shown on the drawings, furnish duct detectors with alarm indicating lamps. Where the

detector is inaccessible from a corridor or aisle or cannot be seen from an accessible corridor or

aisle, provide a remote alarm lamp in an accessible location in the Mechanical Room, or in the

Corridor.

B. Duct smoke detectors and duct mounting units shall be complete with sampling tubes and all

required accessories.

2.07 REMOTE ALARM LAMPS

A. Remote alarm lamps shall be used to annunciate duct or area protection detectors when these

devices are located in an unsupervised or concealed location. The lamp shall be installed in a

single gang device plate and be identified as a fire alarm indicator.

2.08 REMOTE RELAYS

A. Remote HVAC, door control or other control function relays shall be used for interface with those

systems to eliminate 120 V.A.C. control wiring in fire alarm conduits or junctions. Relays shall have

24 V.D.C. coils that are energized in the normal condition and operate on alarm condition in the

control panel or wiring failure.

B. Relays shall have a minimum of two (2) form 'C' (SPDT) contacts rated at 10 amps minimum for

connection by the elevator, HVAC, or other system controls contractor.

C. Furnish Square "D", Class 8501, CDG-16 in a NEMA 1 enclosure, or CDO-16 in a NEMA 3R

enclosure where indicated.

2.09 LOCAL OPERATING CONSOLE (LOC)

A. The Local Operating Console shall be a paging component that allows activation of pre-recorded

messages or live voice paging from a location remote from the FACP. The LOC shall contain a

paging microphone, a network touchscrene graphic annunciator and an addressable switch

module.

2.10 FRAMED IDENTIFICATION DRAWINGS

A. Adjacent to the control panel install an updated, framed, small scale, back lines on white paper,

graphic floor plan identifying all fire alarm devices, with zone and device number, for the system.

B. The floor plan shall show all walls, and columns, and be provided with a north arrow, "You Are

Here" indication showing the control panel, and floor title stating "Fire Alarm - Floor Plan" or as

appropriate.

C. The graphic floor plan shall be correctly oriented with respect to the panel, so that when viewed in a

vertical position, the building floor plan will be geographically correct to the viewer. Mount each floor

plan drawing 5'-0" above the finished floor to the centerline with screws.

D. The identification drawings shall be framed under glass.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.01 WIRING

A. Fire alarm and voice notification system wiring shall be installed in accordance with the

manufacturer's wiring diagrams and shall test free from grounds, opens and short circuits. The

contractor shall furnish and install all conduit and wiring required by the fire alarm manufacturer for

a complete installation in accordance with the manufacturer's shop drawings.

B. Wiring shall be stranded #14 AWG, color coded, and numbered. Insulation shall be type THHN or

XHHW.

C. Wiring in junction boxes shall be numbered to correspond to numbering in the control panel.

D. IP based communications circuits shall meet survivability level 0, and the shared pathway shall be

level 1. Communications cables between the IP transmitter and building router/server shall be

orange in color.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. All fire alarm wiring shall be installed in metal raceways. Junction boxes shall be sized in

accordance with the number of wires and terminations to be installed.

B. All connections shall be made by or under the direct supervision of a qualified systems trained

technician.

C. All new 120 VAC wiring shall be installed in separate conduits and interfaced with remote relays.

D. Verify location and quantity of sprinkler system waterflow and supervised valve monitoring points

with the sprinkler system contractor. Furnish and install all fire alarm system equipment and

hardware where required to monitor each point for compliance with applicable Codes.

E. Where duct smoke detectors are indicated, verify the exact location and quantity of duct smoke

detectors with the HVAC system contractor. Furnish and install additional detectors and associated

fire alarm system equipment and hardware where required for compliance with applicable Codes.

3.03 SMOKE DETECTOR INSTALLATION

A. Smoke detectors shall not be located closer than 4 feet from an air supply vent.

B. Detectors shall be accessible for inspection and maintenance.

C. All detectors shall be:

1. Visible from the floor. 2. Installed in an area on the ceiling or slab that is free from obstructions for a minimum of

18 inches on all sides. 3. Located so that it can be reached from the floor by use of a ladder or a remote

removal/replacement tool.

D. Cover all smoke detection devices with plastic bags immediately after installation to maintain

cleanliness.

3.04 ALARM SIGNAL DEVICE INSTALLATION


A. Audible signaling devices shall be located as indicated on plans and additional audible signaling

devices shall be furnished and installed as required to provide minimum sound pressure levels in

all areas as required by applicable codes.

B. Visual signaling devices shall be located as indicated on plans and additional visual signaling

devices shall be furnished and installed as required to provide minimum levels in all areas as

required by ADA and applicable codes.

C. Mechanical rooms and other high ambient noise levels areas shall be equipped with high output

audible devices.

3.05 CERTIFICATION

A. Upon completion of installation, the entire system shall be tested by the manufacturer's

technician in the presence of the Owner's and/or Contracting Officer's representative and a

certificate shall be forwarded to the Contracting Officer by the technician stating that he has

personally verified the following:

1. System alterations and additions are in accordance with the specifications. 2. The entire system, existing and alterations, is in correct operating condition.

B. The system shall not be accepted without the certificate. The Contracting Officer shall be notified of

the dates and times proposed for the system tests. Tests shall not be performed without the

Contracting Officers approval.

C. All new equipment and associated labor shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from

acceptance.

3.06 TRAINING

A. Prior to acceptance of the fire alarm and voice notification system, the fire alarm and voice

notification system contractor shall hold one training session for the Owner's staff members

requiring knowledge of system operation.

3.07 "AS BUILT" DOCUMENTATION

A. Three operation manuals including copies of "As Built" Drawings shall be furnished to the Owner

and one manual shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer for record.

B. As built drawings shall include revised shop drawings showing all changes made to the system

during construction, including all change orders, and other modifications. As-Built Drawings shall

consist of CAD files in the latest version of Autocad.

C. Operation manuals shall include operating, and instruction manuals.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC COMBINATION MASS NOTIFICATION/LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 28 39 00 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001

SECTION 28 39 00

COMBINATION MASS NOTIFICATION/LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM

PART 1-GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This performance specification provides the minimum requirements for the Mass Notification / Life Safety System. The system shall include, but not limited to all system design, equipment, materials, labor, installation, documentation, testing and services necessary to furnish and install a complete, operational system to include but not limited to the following functions:

1. One-way voice communication notification system

2. ADA compliant visual notification system

3. Interface to the Fire Alarm System for fire signaling override when necessary

4. Interface to any site wide master station

5. UFC 4-021-01 Compliant Mass Notification/Life Safety System

6. Obtain the Authority Having Jurisdiction’s acceptance

B. Quantity or Placement of Devices: This specification makes no representation to the quantity or location of devices required to satisfy the Authority Having Jurisdiction. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate with the Authority Having Jurisdiction (Robins AFB 78CEG) to ensure that the completed installation satisfies all requirements of the governing codes. Device Placements on Proto Type drawings on bid drawings are shown as one suggested layout. Final placement of devices is subject to approval of 78 CEG.

C. Authority Having Jurisdiction: The Authority Having Jurisdiction for this project is Robins AFB 78 CEG.

1.02 ALTERNATES, MASS NOTIFICATION / LIFE SAFETY

A. Strict conformance to this specification is required to ensure that the installed and programmed system will function as designed, and will accommodate the future requirements and operations of the building. All specified operational features must be met without exception.

B. The authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment shall be responsible for the satisfactory installation of the complete system.

C. All equipment and components shall be the manufacturer's current model. The materials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a nationally recognized approvals agency for use as part of a protected premises protective signaling system. The authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment, such as control panels, shall be responsible for the satisfactory installation of the complete system.

D. All control panel assemblies and connected field appliances shall be provided by the same system supplier, and shall be designed and tested to ensure that the system operates as specified. The system shall utilize independently addressed, microprocessor-based modules to activate the strobe circuits and for use as interface to the fire alarm signaling as detailed in this specification.

COMBINATION MASS NOTIFICATION/LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS NBFF / CCC



E. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

F. The equipment to be supplied will be considered only if it meets all sections of the performance specification. Any deviations of system performance outlined in this specification will only be considered when the following requirements have been met:

G. A complete description of proposed alternate system performance methods with five (5) copies of working drawings thereof for approval by the Government, not less than ten (10) calendar days prior to the scheduled date for submission of bids.

H. The supplier shall furnish evidence that the proposed or alternate system performance is equal or superior to the system operation stated in the specification. Such evidence shall be submitted to and accepted by the Government, not less than ten (10) calendar days prior to the scheduled date for submission of bids.

I. The supplier shall submit a point-by-point statement of compliance for all sections in this specification. The statement of compliance shall consist of a list of all paragraphs within these sections. Where the proposed system complies fully with the paragraph, as written, placing the word "comply" opposite the paragraph number shall indicate such. Where the proposed system does not comply with the paragraph as written and the supplier feels the proposed system will accomplish the intent of the paragraph, a full description of the function as well as a full narrative description of how its proposal will meet its intent shall be provided. Any submission that does not include a point-by-point statement of compliance as described herein shall be disqualified. Where a full description is not provided, it shall be assumed that the proposed system does not comply.

J. The acceptability of any alternate proposed system shall be the sole decision of the Government or his authorized representative.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Codes & Standards

1. The equipment and installation shall comply with the current provisions of the following codes and standards:

NFPA 70 - 2014 National Electric Code®NFPA 72 - 2016 National Fire Alarm Code®NFPA 101- 2015 Life Safety Code®

UL 464 - Audible Signaling Appliances.UL 864 - Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.UL 1971 - Signaling Devices for the Hearing-Impaired.UL 1481 - Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.UL 1711 - Amplifiers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.UL 1635 - Digital Alarm Communicator System Units

Federal Codes and Regulations

UFC 4-010-01 DOD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for BuildingsUFC 4-021-01 Design and O&M: Mass Notification Systems


Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

International Standards Organization (ISO)ISO-9000ISO-9001

Electromagnetic Compatibility Requirements

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. General, Mass Notification / Life Safety: The Contractor shall furnish all labor, services and testing materials necessary to design, furnish and install a complete, functional Mass Notification / Life Safety (fire alarm system). The System shall comply in respects with all pertinent codes, rules, regulations and laws of the Authority, and local jurisdiction. The System shall comply in all respects with the requirements of the specifications, manufacturer's recommendations and Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (ULI) listings.

B. It is further intended that upon completion of this work, the Government be provided with:

C. Complete information and drawings describing and depicting the entire system as installed, including all information necessary for maintaining, troubleshooting, and/or expanding the system at a future date.

D. Designs of attachments to building structure shall meet the requirements of IBC, 2015 edition, Seismic Zone, or as directed by Authority Having Jurisdiction. Submit detailed mathematical analysis of the design.

E. Complete documentation of system testing.

F. Certification that the entire system has been inspected and tested, is installed entirely in accordance with the applicable codes, standards, manufacturer's recommendations and ULI listings, and is in proper working order. Contractor shall fill out the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion” after testing the system as required by Chapter 10 of NFPA 72 - 2016 edition, and the requirements of Annex E.

G. Mass Notification System. Provide and install a new mass notification system consisting of:

1. The Autonomous Control Unit (ACU) shall be located with the central fire alarm control cabinet.

2. The combination Remote LCD annunciator with remote microphone / Local Operator Console shall be located at the main store entrance, also in security office, store manager office and as described in UFC 4-021-01.

3. Provide a combination multi-channel one-way voice communication system.

4. Booster Power Supplies, (BPS) to power the strobe lights shall be located, as needed for the number of mass notification strobes in the building. Each BPS shall provide supervision to the strobe lights and associated wiring as required by UL, and any fault shall be transmitted to the mass notification main control panel.

5. Provide audible appliances located throughout the building.

6. Provide synchronized Class A wired visual appliances located throughout the building.




7. Provide interface to the fire alarm control panel to shut down the fire alarm signals, both audible and visual, upon a mass notification alarm condition. During any mass notification alert message, the fire alarm horn/strobes shall be silenced so that the mass notification message can be heard throughout.

H. Mass Notification Autonomous Control Unit.

1. The Autonomous Control Unit (ACU) shall be located adjacent to the remote fire alarm annunciator and shall be multiplexed back to the main mass notification panel and provide the capability to page any level of the building individually as well as the ability to activate any one of 7 mass notification messages stored in the ASU portion of the mass notification panel.

2. The local Operator Console /Remote LCD annunciator with remote microphone shall be located per UFC 4-021-01. All locations shall be verified with the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

3. Provide a combination multi-channel one-way voice communication system having a minimum of eight (8) prerecorded mass notification event messages as well as the ability to page a manual message from the microphone in the local operator console.

4. Provide synchronized Class A wired amber visual appliances located throughout the building.

5. Provide textual signage located throughout the building as required by UFC 4-021-01.

6. Provide a connection to receive signals from and to transmit signals to the base mass notification system.

7. Provide a connection to the building public address system.

1.05 OPERATIONS

A. Upon manual initiation of any mass notification event:

1. The selected message shall be broadcast throughout the entire building. This message shall override any fire messages in progress or subsequent to the initiation of the mass notification message. The mass notification message shall continue until overridden by a manual page or the message broadcast is manually discontinued. This message shall also be fed into the building public address system.

2. The synchronized amber alert strobes shall be activated for the duration of the message.

3. The clear “fire” strobes shall be extinguished if flashing and prohibited while the mass notification event is active.

4. The textual signage shall indicate a mass notification event is in progress.

5. The panel / ACU shall indicate all applicable information associated with the event condition including: message active destination zones if applicable.

6. The remote annunciator / LOC LCD/LED's associated with the event shall be illuminated.

7. It shall be possible to duplicate any ACU command/function from any LOC systems.


B. System Configuration:

1. All Mass Notification / Life Safety System equipment shall be arranged and programmed to provide, the notification of building occupants and to facilitate the safe evacuation of building occupants, as required.

2. Power Supply Audio: Standby power supply shall be an electrical battery with capacity to operate the system under maximum supervisory load for seventy-two (72) hours and capable of operating the system for fifteen (15) minutes of evacuation alarm on all devices, operating at maximum load. The system shall include a charging circuit to automatically maintain the electrical charge of the battery. The system shall automatically adjust the charging of the battery to compensate for temperature.

3. Display: The main display interface shall show the first and most recent highest priority system events without any operator intervention. All system events shall be directed to one of four message queues. Messages of different types shall never be intermixed to eliminate operator confusion. A "Details" switch shall provide additional information about any device highlighted by the operator.

4. Notification Appliance Circuits: All notification appliance circuits shall be Class A (Style "Z"). All notification appliance circuits shall have a minimum circuit output rating of: 2 amps @ 24 vdc; 50 watts @ 25V audio, and 35 watts @ 70V audio. The notification circuits shall be power limited. Non-power limited circuits are not acceptable.

5. Network Wiring:

a. The system supplied under this specification shall utilize node-to-node, direct-wired multi-priority peer-to-peer network operations. The system shall utilize independently addressed, output modules as described in this specification for triggering of the BPS units for the amber mass notification strobe lights. The peer-to-peer network shall contain multiple nodes consisting of the ACU, main controller, remote control panels, and LCD/LED (LOC) nodes. Each node is an equal, active functional node of the network, which is capable of making all local decisions and generating network tasks to other nodes in the event of node failure or communications failure between nodes.

b. When a network is wired using a Class A configuration, a single break or short on the network wiring causes the system to isolate the fault, and network communication continues uninterrupted, without any loss of function. Should multiple wiring faults occur, the network re-configures into many sub-networks and continues to respond to alarm events from every panel that can transmit and receive network messages.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. The contractor shall purchase no equipment for the system specified herein until the Government has approved the project submittals in their entirety and has returned them to the contractor. It is the responsibility of the contractor to meet the entire intent and functional performance detailed in these specifications. Approved submittals shall only allow the contractor to proceed with the installation and shall not be construed to mean that the contractor has satisfied the requirements of these specifications. The contractor shall submit five (5) complete sets of documentation within 30 calendar days after award of purchase order.

B. Each submittal shall include a cover letter providing a list of each variation that the submittal may have from the requirements of the contract documents. In addition, the Contractor shall provide specific notation on each shop drawing, sample, catalog cut, data sheet, installation manual, etc. submitted for review and approval, of each such variation.




C. All drawings and diagrams shall include the contractor's title block, complete with drawing title, contractor's name, address, date including revisions, and preparer's and reviewer's initials.

D. Product Data: Data sheets with the printed logo or trademark of the manufacturer for all equipment. Indicated in the documentation will be the type, size, rating, style, and catalog number for all items proposed to meet the system performance detailed in this specification. The proposed equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Government and Contracting Officer.

E. Shop Drawings: A complete set of shop drawings shall be supplied. The shop drawings shall be reproduced electronically in digital format. This package shall include but not be limited to:

1. Control panel wiring and interconnection schematics.

2. Complete point-to-point wiring diagrams.

3. Riser diagrams.

4. Complete floor plan drawing locating all system devices and 1/4' = 1'-0 scale plan and elevation of all equipment in the Fire Command Station. Including showing the placement of each individual item of fire alarm, security, and access control equipment as well as raceway size and routing, junction boxes, and conductor size, quantity, and color in each raceway.

5. Detailed system operational description. Any Specification differences and deviations shall be clearly noted and marked.

6. Complete system bill of material.

7. All drawings shall be reviewed and signed off by an individual having a minimum of a NICET III certification in fire protection engineering technology, subfield of fire alarm systems.

8. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals

9. Installer's Certification

10. The engineered systems distributor must be licensed in the state of project location and have been incorporated in the business in that state for a minimum of 5 years.

11. Submit a copy of the system supplier's training certification issued by the manufacturer of the integrated life safety system, and a copy of the installing technician's NICET certification.

12. Complete calculations shall be provided which show the electrical load on the following system components:

13. Each system power supply, including stand-alone booster supplies.

14. Each standby power supply (batteries).

15. Each notification appliance circuit.

16. Each auxiliary control circuit that draws power from any system power supply.


F. Close Out: Five (5) copies of the following documents shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer at the time of system acceptance. The close out submittals shall include:

1. Project specific operating manuals covering the installed integrated life safety system. The manual shall contain a detailed narrative description of the system architecture, inputs, notification signaling, auxiliary functions, annunciation, sequence of operations, expansion capability, application considerations and limitations. Manufacturer's data sheets and installation manuals/instructions for all equipment supplied. A generic or typical owner's instruction and operation manual shall not be acceptable to fulfill this requirement.

2. As-Built drawings consisting of: a scaled plan of each building showing the placement of each individual item of the Integrated Life Safety System equipment as well as raceway size and routing, junction boxes, and conductor size, quantity, and color in each raceway. All drawings must reflect point to point wiring, device address and programmed characteristics as verified in the presence of the Contracting Officer and/or the end user unless device addressing is electronically generated, and automatically graphically self-documented by the system.

3. All drawings shall be provided in standard .DXF format. A vellum plot of each sheet shall also be provided.

4. The application program listing for the system as installed at the time of acceptance by the Contracting Officer and/or local AHJ (disk, hard copy printout, and all required passwords).

5. Provide the name, address and telephone of the authorized factory representative.

6. A filled-out Record of Completion similar to NFPA 72, 2016 edition figure 4.5.2.1.

7. Include a complete set of drawings in final record building drawings.


A. The contractor shall have successfully installed similar system fire detection, evacuation voice and visual signaling control components on a previous project of comparable size and complexity. AAFES and the Government reserve the right to reject any control components for which evidence of a successful prior installation performed by the contractor cannot be provided.

B. The contractor shall have in-house engineering and project management capability consistent with the requirements of this project. Qualified and approved representatives of the system manufacturer shall perform the detailed engineering design of central and remote-control equipment. Qualified and approved representatives of the system manufacturer shall produce all panel and equipment drawings and submittals, operating manuals. The contractor is responsible for retaining qualified and approved representative of those system manufacturers specified for detailed system design and documentation, coordination of system installation requirements, and final system testing and commissioning in accordance with these specifications.

1.08 WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE

A. The Contractor shall supply the following spare parts:

1. Audible and visible devices - One (1) percent of the installed quantity of each type, but no less than two (2) devices.




2. Keys - A minimum of three (3) sets of keys shall be provided and appropriately identified.B. Warranty:

1. The contractor shall warranty all materials, installation and workmanship for one (1) year from date of acceptance, unless otherwise specified. A copy of the manufacturer's warranty shall be provided with closeout documentation and included with the operation and installation manuals.

1.09 TRAINING

A. The System Supplier shall schedule and present a minimum of 8 hours of documented formalized instruction for the Contracting Officer, detailing the proper operation of the installed System.

B. The instruction shall be presented in an organized and professional manner by a person factory trained in the operation and maintenance of the equipment and who is also thoroughly familiar with the installation.

C. The instruction shall cover the schedule of maintenance required by NFPA 72 and any additional maintenance recommended by the system manufacturer.

D. Instruction shall be made available to the Local Municipal Fire Department if requested by Robins AFB 78 CEG.

PART 2-PRODUCT

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. All equipment and components shall be the manufacturer's most current model. The materials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a nationally recognized approvals agency for use as part of a protected premises protective signaling system. The authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment, such as control panels, shall be responsible for the satisfactory installation of the complete system.

B. The contractor shall be experienced in the installation of UL listed fire alarm systems as the Mass Notification system shall be a fully supervised Class A wired voice and visual annunciation system to provide full coverage both audibly and visually the entire project, to meet ADA and NFPA 72 installation for voice and visual evacuation systems.

C. The manufacturer of the system equipment shall be regularly involved in the design, manufacture, and distribution of all products specified in this document. These processes shall be monitored under a quality assurance program that meets the ISO 9000 requirements.

D. All System components shall be the cataloged products of a single supplier. All products shall be listed by the manufacturer for their intended purpose.

E. All control panel assemblies and connected field appliances shall be both designed and manufactured by the same company and shall be tested and cross-listed as to ensure that a fully functioning is designed and installed. The system supplied under this specification shall be a microprocessor-based direct wired, multi-priority peer-to-peer networked system. The system shall utilize independently addressed, microprocessor-based smoke detectors, heat detectors, and modules as described in this specification.


2.02 PANEL COMPONENTS AND FUNCTIONS

A. Combination Mass Notification / Life Safety

1. The control panel shall be a multi-processor based networked system designed specifically for one-way emergency audio communications applications. The control panel shall be listed and approved for the application standard as listed under the General section.

2. The control panel shall include all required hardware, software and site-specific system programming to provide a complete and operational system. The control panel shall be designed such that interactions between any application can be configured, and modified using software provided by a single supplier. The control panel operational priority shall assure that mass notification takes priority over other life safety activities coordinated by the control panel.

3. The control panel /ACU shall include the following capacities:

a. Support up to 2500 analog/addressable points.

b. Provide an operator interface control/display that shall annunciate, command and control system functions.

c. Provide an internal audible signal with different programmable patters to distinguish between alarm, supervisory, trouble and monitor conditions.

d. Provide system reports that provide detailed description of the status of system parameters for corrective action or for preventative maintenance programs. Reports shall be displayed by the operator interface or capable of being printed on a printer.

e. Provide an authorized operator with the ability to operate or modify system functions like system time, date, passwords, holiday dates, restart the system and clear control panel event history file.

f. Provide an authorized operator to perform test functions within the installed system.

g. The control panel shall contain a standby power supply that automatically supplies electrical energy to the system upon primary power supply failure. The system shall include a charging circuit to automatically maintain the electrical charge of the battery.

B. Control Panel / Autonomous Control Unit:

1. The system shall be designed and equipped to receive, monitor, and annunciate signals from devices and circuits installed throughout the building. Standard LED annunciators may be combined in common enclosures provided that the groups of LED's comprising each of the required annunciators are separated from one another (MN Event Messages, Detection, Supervisory, Status, and Security) and clearly labeled.

2. Manufacturers' standard control switches shall be acceptable if they provide the required operation, including performance, supervision and position indication. If the manufacturers' standard switches do not comply with these requirements, fabrication of custom manual controls acceptable to the Contracting Officer is required.




3. Activation of a mass notification event, receipt of alarm, trouble, and supervisory signals shall activate integral audible devices at the control panel(s) and at each remote annunciation device. The integral audible devices shall produce a sound output upon activation of not less than 85 dBA at 10 feet.

4. The annunciator shall contain the following system status indicators:

a. 168-character Backlit Liquid Crystal Display b. System Normal Indicatorc. System Common Alarm Indicatord. System Common Trouble Indicatore. System Common Supervisory Indicatorf. System Ground Fault Indicatorg. System Disabled Point(s) Indicatorh. System Reset Switch with Indicator i. System Alarm Silence Switch with Indicator j. System Trouble Silence Switch with Indicatork. System Message Queue Scroll Switches.l. 10-Digit Keypad to Enable/Disable System and Functions.

5. The LED Annunciator/Switches shall provide manual initiation of mass notification event messages (8 minimum) and destination zones.

6. The LED Annunciator shall contain the following switches:

a. Provide two-position switch to manually unlock all stairwell and exit doors.

b. Provide switches for system by-pass functions. Actual switch function shall be determined by the Contracting Officer.

c. Provide a one-way emergency voice communication system annunciator with the following design: This standard LED annunciator (LOC) shall incorporate the microphone for the one-way broadcasts, including all required zone select and manual override control switches to duplicate the functions of the ACU, in the event the ACU is not accessible. Locate the LOC as directed by the AHJ.

d. The unit shall be fully supervised from the control panel. The housing shall contain a lock that is keyed identical to the fire alarm system for the building.

e. Auxiliary Input Module shall be designed to be an outboard expansion module to either expand the number of optional remote microphone stations or allow a telephone interface.

f. Remote microphone station (PA) shall incorporate a Push-To-Talk (PTT) microphone, and controls to allow public address paging in the facility. The public-address paging function shall not override any alarm or notification functions.

7. Audio:

a. The system shall be capable of delivering multi-channel audio messages simultaneously over copper and/or fiber media. All audio messages and live pages shall originate at the one-way audio control unit. The one-way audio control unit shall store pre-recorded audio messages digitally. These messages shall be automatically directed to various areas in a facility under program control or to all areas of the


building simultaneously. The system shall support remote cabinets with zoned amplifiers to receive, amplify and send messages through speakers over supervised circuits.

b. The one-way emergency audio control shall provide control switches to select and direct Mass Notification Messages.

c. Manual page controls and destination switches shall be provided.

8. Audio Amplifiers (Multi-Channel): Provide as minimum one twenty (20) watt audio amplifier per paging zone. The system software shall be capable of selecting the required audio source signal for amplification. To enhance system survivability, each audio amplifier shall automatically provide a local 3-3-3 1000 Hz temporal pattern output upon loss of the audio communications with the one-way audio control unit, during an alarm condition. Audio amplifiers shall be power limited and protected from short circuits conditions on the audio circuit wiring. Each amplifier output shall include a dedicated, selectable 70 Vrms output. Provide a standby audio amplifier that will automatically sense the failure of a primary amplifier, and replace the function of the failed amplifier.

9. Power Supply:

a. System power supply(s) shall provide multiple power limited 24 VDC output circuits as required by the panel.

b. Upon failure of normal (AC) power, the affected portion(s) of the system shall automatically switch over to secondary power without losing any system functions.

c. Each system power supply shall be individually supervised. Power supply trouble signals shall identify the specific supply and the nature of the trouble condition.

d. All standby batteries shall be continuously monitored by the power supply. Low battery and disconnection of battery power supply conditions shall immediately annunciated as battery trouble and identify the specific power supply affected.

e. All system power supplies shall be capable of recharging their associated batteries, from a fully discharged condition to a capacity sufficient to allow the system to perform consistent with the requirements of this section, in 60 minutes maximum.

f. All AC power connections shall be to the building's designated emergency electrical power circuit and shall meet the requirements of NFPA 72. The AC power circuit shall be installed in conduit raceway. The power circuit disconnect means shall be clearly labeled Mass Notification System CIRCUIT CONTROL and shall have a red marking. The location of the circuit disconnect shall be labeled permanently inside the each control panel the disconnect serves.

2.03 FIELD MOUNTED SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Low Profile Speaker-Strobe:

1. Provide low profile wall mount speaker/strobes. The low profile speaker/strobe shall not extend more than 1" (2.5cm) past the finished wall surface, and provide a switch selectable audible output of 2W (90dBA), 1W (87dBA), 1/2W (84dBA), or 1/4W (81dBA) at 10 ft. when measured in reverberation room per UL-464.

2. Strobes shall provide synchronized flash output that shall be switch selectable for output values of 15cd, 30cd, 75cd & 110cd. Wattage and candela settings shall be visible with




the cover installed. When the cover is installed, no mounting hardware shall be visible. In and out screw terminals shall be provided for all wiring. The low profile speaker/strobes shall mount in a North American 4" x 2 1/8" square electrical box, without trims or extension rings.

3. All “Alert” strobes shall be ceiling mounted, provided with amber lenses.

B. Speaker-Strobe Ceiling 8”:

1. Provide 8" ceiling mounted speaker/strobes. In and out screw terminals shall be provided for wiring. Speaker baffles shall be round or square, steel with white finish as required. Provide square surface mount boxes with matching white finish as required. Speakers shall provide 1/2w, 1w, 2w, and 4W power taps for use with 25V or 70V systems. At the 4-watt setting, the speaker shall provide a 94-dBA sound output a frequency of 1000 Hz. when measured in an anechoic chamber at 10 ft. Strobes shall provide synchronized flash outputs. Strobe output shall be determined as required by its specific location and application from a family of 15cd, 30cd, 75cd, and 110cd devices.

2. All “Alert” strobes shall be provided with amber lenses.

C. Speakers, Outside:

1. Provide 8" recessed weatherproof outside mounted re-entrant speaker and separate strobes at the locations shown on the drawings. Weatherproof boxes shall be provided for outdoor mounting. Speakers shall provide 2w, 4w, 8w, and 15w power taps for use with 70V systems. The re-entrant speakers shall utilize a high efficiency compression driver. Cone type drivers are not acceptable. At the 15-watt setting, the speaker shall provide a 102-dBA sound output over a frequency range of 400-4000 Hz. when measured in reverberation room per UL-1480. Strobes shall provide synchronized flash. Strobe output shall be determined as required by its specific location and application from a family of 15cd, 30cd, 75cd, & 110cd devices. Provide Bogen flush mount Model FMH15T speaker with SGHD8 grill and adaptor ring. Paint grill to match building color.

2. All “Alert” strobes shall be provided with amber lenses. Provide speaker/strobes with a 757A-WBW w/p box or equal.

D. Remote LED Text Display

1. An LED text display shall be provided at all public exit locations. The LED text display shall be at least two lines with a minimum of 20 characters per line. The size shall not exceed 16 inches length x 6 inches height x 3 inches deep. The text display shall as a minimum meet the following requirements: (Electrical mechanical room does not require a text sign.)

a. Two lines of information for high priority messaging.

b. Minimum of 20 characters per line (40 total) displayed.

c. Text shall be no less than ½” in height and readable from 1 foot to 20 feet away.

d. 32K character memory.

e. RS232 or RS485 serial interface included.

f. Display shall be wall or ceiling mounted.


g. Mounting brackets for a convenient wall/cubicle mount.

h. During non-emergency periods, date and time shall be displayed.

i. All programming shall be accomplished from the mass notification network.

j. No user programming shall be required.

E. Fiber Optic: The fiber optic transceiver shall be fully compatible with EIA standards for RS-232, RS-422 and RS485 at data rates from 0 (DC) to 2.1 mbps (200 kbps for RS-232) in the low speed mode or from 10 kbps to 10 mbps in the high-speed mode. The fiber optic transceiver shall be capable of simplex or full duplex asynchronous transmissions in both point-to-point systems and drop-and-repeat data networks. The fiber optic transceiver shall be user configurable for the protocol, speed and mode of operation required. The fiber optic transceiver shall be installed as a stand-alone or card cage unit. The fiber optic transceiver shall operate on either multi-mode or single-mode fiber optic cable. The fiber optic transceiver shall be supplied with optical connectors. Meet current Base standards. Verify fiber mode with Base.

PART 3-EXECUTIOIN

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. The contractor shall provide all equipment, labor, materials, transportation and documentation required herein and on the drawings to install a complete and operable system to include all required testing and test documents. The installing contractor shall be UL listed as a fire alarm installer under category UUJS of the UL FIRE Protection Equipment Directory. The installation shall be under the direct supervision of a factory trained representative of the equipment manufacturer with a minimum of four years experience in the installation of similar systems. Qualifications of the installers and supervisor shall be provided to the Contracting Officer upon request.

B. All system wiring shall be approved for mass notification use and shall be installed in metallic conduit or raceway. All conduit penetrations through walls shall be sealed with appropriate fire-resistant material. Conduit runs shall follow the building contours and shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to walls and ceilings. All conduit field bends shall be made by benders specifically designed for the purpose. All junction boxes shall be sized to accommodate the number of conductors installed in accordance with the NEC. Conduit wire fill shall not exceed 40 percent. Conductors for lighting, power or Class 1 circuits shall not be installed with mass notification conductors in any conduit, raceway or cable.

C. Signaling line, notification and Class A circuits shall have supply and return conductors installed in separate conduits.

D. Provide all wiring in conduit. Voltages shall not be mixed in any junction box, housing, or device, except those containing power supplies and control relays. Electrical metallic tubing conduit is acceptable in dry locations not enclosed in concrete or where not subject to mechanical damage. Conceal conduit in finished areas of new construction and wherever practicable in existing construction. The use of flexible conduit not exceeding a 6 foot length shall be permitted in initiating device circuits. Run conduit or tubing concealed unless specifically shown otherwise on the drawings. Shielded wiring shall be utilized where recommended by the manufacturer. For shielded wiring, the shield shall be grounded at only one point, that shall be in or adjacent to the FCP. Pigtail or T-tap connections to signal line circuits, initiating device circuits, supervisory alarm circuits, and notification appliance circuits are prohibited. Color coding is required for circuits and shall be maintained throughout the circuit. Conductors used for the same functions shall be similarly color coded. Wiring shall conform to NFPA 70.




E. Conductor Terminations: Labeling of conductors at terminal blocks in terminal cabinets, and remote-control units shall be provided at each conductor connection. Each conductor or cable shall have a shrink-wrap label to provide a unique and specific designation. Each terminal cabinet and fire alarm control unit shall contain a laminated drawing that indicates each conductor, its label, circuit and terminal. The laminated drawing shall be neat, using 12-point lettering minimum size, and mounted within each cabinet, panel, or unit so that it does not interfere with the wiring or terminals. Maintain existing color code scheme where connecting to existing equipment.

3.02 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

A. The contractor shall maintain a set of drawings on site to record as-built construction. The drawings shall be updated on a daily basis and shall be available for review at all times. These drawings shall not be used for construction prints. As-built drawings shall show details of installation including conduit/cable locations, device locations, wire counts, equipment locations and such other details of construction required for a complete record of the construction. Upon completion of the construction the on-site as-built drawings shall be formally produced in a CAD format for turnover to the government and contracting officer as part of the required documentation package.

3.03 CONNECTION OF NEW SYSTEM

A. The following new system connections shall be made during the last phase of construction, at the beginning of the preliminary tests. New system connections shall include:

1. Connection of new control modules to magnetically held smoke door (hold-open) devices.

2. Connection of new elevator recall smoke sensors to wiring and conduit.

3. Connection of new system transmitter to base fire reporting system.

B. Once these connections are made, system shall be left energized and new audio/visual devices deactivated. Report immediately to the Contracting Officer, coordination and field problems resulting from the connection of the above components.

3.04 FIRESTOPPING

A. Provide firestopping for holes at conduit penetrations through floor slabs, fire rated walls, partitions with fire rated doors, corridor walls, and vertical service shafts in accordance with Division 07.

3.05 PAINTING

A. Paint exposed electrical, fire alarm conduit, and surface metal raceway to match adjacent finishes in exposed areas. Paint junction boxes, conduit and surface metal raceways red in unfinished areas. Painting shall comply with Division 09.



A. Testing Procedures: Detailed test procedures, prepared and signed by a Registered Professional Engineer or a NICET Level 3 Fire Alarm Technician, and signed by representative of the installing company, for the fire detection and alarm system 60 days prior to performing system tests. Detailed test procedures shall list all components of the installed system such as initiating devices and circuits, notification appliances and circuits, signaling line devices and circuits, control devices/equipment, batteries, transmitting and receiving equipment, power sources/supply, annunciators, special hazard equipment, emergency communication equipment, interface equipment, Guard’s Tour equipment, and transient (surge) suppressors. Test procedures shall include sequence of testing, time estimate for each test, and sample test data forms. The test data forms shall be in a check-off format (pass/fail with space to add applicable test data) and shall be used for the preliminary testing and the acceptance testing. The test data forms shall record the test results and shall:

1. Identify the NFPA Class of all Initiating Device Circuits (IDC), Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC), Voice Notification System, and Signaling Line Circuits (SLC).

2. Identify each test required by NFPA 72 Test Methods and required test herein to be performed on each component and describe how this test shall be performed.

3. Identify each component and circuit as to type, location within the facility, and unique identity within the installed system. Provide necessary floor plan sheets showing each component location, test location, and alphanumeric identity.

4. Identify all test equipment and personnel required to perform each test (including equipment necessary for testing smoke detectors using real smoke).

5. Provide space to identify the date and time of each test. Provide space to identify the names and signatures of the individuals conducting and witnessing each test.

B. Test States:

1. Preliminary Testing: Conduct preliminary tests to ensure that devices and circuits area functioning properly. Tests shall meet the requirements of paragraph entitled ‘Minimum System Tests;. After preliminary testing is complete, provide a letter certifying that the installation is complete and fully operable. The letter shall state that each initiating and indicating device was tested in place and functioned properly. The letter shall also state that panel functions were tested and operating properly. The letter shall include the names and titles of the witnesses to the preliminary tests. The Contractor and an authorized representative from each supplier of equipment shall be in attendance at the preliminary testing to make necessary adjustments.

2. Request for Formal Inspection and Tests: When tests have been completed and corrections made, submit a signed, dated certificate with a request for formal inspection and tests to the Contracting Offices Designated Representative (COR).

C. Final Testing: Notify the Contracting Officer in writing when the system is ready for final acceptance testing. Submit request for test at least 15 calendar days prior to the test date. The tests shall be performed in accordance with the approved test procedures in the presence of the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall furnish instruments and personnel required for the tests. A final acceptance test will not be scheduled until the operation and maintenance (O&M) Manuals are furnished to the Contracting Officer and the following are provided at the job site:

1. The systems manufacturer’s technical representative




2. Marked-up red line drawings of the system as actually installed.

3. Megger test results

4. Loop resistance test results

5. Complete program printout including input/output addresses

D. The final tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Offices Designated Representative (COR). At this time, any and all required tests shall be repeated at their discretion. Following acceptance of the system, as-built drawings and O&M Manuals shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer for review and acceptance.

E. Minimum System Tests: Test the system in accordance with the procedures outlined in NFPA 72, IEC 60849, IEC 60268-16. The required tests are as follows:

1. Megger Tests: After wiring has been installed, and prior to making any connections to panels or devices, wiring shall be megger tested for insulation resistance, grounds, and/or shorts. Conductors with 300 volt rated insulation shall be tested at a minimum of 250 VDC. Conductors with 600 volt rated insulation shall be tested at a minimum of 500 VDC. The tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer and test results recorded for use at the final acceptance test.

2. Loop Resistance Tests: Measure and record the resistance of each circuit with each pair of conductors in the circuit short-circuited at the farthest point from the circuit origin. The tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer and test results recorded for use at the final acceptance test.

3. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground. The tests shall be accomplished at the preliminary test with results available at the final system test.

4. Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer’s O&M Manual.

5. Test each initiating and indicating device and circuit for proper operation and response at the control unit. Smoke sensors shall be tested in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended calibrated test method. Use of magnets is prohibited. Testing of duct smoke detectors shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 72.

6. Test the system for specified functions in accordance with the contract drawings and specifications and the manufacturer’s O&M Manual.

7. Test both primary power and secondary power. Verify, by test, the secondary power system is capable of operating the system for the time period and in the manner specified.

8. Determine that the system is operable under trouble conditions as specified.

9. Visually inspect wiring.

10. Test the battery charger and batteries.


11. Verify that software control and data files have been entered or programmed into the FACP. Hard copy records of the software shall be provided to the Contracting Officer.

12. Verify that red-line drawings are accurate.

13. Measure the current in circuits to ensure there is the calculated spare capacity for the circuits.

14. Measure voltage readings for circuits to ensure that voltage drop is not excessive.

15. Disconnect the verification feature for smoke sensors during tests to minimize the amount of smoke needed to activate the sensor. Testing of smoke sensors shall be conducted using real smoke. The use of canned smoke is prohibited.

16. Measure the voltage drop at the most remote appliance (based on wire length) on each notification appliance circuit.

17. Audibility intelligibility testing of the voice evacuation notification system shall be accomplished law NFPA 72 for voice evacuation systems, IEC 60268-16, and ANSI S3.2.

18. Opening the circuit at not less than 10% of alarm initiating devices and notification appliances to test the wiring supervisory feature.

19. The Contractor shall demonstrate modem communications with remote sites as specified by the COR. Dial in capability shall also be demonstrated, using specified security.

20. The Contractor shall demonstrate fiber optic communications with remote sites as specified by the COR. Dial in capability shall also be demonstrated, using specified security.

3.07 ARMY/AIR FORCE SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS: VERIFY INTELLIGIBILITY BY MEASUREMENT AFTER INSTALLATION

A. Ensure that a CIS score greater than 0.8 is provided in each area where building occupants normally could be found. Note: Values of 0.75 through 0.84 will be rounded to 0.8.

B. Areas of the building provided with hard wall and ceiling surfaces (such as metal or concrete) that are found to cause excessive sound reflections may be permitted to have a CIS score less than 0.8 if approved by the DOD installation, and if building occupants in these areas can determine that a voice signal is being broadcast and they must walk no more than 10 m (33 ft) to find a location with CIS score of at least 0.8.

C. Areas of the building where occupants are not expected to be normally present are permitted to have a CIS score less than 0.8 if personnel can determine that a voice signal is being broadcast and they must walk no more than 15 m (50 ft) to a location with a CIS score of at least 0.8.

D. Measurements should be taken near the head level applicable for most personnel in the space under conditions (e.g. standing, sitting, sleeping, as appropriate).

E. Commercially available test instrumentation shall be used to measure intelligibility as specified by IEC 60849 and IEC 60268-16. The mean value of at least three readings shall be used to compute the intelligibility score at east test location.

Note: An STI score of 0.7 is considered equivalent to a CIS score of 0.7.




3.08 DRAWINGS, MANUALS, TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS

A. Upon completion of the installation and prior to final inspection, the contractor shall furnish ‘as-built’ drawings as indicated above. In addition, the contractor shall furnish five (5) copies of a manual, including wiring diagrams, giving complete instructions for the operation, inspection, testing and maintenance of the system. Any special tools necessary for the maintenance of the equipment shall be furnished, as well as one spare set of fuses of each type and size required. As son as practicable after approval of the list of equipment, the contractor shall furnish copies of spare parts data for each different item of equipment listed. The data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies with current unit prices.

3.09 INSTRUCTION OF GOVERNMENT EMPLOYEES

A. Equipment manufacturer shall provide one day on site and five days of technical training to the Government at the manufacturing facility. Training shall allow for classroom instruction as well as individual hands on programming, troubleshooting and diagnostics exercises. Room and travel costs shall be included for two Government personnel. Factory training shall occur within six months of system acceptance.

B. Instructor: Include in the project the services of an instructor, who shall have received specific training from the manufacturer for the training of other persons regarding the inspection, testing, and maintenance of the system provided. The instructor shall train the Government employees designated by the Contracting Officer, in the care, adjustment, maintenance, and operation of the fire alarm and fire detection/mss notification system.

C. Qualifications: Each instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of this installation. The instructor shall be trained in operating theory as well as in practical O&M work.

D. Required Instruction Time: Provide eight hours of instruction after final acceptance of the system. The instruction shall be given during regular working hours on such dates and times as are selected by the Contracting Officer. The instruction may be divided into two or more periods at the discretion of the Contracting Officer. The training shall allow for rescheduling for unforeseen maintenance and/or fire department responses.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS /NBFF / CCC EARTHWORK ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 31 00 00 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 31 00 00

EARTHWORK PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Work on this section includes grading (excavating) and filling as indicated on Drawings and

the following: 1. Installation of utilities or modification of existing utilities may require performing grading

operations in stages, so that utilities may be installed and protected during site construction.

2. Scarifying and compaction of previously graded sites to ensure proper preparation and acceptability.

3. Excavation and embankment placement to required lines, grades, and elevations. 4. Preparation of existing low areas for placing of fill, including disposal of muck, silt, wet, or

unsuitable material. 5. The contractor shall be prepared to dewater the site and to implement a dewatering plan

during construction. Dewatering design and implementation is a part of the Contractor’s basic scope of work. No additional payment will be made for dewatering.

6. If additional fill material is required the Contractor shall haul in additional suitable material as necessary to provide properly graded site lines and grades.

7. If excess excavation is encountered and cannot be used to grade site in accordance with Drawings, remove excess material and dispose of material at locations as directed by the Contracting Officer.

8. Remove materials from grading operations that are determined to be unsuitable by AAFES and dispose of offsite in a legal manner.

9. Preparation of embankments to receive fill and preparation of excavation areas. 10. Removal of high plastic clays and replacement with suitable material within building pad. 11. Bioretention facilities. See Section 3.09.

B. Work shall comply with the latest edition of Robins AFB AFB requirements and/or regulations

and requirements of all governing authorities (Georgia Environmental Protection Division, etc.) in earthwork and erosion control of said above items.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Following most current publications from part of this specification to extent indicated by

references thereto.

B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials Standard Specifications (AASHTO): T88 Mechanical Analysis of Soils

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. D 422 Method for Particle Size Analysis of Soil 2. D 698 Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils, Using 5.5 lb.

(2.5 Kg) Rammer and 12-inch (304.8mm) Drop (Standard Proctor) 3. D 1556 Test for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method

4. D 1557 Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using 10-lb. (4.5 Kg) Rammer and

EARTHWORK CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS /NBFF / CCC 31 00 00 - 2 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

18-inch (457 mm) Drop (Modified Proctor) 5. D 1559 Test Method for Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures using

Marshall Apparatus 6. D 2167 Test for Density of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method

7. D 2216 Laboratory Determination of Moisture Content Of Soil 8. D 2487 Classification of Soils for Engineering Purpose

9. D 2922 Tests for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods Shallow Depth)

10. D 3017 Test for Moisture Content of Soil and Soil Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)

11. D 4318 Test Plastic Limit, Liquid Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils D. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

T 88 Mechanical Analysis of Soils 1.03 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Refer to the contract plans and specifications for specific requirements regarding the

preparation of the building subgrade pad. Where those requirements for the building pad conflict with those stated herein, the most stringent conditions shall govern.

B. Refer to Geotechnical Report for additional information regarding existing site conditions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS A. Topsoil: Use stockpile and topsoil on site at locations shown on the plans and to complete

landscape work indicated on Drawings and in accordance with specifications for landscaping.

B. Unclassified excavation is defined as any material encountered that is not suitable as structural fill without regard as to type or character; whether wet or dry; dark or light; dirt or rock; hard or soft; humus or non-humus; has a smell or does not smell; and is heavy or light in weight. The contractor shall refer to the Geotechnical Investigation report provided by Gallet & Associates, Inc.

C. Acceptable Stabilization Fabrics and Geogrids: (required only where indicated on drawings)

1. Mirafi 50OX or 60OX 2. Phillips 66 Supac 6WS 3. Dupont Typar 3401 and 3601 4. Trevira S1114 and S1120 5. Tensar SS-1 and SS-2

D. Filter/Drainage Fabrics: (required only where indicated on drawings or as required by

Geotechnical Engineer) 1. 140S 2. Phillips 66 Supac 4NP 3. Dupont Typar 3341

C. Silt Fencing Fabrics:


1. Phillips 66 Supac 5NP (UV) 2. Mirafi 10OX

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Material encountered in grading operation that is unsuitable or undesirable shall be as

follows:

1. Unsuitable Materials: Material defined as organic or material that will not provide a stable foundation or material that will not compact to the requirements set forth in these specifications. Contractor's base bid will include accepting all material. No additional payment will be made for improvement or removal of unsuitable material.

2. All unsuitable material that is removed by the Contractor shall be disposed of offsite in a manner satisfactory to the Contracting Officer at no additional cost to the AAFES.

3. Backfill for these areas will be with material approved by the Testing Agency, with layers

of suitable material and compacted to the requirement set forth in these specifications.

4. At least 45 days prior to the start of construction of bioretention facilities the contractor shall submit the source of the Planting Soil for the BSM to the A/E for approval. Once the Planting Soil mix is approved, no material shall be added to the stockpile.

B. Prior to placing fill perform following procedures:

1. Drain water out by gravity with ditch having flow line lower than lowest elevation in low area. If drainage cannot be performed by gravity ditch then contractor shall refer to Sub-section 3.02 “Dewatering” for requirements. Contractor shall at all times keep site graded to maximize runoff in case of rain. When rain is predicted, Contractor shall roll graded areas to seal against infiltration. Dewatering is part of the contractor’s basic scope of work. No additional payment will be made for Dewatering.

2. After drainage of area is complete, remove muck, mud, debris, and other material of

unsuitable nature by using acceptable equipment and methods that will keep natural soils underlying low area dry and undisturbed.

3. Contractor shall contact the testing representative to inspect proof rolling operations. All

areas failing proof rolling shall be undercut and replaced in accordance with these specifications.

C. Do not perform grading operations during period of wet weather when it would be impossible

to control moisture of soils. All areas that will support floor slabs to ten feet outside the building walls and pavements to five feet beyond the edge of paving shall be properly prepared as controlled fill areas.

D. After grade has been established in cut areas and prior to placement of fill in all fill areas, the

exposed subgrade should be carefully inspected by probing and testing as needed. All topsoil or other organic material still in place, frozen, wet, soft or loose soil and other


undesirable materials shall be removed. The exposed subgrade shall furthermore be inspected by proof rolling to check for areas that rut, deflect or fail to tighten up or soft material hidden beneath a thin crust of better soil. All material thus exposed shall be considered unsuitable.

E. Use earth fill to replace undercut in building area and in future expansion area to facilitate

placement of utilities and future footings.

3.02 DEWATERING

A. General:

1. Provide dewatering systems as required for excavations. In any event, dewatering shall

be such that the groundwater level is controlled to a minimum depth of 2 feet below the elevation that is being compacted.

2. Design and provide dewatering system using accepted and professional methods

consistent with current industry practice to eliminate water entering the excavation under hydrostatic head from the bottom or sides. Design system to prevent differential hydrostatic head, which would result in floating out soil particles in a manner, termed as a “quick” or “boiling” condition. System shall not be dependent solely upon sumps or pumping water from within the excavation where differential head would result in a quick condition, which would continue to worsen the integrity of the excavation’s stability.

3. Provide dewatering system of sufficient size and capacity to prevent ground and surface

water flow into the excavation and to allow Work to be installed in a dry condition.

4. Control, by acceptable means, all water regardless of source. Contractor shall be responsible for disposal of the water.

5. Confine discharge piping or ditches to available easement or to additional easement

obtained by Contractor. Provide necessary permits or easement.

6. Control groundwater in a manner that preserves strength of foundation soils, does not cause instability or raveling of excavation slopes, and does not result in damage to existing structures. Where necessary, lower water level in advance of excavation utilizing wells, wellpoints, jet educators, or similar positive methods. The water level as measured by piezometers shall be maintained a minimum of 3 feet below prevailing excavation level.

7. Commence dewatering prior to any appearance of water in excavation and continue until

Work is complete to the extent that no damage results from hydrostatic pressure, flotation, or other causes.

8. Open pumping with sumps and ditches will be allowed provided it does not result in boils,

loss of fines, softening of the ground, or instability of slopes.

9. Install wells or well points, if required, with suitable screens and filters so that continuous pumping of fines does not occur. Arrange discharge to facilitate collection of samples by the AAFES. During normal pumping and upon development of wells, levels of fine sand or


silt in the discharge water shall not exceed 5 ppm. Install sand tester on discharge of each pump during testing to verify that levels are not exceeded.

10. Control grading around excavations to prevent surface water from flowing into excavation

areas.

11. No additional payment will be made for any supplemental measures to control seepage, groundwater, or artesian head. The contractor shall provide all cost associated with Dewatering design and implementation to construct the proposed improvements to the lines and grades shown on the construction plans.

B. Design:

1. Designate and obtain the services of a qualified dewatering specialist to provide dewatering plan as may be necessary to complete the Work.

2. Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of the drawings, design data, and operational records required.

3. Contractor shall be responsible for the design, installation, operation, maintenance, and any failure of any component of the system.

C. Damages:

1. Contractor shall be responsible for and shall repair any damage to work in place, other

contractor’s equipment, utilities, residences, highways, roads, railroads, private and municipal well systems, adjacent structures, natural resources, habitat, existing wells, and the excavation. Contractor responsibility shall also include, damage to the bottom due to heave and including but not limited to, removal and pumping out of the excavated area that may result from Contractor’s negligence, inadequate or improper design and operation of the dewatering system, and any mechanical or electrical failure of the dewatering system.

2. Remove subgrade materials rendered unsatisfactory by excessive wetting and replace

with approved backfill material at no additional cost to AAFES.

D. Maintaining Excavation in Dewatering Condition: 1. Dewatering shall be a continuous operation. Interruptions due to power outages, or any

other reason will not be permitted. 2. Continuously maintain excavation in a dry condition with positive dewatering methods

during preparation of subgrade, installation of pipe, and construction of structures until the critical period of construction or backfill is completed to prevent damage of subgrade support, piping, structure, side slopes, or adjacent facilities from flotation or other hydrostatic pressure imbalance.

3. Provide standby equipment on site, installed, wired, and available for immediate operation if required to maintain dewatering on a continuous basis in the event any part of the system becomes inadequate or fails. If dewatering requirements are not satisfied due to


inadequacy or failure of dewatering system, perform such work as may be required to restore damaged structures and foundation soils at no additional cost to Owner.

4. System maintenance shall include but not be limited to 24-hour supervision by personnel skilled in the operation, maintenance, and replacement of system components, and any other work required to maintain excavation in dewatered condition.

E. System Removal: Upon completion of the work, remove dewatering equipment from the site, including related temporary electrical service.

F. Wells shall be removed or cut off a minimum of 3 feet below final ground surface, capped, and abandoned in accordance with regulations by agencies having jurisdiction.

3.03 OVEREXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

A. Over excavation which is required to remove unsuitable material shall be immediately reported

to the Contracting Officer or his representative and performed as directed by the Contracting Officer, and the theoretical lines and grades will be adjusted accordingly. Material outside the excavation limits which are disturbed due to the fault or negligence of the Contractor or due to his failure to exercise sound construction practices, shall be either replaced by the Contractor with suitable materials (earth) at no cost to AAFES.

3.04 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE IN EMBANKMENTS (FILLS) AND CONTROLLED FILL AREAS

A. The existing soil in fill areas shall be prepared for other phases of work to follow. All fill areas

that will support floor slabs to ten feet out side the building walls and pavements to five feet beyond the edge of paving shall be properly prepared as controlled fill areas. This work shall include the following: 1. Remove all clearing and grubbing and topsoil from area to receive fill. All cavities and

irregularities shall be enlarged to permit use of compaction equipment, backfilled, and compacted as required.

2. Compaction: a. Building area to 10 feet outside building area: Remove existing paving section or

scarify existing soils to 10” below planned subgrade. Recompact in 6-inch lifts to a minimum level of 95% Maximum Dry Density based on the Modified Proctor Compaction Test, ASTM D-1557 within +2 to -2 percentage points of optimum moisture content.ill specification and density requirements. b. Parking areas: Scarify and recompact the top 10” of the area to receive fill and all

following fill layers to a minimum level of a 95% Maximum Dry Density based on the Modified Proctor Compaction Test, ASTM D-1557 within +2 to -2 percentage points of optimum moisture content.

B. Proof roll prepared area in presence of testing representative.

C. The exposed subgrade shall be inspected by proof rolling to check for areas that rut, deflect or fail to tighten up or soft material hidden beneath a thin crust of better soil. Any


material thus exposed shall be considered unsuitable. All areas failing proof rolling shall be undercut and replaced in accordance with these specifications.

3.05 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADES IN EXCAVATION (CUT) AREAS

A. The exposed soil in cut areas shall be prepared for other phases of work to follow. All cut areas that will support floor slabs to ten feet out side the building walls and pavements to three feet beyond the edge of paving shall be properly prepared. This work shall include the following: 1. After excavations have been cut to subgrade, the subgrade areas shall be scarified to a

minimum depth of 10” inches and compacted a 95% Maximum Dry Density based on the Modified Proctor Compaction Test, ASTM D-1557 within -2 to +2 percentage points of optimum moisture content.

2. Proof roll prepared area in presence of testing representative. 3. The exposed subgrade shall be inspected by proof rolling to check for areas that rut,

deflect or fail to tighten up or soft material hidden beneath a thin crust of better soil. Any material thus exposed shall be considered unsuitable. All areas failing proof rolling shall be undercut and replaced in accordance with these specifications.

3.06 FILLING AND SUBGRADING A. Materials:

Onsite materials are considered acceptable as fill with proper moisture control. However, due to the presence of high silt content, these soils may be moisture sensitive and their reuse as structural fill during periods of wet weather. The contractor shall be prepared to moisture condition by drying or wetting the onsite soils prior to use as engineered fill. Engineered fill material must be free of organics and have a plasticity index of less than 20, and a maximum particle size of 4 inches, with not more than 30 percent greater than ¾-inch. These requirements also pertain to offsite borrow fill. The contractor shall expect to undercut isolated areas when encountered and replace with engineered fill material. No additional payment will be made for undercut removal and replacement with engineered fill to the lines and grades shown on the plans.

B. Off site material to be used in controlled fill areas shall be free of topsoil and other organics. Plasticity Index less than 20. The dry density as determined by ASTM D-1557 shall exceed 100 LB/CF. The maximum practice size shall be less than four (4”) inches with not more than 30% greater than ¾-inch. The material must obtain a CBR (California Bearing Ratio) of at least 15.

C. Fill placement can proceed after the surface densification is accomplished and proof rolling is completed.

D. Immediately prior to any slab construction or paving in areas which are at grade, subgrade should be proof-rolled to further densify the surface soils and detect soft areas. All areas that pump or rut shall be undercut.


E. All controlled fill shall be placed in thin lifts (maximum 6 inches loose measure). Soil should

be aerated or moisture conditioned as necessary to maintain the moisture content within –2 to +2 percent of the optimum moisture content and compacted to a minimum of 95% compaction based on the Standard Proctor Test, D-1557

F. Remove areas of finished subgrade found to have soft spots to depth necessary and replace in a manner that will comply with compaction requirements by use of material equal to or better than best subgrade material on site. Surface of subgrade after compaction shall be hard, uniform, smooth, stable, and true to grade and cross-section. The surface shall be maintained for the duration of contract or until released by Government.

G. Make acceptance of grades to receive buildings and paving by string line from grade stakes (blue tops) set to grade on not more than 50’0” centers. Tolerance of +0.10' will be permit-ted. There will be no decrease or loss of thickness, or no deviation from allowable grade tolerances of the higher grade materials to be placed over the subgrade (i.e. base mixes, bituminous paving, crushed stone, concrete slabs, etc.). Provide field staking of work and provide engineering necessary for verification of lines, grades and elevations.

3.07 FINISH GRADING - OTHER THAN PAVED AREAS

A. Grade areas in which elevations or contours are indicated on Drawings, including excavated

areas, filled and transition areas, and landscaped areas to uniform and smooth, finished surface, free from rock, debris, or irregular surface changes. Finished surface shall not be more than 0.10’ above or below finish grade or grade required for placement of topsoil or other material as noted on drawings or as required in these specifications, and all ground surfaces shall vary uniformly between indicated elevations. Grade ditches and swales to allow for proper drainage without ponding and in a manner that will minimize erosion potential.

B. Cover areas of project that have been disturbed by grading operations and are not to be covered by permanent construction such as pavements or buildings with 4” thickness of topsoil. Remove any excess topsoil from site, likewise, where deficient topsoil exist, import topsoil as needed.

C. Correct settlement in grade within one year after date of completion at no additional expense

to Government. Bring grades to proper elevation. Re-planting or replacing any grass, shrubs, bushes, or other vegetation or construction disturbed by corrective measures.

D. All fill shall be placed in thin lifts (maximum 6 inches loose measure). Soil should be aerated or moisture conditioned as necessary to maintain the moisture content within –2 to +2 percent of the optimum moisture content and compacted to a minimum of 95% compaction based on the Modified Proctor Test, D-1557.

E. Contractor shall include in the basic scope of work importing topsoil if none exists on the site. 3.08 FLOOR SLAB, FOOTING BEARING AND PAVED AREA REQUIREMENTS:

A. Floor slabs and paved areas shall be supported on compacted controlled fill or prepared cuts exposed at grade.


B. If high plastic soils or organic materials are encountered in the footings, the high plastic soils shall be undercut to a maximum depth of three feet below the finished grade at the exterior grade of the building. All highly organic material shall be removed completely. All excavations shall be backfilled with compacted controlled fill in accordance with these specifications.

C. If high plastic soils or organic materials are encountered at subgrade below the floor slab, the

high plastic soils shall be undercut to a maximum depth of three feet below the subgrade. All highly organic material shall be removed completely. All excavations shall be backfilled with compacted controlled fill in accordance with these specifications.

D. Building floor slab shall include a capillary break, comprised of a 6 inch granular drainage

layer consisting of free draining granular soils; Modulus of Subgrade of 200 PSI for point load conditions. The drainage layer shall have no more than 5% passing the #200 sieve, a maximum particle size of 1½”, a plastic Index of 6 maximum, and a liquid limit of 25 maximum. A vapor barrier shall be installed on top of the granular drainage layer. This is not required for parking areas. .

E. Sand fill shall be compacted to a minimum 95% modified density as determined by ASTM D-

1557. Gravel fill shall be consolidated use appropriate compaction techniques.

F. Contractor shall remove and replace all material found to be inappropriate for footing bearing. All bearing surfaces consisting of fill are proof-compacted with a manually operated piston type tamper prior to placement of the reinforcing steel.

3.09 BIORETENTION FACILITIES

D. Bioretention Soil Mixture (BSM) shall be a uniform mix, free of stones, stumps, roots, or other similar objects larger than 2 inches excluding mulch. The composition of the BSM shall be as follows: No other materials or substances shall be mixed or dumped within the bioretention areas that may be harmful to plant growth, or prove a hindrance to the planting or maintenance operations.

E. Bioretention Soil Mixture is a mixture of planting soil, mulch, and clean washed sand consisting of 15-25% Topsoil; 25% Leaf Compost; and 50% Sand (ASTM C33 Fine Aggregate). The USDA textural classification of the Planting Soil for the BSM shall be LOAMY SAND or SANDY LOAM. The Planting Soil shall be salvaged or furnished. Additionally, the Planting Soil shall be tested and meet the following criteria: Item Particle Size (mm) Percent By Volume Test Method Sand 2.0- 0.050 85- 88 AASHTO M-6 or ASTM C-33 Silt+Clay (0.050-0.002) 8 – 12 (max. 5% clay) AASHTO T88 Organics 3 – 5 ASTM D2974 Method C

The textural analysis for the Planting Soil shall be as follows: ASTM E11 Sieve Size Minimum Percent Passing By Weight

2 inch 100


No. 4 90 No. 10 80 F. The Bioretention Soil Mixture shall be tested and meet the following criteria:

Corrected pH: 5.5-7.5 per ASTM D4972 Magnesium: Minimum 32ppm Phosphorus (Phosphate P2O5): Not to exceed 69ppm Potassium (K2O): Minimum 78ppm Soluble Salts: Not to exceed 500ppm.

Should the pH fall outside of the acceptable range, it will be modified with lime (to raise) or iron sulfate (to lower). The lime or iron sulfate must be mixed uniformly into the BSM prior to use in bioretention facility.

Should the BSM not meet the minimum requirement for magnesium, it may be modified with magnesium sulfate. Likewise, should the BSM not meet the minimum requirement for potassium, it may be modified with potash. Magnesium sulfate and potash must be mixed uniformly into the BSM prior to use in bioretention facilities.

G. Plant Materials: Refer to Grading Plan, ES&PC Plans, and Landscape Plan.

H. Construction: Bioretention facilities shall not be constructed until all contributing drainage

areas are stabilized as shown on the Civil Plans. Bioretention facilities shall not be used as sediment control facilities after the BSM is installed. No heavy equipment shall operate within the perimeter of a bioretention facility during excavation, underdrain placement, backfilling, planting, or mulching the facility.

I. Excavation: The bioretention facility shall be excavated to the dimensions, side slopes, and

elevations shown on the Civil Plans. The method of excavation shall minimize the compaction of the bottom of the bioretention facility. Excavators and backhoes, operating on the ground adjacent to the bioretention facility, shall be used to excavate the facility if possible. Low ground-contact pressure equipment may also be used for excavation. No heavy equipment shall be allowed on the bottom of the bioretention facility. Excavated materials shall be removed from the bioretention facility site. Excavated materials shall be used or disposed of in accordance with the contract documents.

J. Prior to placing the underdrain and the BSM, the bottom of the excavation shall be roto-tilled

to a minimum depth of 6 inches to alleviate compaction of the facility bottom. Any ponded water shall be removed from the bottom of the facility and the soil shall be friable before roto-tilling.

K. Underdrain: The underdrain system shall be placed on a 3-foot wide bed of No. 57 Stone.

The minimum thickness of the 57 stone shall be 3-inches. Underdrain shall be covered with 6-inches of No. 57 stone and topped with an additional 2-inch thick layer of No. 7 stone.

Cleanouts of 6-inch non-perforated pipe shall be placed vertically in the bioretention facility as shown on the plans. The cleanouts shall extend 6-inches above the top elevation of the bioretention facility mulch, and shall be capped with a screw cap. The ends of the underdrain pipes not terminating in a cleanout or structure shall be capped.


L. Placement and Compaction: The Bioretention Soil Mixture (BSM) shall be placed and graded using low ground-contact equipment or by excavators and/or backhoes operating on the ground adjacent to the bioretention facility. No heavy equipment shall be used within the perimeter of the bioretention facility before, during, or after the placement of the BSM. The BSM shall be placed in horizontal layers not to exceed 12 inches for the entire area of the bioretention facility. The BSM shall be compacted by saturating the entire area of the bioretention facility after each lift of BSM is placed until water flows from the underdrain. Water for saturation shall be applied by spraying or sprinkling. Saturation of each lift shall be performed under supervision of the owner’s representative. An appropriate sediment control device shall be used to treat any sediment-laden water discharged from the underdrain. If the BSM becomes contaminated during the construction of the facility, the contaminated shall be removed and replaced with uncontaminated material at no additional cost to the Owner. Final grading of the BSM shall be performed after a 24-hour settling period. Final elevations shall be within 1 inch of the elevations shown on the civil plans.

M. Watering: Contractor shall provide temporary irrigation to the vegetation in the bioretention facilities during and throughout construction.

3.10 RIPRAP

A. Place rip rap in all areas where indicated on the drawings. The stone for rip rap shall consist

of field stone or rough unhewn quarry stone as nearly uniform in section as is practical. The stones shall be dense, resistant to the action of air and water, and suitable in all aspects for the purpose intended.

B. Slopes and other areas to be protected shall be dressed to the line and grade shown on the plans prior to the placing of rip rap. Contractor shall then undercut the areas to receive rip rap to an elevation equal to the final elevation less the average diameter of the stones before placing the rip rap. This will be considered critical around flumes and other drainage structures. Stones shall be placed so that the greater portion of their weight is carried by the earth and not by the adjacent stones. The stones shall be placed in a single layer with close joints. The upright areas of the stone shall make an angle of approximately 90 with the embankment slope. The courses shall be placed from the bottom of the embankment upward, the larger stones being placed in the lower courses. Open joints shall be filled with spalls. Stones shall be embedded in the embankment as necessary to present a uniform top surface such that the variation between tops of adjacent stones shall not exceed three inches.


A. Independent Testing Laboratory shall perform construction testing on site. General

Contractor shall request for testing as follows: 1. Fill Placed in Areas to be Paved: At least one compaction test for every 2,500 square

feet of each 6" loose lift or layer. 2. Fill Placed Under Building and Extending 10’ outside Exterior Building Line: At least one

compaction test for every 2,500 square feet of each 10" loose lift or layer, a minimum of 3 test per lift.

3. Inspect proof rolling operations of all cuts and fills.


B. If compaction requirements are not complied with at any time during construction process, remove and recompact deficient areas until proper compaction is obtained at no additional expense to AAFES.

C. The Independent Testing Laboratory shall prepare test reports that indicate test location, elevation data, and test results. Contracting Officer, Architect/Engineer and Contractor shall be provided with copies of reports within 48 hours of time test was performed.

D. In event that any test performed fails to meet these Specifications, AAFES and Contractor shall be notified immediately by the Independent Testing Laboratory.

E. Foundation excavations shall be inspected and tested for appropriateness of bearing level by the Independent Testing Laboratory.

F. All proof rolling operations shall be performed in the presence of the independent testing laboratory. The independent testing laboratory shall determine if the subgrade passes the proof rolling operation.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS /NBFF / CCC SITE CLEARING ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 31 10 00 -1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 31 1000

SITE CLEARING

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Site clearing work includes, but is not limited to:

1. Removal of trees and other vegetation. 2. Topsoil stripping. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Removing above grade-improvements. 5. Removing below grade improvements. B. Work shall comply with the latest requirements of Robins AFB and/or regulations and

requirements of all governing authorities in clearing of said above items. 1.02 JOB CONDITIONS A. Traffic:

Conduct site clearing operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Protection of Existing Improvements:

1. Provide protection necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements indicated to remain in place.

2. Protect improvements on adjoining properties and on owner's property. 3. Restore damaged improvements to original condition as acceptable to parties having

jurisdiction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

Topsoil: organic surface soil. Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2” in diameter, and without weeds, roots and other objectionable material.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SITE CLEARING A. Site clearing contractor shall meet with Post Representative prior to removing any trees and

shrubs to verify all removals. No trees shall be removed within tree save areas indicated on drawings.

B. Remove trees, shrubs, grass, other vegetation, all organic material, improvements, or

obstructions interfering with installation of new construction as indicated on plans by limits of grading, except where shown to remain.

C. Remove items elsewhere on site or premises as specifically indicated. Removal includes

digging out stumps and roots. D. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil

SITE CLEARING CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS /NBFF / CCC 31 10 00 -1 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

or other objectionable material. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping.

E. Stockpile topsoil in storage piles in areas shown or where directed. Construct storage piles to freely drain surface water. Cover storage piles if required to prevent windblown dust.

F. Dispose of unsuitable or excess topsoil on site or at a designated location on the Installation.

G. Clearing and Grubbing:

1. Clear site of trees, shrubs, and other vegetation.

` 2. Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris protruding through ground surface.

3. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil

material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.

4. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6” loose depth, and thoroughly compact to density equal to adjacent original ground.

3.02 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS

A. Burning on Government Property: Burning will not be permitted.

B. Removal from Government Property: Contractor shall remove waste materials and unsuitable

material from Government property and dispose of off site in legal manner. Soil materials must be disposed of in accordance with requirements of Section 01 7419 Environmental Protection.

C. Burial of waste materials on-site will not be allowed.

D. At the Contracting Officer’s discretion, excess topsoil shall be disposed of offsite per

requirements of the Post.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS /NBFF / CCC EXCAVATION AND FILL ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 31 23 00 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 31 23 00

EXCAVATION AND FILL


A. Work in this section includes compliance with requirements of Robins AFB and/or regulations and requirements of all governing authorities. Work shall be performed in a safe manner and environment by means as prescribed by any local, state, federal or other governing agency in excavation, backfilling, and compacting for utilities.

B. Before excavating over or around existing utilities, the owner of utility shall be notified. Any damage to existing utilities shall be repaired in accordance with owner of utility, at no additional cost to said owner.

C. This section includes excavation, bedding, and backfilling for utilities necessary to perform work indicated on Drawings and in Specifications.

D. Maintain in operating condition existing utilities, active utilities, and drainage systems encountered in utility installation. Repair any damaged surface or subsurface improvements shown on Drawings at no additional cost to owners of utilities.

E. Verify location, size, elevation, and other pertinent data required to make connections to existing utilities and drainage systems as indicated on Drawings. Comply with permits and regulations according to General Conditions.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings or details pertaining to Site Utilities are not required unless use of materials methods, equipment, or procedures contrary to Drawings or these specifications are proposed. Do not perform work until Contracting Officer’s representative has accepted required shop drawings.

1.03 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Set all lines, elevations, and grades for utility and drainage system work and control system for duration of work, including careful maintenance of bench marks, property corners, monuments, or other reference points.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Bedding Material: Processed sand and gravel free from clay lumps, organic, or other deleterious material, and complying with following gradation requirements:

U. S. Sieve Size Passing by Weight, Percent

EXCAVATION AND FILL CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS /NBFF / CCC 31 23 00 - 2 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

1 Inch 100 3/4 Inch 90-100 3/8 Inch 20-55 No. 4 0-10 No. 8 0-5

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

A. Perform all excavation, trenching and backfilling on an unclassified excavation

basis. B. Perform excavation as indicated for specified depths. During excavation, pile materials suitable for

backfilling in orderly manner far enough from bank of trench to avoid overloading sides, or causing cave-ins.

C. Remove excavated materials not required or not suitable for backfill or embankments and remove from site at no additional cost to AAFES.

D. Prevent surface water from flowing into trenches or other excavation by temporary grading or other methods, as required. Remove accumulated water in trenches or other excavations by pumping or other acceptable methods.

E. Open cut excavation with trenching machine or backhoe. When trenching machine is utilized, compaction equipment shall have a width suitable for the trench width. Where machines other than ladder or wheel-type trenching machines are used, do not use clods for backfill. Dispose of unsuitable material on site or on an approved area on the Installation and provide other suitable material at no additional cost to AAFES.

3.02 TRENCH EXCAVATION

A. Dig trench at proper width and depth for laying pipe, conduit, or cable. Cut trench banks as nearly vertical as practical for safe installation of system, and remove stones as necessary to avoid point-bearing. Over excavate wet or unstable soil, if encountered, form trench bottom as necessary to provide suitable base for continuous and uniform bedding.

B. Minimum requirements shall be that all trench excavation side walls greater than 4 feet in depth shall be sloped, shored, sheeted, braced or otherwise supported by means providing sufficient protection for the workmen within them in accordance with the applicable rules and regulations established for construction by the Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), and by local ordinances or other governing authorities. Lateral travel distance to an exit ladder or steps shall not be greater than 25 feet in trenches that are 4 feet or deeper.

C. Accurately grade trench bottom to provide uniform bearing and support for each section of pipe on undisturbed soil or bedding material at every point along entire length, except where necessary to excavate for bell holes, proper sealing of pipe joints, or other required connections. At joints, dig no deeper, longer, or wider than needed to make joint connection properly. For pipes or conduit with a vertical height of 48-inches or less, the bottom of the trench shall not be less than 12” nor more than 1/3 pipe diameter wider than outside surface of any pipe or conduit. All other trench width requirements for pipe, conduit, or cable shall be held to a minimum width that will allow for safe

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS /NBFF / CCC EXCAVATION AND FILL ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 31 23 00 - 3 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

installation, and proper compaction of trench backfill.

D. Trench depth requirements measured from finished grade or paved surface shall be in accordance with the following or any applicable codes and ordinances:

1. Water Mains: Minimum cover over top of pipe as required by governing agencies or 30-inches, whichever is greater.

2. Sanitary Sewer: Depths, elevations, and grades as indicated on Drawings. 3. Storm Drains: Depths, elevations, and grades as indicated on Drawings. 4. Electrical Conduits: 24” minimum cover to top of conduit or as required by NEC 300-5 and NEC

710-36 codes, or as directed by electrical specifications or the power company, whichever is deeper.

5. TV Conduits: 18” minimum cover to top of conduit or as required by the local utility company, or as directed by electrical specifications whichever is deeper.

6. Telephone Conduits: 18" minimum cover to top of conduit or as required by the local utility company, or as directed by electrical specifications whichever is deeper.

7. Gas Mains and Service: 30” minimum cover to top of pipe or as required by gas company or mechanical specifications which every is greater.

3.03 SHEETING AND BRACING

Provide sheeting and bracing, where necessary, in trenches and other excavations where protection of workmen is required. Sheeting may be removed after excavation has been backfilled sufficiently to protect workmen or material against damaging or injurious caving in.

3.04 PIPE BEDDING

Accurately cut trenches for pipe or conduit that is to be installed to designated elevations and grades to line and grade 4” below bottom of pipe and to width as specified. Place 4" of bedding material, compact in bottom of trench, and accurately shape to conform to lower portion of pipe barrel. After pipe installation, place select backfill and compact in maximum 6” layers measured loose.

3.05 TRENCH BACKFILLING

A. Criteria: Do not backfill trenches until required tests are performed, utility systems are Inspected as required and are accepted by applicable governing authority. Backfill trenches as specified. If improperly backfilled, reopen to depth required to obtain proper compaction. Backfill and compact, as specified, to properly correct condition in an acceptable manner.

B. Backfilling: After pipe or conduit has been installed, bedded, and tested as specified, backfill trench or structure excavation with specified material placed in lifts or layers not exceeding 6” of loose measurement. Material and compact shall meet the requirements set forth in Section 31 00 00 "Earthwork", except the maximum particle size shall not exceed 1”.

C. Compaction: Exercise proper caution when compacting immediately over top of pipes or conduits. Water jetting or flooding is not permitted as method of compaction. Compact in accordance with requirements of Section 31 00 00 “Earthwork”.

D. Compaction Testing: An independent testing laboratory shall perform test at intervals not exceeding 100 linear feet of trench for each 6” of compacted trench backfill and furnish copies of test results as specified.

3.06 TESTING

A. Compaction Testing: An independent testing laboratory shall perform test at intervals not exceeding 200 linear feet of trench for each 6” of compacted trench backfill and furnish copies of test results as

EXCAVATION AND FILL CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS /NBFF / CCC 31 23 00 - 4 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

specified.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC TERMITE CONTROLROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 31 31 16 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 31 31 16TERMITE CONTROL


A. Chemical soil treatment.1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Title 7, United States Code, 136 through 136y - Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and RodenticideAct; 1947 (Revised 2001).

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 1 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.B. Product Data: Indicate toxicants to be used, composition by percentage, dilution schedule,

intended application rate.C. Test Reports: Indicate regulatory agency approval reports when required.D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that toxicants meet or exceed specified requirements.E. Certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of toxicants.F. Manufacturer's Application Instructions: Indicate caution requirements .G. Record moisture content of soil before application, date and rate of application, areas of

application, and diary of toxicity meter readings and corresponding soil coverage.H. Maintenance Data: Indicate re-treatment schedule .I. Warranty: Submit warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing this type of work and:

1. Having minimum of 2 years documented experience.2. Approved by manufacturer of treatment materials.3. Licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

1.05 WARRANTYA. Provide five year installer's warranty against damage to building caused by termites.

1. Include coverage for repairs to building and to contents damaged due to building damage. Repair damage and, if required, re-treat.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers:1. Bayer Environmental Science Corp: www.backedbybayer.com/pest-management.2. FMC Professional Solutions: www.fmcprosolutions.com.3. Syngenta Professional Products: www.syngentaprofessionalproducts.com.

B. Toxicant Chemical: EPA and local authority approved; synthetically color dyed to permit visualidentification of treated soil.

C. Diluent: Recommended by toxicant manufacturer.2.02 MIXES

A. Mix toxicant to manufacturer's instructions.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that soil surfaces are unfrozen, sufficiently dry to absorb toxicant, and ready to receivetreatment.

B. Verify final grading is complete.

TERMITE CONTROL CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC31 31 16 - 2 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA


3.02 APPLICATIONA. Comply with requirements of U.S. EPA and applicable state and local codes.B. Spray apply or inject toxicant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Apply toxicant at following locations:

1. Under Slabs-on-Grade.2. At Both Sides of Foundation Surface.3. Soil Within 10 feet of Building Perimeter For a Depth of 2 feet.

D. Under slabs, apply toxicant immediately prior to installation of vapor barrier.E. At foundation walls, apply toxicant immediately prior to finish grading work outside foundations.F. Apply extra treatment to structure penetration surfaces such as pipe or ducts, and soil

penetrations such as grounding rods or posts.G. Re-treat disturbed treated soil with same toxicant as original treatment.H. If inspection or testing identifies the presence of termites, re-treat soil and re-test.

3.03 PROTECTIONA. Do not permit soil grading over treated work.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS /NBFF / CCC BASES, BALLASTS, AND PAVING ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 32 10 00 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 32 10 00

BASES, BALLASTS, AND PAVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. All Georgia Department of Transportation specification sections noted on the drawings which

pertain to the mix design, materials, preparation, and/or execution of this product shall be incorporated in this specification the same as if printed in their entirety herein.

B. Work shall comply with the requirements of Robins AFB and requirements of all governing authorities on asphaltic concrete paving.


A. Drawings, Conditions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and

Division 1 Special Conditions sections, apply to work of this Section.

B. Related Work: Prepared subbase as specified in earthwork sections and as noted on site plans. 1. Section 31 00 00: Earthwork 2. Section 32 17 23: Pavement Markings

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Design Mix: Before any asphalt surface is constructed, submit actual design mix to

Contracting Officer’s representative for acceptance.

B. Material Certificates: Furnish copies of materials certificates signed by material producer and Contractor, certifying that each material items complies with, or exceeds, specified requirements.

1.04 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: 3. Apply prime and tack coats if required when ambient temperature is above 40, and when

the temperature has not been below 35 for 12 hours immediately prior to application. Do not apply when base is wet or contains excess moisture.

4. Construct asphalt concrete surface course when atmospheric temperature is above 40 and when base is dry. Asphalt base course may be placed when air temperature is above 30 and rising.

B. Grade Control: Establish and maintain required lines and elevations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Base Course Aggregate: Sound, angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or crushed slag, stone, or slag screenings. Uncrushed gravel may be used in base course mixture if required to suit local material availability.

B. Surface Course Aggregate: Crushed stone, crushed gravel, crushed slag, and sharp-edged

BASES, BALLASTS, AND PAVING CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS /NBFF / CCC 32 10 00 - 2 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

natural sand. Sand prepared from stone, blast-furnace slag, or gravel, or combinations thereof may be used if required to suit local material availability.

C. Mineral Filler: Rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material complying with

AASHTO M-17/ASTM D 242, if recommended by applicable state highway standards.

D. Asphalt Cement: Comply with AASHTO M-226/ASTM D 3381; AC-20, AR-80, viscosity grade.

E. Tack Coat: Emulsified asphalt; AASHTO M-140/ASTM D 997 or M 208/ASTM D 2397, SS-1h, CSS-1, or CSS-1h, diluted with one part water to one part emulsified asphalt.

2.02 BASE COURSE

A. Material: All materials shall be indicated on Drawings and shall comply with applicable state highway specifications regarding source.

B. Thickness: 1. Aggregate Base: In accordance to GDOT Specification Section 800. Construct to

thickness indicated on Drawings. Apply in lifts or layers not exceeding 6” measured loose, prior to compaction operations.

2. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Coarse: Install 9.5mm and 12.5mm Superpave as shown on the plans in accordance to GDOT Specification Section 802. Construct to thickness indicated on Drawings. Apply in lifts or layers not exceeding 2” thickness for 9.5mm and 3" thickness for 12.5mm measured loose or per GDOT specification requirements, whichever is more stringent, prior to compaction operations.

C. Construction:

1. Construction of base course, including equipment and methods shall be in accordance with applicable state highway specifications.

2. Perform base course construction in a manner that will drain surface properly at all times and at same time prevent runoff from adjacent areas from drainage onto base course construction.

3. Surface Tolerances: Plus all of thickness shown on drawings. D. Compaction (Use only If not covered by Highway Specification use following):

1. Except for full depth asphalt and sand asphalt bases, compact base courses to not less than 100% of optimum density as determined by ASTM D 1557 or AASHTO T-180 (modified proctor).

2. Compact full depth asphalt and sand asphalt bases to not less than 98% of laboratory compacted density as determined by Marshall Test Method ASTM D 1559, 50 blow, 1500 pound test type.

2.03 EQUIPMENT

A. Maintain equipment in satisfactory operating condition and correct break-downs in a manner

that will not delay or be detrimental to progress of paving operations. 2.04 ASPHALT-AGGREGATE MIXTURE (TO BE USED WHEN DEPARTMENT OF

TRANSPORTATION DOES NOT SPECIFY.) A. Design Mixes: Mix shall be within sieve analysis and bitumen range given below and have

minimum stability based on 50-blow Marshall complying with ASTM D 1559 or 3,500 lbs. unless otherwise noted on Drawings.


B. Percent bitumen by weight of total mix variance: 0.4%.

C. Provide asphalt-aggregate mixture as recommended by local or state paving authorities to

suit project conditions. Use locally available materials and gradations which exhibit satisfactory record on previous installations.


A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before applying prime

coat.

B. Proof roll prepared subbase base surface to check for unstable areas and areas requiring additional compaction.

C. Do not begin paving work until deficient subbase areas have been corrected and are ready to receive paving.

D. Prime Coat: (If required will be indicated on drawings) 1. Apply bituminous prime coat to base course surfaces where asphaltic concrete paving

will be constructed. 2. Apply bituminous prime coat in accordance with APWA Section 2204 and applicable

Department of Transportation. 3. Apply at minimum rate of 0.20 to 0.50 gal./sq. yd. over compacted subbase. Apply

material to penetrate and seal, but not flood, surface. 4. Cure and dry as long as necessary to attain penetration and evaporation of volatile.

E. Tack Coat:

1. Apply to contact surfaces of previously constructed asphalt or portland cement concrete and surfaces abutting or projecting into asphalt concrete and surfaces abutting or projecting into asphalt concrete pavement.

2. Apply tack coat to full depth asphalt and sand asphalt subbase. Apply emulsified asphalt tack coat between each lift or layer of full depth asphalt and sand asphalt bases and on surface of such bases where asphaltic concrete paving will be constructed.

3. Apply emulsified asphalt tack coat in accordance with APWA Section 2204 and applicable Department of Transportation requirements.

3.02 PLACING MIX

A. Place asphalt concrete mixture on prepared surface, spread, and strike off. Spread mixture

at following minimum temperatures: 1. When ambient temperature is higher than 60F.

B Place inaccessible and small areas by hand. Place each course to required grade, cross-

section, and compacted thickness.

C. Paver Placing: Place in strips not less than 10’ wide, unless otherwise acceptable to AAFES. After first strip

BASES, BALLASTS, AND PAVING CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS /NBFF / CCC 32 10 00 - 4 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete base course for section before placing surface course.

D. Joints:

Make joints between old and new pavements, or between successive days' work, to ensure continuous bond between adjoining work. Construct joints to have same texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of asphalt concrete course. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat.

E. Curbs: 1. Construct asphalt curbs over compacted pavement surfaces only when indicated on

Drawings. Apply light tack coat unless pavement surface is still tacky and free from dust.

2. Place curb materials to cross-section indicated by machine or by hand in wood or metal forms. Tamp hand placed materials and screed to smooth finish. Remove forms as soon as material has cooled.

3.03 ROLLING

A. Begin rolling when mixture will bear roller weight without excessive displacement.

B. Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in areas inaccessible

to rollers.

C. Breakdown Rolling: Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately following rolling of joints and outside edge. Check surface after breakdown rolling, and repair displaced areas by loosening and filling, if required, with hot material.

D. Second Rolling: Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible, while mixture is hot. Continue second rolling until mixture has been thoroughly compacted.

E. Finish Rolling: Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for removal of roller marks. Continue rolling until roller marks are eliminated and course has attained maximum density. Patching: Remove and replace paving areas mixed with foreign materials and defective areas. Cut out such areas and fill with fresh, hot asphalt concrete. Compact by rolling to maximum surface density and smoothness.

F. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened.

G. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked.


A. An independent testing laboratory shall be retained to perform construction testing of in-place

asphalt concrete courses for compliance with these requirements as follows. 1) Asphalt surface and base course shall be randomly cored at a rate of one core for

every 20,000 square feet of paving. However, no less than three cores in light duty areas and three cores in heavy duty areas shall be obtained. Asphalt pavement samples shall be tested for aggregate gradation and bitumen content for conformance


with the mix design. 2) Thickness: In-place compacted thickness shall not be less than thickness specified on

the drawing. Thickness of core shall be use to determine thickness of asphalt provided 3) The finished surface of each asphalt concrete course shall be tested for smoothness

using a 10 foot straightedge applied parallel with, and at right angles to centerline of paved area. Surfaces will not be acceptable if exceeding following tolerances for smoothness.

1. Base Course Surface: 1/4” 2. Wearing Course Surface: 3/16”

B. The contractor shall repair or remove and replace unacceptable paving as determined by the

above testing results.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS /NBFF / CCC RIGID PAVING ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 32 13 00 -1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 32 13 00

RIGID PAVING

PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES

A. Work shall comply with Robins AFB requirements and all requirements of governing authorities on concrete paving.

B. Traffic Control:

1. Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.

2. Utilize flagmen, barricades, warning signs, and warning lights as required.

C. Related Sections: 1. Section 31 0000: Earthwork 2. Section 32 1723: Pavement Markings 3. Section 32 1613.13: Cast-In-Place Concrete


A. Forms: 1. Steel, wood, or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement during

concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Use straight forms, free of distortion and defects.

2. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required.

B. Form Release Agent: Coat forms with non-staining type coating that will not discolor or deface surface of concrete.

C. Welded Wire Mesh: Welded plain cold-drawn steel wire fabric, ASTM A 185. Furnish in

flat sheets, not rolls, unless otherwise acceptable by AAFES.

D. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 40. Concrete Materials: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for concrete materials, admixtures, bonding materials, curing materials, and others as required.

E. Joint Fillers: Resilient premolded bituminous impregnated fiberboard units complying with

ASTM D 1751 FS HH-F-341, Type II, Class A; or AASHTO M 153, Type I.

F. Curing and Sealing Compound: FS TT-C-800, with 30% solids content minimum.

G. Epoxy Resin Grout: FS MMM-G-650.

RIGID PAVING CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS /NBFF / CCC 32 13 00 -2 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

2.02 MIXING

A. Design mix to produce normal weight concrete consisting of grey portland cement, aggregate, water-reducing or high-range water-reducing admixture (super-plasticizer), air-entraining admixture and water to produce following properties. (Concrete shall conform to the requirements of Concrete – Section 32 1613.13). 1. Compressive Strength: 4,000 psi, minimum at 28 days. 2. Slump Range: 8" for concrete containing HRWR admixture (super-plasticizer); 3"

– 5” for other concrete. 3. Air Content: 5% to 8%.


A. Surface Preparation: Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.

B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and need for additional

compaction. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been corrected and are ready to receive paving.

3.02 CONCRETE INSTALLATION

A. Form Construction: 1. Set forms to required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured. Install\

sufficient quantity of forms to allow continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

2. Check complete formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances: a. Top of forms not more than 1/8” in 10’0” b. Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4” in 10’0” c. Sloped sidewalks shall have 1” in 12” maximum grade with 5’-0” landing

at 30’-0” interval maximum. 3. Clean forms after each use, and coat with form release agent as often as required

to ensure separation from concrete without damage.

B. Reinforcement: Locate, place, and support reinforcement as required to produce section on drawings.

C. Concrete Placement:

1. Do not place concrete until subbase and forms have been checked for line and grade. Moisten subbase if required to provide uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.

2. Place concrete using methods which prevent segregation of mix. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with interval vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices.

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS /NBFF / CCC RIGID PAVING ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 32 13 00 -3 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

3. Deposit and spread concrete in continuous operation between transverse joints, as far as possible. If interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place construction joint.

D. Curbs and Gutters: Automatic machine may be used for curb and gutter placement at

Contractor's option. Machine placement must produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and joining as specified for formed concrete. If results are not acceptable, remove and replace with formed concrete as specified.

3.03 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Construct expansion, weakened-plane (contraction), and construction joints true-to-line with face perpendicular to surface of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Weakened-Plane (Contraction) Joints: Provide weakened plane (contraction)

joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated on drawings or at 15’0” o.c. maximum each way if not specified on drawings. Lines of joints shall be straight and true and uniform in thickness and depth with an allowable tolerance of 1/4” per 10’01” of joint. Joints shall be a minimum of 1/8 wide and no more than 3/16” wide. Construct weakened-plane joints for depth equal to at least 1/4 concrete thickness, as follows.

2. Tooled Joints: Form weakened-plane joints in fresh concrete by grooving top portion with recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with jointed cove.

3. Sawed Joints: Form weakened-plane joints using powered saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond rimmed blades. Sawing shall be done within eight hours of pour or as soon as concrete can support weight and provide a smooth cut without spalling.

4. Inserts: Use embedded strips of metal or sealed wood to form weakened-plane joints. Set strips into plastic concrete and carefully remove strips after concrete has hardened.

B. Construction Joints:

1. Place concrete joints at end of placement and at locations where placement operations are stopped for period of more than 1/2 hour, except where such placements terminate at expansion joints.

2. Construct joints using standard metal keyway-section forms.

C. Expansion Joints: 1. Provide premolded joint filler for expansion joints abutting catch basins, manholes,

inlets, structures, walks, and other fixed objects. 2. Locate expansion joints as indicated on drawings at 60’0” o.c. maximum for each

pavement lane if not specified on drawings. D. Joint Fillers:

1. Extend joint fillers full-width and depth of joint, and not less than 1/2” or more than 1” below finished surface where joint sealer is indicated. If no joint sealer, place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface.

2. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for full width being placed, wherever possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together.

RIGID PAVING CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS /NBFF / CCC 32 13 00 -4 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

E. Joint Sealants: Exterior pavement joint sealants shall be composed of a non-priming pourable, self-leveling type of a coal tar modified polyurethane, or a polyurethane sealant suitable for use in pavements and sidewalks.

3.04 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. After striking-off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screeding and floating. Adjust floating to compact surface and produce uniform texture.

B. After floating, test surface for trueness with 10’-0” straight edge. Distribute concrete as

required to remove surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to provide continuous smooth finish.

C. Work edges of slabs, gutters, back top edge of curb, and formed joints with an edging

tool, and round to 1/2” radius. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surface.

D. After completion of floating and trawling when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete surface finishing, as follows: 1. Curbs, Gutters, and Walks: Broom finish by drawing finehair broom across concrete

surface perpendicular to line of traffic. Repeat operation if required to provide fine line texture.

2. Inclined Slab Surfaces: Provide coarse, nonslip finish by scoring surface with stiff-bristled broom perpendicular to line of traffic.

3. Paving: Burlap finish by dragging seamless strip of damp burlap across concrete perpendicular to line of traffic. Repeat operation to provide gritty texture.

E. Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form removal,

clean ends of joints and point up any minor honeycombed areas. Remove and replace areas or sections with major defects, as directed.

3.05 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Repair or replace broken or defective concrete, as directed.

B. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials.

C. Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt, and other foreign

material to the satisfaction of the contracting officer just prior to final inspection.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS /NBFF / CCC CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE CURBS ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA AND GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406 32 16 13.13 - 1

SECTION 32 16 13.13

CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE CURBS AND GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Formwork, shoring, bracing, and anchorage. 2. Reinforcement and accessories. 3. Cast-in-place concrete, including sidewalks. 4. Curing and finishing. 5. Grout.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. 3. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 4. ACI 347 - Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM A82 - Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. 2. ASTM A185 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. 3. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 4. ASTM C31 - Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 5. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates. 6. ASTM C39 -Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 7. ASTM C78 - Flexural Strength of Concrete. 8. ASTM C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete. 9. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. 10. ASTM C192 -Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory. 11. ASTM C260 - Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 12. ASTM C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.

C. American Welding Society (AWS):

1. AWS Dl.4 - Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel.

D. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI): 1. CRSI - Manual of Practice. 2. CRSI 63 Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars. 3. CRSI 65 Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports, Specifications and Nomenclature.

E. Product Standard (PS):

1. PS1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.

CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE CURBS CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS /NBFF / CCC AND GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 32 16 13.13 - 2 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: 1. Product List: List product selected for the following:

a. Form release agent. b. Curing compound. c. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Formwork: Submit diagram of proposed construction joints not shown on Drawings. a. Reproduce concrete notes that concern proper placing of reinforcement

and submit with shop drawings for field use. Do not use reproductions of Contract Drawings as shop drawings.

b. Provide reinforcement placement drawings with bar lists. Comply with Part B, Chapter 3 of ACI 315 for preparation of shop drawings. Include number, grade, size, length, mark, location, splice lengths, and bending diagrams for all reinforcing steel and related products.

C. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Mix Design: Submit two copies of each mix design proposed in accordance with ACI 301, Chapter 3. Use either Laboratory Trial Mix Procedures or Previous Field Experience Procedure. a. Determine or certify proportions of ingredients for mix by independent

testing laboratory in accordance with Chapter 4 of ACI 318 to provide characteristics listed on Drawings for each class of concrete.

b. Determine required average strength for above specified strength in accordance with ACI 318; evaluate compressive strength results of field concrete in accordance with ACI 214.

c. Include the following information in concrete mix design:

(1) Proportions of cement, fine and coarse aggregates, and water. (2) Water-cement ratio, 28 day compressive and design strength,

slump, and air content. (3) Type of cement and aggregates. (4) Aggregate gradation. (5) Type and dosage of admixtures. (6) Special requirements for pumping. (7) Range of ambient temperature and humidity for which design is

valid. (8) Special characteristics of mix which require precautions in mixing,

placing, or finishing techniques to achieve finished product speci-fied.

2. Batch Delivery Tickets: a. Submit sample ticket indicating information to be supplied.

1.04 TESTS

A. Required testing will be performed by Testing. Notify testing laboratory 24 hours prior to proposed concrete pour.


B. Testing firm will take cylinders and perform slump and air entrainment tests in

accordance with ACI 301.

C. Four concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 100 or less cubic yards of each class of concrete placed each day.

D. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken.

E. For air-entrained concrete one air content test will be made when slump test is taken.

1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Cold Weather Placing:

1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with the requirements of ACI 306 and as herein specified.

2. When the air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40F, provide adequate means to maintain the temperature in the area where concrete is being placed at either 70F for 3 days or 50F for 5 days after placing. Provide temporary housings or coverings including tarpaulins or plastic film. Keep protections in place and intact at least 24 hours after artificial heat is discontinued. Avoid rapid dry-out of concrete due to overheating, and avoid thermal shock due to sudden cooling or heating.

3. When air temperature has fallen or is expected to fall below 40F, uniformly heat all water and aggregates before mixing as required to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50F and not more than 80F at point of placement.

4. Do not use frozen materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. Ascertain that forms, reinforcing steel, and adjacent concrete surfaces are entirely free of frost, snow, and ice before placing concrete.

5. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.

6. Use set-control admixtures when required and accepted in mix designs.

B. Hot Weather Placing: 1. When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously

impair the quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified.

2. Temperature of concrete at time of placing shall not exceed 95°F. Contractor shall maintain an accurate reading thermometer at the job site to check temperature of concrete. Concrete shall be rejected before placing if temperature of concrete exceeds 90°F.

3. Special precautions to protect fresh concrete before and during finishing shall be

mandatory when the rate of evaporation of surface moisture from concrete exceeds 0. 2 pounds per square foot per hour. Rate of evaporation shall be determined in accordance with ACI 305. Special precautions shall include the following:


a. Good planning and close coordination between supplier and job site shall be maintained to ensure prompt placement of concrete upon arrival at job site.

b. Cool ingredients before mixing to reduce concrete temperature at time of placement. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control the concrete temperature provided the water equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total amount of mixing water.

c. Dampen subgrade and forms. d. Erect windbreaks to reduce wind velocity over the concrete. e. Erect sunshades to reduce concrete surface temperatures. f. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap so the steel

temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete.

g. Utilize fogging to cool and moisten surrounding air. Fog nozzles, specially designed for concrete fogging, which produce a fog blanket shall be used. Common garden hose nozzles or other nozzles which produce an excessive washing spray shall not be allowed

h. Provide temporary covering such as wet burlap, plastic membrane, curing paper, or other suitable means.

i. Use set control admixtures when required and accepted in mix design. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK

A. Engineer forms, shores, bracing, and other temporary supports to support loads imposed construction. 1. Plywood: Sound, undamaged sheet with straight edges. 2. Lumber: Construction grade. 3. Steel: Minimum 16 gage sheet, well matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support

weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces.

B. Accessories:

1. Shearkey: Galvanized steel with removable top strip exposing sealant trough; knockout holes at six inches on center; 18 gage channel dowels.

2. Form Ties: Removable or snap-off metal, of fixed or adjustable length as applicable, with cone ends.

2.02 REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615; 60 ksi yield grade billet-steel plain bars, uncoated finish.

B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ANSI/ASTM A185 plain type. Provide mats for welded wire fabric with wire size of W2.9 or larger.

2.03 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gauge annealed type.


B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during installation and placement of concrete.

2.04 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cement: ASTM C150, normal - Type I, produced from American made clinker. Fly ash, slag, and pozzolans are not permitted as substitutes for cement.

B. Fine and Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33. Use maximum coarse aggregate size per ACI 318, but not larger than in inches, except building slabs-on-grade use 1 inch maximum. Meet the following grading requirements of fine aggregates for building slabs-on-grade.

Sieve Percent Passing 3/8 inch 100% #4 95 - 100% #8 80 - 90% #16 50 - 75% #30 30 - 50% #50 10 - 20%

#100 2 - 5% C. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.

2.05 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES

A. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C494; Type A - water reducing; Type B - retarding; Type C - accelerating; Type D - water reducing and retarding.

2.06 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Joint Filler for Non-traffic Joints: one inch preformed type.

B. Sawed Control Joint Filler in Building: MM80 as manufactured by Metzker-McGuire, Contoocook, NH (603/746-4963) at slab sawed control joints not below rack layout. Joints below racks remain unfilled but are to be cleaned out with compressed air. Filler material shall have sufficient strength such that when cured will support all loads and have a durometer Shore A-scale hardness value of approximately 80 in accordance with ASTM D2240 and ASTM D676. Tensile strength shall be comparable to that of concrete slab.

C. Non-shrink Grout: Pre-mixed non-shrinking, high strength grout, COE CRD-621;

compressive strength of 5000 psi in 28 days.

1. Masterflow 713 by Master Builders Co. 2. Gilco Construction Grout by Gifford-Hill Co. 3. Crystex by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 4. Euco-N-S Group by Euclid Chemical Company. 5. Sonogrout by Sonneborn Building Products.

2.07 CONCRETE MIX


A. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94.

B. Provide concrete with the following characteristics:

1. For all concrete: a. Compressive Strength:

(1) 7 Days: 1950 psi. (2) 28 Days: 3000 psi.

b. Maximum slump not to exceed 4 inches.

C. Accelerating Admixtures: ASTM C494; Type C. Use in cold weather only when approved by Construction Manager. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements.

D. Set-retarding Admixtures: ASTM C474; Type B. Use during hot weather only when

approved by Construction Manager.

E. Air Entraining Admixtures: ASTM C260. Add to concrete mix for concrete work subject to freeze-thaw cycling.

F. Water Reducing Admixtures: ASTM C494, Type A. Use at interior slabs on grade.

2.08 CURING MATERIALS

A. Curing Compound: Kure-N-Seal 0800 by Sonneborn Building Products. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement, and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, held securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent. Apply bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. At locations where new concrete is dowelled to existing, drill holes in existing concrete,

insert deformed steel reinforcing dowels, and pack solid with non-shrink grout. 3.03 VAPOR RETARDER INSTALLATION

A. Following leveling and tamping of prepared base for slabs on grade, place vapor retarder sheeting with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour.

B. Lap joints 6 inches minimum and seal with appropriate tape. Do not disturb or damage vapor retarder while placing concrete reinforcing. If damage occurs, repair before concrete placement.


3.04 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

A. Perform concrete reinforcement work in accordance with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, and CRSI Documents 63 and 65. 1. Accurately place and secure saddle ties at every other intersection with 16 gage

black annealed wire; hold rigidly in place with metal chairs or spacers during placing of concrete.

2. Hold bars in beams and slabs to exact location during concrete placement. Use spacers, chairs, or other necessary supports with the following tolerances: a. Bars in Slabs and Beams:

(1) Members 8 Inches Deep or Less:- 1” (2) Members 8 Inches to 2'0" Deep: +/-1” (3) Members More than 2'0" Deep: +/+ 2”

b. Lengthwise of Member: +/- 2”. c. Concrete Cover to All Surfaces: 2”. d. Minimum Spacing Between Bars: +/- 1”

3.05 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Notify Testing Laboratory a minimum of 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations.

B. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301; including hot and cold weather placement

procedures.

C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement.

D. Place concrete in reasonably uniform layers, approximately horizontal, and not more than

12 inches deep, exercising care to avoid vertical joints or inclined planes. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction and control joints. Piling up of concrete in forms to cause separation or loss of ingredients is not permitted.

E. Do not deposit concrete which has partially set or hardened. Remove hardened or

partially hardened concrete which has accumulated on forms or reinforcement. Do not place concrete on previously deposited concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams or planes of weakness within respective member or section except as specified.

F. Deposit concrete as nearly in final position as practical to avoid rehandling. Exercise

care to prevent splashing forms or reinforcing with concrete. Do not permit concrete to drop freely a distance greater than 3 feet. Where longer drops are necessary, use chute, tremie, or other conveyance to help avoid separation.

G. Do not deposit concrete into excavation where water is standing. If place of deposit

cannot be successfully pumped dry, pour through tremie with outlet end near bottom of place of deposit.

H. Do not deposit concrete when plasticity, measured by slump test, is outside limits

indicated on Structural Drawings or in Specifications.


I. Consolidate and screed concrete by use of vibratory screed of size to allow construction

joint pattern as indicated on Structural Drawings.

J. Vibration: As soon as concrete is deposited, thoroughly agitate with mechanical vibrators and suitable hand tools to work mixture into corners of forms and around reinforcing and embedded items. Use mechanical vibrators with minimum frequency of 7000 revolutions/minute. Do not over vibrate or use vibrators to transport concrete within forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators at many points, 18 to 30 inches apart. At each insertion, vibrate generally 5-15 seconds, sufficient to consolidate concrete but not long enough to cause segregation. Keep spare vibrator on job site during concrete placement operations. Do not insert vibrator into lower courses that have begun to set.

K. Saw cut control joints within 12 hours after finishing. Use inch thick blade, cutting 1 inch

into slab.

L. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Testing Laboratory upon discovery.

3.06 FORM REMOVAL

A. Do not remove forms until concrete has attained sufficient strength. Clamps or tie rods may be loosened 24 hours after concrete is placed. Ties, except for sufficient number to hold forms in place, may be removed at that time.

B. Minimum Curing Period Prior to Form Removal:

1. Above 60F: 3 days. 2. 50F to 60F: 5 days. 3. 40F to 50F: 7 days. 4. Less than 40F: See Note below.

C. Observance of minimum curing periods listed above does not relieve Contractor of

responsibility for safety of structure during construction.

D. Remove wood forms from under floors, ramps, steps, and similar places (through temporary openings if necessary) so no material will be left to rot or to be infested by termites.

3.07 FINISHING

A. Schedule of Finishes:

1. Exterior Formed Surfaces: Rough form finish. 2. Sidewalks: Woodfloat; heavy broom at ramps or steps.

B. Initial Working:

1. Remove surface irregularities with bull float or darby before water appears on concrete surface. 2. Do no further working of surface until time for floating;

do not work surface while water is present.

C. Floating:


1. Begin float operations when bleed water sheen has disappeared and concrete has stiffened sufficiently to allow walking on surface without leaving heel prints more than 1 inch deep. Use magnesium or aluminum power float. 2. Premature finishing brings excessive fines to surface and causes finished slab to have soft surface which will dust.

D. Trowelling:

1. Delay trowelling as long as possible to prevent working excess fines and water to surface. Do not begin until surface moisture film and shine remaining after floating have disappeared.

2. Power trowel where possible; use hand trowel in inaccessible areas. 3. Do not re-wet surface to trowel.

E. Provide ACI Class A tolerance; 1/8 inch variation in 10 feet, measured with straight edge

laid in any direction.

F. Pitch to drains 1” inch per foot nominal. 3.08 CURING

A. Chemical Curing: 1. Apply specified curing compound to damp concrete surfaces as soon as possible

after final finishing operations are complete, but no later than 2 hours. Apply uniformly in a continuous operation by power spray equipment in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Do not use hand pump sprayer, apply only with airless sprayer to produce mist.

a. Do not use membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be

covered with a coating material applied directly to the concrete or with a covering material bonded to the concrete, such as liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring, painting, and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to the AAFES. The Contractor shall obtain from the curing compound manufacturer a written guarantee that its compound will not be detrimental to bonding of flooring adhesives or surface materials. This guarantee shall be submitted to the AAFES at the time request is made for use of curing compound.

b. Do not use curing compounds on surfaces to which additional concrete or

cementitious finishing materials are to be applied. Such areas shall be cured by moist curing method.

B. Moist Cure for Exterior Concrete: Place wet, moisture-containing fabric covering as soon

as concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent surface damage. 1. Cover entire surface, including edges of slabs such as paving or sidewalks. 2. Keep coverings continually moist so that a film of water remains on concrete

surface throughout curing period. 3. Maintain concrete in moist conditions for not less than seven days after placement.


3.09 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE

A. Replace concrete not conforming to required levels and lines, details, and elevations.

B. Replace concrete not properly placed or of the specified type.

C. Do not impair appearance or strength of structure in removal or replacement procedures. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing laboratory will inspect and control concrete mixing of transit-mix trucks at start of each day's mixing. Prevailing conditions will be compared to criteria indicated on appropriate design mix, including temperature, moisture, and condition of aggregates. Significant deviations will be immediately reported to design mix laboratory, and corresponding adjustment shall be made before materials are discharged.

B. Testing laboratory will control addition of water to concrete at job site and length of time

concrete is allowed to remain in truck during pour. C. Testing laboratory will certify each delivery ticket indicating class of concrete delivered or

poured, amount of water added, and time at which cement and aggregate were loaded into truck and time at which concrete was discharged from truck.

D. Provide and pay for the following:

1. Qualification of proposed materials and establishment of mix designs in accordance with ACI 318.

2. Testing services needed or desired by Contractor for his purposes. E. Evaluation and Acceptance:

1. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if 90% of strength test results and averages of all sets of three consecutive strength tests results equal or exceed specified strength and no individual test result is below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi, and flexural strength by 75 psi.

2. Complete concrete work will not be accepted unless requirements of ACI 301, Chapter 18, have been complied with.

3. Where average strength of laboratory control cylinders, as shown by tests, falls below minimum ultimate compressive strength specified, Contracting Officer’s representative reserves the right to require Contractor to provide improved curing conditions of temperature and moisture to secure required strength. If average strength of laboratory control cylinders should fall so low as to cause portions of structure to be in question by Contracting Officer’s representative, Contractor shall follow core procedure set forth in ASTM C42. If results of core test indicate, in load testing, or strengthening as may be ordered by Contracting Officer’s representative shall be provided by Contractor without additional cost to AAFES. If core tests are so ordered and results of such tests disclose that strength of structure is as required by provisions of Specifications and Drawings, cost of test will be borne by AAFES. If in the opinion of the Contracting Officer’s representative, the strength of structure is inadequate, replacement will be required.

F. Reports:


1. Testing Laboratory reports will be furnished as follows:

a. Concrete Supplier: One copy. b. Contractor: One copy. c. Contracting Officer: One copy. d. Architect: One copy. e. Engineer: One copy.

2. Reports will be made and distributed immediately after respective tests or inspections are made.

3. Where reports indicate deviations from Contract Documents, they will also include determination of probable cause of deviation and, where applicable, recommendation for corrective action.

4. Wherever testing laboratory recognizes trend of decreasing quality in concrete due to changing seasons, conditions of curing, or other cause, this will be brought to attention of Contracting Officer’s representative, along with recommendation for corrective action to be taken before materials fall below requirements of these Specifications.

G. Authority and Responsibilities of Testing Laboratory:

1. Laboratory representative will immediately notify Contracting Officer’s representative and Contractor of deviations from specifications and accepted design mixes observed at mixing plant or job site.

2. If, in the opinion of laboratory representative, deviation observed will be probable cause for subsequent rejection of material, representative will inform Contractor and Contracting Officer’s representative so that timely decision may be made as to whether or not to continue operations.

3. Subsequent to on-the-spot verbal notification, laboratory will file written report of deficiencies or deviations noted, including summary of conversations and decisions made and actions taken at time.

4. Testing laboratory will control field adjustment made to concrete mixes to compensate for field conditions and report same.

3.11 PROTECTION

A. Protect finished work. B. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or

cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.

3.12 CLEANING A. Remove forms, equipment, protective coverings, and rubbish resulting from concrete

operations. Leave finished concrete surfaces in clean conditions. After sweeping with ordinary broom and removing mortar, concrete droppings, loose dirt and mud, wash concrete with soapy water and rinse with clean water.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS /NBFF / CCC PAVEMENT MARKINGS ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 32 17 23 -1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 32 17 23

PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Related Sections:

1. Section 32 1000: Bases, Ballasts, and Paving 2. Section 32 1613.13: Cast In Place Concrete Curbs and Gutters and Sidewalks

B. Work shall comply with Robins AFB regulations and requirements of all governing

authorities. 1.02 Project Conditions

Traffic Control: A. Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction

activities. B. Utilize flagmen, barricades, warning signs, and warning lights as required for safe working

conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

Paint: A. Type: Chlorinated rubber alkyd, FS TT-P-115, Type III, factory mixed, quick-drying, non-

bleeding. B. Colors: (Unless noted on plan)

1. Lane Striping: Yellow 2. Handicap Symbols: Blue or Per Local Code 3. Parking Stall Striping: White 4. Directional Arrows and

Wording at Entrances and Exits: White 5. Directional Arrows in Parking Lot: White 6. Stop Bars: White


Sweep and clean surface as necessary to eliminate loose -material, dust, oil, grease or other material or impurities that would hamper bonding of paint to surface.

3.02 APPLICATION A. Apply paint at manufacturer's recommended rate with total minimum of 100 to 110 sq.

ft./gal. Apply with mechanical equipment to produce uniform straight edges. B. Painting of traffic markings shall consist of two (2) coats, one (1) applied as stated above

and the other six (6) to seven (7) months after opening.

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS /NBFF / CCC PAVEMENT MARKINGS ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 32 17 23 -2 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS /NBFF / CCC CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 32 3113 -1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 32 3113

CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes 1. Chain link fences and gates associated with sitework.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A 392 - Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric 2. ASTM C 94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete

B. Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (CLFMI) latest edition Product Manual 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of property perimeter posts relative to property lines and easements.


A. Chain link fabric, posts, and components, and installation shall conform to the requirements of the CLFMI Product Manual unless otherwise shown or specified.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum 3 years documented experience.


A. Steel Posts: Type I or II or roll formed "C" Section steel conforming to CLFMI and as specified hereinafter.

B. Fabric: No. 9 gage (0.148 nominal) galvanized steel wire in 2 inch mesh; ASTM A 392, top and bottom selvages twisted and barbed, height as shown. Furnish 1-piece widths, vinyl coated black or brown.

C. End, Corner, and Pull Posts: Minimum sizes and weights as follows. 1. Up to 13 Foot Fabric Height: Type I or II in accordance with CLFMI Product Manual. 2. 13 foot and over Fabric Height (If required): a. Type I Posts: Round; 4.0 inch outside diameter pipe, 9.10 lbs/lin ft. b. Type II Posts: 4.0 inch outside diameter pipe, 6.56 lbs/lin.ft.

CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS /NBFF / CCC 32 3113 -2 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

D. Line (Intermediate) Posts: Minimum sizes and weights as follows.

1. Up to 8 Foot Fabric Height: Type I, II, or "C" Section in accordance with CLFMI Product Manual.

2. Over 8 Foot Fabric Height: a. Type I Posts: 1) Round: 2.875 inch outside diameter pipe, 5.79 lbs/lin ft. 2) Square: 2.5” x 2.5” outside dimension, 5.10 lbs/lin ft. b. Type II Posts: 2.875 inch outside diameter pipe, 4.64 lbs/lin ft.

E. Gate Posts: Type I or II in accordance with CLFMI Product Manual.

F. Top, Bottom, and Intermediate Rails: Type I or II in accordance with CLFMI Product Manual. 1. Manufacture’s longest lengths. 2. Couplings. Expansion type, approximately 6 inches long. 3. Attaching Devices: Means of attaching top rail securely to each gate, corner, pull and end post.

G. Sleeves: Galvanized steel pipe not less than 6-inches long with inside diameter not less than ½ inch greater than outside diameter of pipe. Provide steel plate closure welded to bottom of sleeve of width and length not less than 1 inch greater than outside diameter of sleeve.

H. Tension Wire: 7 gage galvanized steel conforming to CLFMI, Marcelled, located at bottom of fabric.

I. Wire Ties: Class 1 galvanized steel, no less than 9 gage.

J. Post Brace Assembly: Manufacturer's standard adjustable brace at end of gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts, with horizontal brace located at mid-height of fabric. Use same material as top rail for brace, and truss to line posts with 0.375-inch diameter rod and adjustable tightener.

K. Post Tops: Galvanized steel, weather tight closure cap for each tubular post. Furnish caps with openings to permit passage of top rail.

L. Stretcher Bars: Galvanized steel, 1 piece lengths equal to full height of fabric, with minimum cross-section of 3/16-inch x 3/4-inch. Provide one stretch bar for each gate and end post, and two for each corner and pull post.

M. Stretch Bar Bands: Manufacturer's standard

N. Gate Cross-bracing: 3/8-inch diameter galvanized steel adjustable length truss rods.

O. Ready Mix Concrete: ASTM C94, mix design as follows: 1. Design mix to produce normal weight concrete consisting of Portland cement, aggregate, water-reducing admixture, air-entraining admixture, and water to produce following: a. Compressive Strength: 3,500 psi, minimum at 28 days, unless otherwise indicated on Construction Drawings.

b. Slump Range: 1 to 3 inches at time of placement c. Air Entrainment: 5 to 8 percent


P. Water: Clean

Q. Swinging Gate Hardware: 1. Hinges: Size and material to suit gate size, non-lift-off type, offset to permit full 180-degree gate opening. Provide a pair of 1 1/2-inch hinges for each leaf over 6'-0" nominal height. 2. Latch: Forked type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with padlock eye as integral part of latch.

R. Double Gates Hardware: Provide gate stops for double gates, consisting of mushroom type of flush plate with anchors set in concrete, to engage center drop rod or plunger bar. Include locking device and padlock eye as integral part of latch, using 1 padlock for locking both gate leaves.

2.02 GATE FABRICATION

A. Fabricate swing gate perimeter frames of 1.90-inch OD pipe, galvanized steel. Provide horizontal and vertical members to ensure proper gate operation and attachment of fabric, hardware, and accessories. Space frame members maximum of 8'-0" apart.

B. Assemble gate frames by welding or special fittings and rivets, for rigid connections. Install same fabric as for fence with stretcher bars at vertical edges. Install diagonal cross-bracing on gates as required ensuring rigid frame without sag or twist. Bars may be used at top and bottom edges. Attach stretchers to gate frame at 15 inches o.c. maximum.

C. Attach hardware to provide security against removal or breakage.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install chain link fence in accordance with CLFMI Product Manual unless otherwise specified herein.

B. Comply with recommended procedures and instructions of fencing manufacturer. Provide secure, aligned installation with line posts spaced at 10'-0" o.c. maximum.

C. Methods for Setting Posts: 1. Grade-Set Posts: a. Drill or hand excavate to a depth approximately 3 inches lower than post bottom. Set post bottom not less than 36 inches below finish grade. b. Excavate each post hole to 12 inch diameter, or not less than four times diameter of post.

c. Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Check each post for vertical and top alignment, and hold in position during placement and finishing operations. Extend concrete footing 2-inches above grade and trowel crown to shed water.

d. Post shall be set plumb within 1/4" in 10 feet.

2. Sleeve Set Posts: Anchor posts by means of pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between

CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS /NBFF / CCC 32 3113 -4 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

post and sleeve solid with nonshrink, non-metallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's directions.

D. Top Rails: Run rail continuously, bending to form radius for curved runs. Provide expansion couplings as recommended by manufacturer.

E. Center Rails: Provide center rails where indicated. Install in 1 piece between posts and flush with post on fabric side, using special offset fittings where necessary.

F. Brace Assemblies: Install braces so posts are plumb when diagonal rod are under proper tension.

G. Tension Wire: Install tension wires through post cap loops before stretching fabric and tie to each post cap with not less than 6 gauge galvanized wire. Fasten fabric to tension wire using 11 gauge galvanized steel hog rings spaced 24-inches o.c.

H. Fabric: Leave approximately 2 inches between finish grade and bottom selvage. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Install fabric on security side of fence, and anchor to framework so that fabric remains in tension after pulling force is released.

I. Stretcher Bars: Secure at end, corner, pull, and gate posts by threading through or clamping to fabric at 4 inches o.c. and secure to posts with metal bands spaced at 15 inches o.c.

J. Tie Wires: 1. Use U-shaped wire, conforming to diameter of pipe to which attached, clasping pipe

and fabric firmly when ends twisted at least 2 full turns. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to persons or clothing.

2. Tie fabric to line posts with wire ties spaced 12 inches o.c. Tie fabric to rails and braces with wire ties spaced 24 inches o.c. Tie fabric to tension wires with hog rings spaced 24-inches o.c.

3. Manufacturer's standard procedure will be accepted if of equal strength and durability.

K. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and hardware bolts on side of fence opposite f fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts.

L. Gates: Install gates plumb, level, and secure for full opening without interference. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubrication.

3.02 ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS

A. Use U –shape tie wires, conforming to the diameters of pipe, that clasp the pipe and fabric firmly with ends twisted at least 2 full turns.

B. Bend ends of exposed wires to minimize hazards to persons or clothing.


C. Install nuts for fasteners on tension bands and hardware bolts on the side of the fence opposite the fabric. The ends of bolts, once secure and checked for smooth operation, shall be pined to prevent removal of nuts.

D. Repair coatings damaged in the field with methods and techniques as recommended by the

manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC SEEDINGROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 32 92 19 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 32 92 19SEEDING


A. Hydroseeding, mulching and fertilizer.B. Maintenance.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork: Subgrade preparation and placement of topsoil.B. Section 31 10 00 - Site Clearing: Stripping and stockpiling topsoil.C. Section 32 92 23 - Sodding.

1.03 DEFINITIONSA. Weeds: Include Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass,

Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, PoisonOak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge,Nimble Will, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.B. Topsoil samples.C. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance instructions, cutting method and maximum grass

height; types, application frequency, and recommended coverage of fertilizer.1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer and herbicide composition.B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of seed

mixture.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver grass seed mixture in sealed containers. Seed in damaged packaging is notacceptable. Deliver seed mixture in containers showing percentage of seed mix, year ofproduction, net weight, date of packaging, and location of packaging.

B. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis, and name ofmanufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SEED

A. Grass Seed Type: As directed by Contracting Officer to match Base Standard.2.02 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Topsoil: As specified in Section 31 10 00.2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Mulching Material:1. Wood cellulose fiber or natural wood fiber suitable for hydraulic application as part of

hydroseeding mixture.B. Fertilizer: Recommended for grass, with fifty percent of the elements derived from organic

sources; of proportion necessary to eliminate any deficiencies of topsoil, as indicated byanalysis.

C. Water: Clean, fresh and free of substances or matter that could inhibit vigorous growth ofgrass.

D. Herbicide: As recommended by grass seed supplier.

SEEDING CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC32 92 19 - 2 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA


E. Stakes: Softwood lumber, chisel pointed.F. String: Inorganic fiber.

2.04 TESTSA. Provide analysis of topsoil fill.B. Analyze to ascertain percentage of nitrogen, phosphorus, potash, soluble salt content, organic

matter content, and pH value.C. Provide fertilizer recommendation to address topsoil deficiencies.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that prepared soil base is ready to receive the work of this Section.3.02 GROUND PREPARATION

A. After grading and topsoil placement and prior to ground preparation, the Contractor shallremove all boulders, stumps, roots, or other objects with any dimension larger than 1 inch.

B. Ground preparation shall consist of cultivating the topsoil to a loose depth of at least 4 inchesexcept on slopes 2:1 or steeper. The plowing, harrowing, cultivation, and all other operationsshall be performed with proper equipment and in such a manner as to break up all clods.

C. The ground shall be plowed to the required depth and then cultivated with a rotary tiller or diskharrow, in crossing directions if necessary, until the result is a smooth, uniform, loose, and wellbroken soil providing a suitable bed for seed. In small or inaccessible areas, the use of handtools will be permitted. The Contractor shall add water as necessary to provide sufficient soilmoisture to prepare the ground.

D. All trash and other debris shall be removed from the cultivated topsoil. All pieces of wood, rocksand unbroken clumps of earth with any dimension larger than 1 inch shall be removed from theplanting area.

3.03 FERTILIZINGA. Apply fertilizer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and topsoil analysis

recommendations.B. Apply after smooth raking of topsoil and prior to roller compaction.C. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of topsoil.D. Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer.

3.04 SOWING OF SEEDA. Mechanical or hydraulic seeders shall be used for sowing unless approved otherwise by the

Contracting Officer.B. Sowing shall not be performed during windy weather, when the prepared surface is crusted, or

when the ground is frozen, wet or otherwise in a non-tillable condition. The addition of watermay be required to render excessively dry soils tillable.

C. Equipment for applying seed hydraulically shall be designed for this purpose. The equipmentshall be capable of mixing and pumping the water, seed mixture, mulch and fertilizer uniformlyover the area to be seeded. Power driven agitators shall be provided to keep the mixtureuniform during the application.

3.05 HYDROSEEDINGA. Apply seeded slurry with a hydraulic seeder evenly in two intersecting directions.

1. Hydroseed slurry shall contain wood mulch, grass seed, fertilizer, soil conditioners,tackifier, water, and any other ingredients recommended by the hydroseed applicator.

2. Slurry shall contain the amount of grass seed per acre as recommended for new lawns bythe seed manufacturer.

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC SEEDINGROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 32 92 19 - 3AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

B. Apply water with a fine spray immediately after each area has been hydroseeded. Keephydroseeded areas moist but not saturated for the first several weeks. Do not allow puddles toform on the ground surface.

C. Following germination, immediately re-seed areas without germinated seeds that are larger than4 by 4 inches.

3.06 PROTECTIONA. Identify seeded areas with stakes and string around area periphery. Set string height to 12

inches. Space stakes at 72 inches.3.07 MAINTENANCE

A. Provide maintenance at no extra cost to Owner; Owner will pay for water.B. Maintain seeded areas immediately after placement until grass is well established and exhibits a

vigorous growing condition. Continue maintenance until Substantial Completion of project.C. Mow grass at regular intervals to maintain at a maximum height of 2-1/2 inches. Do not cut

more than 1/3 of grass blade at any one mowing.D. Neatly trim edges and hand clip where necessary.E. Immediately remove clippings after mowing and trimming.F. Water to prevent grass and soil from drying out.G. Roll surface to remove minor depressions or irregularities.H. Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Remedy damage resulting from improper use of herbicides.I. Immediately reseed areas that show bare spots.J. Protect seeded areas with warning signs during maintenance period.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC SODDINGROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 32 92 23 - 1AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 32 92 23SODDING


A. Fertilizing.B. Sod installation.C. Maintenance.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork: Subgrade preparation and placement of topsoil.B. Section 31 10 00 - Site Clearing: Stripping and stockpiling topsoil.C. Section 32 92 19 - Seeding.

1.03 DEFINITIONSA. Weeds: Includes Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass,

Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, PoisonOak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge,Nimble Will, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. TPI (SPEC) - Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding; 2006.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.B. Certification: Submit certification of grass species and location of sod source.C. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance instructions, cutting method and maximum grass

height; types, application frequency, and recommended coverage of fertilizer.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Sod Producer: Company specializing in sod production and harvesting with minimum five yearsexperience, and certified by the State of Georgia.

1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTSA. Comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer and herbicide composition.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver sod on pallets. Protect exposed roots from dehydration.B. Do not deliver more sod than can be laid within 24 hours.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. Sod: TPI (SPEC), Certified Turfgrass Sod quality; cultivated grass sod; type indicated below;with strong fibrous root system, free of stones, burned or bare spots; containing no more than 5weeds per 1000 sq ft. Minimum age of 18 months, with root development that will support itsown weight without tearing, when suspended vertically by holding the upper two corners.1. Grass Type: As directed by Contracting Officer to match Base Standard.2. Thickness: "Thick" sod, minimum 1 inch and maximum 1-3/8 inch topsoil base.3. Machine cut sod and load on pallets in accordance with TPI (SPEC) Guidelines.

B. Topsoil: As specified in Section 31 10 00.C. Fertilizer: Recommended for grass, with fifty percent of the elements derived from organic

sources; of proportion necessary to eliminate any deficiencies of topsoil, as indicated byanalysis.

SODDING CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC32 92 23 - 2 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA


D. Water: Clean, fresh and free of substances or matter that could inhibit vigorous growth ofgrass.

2.02 ACCESSORIESA. Wood Pegs: Softwood, sufficient size and length to ensure anchorage of sod on slope.B. Herbicide: As recommended by sod producer.

2.03 TESTSA. Provide analysis of topsoil fill.B. Analyze to ascertain percentage of nitrogen, phosphorus, potash, soluble salt content, organic

matter content, and pH value.C. Provide fertilizer recommendation to address topsoil deficiencies.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that prepared soil base is ready to receive the work of this section.3.02 GROUND PREPARATION

A. After grading and topsoil placement and prior to ground preparation, the Contractor shallremove all boulders, stumps, roots, or other objects with any dimension larger than 1 inch.

B. Ground preparation shall consist of cultivating the topsoil to a loose depth of at least 4 inchesexcept on slopes 2:1 or steeper. The plowing, harrowing, cultivation, and all other operationsshall be performed with proper equipment and in such a manner as to break up all clods.

C. The ground shall be plowed to the required depth and then cultivated with a rotary tiller or diskharrow, in crossing directions if necessary, until the result is a smooth, uniform, loose, and wellbroken soil providing a suitable bed for seed. In small or inaccessible areas, the use of handtools will be permitted. The Contractor shall add water as necessary to provide sufficient soilmoisture to prepare the ground.

D. All trash and other debris shall be removed from the cultivated topsoil. All pieces of wood, rocksand unbroken clumps of earth with any dimension larger than 1 inch shall be removed from theplanting area.

3.03 FERTILIZINGA. Apply fertilizer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and topsoil analysis

recommendations.B. Apply after smooth raking of topsoil and prior to installation of sod.C. Apply fertilizer no more than 48 hours before laying sod.D. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of topsoil.E. Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer.

3.04 LAYING SODA. Moisten prepared surface immediately prior to laying sod.B. Lay sod within 24 hours after harvesting to prevent deterioration.C. Lay sod smooth and tight with no open joints visible, and no overlapping; stagger end joints 12

inches minimum. Do not stretch or overlap sod pieces.D. Where new sod adjoins existing grass areas, align top surfaces.E. Where sod is placed adjacent to hard surfaces, such as curbs, pavements, etc., place top

elevation of sod 1/2 inch below top of hard surface.F. On slopes 6 inches per foot and steeper, lay sod perpendicular to slope and secure every row

with wooden pegs at maximum 2 feet on center. Drive pegs flush with soil portion of sod.G. Water sodded areas immediately after installation. Saturate sod to 4 inches of soil.

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS / NBFF / CCC SODDINGROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 32 92 23 - 3AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

H. After sod and soil have dried, roll sodded areas to ensure good bond between sod and soil andto remove minor depressions and irregularities.

3.05 MAINTENANCEA. Provide maintenance at no extra cost to Owner; Owner will pay for water.B. Maintain sodded areas immediately after placement until grass is well established and exhibits a

vigorous growing condition. Continue maintenance until Substantial Completion of project.C. Mow grass at regular intervals to maintain at a maximum height of 2-1/2 inches. Do not cut

more than 1/3 of grass blade at any one mowing.D. Neatly trim edges and hand clip where necessary.E. Immediately remove clippings after mowing and trimming.F. Water to prevent grass and soil from drying out.G. Roll surface to remove irregularities.H. Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Remedy damage resulting from improper use of herbicides.I. Immediately replace sod to areas that show deterioration or bare spots.J. Protect sodded areas with warning signs during maintenance period.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS /NBFF / CCC UTILITIES ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 33 00 00 - 1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 33 00 00

UTILITIES


A. Related items necessary to perform work:

1. Storm drainage system. 2. Sanitary sewers.

3. Water lines.

B. Work shall comply with Robins AFB regulations and requirements of all governing authorities on said above items and shall supersede the lesser specification.

C. Related Section:

Section 31 2300: Excavation and Fill 1.02 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Set lines, elevations, and grades for utility and drainage system work and control system for

duration of work, including careful maintenance of bench marks, property corners, monu-ments, or other reference points.

B. Coordinate with building contractor utility tie in points at building. Provide a sign indicating

service at all building utility stubs until building contractor ties to site utilities.

C. Provide a sign at all utility stubs or other dead ends. Label each sign indicating the utility.

D. Provide appropriate plug, cap or seal to prevent soil, trash or other debris from entering utility line at all building tie-in points or dead ends. Provide in a manner which will allow future tie-in or extension by others.

1.03 MATERIALS

A. Where plans indicate material types, the contractor shall utilize the material indicated on the plans and refer to appropriate portions of these specifications for specific requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PERMITS, CODES AND FEES A. The intent of this section of the specifications is that the Contractor's bid on the work covered

herein shall be based upon the drawings and specifications, and that the work shall comply with all applicable codes and regulations. Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits and utility charges including tap or connection fees.

B. Any utility system that will be dedicated to the Installation: All work on existing and new

construction will be coordinated by the Contractor and with the Post and the respective utility

UTILITIES CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS /NBFF / CCC 33 00 00 - 2 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

company. Contractor shall request Robins AFB and the respective utility company to inspect the work and request a letter from them stating the work is completed in accordance with all their requirements. A copy of this letter shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer’s representative.

C. Manholes: 1. Construct manholes of cast in place concrete, precast concrete, concrete block, or

brick masonry as indicated on plans and details to size, shape, and depth indicated, but not less than 4’-0” diameter.

2. Precast Concrete Manhole with Cast-In-Place Bottom: a. After complete of excavation, setting, reinforcing steel and placing inlet and outlet

pipes, but prior to placing concrete for invert slab, set precast concrete blocks on foundation to support first joint of manhole barrel which shall be lowered into excavation, grooved end first, and set on concrete blocks. Align vertically and adjust to proper grade prior to placing invert slab which shall be poured immediately after setting of first section of manhole barrel.

b. Prior to setting subsequent manhole barrel sections, paint both tongue and

groove ends with factory recommended primer. Allow primer to set in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation. Place ”Raiment” or equivalent, plastic rope on tongue end. Lower next section into position, and remove excess material from interior of structure. Add additional material on exterior of joint, if necessary, for completely watertight joint.

3. Precast Concrete Manhole with Precast Base Section: a. Manhole section shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Specification C-478.

Joints between the manhole sections shall be “O”ring rubber gaskets and shall meet the requirements of ASTM C-443.

b. Two lift holes shall be cast into each cone or riser section for purposes of

handling and placement. c. Openings for inlet and discharge sewer pipes shall be provided in the manhole

base section or in the riser section as per details. Openings shall be at positions and elevations as indicated on the plans or predetermined in the field, and may be cast into the manhole wall or mechanically cored on completed sections. Where pipes are to be sealed into the manhole wall with mortar, openings shall be large enough to permit such variations in both horizontal and vertical position as field conditions may dictate. Mortar for sealing pipes into manholes shall be one part Portland cement and two parts sand by volume. The amount of water used in the mixture shall be enough to produce a stiff workable mix but shall in no case exceed five and one half gallons per sack of cement. Sand shall conform to specification M-45 and cement to specification M-85 of the American Association of State Highway and Transportation officials.

d. After completion of excavation, set precast base section on a foundation of clean

crushed stone to support the base section of manhole. Align vertically and adjust to proper grade and elevation Sections prior to placing additional sections; shall be installed per manufacturer’s recommendation. Lift holes shall be sealed watertight.

4. Cast-in-place Manholes: Cast-in-place manholes shall be constructed of 3500 psi concrete. Forms shall be


accurately made of steel sheets or wood and shapes made up of ample strength to form dense watertight walls to true dimensions. Concrete shall be deposited in evenly distributed layers of about eighteen (18) inches, with each layer vibrated to bond it to the preceding layer. Reference Section 32 1613.13, "Cast In Place Concrete Curbs and Gutters and Sidewalks".

5. Brick Masonry a. Brick masonry for manholes, inlets and catch basins shall conform to details

shown on the plans. Where shown on the plans the faces of these structures shall be given a plaster coat. Mortar for this coat shall be of the same mix as used in laying the brick and the coat shall be not less than 1/4 inch in thickness. Before applying the plaster coat, the brick shall be thoroughly wetted and the surface allowed to dry sufficiently to insure proper bond of the plaster coat. Full mortar beds shall be provided for setting castings required by the plans. Castings shall be set carefully to the specified elevations.

b. The foundation shall be constructed firm and dry. All brick shall be damp at the time of laying. Bricks shall be laid in courses in full, close, uniform, joints of mortar. Adjoining courses shall break joints by one-half length as nearly as practicable. The courses shall be level in all places, except where otherwise directed. All exposed surfaces shall be smooth and clean and the tie joints shall not exceed 1/2 inch in width/ broken or chipped bricks shall not be used in the faces of the masonry. The joints shall be cleaned and pointed before the mortar sets. The exposed surfaces of the bricks shall not be smeared with mortar forced out of the joints or that used in pointing, but shall be kept clean and free from mortar stains. For straight walls, every other course shall be a header course. No masonry work shall be done in freezing weather.

D. Inlets:

Construct inlets of cast in place concrete, precast concrete, concrete block or brick masonry as indicated on plans and details and the above requirement under “Manholes” to size, shape, and depth indicated, but not less than 4’0” diameter.

E. Main and Lateral Pipes:

Neatly cut off main and lateral pipes flush with inside of manhole or inlet where they enter structure walls. Fill in all irregularities and rough edges with non-shrinking grout.

F. Inverts: Shape inverts for smooth flow across structure floor. Use concrete and mortar to obtain proper grade and contour and finish surface with fine textured wood float.

G. Cast Iron Frames, Covers, and Grates: All covers for manholes shall have cast in place the words “Storm Sewer”. After completion of manhole or inlet, set cast iron frame in full mortar bed after adjusting to required elevation.

H. Manhole and Inlet Adjustment: 1. Manhole covers or gratings shall be adjusted by using precast adjustment rings,

brick masonry and grout. All work shall be done in good workmanlike manner by competent workmen and the unit re-established in proper working order at its new elevation.

2. When adjustment to manhole or inlet exceeds a total of 18 inches from the reduced section of manhole to the top of casting, the reduced section shall be


removed and manhole or inlet reconstructed to proper elevation. Reconstruction shall be made using the same material as existing or approved by Engineer.

3. Any manhole or inlet cover, grating or other material broken, unfit for reuse or not designed for H-20 loads shall be replaced.

2.02 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM (SEE DRAWINGS FOR PRODUCT REQUIREMENT) A. Reinforced Concrete Pipe: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 76, Class III, unless

otherwise indicated on Drawings, installed with flexible plastic (Bitumen) gaskets at all joints. Gaskets shall comply with AASHTO M-198 75I, Type B, and shall be installed in strict accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: Pipe and fittings shall comply with ASTM D 3034, rated SDR

35 or High Density Polyethelene (HDPE). Pipe shall be continually marked with manufacturer's name, pipe size, cell classification, SDR rating, and ASTM D 3034 classification. Pipe joints shall be integrally molded bell ends in accordance with ASTM D 3034, with factory supplied elastomeric gaskets and lubricants.

2.03 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM A. All current criteria of Robins AFB and all authorities having jurisdiction shall be followed.

B. Material Requirements:

1. Ductile Iron Sanitary Sewer: Pipe and fittings shall comply with class 52.

C. Manholes: 1. Construct manholes of precast concrete or brick masonry as indicated on plans

and details to size, shape, and depth indicated, but never less than 4'0" inside diameter.

2. Manhole construction shall comply with precast manhole construction and brick masonry construction described under "STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM" article.

D. Main and Lateral Pipes: Neatly cut off main and lateral pipes flush with inside of manhole or

inlet where they enter structure walls, and point up irregularities and rough edges with non-shrinking grout.

E. Inverts: Shape inverts for smooth flow across structure floor as shown on Drawings. Use

concrete mortar to obtain proper grade and contour and finish surface with fine textured wood float.

F. Cast Iron Frame and Cover: All covers shall have cast in place the words "Sanitary Sewer".

After completion of manhole or inlet, set cast iron frame in full mortar bed after adjusting to required elevation.

2.04 WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM A. Where Mechanical drawings and specifications indicate a material type, the mechanical

drawings and specifications shall supersede the requirements of this regarding material requirements for sewer systems on site. All other pipes that are installed below grade and outside building shall comply with one or combination of following, as indicated on plans:


1. Seamless Copper Tubing: Type “K” roll form in accordance with ASTM B 88-62 and installed with wrought copper fittings in accordance with ANSI B16.22. All

underground solder joints shall be made using Sel-Fos Silver Solder. 2. Ductile Iron Water Pipe: AWWA C151, Pressure class 350 (4-12”) Pressure

Class 250 (14-16”). a. Fittings: Either mechanical joint or push-on joint, AWWA C153, and shall be

coated with a 6-8 mil nominal thickness fusion bonded epoxy conforming to the requirements of AWWA C550 and C116, or cement mortar lined in accordance with AWWA C104.

b. Elastomeric gaskets and lubricant: ASTM F477.. B. Water pipe accessories, such as tapping sleeves with valves and valve boxes, gate valves

with valve boxes, Base indicator. valves, check valves, and fire hydrants, shall have cast iron mechanical joint, 350 lb. working pressure and shall meet or exceed specifications of American Water Works Association.

C. Install gate valves as indicated on Drawings with valve stem vertical and plumb. Install valve

boxes in a manner that will not transmit loads, stress, or shock to valve body.

D. Center valve box over operating nut of valve vertical and plumb. Securely fit valve box together leaving cover flush with finished surface.

E. Install fire hydrant assemblies as indicated on Drawings in vertical and plumb position with steamer nozzle pointed toward building unless otherwise directed by local authorities. Support hydrant assembly on concrete pad and firmly braced on side opposite inlet pipe against undisturbed soil with concrete blocking. Place minimum of 6 cu. ft. of crushed stone or gravel having good drainage characteristics around hydrant weephole, hydrant base and barrel after thrust blocking has cured at least 24 hours. Exercise care when backfilling and compacting so proper vertical position will not be altered.

F. Place thrust blocking consisting of 3,000 psi concrete to provide sufficient bearing area to transmit unbalanced thrust from bends, tees, caps, or plugs to undisturbed soil without loading undisturbed soil in excess of 2,500 lb./sq.ft. when water main pressure is 100 psi.

G. Connections with Existing Pipelines: where connections are made between new work and existing piping, make connection using suitable fittings for conditions encountered. Make each connection with existing pipe at time and under conditions which least interfere with operation of existing pipeline service. Prior to making connection, thoroughly disinfect new fittings and surfaces of an existing line (except where as required by local ordinances, construction necessity or for public convenience) with a solution of sodium hyperchloride (chlorine) in a concentration of not less than 50 parts per million for a period of not less than 24 hours. After disinfection, thoroughly flush the new fittings and existing lines. Exercise care during installation so as to not contaminate the disinfected surfaces. Provide facilities for proper dewatering and for disposal of water removed from dewatered lines and excavations without damage to adjacent property.

H. Fire Hydrants shall comply with AWWA Standard Specifications C502, UFC 3-600-01, and

shall meet local standards and requirements, particularly as to nozzle diameters and threads direction of openings and cap nuts. Fire hydrants shall be compatible with existing equipment in use at the Post. Hydrants shall be painted the installation’s Fire hydrants shall have three


(3) hose nozzles, a valve opening not less than 5 1/4” the length of hydrant barrel shall be determined by the specified cover over the piping and additional length to bring fire hydrant to proper finish grade. Fire hydrants are to be traffic type unless otherwise noted on plans or required by local standards.

2.05 RELATION OF WATER MAINS TO SEWERS

A. Whenever a water main crosses over a sewer with less than an 18-inch vertical separation or crosses under a sewer, both the water main and the sewer shall be constructed of Ductile Iron Pipe or PVC Pipe with joints equivalent to water main standards for a distance of 10 feet (10') on each side of the point of crossing. A full section of water main pipe shall be centered at the point of crossing.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM A. Flushing Sewers.

Flush all storm sewers with water in sufficient volume to obtain free flow through each line. Remove all obstructions and correct all defects discovered. Remove all silt and trash from catch basins and inlets just prior to final acceptance of the work.

B. Light Test (Storm Sewer). After backfilling to at least one (1) foot depth over any section of sewer (except building connection) which should have uniform and straight alignment, flash a light from manhole to manhole, or to manhole of cleanout location. If the view through the lines does not show a vertical axis in full pipe diameter and the horizontal axis in at least 3/4 pipe diameter, remove and relay pipe as necessary to meet such requirements.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM

A. Watertight Construction. It is imperative that all sewers and manholes be built practically watertight and that the Contractor adhere rigidly to the specifications for material and workmanship. After completion, the sewers or section thereof will be tested and gauged, and if filtration is above allowable limits specified, the sewer will be rejected.

B. Inspection. On completion of each block or section of sewer, or such other time as the Contracting Officer’s representative may direct, the block or section of sewer is to be cleaned, tested and inspected. All repairs shown necessary by the test are to be made, broken or cracked pipe replaced, all deposits removed, the sewers lift true to line and grade as herein specified or shown on plans, entirely clean, free from dirt, etc., ready for use. Each section of sewer between manholes is to show from either end on examination a full circle of light.

C. Perform all testing as required by Robins AFB Department of Public Works. D. Limits of Infiltration Methods of Testing.

Measurement of the infiltration will be made before sewage flows are allowed in the sewer and shall be made by means of a V-notch weir, or by measuring the volume direct. All infiltration tests shall be made by the Contractor in presence of the Contracting Officer’s


representative. All expense of the tests shall be borne by the Contractor. The allowable limit of groundwater infiltration for the entire system of new sewers or any one truck interceptor or outfall following limit of infiltration rates for full acceptance. In case the leakage exceeds the specified rates, the sewer will not be accepted until so repaired that it will comply with these requirements. 50 gallons per inch of diameter per mile day for any stretch of sewer or system of sewer in conjunction with the proposed improvements.

E. Air Testing. Sewer shall be air tested in accordance with the procedures and requirements of ASTM C828-75T. In the event the pressure drop exceeds the specified rates, the sewer will not be accepted until so repaired that it will comply with the requirements.

F. Schedule inspections by appropriate regulatory authority as not to interfere with construction

progress.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR WATER SYSTEM

A. Test water distribution system pipe sizes installed below grade and outside building tested in accordance with following procedures:

B. After any section of pipe, fittings, hydrants, valves, etc., has been completed, a hydrostatic

and leakage test shall be performed. Test shall be conducted in accordance with NFPA form “Contractor’s Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping” on all fire main or combination fire and domestic mains. Water mains used for domestic service only shall be tested in accordance with AWWA and form “Water Pressure Test Report”. Contractor shall conduct test in accordance with instructions on form, arrange for signature as specified and submit completed and acceptable form to Contracting Officer’s representative.

C. Slowly fill each valved section of pipe with water, vent air as necessary, and apply specified

test pressure by means of pump connected to pipe. Furnish, install, and operate the necessary connections, pump, meter, and gauges. Prior to running any field test, meter shall be tested, sealed, and approved be applicable governing authority at Contractor’s expense.

D. Examine exposed pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants, and joints during open-trench test. Repair

visible leaks. remove cracked or defective pipes, fittings, valves, or hydrants discovered on consequence of this pressure test. Replace with sound material. Repeat test until no visible leaks are present and there is no loss of pressure shown on test gauge.

E. Unless otherwise required by other governing authority, test gage shall have a face diameter

not less than 3½". The gage scale shall not exceed 1½ times the test pressure or be less than 25 psi above test pressure. .

F. Test pipe lines before backfilling at joints, except where otherwise required by construction

necessity, local ordinances or for public convenience.

G. Duration of test shall not be less than two hours when joints are exposed, and not less than eight hours when joints are covered.

H. Repair visible leaks that are evident on surface whether joints are covered or not, to eliminate

leakage.


I. Furnish copy of results of meter test and hydrostatic pressure test to Contracting Officer’s

representative within 24 hours of tests. J. Sterilization:

Sterilize distribution system with sodium hyperchloride(chlorine) before acceptance for domestic operation. Chlorinating materials shall be introduced in liquid form. Amount of chlorine shall be such as to provide dosage of not less than 50 parts per million for 24 hours, system shall be flushed with clean water until residual chlorine content is not greater than 1.0 part/million open and close valves in lines being sterilized several times during contact period. After sterilization, take water and bacteriologically test in accordance with AWWA specifications. Submit to Contracting Officer’s representative copies of bacteriological test results. Do not place distribution system in service until approval is obtained from applicable governing authorities.

K. Contractor will furnish Contracting Officer’s representative certified "As Built" drawings on

all underground utilities showing size, valves, pressure reducers, fire plugs, fittings and other appurtenances, invert elevations, top of manhole elevation and all other horizontal and vertical control with dimensions.

3.04 FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. At the time of final acceptance of the work performed under the Contract the utilities covered by this Section shall be completed in every respect and in perfect operating condition. All surplus materials of every character resulting from the work of this section shall have been removed. Sanitary and storm sewers shall be free from sand, silt or any other obstructions.

B. Any defects discovered in the utilities subsequent to this inspection shall have been

corrected. Final acceptance of water system shall not be complete until total system has been inspected and accepted by local fire department. A letter by Contractor of acceptance shall be obtained from Local fire department with original being submitted to Contracting Officer’s representative. All other utilities to be maintained by local authorities shall be accepted by letter with original being submitted to Contracting Officer’s representative.

C. Contractor will furnish Contracting Officer’s representative certified "As Built" drawings on all

underground utilities showing size, valves, pressure reducers, fire plugs, fittings and other appurtenances, invert elevations, top of manhole elevation and all other horizontal and vertical control with dimensions.

D. As-Built drawings will consist of marked up utility prints showing actual location signed by

Contractor. As-built drawings are not as-built survey.

E. All testing required by this section of these specifications shall be preformed and paid by the contractor. The Contractor shall provide the AAFES with copies of all test results.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS /NBFF / CCC NATURAL-GAS DISTRIBUTION ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA 33 51 00 -1 AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

SECTION 33 51 00 NATURAL-GAS DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Pipe and fittings for site utility natural gas distribution. 2. Connection of site natural gas system and private utility company system.

B. Related Sections

1. Section 31 0000 - Earthwork

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

1. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings 2. ASME B16.11 - Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Welding and Threaded 3. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings 4. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings 5. ASME B31.8 - Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems 6. ASME S00081 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Sec VIII: Pressure Vessels 7. ASME Q00090 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Sec. IX: Welding and Brazing Qualifications 8. ASME Boiler and Pressure Code

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless 2. ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate

and Elevated Temperature 3. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal 4. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube 5. ASTM D2513 - Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings 6. ASTM D2517 - Reinforced Epoxy Resin Gas Pressure Pipe and Fittings 7. ASTM D2683 - Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings For Outside Diameter-

Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing 8. ASTM D 3261 - Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Polyethylene (PE) Plastic

Pipe And Tubing

C. American Welding Society (AWS)

1. AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal

NATURAL-GAS DISTRIBUTION CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS / GAS /NBFF / CCC 33 51 00 -2 ROBINS AFB, GEORGIA AAFES PROJECT NO. 0753-15-000001 | PWBA 150406

D. American Water Works Association (AWWA)

1. AWWA C105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Piping for Water and Other Liquids

E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

1. ANSI B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes 2. ANSI B31.2 - Fuel Gas Piping

F. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA)

1. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code


A. Perform installation in accordance with utility company requirements.

B. Gas Cock: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.

C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and applicable state regulations.

D. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME Q00090, Sec IX.

E. Conform to NFPA 54, ANSI B31.2, or ASME B31.8.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories.

B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified local requirements.

1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Accurately record actual locations of pipe mains, valves, connections, and top of pipe elevations.


B. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions and location of uncharted utilities.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to be included.

B. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE

A. Steel Pipe

1. Below Ground: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, type E or S, grade B, black: a. Fittings: ASME B16.11, forged steel, or ASTM A234 forged steel welding

type. b. Joints: Welded and seamless. c. Jackets: AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket, double layer, half lapped,

10-mil polyethylene tape. 2. Above Ground: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, type E or S, grade B, black:

a. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, ASME B16.11, forged steel, or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type.

b. Joints: Threaded.

B. Copper Tubing (Natural Gas Piping):

1. Below ground: ASTM B88, Type K, internally tinned: a. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper, or ASME B16.22, wrought copper;

internally tinned. b. Joint: AWS A5.8 BCuP silver brazed.

2. Above ground: ASTM B88, Type K, L or ASTM B75, Type GP; internally tinned: a. Fittings: ASME B16.18 cast copper, ASME B 16.22, wrought copper, or

ANSI B16.26, cast copper, internally tinned. b. Joint: ASTM B32, Solder, Grade 95TA or AWS A5.8, Bcup silver brazed.

C. Polyethylene Pipe (below ground only): ASTM D-2513, SDR 11.5.

1. PE Fittings: ASTM D 2683, socket type or ASTM D 3261, butt type with dimensions matching ASTM D 2513, SDR 11, PE pipe.

2. Joints: Mechanical or Compression fit.

D. Reinforced Epoxy Resin Piping: ASTM D2517.

1. Fittings: ASTM D2517. 2. Joints: Bell and spigot with epoxy resin.


2.02 GAS COCKS

A. 2 Inches and Smaller: 150 psig WOG, bronze body, bronze tapered plug, non-lubricated, Teflon packing, threaded ends with cast iron curb box, cover, and key.

B. Larger than 2 inches: 125 psig WOG, Steel or Cast iron body and tapered plug, non-lubricated, Teflon packing, threaded ends, with cast iron curb box, cover, and key.

C. For Applications with Line Pressure Greater than 60 psig: Over 2 Inches: Cast iron body and plug, pressure lubricated, Teflon packing, flanged ends, with cast iron curb box, cover, and key.

2.03 PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES

A. Single stage, malleable iron body, corrosion-resistant, pressure regulator with atmospher-ic vent, elevation compensator; with threaded ends for 2 inches and smaller or flanged ends for larger than 2 inches. Install earthquake actuated automatic shutoff valve, if required by local code or utility.

B. Capacity: For inlet and outlet gas pressures, specific gravity, and flow rate indicated.

2.04 TRACE WIRE

A. Magnetic detectable conductor, brightly colored plastic covering, imprinted with "Natural Gas Service" in large letters.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions.

B. Verify that building service connection and utility gas main size, location, and depth are as indicated on Construction Drawings.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe ends and remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe over 2-inches diameter or thread ferrous pipe 2-inches diameter and under.


B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections with flanges or threading and unions.

D. Comply with NFPA 54 on installation of gas lines.

3.03 BEDDING

A. Excavate pipe trench and place bedding material in accordance with Section 31 2300.

3.04 INSTALLATION – PIPING

A. Maintain a minimum of 12 inches separation of gas line from sewer, water, or storm water piping in accordance with state or local code.

B. Install piping to conserve space and not interfere with use of site space.

C. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints.

D. Install cocks and other fittings as required.

E. Establish elevations of buried piping in accordance with Section 31 2300.

F. Wrap couplings and fittings of steel pipe with polyethylene tape and heat shrink over pipe in accordance with AWWA C105.

G. Install trace wire continuous over top of pipe for nonmetallic pipe.

H. Backfill trench in accordance with Section 31 2300.

I. Center and plumb valve box over valve. Set box cover flush with finished ground sur-face.

J. Prevent shock or stress from being transmitted through valve box to valve.

K. Wrap valve and valve box with polyethylene tape and heat shrink or paint valves and valve boxes with red anti-rust primer and 1 coat of epoxy paint.

L. All work shall be in accordance with Atlanta Gas Light Company (404)-584-3291 stand-ard specifications.

3.05 SERVICE CONNECTIONS

A. Provide sleeve in foundation wall for gas service main. Caulk enlarged sleeve watertight.

B. Anchor service main to interior surface of foundation wall.

C. Install service regulator adjacent to building wall in specified location.


D. Install service regulator and riser pipe to prevent undue stress on service pipe. For plas-tic service pipe, use steel pipe riser from below ground to regulator.

E. Provide regulator vent with rain and insect proof opening, terminating not less than 5 feet away from building openings.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS/GAS/NBFF/CCC AFB Express/Robin… · construct new express / gas / nbff /...

Documents

Transcript of CONSTRUCT NEW EXPRESS/GAS/NBFF/CCC AFB Express/Robin… · construct new express / gas / nbff /...